Home

HydroGeo Analyst v.4.0 User`s Manual

1. Based on the nature of environmental data and the purpose for which the data is collected there are generally eight table types as shown in the following table 2 Global Time Monitoring Date and Time Events Depth Interval Sample Start Depth End Depth collection Depth Point Sample collection Depth Interval Time Monitoring Monitoring Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time Depth Interval Time Exploration Examination Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time 190 Chapter 5 Template Manager Depth Point Time Monitoring Monitoring Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time Depth Point Time Exploration Examination Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time NOTE The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths and not elevations As such the BHLP and Cross Section editor require that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark The Table Types are listed on the right side of the Table Settings window When the desired Table type is selected from this frame HydroGeo Analyst lists some of the most commonly used tables wherever applicable as Example tables For example if a depth interval data type is selected tables such as Lithology well drilling well casing etc will be listed in the Example tables Select a sample table to view the structure
2. A Start 1 a BM Sector ER 2 Microsoft EJ total Comma MH Parameter q ff Adobe Fram ie reparatos EJ desc Paint Sh A RT Creating Reports 421 11 1 2 Creating a Report Containing a Map Project Follow the directions below to create a report containing one or more map layers from the Map Manager e Start the Map Manager and open a Map Project e Show hide the desired layers in the map project all visible layers will appear in the report e Press the Print button 4 from the toolbar or select Project Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for the current map project or add it to an existing one If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your map project s can be sent to a report one by one Each view of your map project is created with its associated scale bar The map project can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime Report Designer Note that resizing a map project on the runtime Report Designer adjusts the scale that is associated with that specific view of your map project As in the previous type of report the report will
3. Template Manager Demo olx Environmental y T Fm Use as project default Database structure Table Settings Descriptions H Description i E Database Settings H V Geologic Description rau Well Construction Table name screen P Drilling Protocol E Global W Casing cames Global Time Screen from_ to_ Param 3 Param 4 Param 5 Parar Depth Interval M screen_id 1 1 0 1 Examination Event IV from 140 105 105 0 Monitoring Point MV to Depth Point Y diameter desciiplion Monitoring Point V screen_type Examination Event V slot_number i H V Annular Fill Table relationships 4 Monitoring Points Table is parent to H Soil Testing Primary key Table Foreign key H Soil Sampling screen_id gw_level Screen_ID H V Monitoring Event z 4 Mining Exploration 4 Geophysics ne 6 4 Well History Table is child to User Category Primary key View settings Name Screen Fx 3 6 49 Last Change 07 27 2004 2 04 42 PM EE Help r The number of fields that need to be selected as a foreign key depends on the number of fields making up the primary key in the current table In tables where the primary key consists of only one field the cell where foreign keys are to be entered displays a combo box with the list of all fields in the selected table that have similar properties to the primary key in the current table Only one field from the list can be selected as a foreign key In
4. screen_id 1 1 10 2 1 10 Note 3 1 10 The preview shows how your data will be 4 1 10 stored in the database 5 1 10 6 1 10 This step allows you to accept reject 1 10 records with warnings by selecting the 8 1 10 warning message in the Errors arnings 9 1 10 grid Records with errors must be rejected to 1 10 activate the importing process 1 10 1 10 ou can also select one or more records in 1 10 the preview table and exclude them from 1 10 importing into your database 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 A gt M Error YX O Waring lt Back Import Cancel Help Note Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data Chapter 2 Getting Started A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted into the database Ok Close to close the DTS Now that the Screen Id values have been imported you can proceed to import the water level data Import Water Levels Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type Water Level Data in the box that appears Ok Ti button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls water_level xls file located in the AExamples folder under the instal
5. station id station name station station y station toc station elevation ofp X V Wap and BHLP Re ady V Use current projection system elevation Conditions Operator Expression Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows DIS Time 0 0 0 15 Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank conditions field under the Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the ll Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with 233 234 several options will appear gt gt lt lt LIKE IS IS NOT etc For this example select gt e Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 325 e Repeat this step for additional conditions Link multiple conditions by specifying an additional Operator choose from AND OR e Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to generate the SQL string If the Query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the Ef Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the Query The results of thi
6. Settings Fine Sand Live Update Iv Live update Apply Export y Print y Help Output Options The BHLP dialog contains the following items e A list of all Available Stations Select the station for the BHLP e Designer Tree Contains the columns and related entities for the BHLP design e Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the BHLP design e Settings Contains the settings for the selected entity e Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the BHLP Output Options Allow you to export or print one or all BHLPs Live Update When this feature is enabled the Borehole Log Plot Designer will automatically refresh update whenever an entity is defined or modified in the entity settings The time it takes for the BHLP designer to refresh depends heavily on the volume of data being displayed on the BHLP a BHLP displaying a lot of data will take longer to refresh In this case it may be desirable to disable the automatic refresh to avoid the extended refresh times when making changes to the entity settings To do so simply uncheck the Live Update checkbox make all the necessary modifications to the entity settings and then click the Apply button to refresh the BHLP About the Interface 443 12 1 1 Description of Designer Toolbar Items The BHLP designer toolbar provides the controls and commands for the BHLP design The following buttons are available Save button saves the current borehole log plot
7. csssccccssssccsssscccssscceeees L Sample AA IC AOS o 1 What s New in HydroGeo Analyst ssccsssssscsscccsccssssccvecsccscsnscvescssessscnesccssoscccscesssnsonsses 2 New Feres nE O anaa aaa E A NA 2 BA MTS O E E E EE E E E EAE E E E EE EE 4 Data Manac meno ean UAL Naas 4 Application and Project Management 0 cccccccsssssssscesssnssseessesesseeessesesseeesesseeeeseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeess 5 GIS Man MIMIC a A A E T anne 5 Cross SECUN IO occ Bihari das ee sad os eae a a A 5 Borehole Los Plotter stand ei 6 EydtoG eo Analyst SD ExXp letras li ads 6 INE W ES Atte SINN a delos 6 A A E etna tessa cece a Soe let totem obo aea eg tere eete alate raa 6 Data Transter System LES ata US RARA IS 6 ENS A sea ance E woossuuase Men N E E 7 CIOS Secon EOL A dl 7 HGA D E DIOT penas a a inne ds e al edo 7 Query A A a a a 7 BoOtenole LoS Plotter Scand cocaceenareemaauenasanssadoovaacodats smascsdancaaascadaniughludesageberasthaaeh trond imocksay aishacel lr 7 Etc A A en RC RTT nT OTS 7 AA aaa aa aE Eaa 8 Data ACUISTA 8 WO at a MUI Y PCC ORO a O 8 Hnporting and Exportine Data cien 8 Data Maia Cee it a o 8 Template WANA CCE ani intent catheod pinto A dic 9 Customizable Listsand tada e a o salcgie he 9 Data Querying and Filtering with the Query Builder 2 0 0 cccccccssssesesseeceeeeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 Data VTS cha artnet te ns Se es ids cose ses tte ra o decos 10 Wl api ana e ia ads 10 CTOSS SCC HOM E
8. OF Cancel The default AVI File name is the address of the V3D folder for the current project plus the name of the 3D project and a sequential number of the video made for this project followed by the AVI extension The AVI File name can be modified to any path and filename required by clicking the button beside the AVI File name field The Frame size setting has a selection of four options Full window size 640x480 e 320x240 e Custom If the Custom option is chosen the Custom frame size fields Width and Height will be activated and a frame size can be defined The Compression setting lists the various video compression techniques available A higher compression setting will reduce the AVI file size but it will also reduce the quality of the image The Frames per second setting defines the number of frames time steps that will be displayed each second in the AVI file This setting has no effect on the recording speed After specifying the settings click OK and the recording will begin To stop the recording click the Stop button NOTE Recording AVI files will require significant system resources both RAM and Hard disk space It is recommended to close all non essential programs while recording the AVI file and ensure the destination folder has adequate free space Working with 3D Explorer 365 10 2 4 OpenGL Settings By default the 3D Explorer will attempt to use the vendor prov
9. E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Excel Files F Beesh Use connection string Connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password l Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test Connection OF Cancel Help OF Cancel Help e Select the Provider option For this example select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers this option allows you to choose from such sources as Text Excel or Access Click on the Connection tab once more to display the original dialog select the option Use Connection Appendices String e Click on the Build button and the following dialog will appear Select Data Source H ES File Data Source Machine Data Source Look in Data Sources Z DSN Name Hew Select the file data source that describes the driver that you wish to connect to You can Use any file data source that refers to an ODBC driver which ts installed on pour machine e In this dialog select from a list of data sources Since none are available click on the New button to create a new one The following dialog will then appear Create New Data Source x Select a driver for which pou want to set up a data source Orver da Microsoft pa
10. Watch the 3D grid rotate as you do this Stop when you have reached a satisfactory side profile of the fence diagram Finally Z Slider bar and slowly drag this to the right After rotating the grid your 3D image should be similar to the one shown below File Edit View Settings Help e A A om M898 E BC VetticalExaggeration fio ixj Stay on top V f Default Settings Geology 2 6 HGA3D Sand O Axis Hf Site maps Boulder Clay Surfaces H 6 Cross Sections Data Clay Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Gravel Medium Sand Sand Silt Interpretation type Geology EsStations Label Pre Title _ BLegend lt 1 41 Rotate shit Light Position xL Y 4 En ZL E IV Live Update Apply Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side Chapter 2 Getting Started The full capabilities of 3D Explorer are not discussed in this chapter For details on how to use 3D Explorer please refer to Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer File gt Save from the main menu to save the 3D project Once the desired view has been loaded the 3D image may be loaded into the Report Editor To do so E File gt Print from the main menu or click the el Print button from the toolbar This will load the Report Manager where the 3D view may be customized or printed as 1s In the next section you will create a few sample reports Bef
11. 104941956 11421956 11421956 114841956 WO 2 12 2 12 1996 44012416 41671996 WO 8r WO 142 WOT 146 104941956 11421956 114841956 WO 2 12 21271996 44012416 41671996 Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethyibenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene Ethylbenzene ug L 100 ug L 40 ug L ug L ug L ug L 100 ug L 130 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L Advanced Cloze Help Rows 1267 Time 0 0 0 78 NOTE Once you click the Execute Query button all the data that is specified in the SQL statement will be permanently deleted from the database Because there is no undo function it is recommended that you use the select command before a delete command to ensure that you have the selected the correct records The Delete command can also be executed through the Data Query Tab page 238 236 Chapter 7 Queries 7 4 Managing Queries After queries have been created they may be easily modified saved or deleted within the Query Builder As mentioned previously once a query has been created it will appear in the appropriate node in the Project Browser 7 4 1 Editing To quickly load a Data Query into the Query Builder right click on an existing query in the Project Browser under the Queries node or Station Group node a
12. Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 e Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt LIKE IS IS NOT amp For this example select gt e Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 320 224 Chapter 7 Queries Next add this field to the Display Fields To do so double click on the TOC field in the Project Tree and it will be added automatically as a new row in the Display Fields Or press the op Add button located below the Display Fields Then select the TOC field and drag this field into the blank field For each Display Field there are Aggregate sorting Functions Select from AVG COUNT MAX MIN STDEV STDDEVP SUM VAR VARP These functions are explained on page 231 Otherwise leave blank to apply no aggregate options For each Display Field Order options may be specified Select from ASC Ascending or DES Descending or none Once the fields have been added the Query Builder display should be similar to the one shown in the figure below loj x xaue C Station Group Query Data Query A SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOC_Exceeds_320m Function Expression station id E Description FE 7 E Location station name name Station Name station toc TOC X J Map and BHL
13. For more details please refer to Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 4 Major Components Query Builder The Query Builder provides the tools for creating and managing station groups and simple or advanced data queries Within a HydroGeo Analyst project it may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering management and creating customized charts maps cross sections and reports The Query Builder provides the tools for such tasks A few examples of queries are provided below e Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier than 2000 e Select wells with discharge over 250 gpm e Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet and penetrating a sandy gravel layer e Select boreholes with the overburden thickness more than 10 m 153 154 The Query Builder is capable of creating two types of queries e Station Group Queries Used to sort HydroGeo Analyst stations into logical groups e Data Queries Used for creating specialized reports or map layers For more details please refer to Chapter 7 Queries 5 Map Manager The Map Manager is an easy to use GIS tool for mapping HydroGeo Analyst station data The mapping component associated with HydroGeo Analyst is designed to provide a tool for overlaying and displaying site maps so that station data may be related to surficial base map features The Map Manager allows site maps to be imported from various formats including DXF BMP JPF GIF and
14. The Display Tree Panel and the Navigation Panel are both dockable panels which means they can be moved and or docked to another location on the interface or they 358 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer can be left as floating panels on your Windows desktop i e not docked to any location on the interface These panels can either be docked on the left side of the interface or on the bottom of the interface Moving a Panel To move a panel to another location position the cursor over the title bar Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the panel by moving the cursor to another location then release the mouse button to drop the panel at the new location Floating Panels Once a panel has been moved from the docked position to a floating position a Title Bar will appear at the top of the panel and it will behave like a separate Window The Display Tree Panel has an option Stay on top When this is active the panel window will float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer interface as long as it is the active window When this is active this panel will always float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window Docking Panels Floating panels can be docked again by clicking the mouse pointer on the panel Title Bar and dragging it to the left or bottom edge of the 3D Explorer window A grey outline will appear when the mouse pointer is in the proper location and the panel is dockable Release the
15. Boundary Snapping Buffer The default Boundary Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a cross section boundary line either the left or right then the boundary line will become highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this boundary line the drawn line will be automatically snapped to this boundary line Vertex Snapping Buffer The default Vertex Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a vertex on a polygon is selected and the Link Vertex option is used and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a vertex on an adjacent polygon then the vertex will become highlighted with a red box Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor outline upon clicking the left mouse button on this vertex the vertex on the selected polygon will be automatically snapped to this newly selected vertex Polygon Vertex Snapping makes it easy to place polygons adjacent to one another for continuous cross section views Labels Provides options for modifying the label fonts for the interpretation layers Geology Hydrogeology and Model Simply click on the sample box beside the appropriate label and a Font options dialog will appear as shown below fiz Cancel Arial Black Fr Arial Narrow Tr AvantGarde Ek ET Tr AvantGarde Md BT Fr BankGothic Lt BT Fp BankGothic Md BT Effects Sample Strikeout TF Underline AaB bYyZz Color L Black Script wester Define t
16. HydroGeo Analyst v 4 0 User s Manual Database Utilities Borehole logging reporting 2D Mapping and Cross Sections and 3D Visualization A UN i ul Aa Cregs Secton a4 Vertical Exaggeration 6 46743 aa A ean AARS TIARI TIA TARH Sempig Dwie mesos iaa El ove 5 50 Pe gr HE Gearon Grael sos E A fia Sar 500 i Bw 110 1 ar cd 100 13 Prepoil gt He map Project Layer Edi Took Ver elect etingn hep Biel hk lt BOeyt A OKA BIL BRSS 5 D452 Ee ER E WOC ah 5001 no i padin T 9 eshon conics T ELE Dura rs en wi Bisby Ercaracion rad Borstwcdea Hr WATER 1 EUA ans E E E am Hb Hal Pro pecera Preja vdd HEAD annann nnan manag ama ARA ER ven E mb id Dae 11119000 F mo ES M itii H DM 143 ma m ieee timig 7i J Lapas infra 4 j Coord HAD 1563 UTM Zona 17H Geology Cafu Es Met duraci n 1900 Liri Mister Festa Gouri 29 750 ie Medium Sire EEES ee Gravel a Chirii Grivel E Fires Stared on A Clay ga fund He Bowkier Clay a m j Copyright Information 2007 Schlumberger Water Services All rights reserved No portion of the contents of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written permission of Schlumberger Water Services Printed in Canada 2007 Table of Contents 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst
17. Map Project Sample_ Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help bmelh CGMe N AOS XA KIS MESS A AAN SOOT dey CrossSectionLine uolgas sso15 ContourMap Boreholes Sample_Map bmp ColorShadeM ap 350 5 gS 0 pao A a Layer Information Ma A epariment Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 20 535 583 4 813 217 F 23 184 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N Those Borehole stations that lie within the 400 m Buffer Distance will be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected perpendicular to the cross section line 2 5 6 Creating the Cross Section Once the cross section line is defined the corresponding cross section can be created Tools gt Create Cross Section from the main menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button MH on the toolbar this button is located beside the Cross Section line button ee A confirmation dialog will appear Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used as the cross section name ee The cross section editor opens the selected cross section and displays the stations and related information The cross section shows projections of the borehole s lithologic columns on the cross section plane By default the top of model layer 1 ground surface
18. Outline W Grid Pattern Symbol Description 7 Visible 7 Visible Font width 2 40 E Help Apply OF Cancel The Lithology frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button see page 447 The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column Outline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check box Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter The Pattern Symbol frame includes a Visible checkbox which allows you to show hide the lithology patterns and a Width vertical scroll box which allows you to set the width of the lithology pattern as a percentage of the total column width Under the Description frame you can modify the visibility and font style of the descriptive text by selecting the Visible check box and Color box respectively 12 2 5 Well Construction Column The Well Construction column is the most comprehensive data column in the Borehole Log Plot It displays data from various sources in your database including e Drilling details e Lithology e Annular filling e Casing and screens e Centralizers e Cap e Pump locations e Water Level e Pump e Scale Information for the above items and in some cases the images for patterns are taken directly from the database To add a Well Construction column click the Add icon and select Well Construction from the combo box provided
19. SP Data Query Station Data Data Category Description Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m y 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 Location description_addins Name va Station Name GB 01 s 536212 69 Description 4814030 00 323 50 H E Station Data Elevation 3 m E E Queries __ TOC 324 50 m HE Crosstab Total Depth NULL m Ma Station Type Borehole mE __ Depth to Bedrock NULL m Loading options Load All C Incremental x Plots i Existing station data from other databases or files can also be imported through the use of the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS supports importing from text files spreadsheets XLS and databases e g MS Access Database One or more stations can be selected from the Stations list and grouped into logical groupings called Station Groups This feature is explained in the following section Station Groups Most operations in HydroGeo Analyst require the selection of one or more stations in the Station List tab An example of such an operation is data entry One or more stations for which you would like to add view and or modify data need to be selected so that the Station Data tab is accessible activated The complete list of stations that comprise a project can be viewed in the Station List tab by selecting the Project item under the Station Group node in the proje
20. then login now with the appropriate credentials Click OK The Project Wizard window will load as shown below Project Wizard E loj x Step 1 Set Database Environment Select Server and Database The Project Manager allows you Server SRV to create a database for your EA project on a SOL Server of your J Windows NT Integrated Authorization choice through a four step User Name sa RS LY A 1 In this first step select a SOL Password Server on which your project s ESA database will be created and Database EEES AU IO Est select create the database on al that server Build Connection String Cancel EJ Help The Project Wizard contains three steps each step appearing in a new window with the various settings for a new project These include e Step 1 Set Database Environment In this window specify the server and database to be used for the HG Analyst project and the connection string 1f necessary e Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template Creating a New Project 29 e Step 3 Set Project Properties Location and Soil Settings In this window specify the project name project folder project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project The project wizard works in a sequential fashion after defining the necessary inputs in
21. 15 C Primary key O Requires a unit to be selected lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Elev from this list this field contains the Elevations for the stations NOTE The remaining unmapped fields are not necessary for this project Next define units for a few of the length type fields highlighted in the Source table Elev and TOC To do so locate the Unit column under the Source table and select a unit for the Elev field Data Management 47 48 m from this list Repeat this for the TOC field as shown below Data Transfer System Import OF Xx Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheeti y Description y station y Map source fields to destination fields Type i Conditions Type v id DOUBLE LONG O type LONG MW name STRING name STRING M x DOUBLE unknowr x DOUBLE degree wy DOUBLE unknowr y DOUBLE degree O y tag STRING elev DOUBLE elevation DOUBLE m Ts toc DOUBLE toc DOUBLE m A y ES depth DOUBLE m CO Requires a unit to be selected O Required fied 1 Foreignkey O Linked Fields Total of records 15 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Next select these fields for importing Under the Use column Use for Elev and Use for TOC and a check mark will appear beside this field NOTE The units for station X Y co ordinates will be defined in Step 3 of the import
22. 43 4812779610372 43 4781366586241 43 48032005691 83 43 4840015977549 43 4834671503069 43 4787262381 41 43 486065023726 43 4770928697195 43 4826569874823 43 4770928697195 Close Help Rows 65 Time 0 0 0 80 e Press the a Save button to save the query e Press Close to return to the main HydroGeo Analyst window The new station group query will now appear as a new node under the Station Group node in the Project Browser The stations group query dynamic station group can be distinguished from a user defined station group static station group by a modified AF Static BD Dynamic icon SOL NOTE There are no options to modify the list of Display Fields for Station Group queries The default display fields are ID Name X Y Elevation and TOC In addition there are no advanced options for Station Group queries Chapter 7 Queries 7 3 3 Query Using SQL Commands Example If you are familiar with Structured Query Language syntax commands you can retrieve manage and manipulate your data through the SQL View Preview tab using SQL statements For example two commands that are commonly used include the Select command and the Delete command Both of these commands are described below Select Command The Select Command retrieves data from tables in a database and is usually followed by a where clause For example if you want to create a query to show all chemistry results where the
23. 5527393290289 grid Records with errors must be rejected to 19 BH18 80 557 4207847193 activate the importing process 20 BH19 80 5459026870489 You can also select one or more records in 21 BH20 80 5455944457308 the preview table and exclude them from importing into your database ye E Error 7 O Waning Y X lt Back Import Cancel EJ Help The data is checked against three conditions namely e Proper Station Locations in Lat Long format e Specified conditions for each field if any and e Data type compatibility The DTS converts station co ordinates into latitude longitude format and displays the converted values in the Preview frame Stations are converted and stored in the database in this format however the station co ordinates may be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in any projection system desired for this project stations will be displayed in NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17 N By default all data marked as erroneous will not be imported However all warnings are ignored by default One or more of these error messages can be selected and the data affected by those errors can either be rejected or accepted Erroneous records will not be accepted for importing unless the errors are fixed All values causing errors are highlighted in different colors Red represents rejected or erroneous records yellow represents a warning caution for the selected records Each of these problematic records can be selected and e
24. A rii VARAS Model Sa ci NO Gin Beda Soni AN VIERAN SA Geckos A AAA E Gure AA SS A TOO eog Sa Ses NO Gin Casos Curve Taba la Geode A AAA E Era hard n A red 17 HH Leck A AAA E IA A AA r iiin LPPM aqua br ro Ed ALE Hpo r in kem aguia n A 17 Hpg iiH lapiga OS ARANA 1 ATREA Model ite Dota Pa deren ap ey AG OT Medel fc Dor aaa A ap eg Model ite Dota 0 rin TOON Al i Beda Soni AA 1 PA Colo iiH Gureal Ce OT A AA i Capos Curve OS terrre PREFER A enog i Era hard pal ay ey TAO Cenk i La A E IT i Sand So Orn COO Cenk Upp acter ee RA VEREER A piege Hcr AC ACE 1 Gg kem aguia Pa deere ay ey TATA Hpo IAEA AA GH 27 ers ELLE GUA lapiga On rerepi el POS Model 27 ers OC Sa GHH Dota AA SOOT Model 27 ers ELLE GHH Poteet SU rererere a di PRRREPHOGPFO Model Sara ondinn 27 IRALA LLL A Dota 41 Greer E A ien io nj 27 ers CCS GHH Conroe Curve On PERRET ae Firre Cienega J 27 ers OC GA Era hard a TE OO A Geckos 27 ers OC GA La Rede ae SOOT Cenk Doarehoies ba 27 ers LLL Git Cuy AA ne Geode zi own 250 Tes gga For more details on using the Query Builder please see Chapter 7 Queries 9 6 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section 354 Text labels lines and shapes can be added to any layer in the cross section To add annotations you must select the layer but NOT make it active i e do not check the active edit check box Once the layer has been selected right click and select Annotations from the list of op
25. Allows you to edit the page setup properties E Printer Setup Allows you to configure printer settings Print Report Allows you to generate the report and send it to a printer y Preview Report Previews the report before printing Undo Cancels the last operation de Cut Cut selected text or object from the report designer Copy Copies selection to clipboard E Paste Pastes contents of the clipboard to the report designer Delete Deletes current selection x lt Fi oit Reorder Groups Displays the groups order dialog Display Settings Tools ES Report Explorer Displays hides the control that displays all report elements placed on each section of the report 396 Chapter 11 The Report Editor Fields Displays hides the control that displays a list of fields available for the report Properties Displays hides the properties control for the report Ea Toolbox Displays hides the toolbar hosting the toolbox icons cad Grid Displays hides grid lines on the Designer 5 Script Editor Launches the VB Script editor that may be used to enhance report automation Formatting Tools Normal Text Style Selects a format style Arial Font Selects a font for the selected object 10 Font Size Sets the font size for the selected object Bl Bold Sets the bold status of the selected text I italics Sets the italics status of the selected text U Underline Sets the underline status for the selected text A Detailed Font La
26. Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst contour maps depicting the distribution of the selected chemical concentration over the site area Thematic Mapping A Thematic Map of any type of data may be created and displayed on the map view Thematic maps include Pie and Bar charts with options to customize their appearance and style Cross Section Editor Many geologic and or hydrogeologic site investigations require a detailed analysis of the available lithological data and the drafting and interpretation of cross sections The Cross Section editor can be used to perform these tasks The Cross Section editor provides a set of easy to use tools to interpret subsurface data Geological and hydrogeological interpretations as well as interpretations geared towards creating model layers can be created using the cross section module All model interpretations can be exported for use as modeling layers in groundwater modeling software packages including Waterloo Hydrogeologic s Visual MODFLOW The Cross Section editor is seamlessly integrated with the HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram view 3D Subsurface Visualization with 3D Explorer Once cross sectional views of the data are created and preliminary interpretations made 3D Explorer can be used to create fence diagrams containing one or more of those cross sections The 3D Explorer provides a unique pers
27. Close Help Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 Data Query as the type in the upper left section of the window E New Query button in the toolbar 70 Chapter 2 Getting Started Mew Query E a xj Mame Description In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the new query For this example type PCE_exceedences OK The Project Tree on the left side of the window contains the database structure with the data categories tables and fields For this example expand the Soil Sampling category then the Soil Chemistry table and locate the chemical_name field beside Soil Sampling beside Soil Chemistry An example is shown below 7 Query Builder 3x052 2 Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL ViewPreview Select a Query Display Fields PCE_exceedences y function an 7 a Orderby Description a x Geologic Description ES E ae pr gt Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling soil_ samples ee ees ap X Y Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system sys_sample_code Sample_name Conditions eco Operator Expression result_value result_unit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code sample_type_code y Condition Projec
28. Creating a New Project 167 Projection Type 178 Q Quality Control Data source 487 Example 492 Queries SQL Commands 235 Query Builder 219 About the Interface 219 Creating Queries 222 Duplicating Queries 237 Managing Queries 237 Query Types 221 R Recalling Queries 237 Record Sorting Options 129 Records Display on Map 129 Records Filtering and Selecting 128 Reducer 464 Remove Stations from Cross Section 353 Report 413 Report Settings 413 Formatting Styles 416 Grid Settings 415 Page Setup 414 Print Settings 414 Reports Creating A Report Template 426 Restore Database 137 Rotate Model X and Y 361 Rotate Screen X and Y 361 S Saving a Report 424 Setting a Report Template as Default Tem plate 426 Station Group Queries 222 Station Groups 102 Station Types 100 Stations Table 101 T Tabs 105 Station Data Tab 106 Station List Tab 105 Template Manager 9 181 About the Interface 182 Adding Tables 189 Background Information 181 Creating a copy of the current template 197 Deleting Tables 192 Importing Tables 191 Linked Fields 196 Managing Templates 197 Modifying Views and Settings 188 194 Saving a template as default 198 Table Property Settings 189 Toolbar Functionality 1 83 Three Dimensional Interpolation 133 U Uninstalling HydroGeo Analyst 14 User Access Managing Users and Groups 158 User Access Level Management 157 User Access Management Application Level Permissions 160 Project Level Objects 16
29. Description iz Category Unit _ Description Monitoring E vent Mining Exploration Geophysics TO total depth station type depth to bedrock Q La o 3 j3f3 3 313 Under the Lithology tab enter the following soil description information HINT Use the lt Tab gt or lt Enter gt key on the keyboard after each value to shift to the next column in the grid from m Soil_type Description CI ES HINT After each row press the op Add button to add a new record to the grid The Soil types may be selected from the a pre defined soil classification list you will recall that the DIN 4023 Soil Classification System was selected when the project was created Simply choose an appropriate soil type from the list NOTE All depth dependent data must be entered as depth to 0 5 5 10 10 15 etc and in ascending order Once the data has been entered Record gt Post from the main menu or press the Ta Post button in the toolbar to save the data The grid should be similar to the one shown below Chapter 2 Getting Started HydroGeo Analyst SampleProject D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject Bie E oj x Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help 6600 XRA POR O SMa ein ll Station Groups af Station List B Data Query Station Data i 4 Project Data Category Station Da
30. E E Iw La E Y EZ E C E 20 60 lE m E 2 06 E Bow Color amp Sete the lahel attrihutes E Stay on top W Ff AA a El a ISS i H E Interpretations H E BR H E CE ef DD AS EEES PRATS Under the Interpretations folder there will be three separate sub folders one for each of the interpretation types e Model e Geology e Hydrogeology Display Settings 385 Under each individual Interpretation Layer there is a list of the soil types belonging to this layer Each soil type has its own settings as shown here The soil Name may not be modified this name will appear in the Legend contents Each individual soil type may be set to Visible or hidden from view 10 4 Creating Slices and Cross Sections 386 Stay on top A Cross Sections Data Ff AA H E Stations J Interpretations E Model Layers E 6 Geology Layers E Medium Sand ee A Gravel E Fine Sand o Law Silt B Hydrogeology Layers E Pl Name acne Layer Mame Coarse Grav A slice is defined as a 3D planar surface extending horizontally or vertically through the project There are three types of slice objects available e Vertical slices along the XZ or YZ plane extending through the entire depth of the domain e Horizontal slices along the XY plane of the project domain e Cross section slices along a straight line or an irregular polyline through the entir
31. E Generate SQL Statement button from the toolbar at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the Query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning El Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string If not already active SQL View gt Preview tab to see the results of the Query The results should be similar to that shown in the figure below Querying the Database 73 Dl x XH amp e Station Group Quern Data Query Design SQL View Preview Select a Query SELECT station id 45 id station x AS x station y AS y station name 45 name soll_chemiStry chemical_name 45 chemical_name soil_chemistry result_value AS result_value FROM PCE_exceedences y Station RIGHT JOIN PStation ON Station ID PStation SID LEFT JOIN soil_chemlStry ON Station id soil_chemlStry Station WHERE soil_chemistry chemical_name TetrachlORoethylene AND Description soll_chemiStry result_value gt 1 AND PStation ID 1 Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling soil_samples i y name chemical_n result_value Soil Chemistry 7 1272497425 1472406905 BH6 Tetrachloro sys_sample_code 8 1789967438 758741551 BH Tetrachloro Sample_name 21 1944457306 1842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro sample_date 21 1944457306 1842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro jie
32. Exponential Gaussian Power Hole Effect If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 15 5 Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes None 1250 ANSI Central Europe Latin 2 1251 ANSI Cyrillic Slavic 1252 ANSI Latin 1 1253 ANSI Greek 1254 ANSI Latin 5 Turkish 1255 ANSI Hebrew 1256 ANSI Arabic 1257 ANSI Baltic Rim 1258 ANSI Vietnamese 437 OEM US Latin 708 OEM Arabic ASMO 708 720 OEM Arabic Transparent ASMO 137 OEM Greek formerly 437 G 775 OEM Baltic Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes 535 536 850 OEM Western Europe Latin 1 852 OEM Central Europe Latin 2 855 OEM Russian IBM Cyrillic 857 OEM Turkish IBM 860 OEM Portuguese MS DOS 861 OEM Icelandic MS DOS 862 OEM Hebrew 863 OEM Canadian Frech MS DOS 864 OEM Arabic 865 OEM Nordic MS DOS 866 OEM Russian MS DOS Cyrillic II 869 OEM Greek 2 IBM Modern Greek 8859 1 ISO Latin 1 West European Danish Dutch English Faeroes Finnish French German Icelandic Irish Italian Norwegian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 8859 2 ISO Latin 2 East European Albanian Czech English German Hungarian Polish Rumanian Serbo Croatian Slovak Slovene 8859 3 ISO Latin 3 Southeastern European Afrikaans Catalan Dutch English Esperanto German Italian Maltese Spanish Turkish 88
33. General list option from the Get values from list combo box e Click on the Edit List button This will display the List Editor The List Editor provides the tools for populating a list of potential values for the selected field For more details please see Chapter 3 List Editor e Select the Allow values only from list option to strictly limit the values for the selected field to those in the list If this option is not selected then it will be possible to either pick a value from a list or manually enter a new one for this field NOTE Recall that if a field is defined as a foreign key a pick list will automatically be created for it based on values in the primary key in the parent table As such any list created following the steps outlined in this section will be overridden Linked Fields The Properties of linked fields can be modified through an interface provided in the Template Manager Clicking any of the fields in the Linked Fields set activates an interface similar to the one shown in the following figure 196 Chapter 5 Template Manager As with other standard fields there is a number of view settings that can be modified by all users These settings include Template Editor sample Environmental ha Database structure H Description a Geologic Description B V Lithology IV from IV to Y Description V soil_type IV Pattern IV Consistency IV Structure Y ASTM Descript
34. Geographic NAD83 Layer Geology Alberta Community Development http www cd gov ab ca preserving parks lrm index asp Data Parks and Protected Areas Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum NAD83 Layer Parks and Protected Areas Appendices Department of Provincial Treasury http www gov pe ca gis index php3 number 778568 Data Warehouses Format Shapefile and MIF Mapinfo Geographic Coverage Price Edward Island Datum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries Road Forest Hydrology Department of Natural Resources Nova Scotia http www gov ns ca natr meb DOWNLOAD UTMNADS83 htm Data Natural Resources Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Nova Scotia Datum NAD83 Layer Natural Resources New York State GIS Clearinghouse http www nysgls state ny us Data New York State GIS Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage New York State Datum NAD83 Layer Provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census agglomerations census consolidated subdivi sions census subdivisions Ontario Geological Survey http www mndm gov on ca mndm mines ogs draftbedrock_e asp Data Digital version of the Paleozoic bedrock of Southern Ontario compilation map Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage Ontario Layer Geology Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 543 544 Statistics Canada http www 12 statcan ca english census0
35. Help Note The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths not elevations Therefore the BHLP requires that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark Note When Queries are selected for the data source all Queries in your HGA project will be listed in the corresponding pull down menu 476 DiataT able Querez Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Using a Query instead of a Data Table provides more flexibility in the type of information that can be added to a BHLP For more information on developing a Query to use in a BHLP please see Chapter 7 Queries Please be aware that not all queries will be appropriate for use in a BHLP and that in some cases e g Lithology a query cannot replace a data table As well queries cannot be used if images are to be added NOTE When a Query returns more than 1 record for a selected station e g time varying concentrations at a single borehole over various depths the BHLP will automatically use the first result value in the query If using another value is desired then the Data Query should be modified with the appropriate conditions 12 3 2 Add Well Construction Column Next add another column type to the BHLP by right clicking on the Design node and selecting Add Column In this example Well Construction has been added to produce the design shown in the following screenshot i Borehole Log Designer Sa
36. Johns River Water Management District Florida Datum NAD83 Layer Basemap Natural Resources and Images United States Geological Survey and USA Environmental Protection Agency http Mhd usgs gov index html Data National Hydrography Dataset Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage USA Layer Surface water features such as lakes ponds streams rivers springs and wells Appendices United States Environmental Protection Agency http www epa gov O WO W watershed landcover ulcmap html Data Land Cover Digital Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage USA Statewide Layer Satellite Land Cover National Atlas USA http www atlas usgs gove atlasftp html Data National Atlas Map Warehouse Format Shapefile Geotiff DBF Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Agriculture Biology Boundaries Climate Environment Geology History Map Reference People Transportation Water United States Department of Agriculture http datagateway nrcs usda gov Data Natural Resources Data Warehouse Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Orthoimagery Soils Common Land Units Cultural and Demographics Governmental Units and Place names Elevation Hydrography Cadastral Transportation Roads Digital Raster Graphic DRG Scanned USGS quads Land Cover Vegetation Plants Watershed boundaries 10 12 digit hydrologic units Wetlands and Floodplain Easements Climate Preci
37. Selecting Layers When a CAD format is selected using the Layer Import menu navigate to the appropriate file and open it The following dialogue will load Import DXF Projection Projection Type UTM Coordinate System NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17M Unit meters Select layers to import into a map OF Cancel The top portion of the dialogue lists the projection system properties of the current map project Below this frame is a Transform button This option is required only 1f you are not sure that the CAD file has the same projection system as the current map project In this case click Transform to georeference the CAD image Once you are done click OK to return to the Import DXF dialogue In this dialogue select which layers you wish to import into the map and click OK Transforming Coordinates The CAD file must contain the same units and projection system as the current map project in order for it to be displayed properly If there are differences then the CAD Description of Menu Items ZO file can be Transformed to the map project s projection and coordinate system From the Import DXF dialog click on the Transform button This will launch the Map Georeference window as shown below Georeference CAD Georeferz e cS E ioj x Q k Georeference Paint 10 000 m 1 10 000 m Ae 1000 000 m wa f1000 000 m Distance Between Points 1414 214 ml Map Layer Exten
38. The Cross Section editor will generate the text files based on the vertex location of each model layer line in each cross section For example for model layer 1 Topography if cross section AA contains this model line with 5 vertices and cross section BB has the same model line with 10 vertices then the text file should contain 15 rows if both cross sections AA and BB are selected The X Y location for each vertex corresponds to the X Y location on the cross section line the Cross Section editor also provides the option to save the well contacts using the station s X Y co ordinates and retrieve this info from the database For more details on this feature please see Interpretation on page 337 and see Querying Cross Section Interpretations on page 353 Export Image Provides options for exporting the current cross section to a Raster Image file Supported file types include bitmaps BMP Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg and enhanced Meta Files EMF Enter a filename and choose the desired export format and click OK An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file Scale Factor Quality Scale Symbolo 256 Colors Default f Half Tone O Web Safe 24Bit Color O Graps With System Colors i No Symbology Scaled Line Symbology Mot Scaled Source Depth C All Symbology Scaled OK Cancel H Help There are several options for the modifyi
39. The Depth Point based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various depths The data can be displayed using graphics text or both Water Level is an example of data that could be displayed using a Depth Point based column Water level information can be displayed through a combination of a symbol showing the level accompanied by a text label e g showing the date at which the displayed water level was recorded To create a Depth Point based column click the op Add icon Select Depth from the combo box that appears A new Depth column will be added to the designer window 450 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Expand the Depth node in the Designer tree and select DepthEntities H E Well Construction EES Scale ScaleEntities DataTable E Depthe ntity Caption Depth Description Depth DataField Select the data table or query and the depth entity for the column using the combo boxes provided Selecting the field for the depth entity will create markers at the depths for which data is entered in the specified table or query At this point you can select what is displayed beside or in these markers Right click in the settings field and select Add Entity DataT able E Depthe ntity Caption Description DataF eld Please Choose an Entity IrageE nity OF Cancel Adding a Text Entity will allow you to display text in the column such as descriptions or numeric valu
40. The chemistry analysis results should now appear in the project To confirm select one of the new Boreholes from the Station List load the Station Data and view the Soil Sampling data category Soil Chemistry table An example for BH10 1s shown below Data Management 59 HydroGeo Analyst SampleProject C Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject om Bak la xj Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help Jee 7 SR xBRalBEGBCH F B0S SO a F inv B Station List 3B Data Query Station Data Eg Station Groups La Project Data Category H E Station Data Soi Sampin y Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m BP Queries liado 8H10 gt 53536960 481473910 347 00 348 00 F Crosstab g 9 Maps soil_samples Soil Chemistry Rock Coring Soil Vapor Moisture Content Particle Size Distrib Atterberg Unconfined Compression Direct Shear Odometer _4 Cross Sections sys_sample_code chemical result_val result _uni fractioncc interprete reporting result _coi H 4 Reports BH10_10 30 2002_13 7 VOC 15 t 3D View 8H10_10 30 2002 16 7 m TVOC 120 H E Borehole Logs BH10_10 30 2002_2 7 TYOC 3200 Plots BH10_10 30 2002_22 2 T OC 540 BH10_10 30 2002_26 2 TYOC 0 53 BH10_10 30 2002_28 2 TYOC 0 37 BH10_10 30 2002_8 2 Vinyl Chie 0 Loading options Load All Incremental x Total 21 selected 0 Since the dat
41. Toolbar Global Template Opuons Ha 183 Tables and Fields Toolbar rt tad cd 186 Working With the Template Manager ssscscscccccsssssssssssccccccccccssssssssccscssssssees 188 Modifying Tables and View S ttine S ii a ve debe eed ies 188 ata ale O A eeadaorswaoeunecetenons 188 Table Property SCUIN OS dalt rs ida labidd 189 Detinino Table Relations MOS a AES a A A O r Si 192 Modityme Fields and View Seles sei 194 PTAC PEES dine a a a cond soe tg uae ea 196 Manacina Templates oenas n E T 197 Creatine a Mew COM PAU tios 197 Creating a copy OF the Current template A a 197 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Savinesa template as detault template ii loro ri 198 Exporting the current template as a Database template ccccccccnnoocononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnos 198 6 The Data Transfer System cccccsssscccsssscccssscccsssscccssssccesses 199 Sarane Me DTS RA 199 Importing Data using the DTS esssocssssseeccccccssssccceocossssseccccccosssssceseceocossssscccecsssssssseee 201 Chbosera Data SUITE 201 Data Transter Package DEPT las rn RRA RS 201 Select the DataSource sain sarccuentdoiinasadaos accuses e a 202 DE AAA A O ere seren eon ny 205 Data Requirements a ee E uasmsoatadmeeducunene 206 A A r a E RnR tenn Zee An ere 207 Howto Map Fic dS a wae adi tec eeeaeancaremanene 207 UNA SA te cas tasd te ahaa ht ahah cates valet ANA ER 209 MN POT UIA CHIL iid reia A a E EA 209 Station Related Sis 2
42. Value Sets or Returns the string expression to be substituted in the query Name in the query shown below For example the bolded expression in the following parameter query forces the report component to display a dialog as shown below 420 Chapter 11 The Report Editor SELECT Station name as name chem_test_resultsO chemical_name chem_test_resultsO sample_date chem_test_resultsO result_value chem_test_results0 result_unit chem_test_results0 repORtINg_detection_limit FROM Station RIGHT JOIN PStation ON Station ID PStation SID LEFT JOIN chem_test_resultsO ON Station 1d chem_test_resultsO Station WHERE Name lt station namelSelect a station ISelect DISTINCT Name as Name from station gt and chem_test_resultsO chemical_name Benzene and PStation ID 1 An example of a Parameter Query Report is available in the Demo project the report name is Conditional Report When you launch this report the dialog mentioned above will appear prompting you to select a station a Report Parameters i x Enter the values of parameters Select 4 station Select one of the stations that satisfies this query in this case it is one of the Monitoring Wells W 05 for example and click OK The report window will then appear as shown in the screenshot below CEET 2 a Jana EE ai mul jes E Coriaria Stigation ero ON Date d ns 1 2004 ae ee a C T I ea
43. coming from the data source database or provided on the Report Designer The controls that fall into this category include e Label e Check box e RTF Text e Graphics Image Line Forms OLE objects Barcodes etc e Page break e Sub reports Adding Controls Except for ADO data control all controls can be added to the report in the desired section To add a control to a report e select the desired control by clicking on the icon on the toolbar e position the cursor at the desired location and click and drag to define the size of the control Depending on the selected control specific dialog boxes may be displayed requesting information Once the control is placed on the report its properties could be altered by activating the Properties Explorer window and modifying the desired property The position of the controls can be changed by selecting and moving the selection to the desired location Controls can be moved this way only within a given section Cut and paste can be used to move controls to another section Some controls have special properties that require the user s attention these controls are described below Altering Borders of Controls Border properties of one or more controls can be modified by selecting the controls first and either clicking on the Borders button on the toolbar or selecting the option from the pop up menu Modifying Data Source information of the ADO data control The ADO data c
44. e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location of the first vertex of the intended geology layer e Click once on the left mouse button to add a vertex and start digitizing the polygon in the desired direction e Add more vertices by clicking on the left mouse button at desired locations Move the mouse cursor to an interval on a desired station the mouse cursor will snap the vertex of the polygon to the nearest station interval A vertex can also be added anywhere on the cross section by clicking on the left mouse button e Double click anywhere on the cross section using the left mouse button to close the polygon the following dialog will appear Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 343 Geology Layer Pattern o a Name Description Sand Pattern Ok Cancel 53 Help e In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the layer a brief Description and select a soil Pattern If the geologic layer you have just digitized in the current cross section has already been created you may select it from the list instead of typing a new name Click on the blank area beside Pattern to load the pattern options as shown below Fill Patterns Please choose a pattern zm Dolomite OF Cancel e Select a pattern then click OK Repeat the same sequence of operations for other layers within the active cross section The result will be a layered structure of the geological domain The cross section may contain s
45. each window press the Next gt button to proceed The Next gt button will only become active after the necessary fields have been defined Required fields are indicated by an asterisk The first window that appears is Step 1 Set Database Environment 2 1 1 Step 1 Set Database Environment 30 In the first step define the server and database settings for the new project HydroGeo Analyst uses Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express to host the project database Any MS SQL Express server that is currently installed on any computer on your network could be used as long as you have the appropriate access rights to it If you are working on a stand alone computer then the server would be the local computer using SQL Express Once the server is selected select from an existing database on this server or create a new database In this example you will create the project on the local machine For details on building a connection string to a MS SQL Server on a network please refer to Chapter 4 Step 1 Set Database Environment on page 168 Select Server and Database Choose the Select Server and Database option Beside Server select your local machine as the Server this will appear as Computer_Name WHI in the combo box If a separate login password is not required for the selected Server computer be sure to check the box beside Windows NT Integrated Authorization Otherwise de select this option and specify a User
46. for this project You may choose from the following list e Geographic e UTM e State Planar e Others Once the projection Type is selected choose the Projection from the combo box on the right side of the window The Units will be selected automatically based on the selected projection type e g UTM will use m State Planer will use feet etc Once you have specified the required settings you will see that the Finish button at the bottom of the window will become active This indicates that you have entered the necessary input fields for a new project and you can finish the Project Wizard and create your new project Finish to create the project and close the Project Wizard A new project will be created with the necessary tables fields and settings Please be patient during this process The new project should then appear in the main HGA window The first time the project loads the settings for User Access Management will be presented As the creator of the new project you will have Administrator rights where you can add remove users and assign access rights For more details on this feature please see User Access Level Management on page 157 You may return to the Project Manager settings window at any time 1f you need to modify any of the project settings defined above To do so select Project Properties from the main menu of HydroGeo Analyst This is explained in the following section 4 2 4 Modifying P
47. ome ALO XA ALS renel PAA RG 4 BISA 4 814410 E When you are finished with the position edits you must right mouse click on the map window and turn off the Edit Layout option to disable this feature To edit the remaining layout settings including fields violation conditions and display properties simply select Layer Display Data from the main menu then modify the settings as explained above 8 2 3 Edit The Edit menu contains standard windows functions such as Cut Copy and Paste objects as well as other options for editing shapefiles NOTE Before editing a layer make sure that the Editable check box is selected After editing deselect the Editable check box on the Layer Manager Description of Menu Items 297 Cut Cuts the selected object to clipboard only available if an object polygon rectangle circle line or text is selected Copy Copies the selected object only available if an object polygon rectangle circle line or text 1s selected Paste Pastes the clipboard item onto the current layer Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all objects from the current map layer Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex e Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable e Select an object on this layer e Click on the a Add Vertex button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu
48. s data respectively Data Fields Explorer For most report types the Report Editor takes data directly from the database based on the design and generates the desired report Access to the data in the database is provided through the connection string and SQL Statement These inputs result in a list of fields that are available for the current report These fields are listed in the Fields Explorer as shown below that can be displayed by clicking on the Fields icon on the toolbar Refresh the fields list List of available fields resuilt_unit One or more fields in the fields explorer can be selected and dragged and dropped into the desired section of the report if displaying data from these fields is desired Report Properties Toolbox The Report Properties toolbox as shown in the figure below provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain This window can be accessed by clicking on the Properties icon on the toolbar Report Designer Window 407 408 Property Toolbox txtSTR_ MUNICIPIO Identification of the active control Be 8 Visualization options Custor en Mame EISTR_MURNICIPIO Alignment O ddT Left BackColor Backstyle 0 ddBkTranspare Cansrow E CanShrink False ClassName Normal DataField STR_MUNICIPIO Name of the Property Font Arial Forecolor MN Property values height 285
49. station id id Description coat S Geologic Description i tac rene Bene a in lithology soil_type soil_type X rom to soil_type picid oP si J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Consistency Structure ASTM Descriptor Color Conditions Expression lithology from_ Odor lithology soil_type formation_name lithology from_ formation_unit i lithology soil_type moisture comment ha Source Condition Project ta Advanced Close Help Field Name lithology soil_type Type STRING Rows gen Time 0 0 0 15 Enclosing the two or more conditions in parentheses allows you to further refine the query criteria Use AND or OR operators inside and outside the groupings to combine the conditions so as to obtain the best results For the example above the query will return all stations in which at least one lithology interval begins below 30 meters AND contains clay OR 1f the stations have at least one lithology interval that begins below 50 m AND contains Silt e Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Press the a Save button to save the query e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the
50. x Do you want to delete the selected GeoTransFormations e we 312 Chapter 8 Map Manager 8 2 8 Help Contents Contains the contents of the Map Manager help 8 3 Defining a Cross Section Line Use the Map Manager to define the locations of cross section lines which can then be interpreted in the Cross Section editor There are two methods for defining cross section lines Digitizing and Use Existing Polyline Each method 1s described below Digitizing a Cross Section Line In the Map Manager open an existing map project or create a new map project Select a HydroGeo Analyst data layer 1 e station data and ensure this is visible and active selected If you do not have such a layer you may create one based on station groups that are available in your HydroGeo Analyst project To do this use the Layer gt Load HGA Data option to select a station group The Map Manager creates a layer with stations that are available in the group Zoom in to the area of interest optional Click the 5 Cross Section Line button at the right end of the toolbar or select Tools Define Cross Section Line from the Main Menu Place the mouse cursor at the starting point of the line and click once with the left mouse button Click again at another location to add a vertex to the line You may add one or more vertices that define the cross section line Note If you wish to place a vertex beyond the extent of the current map view click
51. 21 1944457306 1842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro chemicaLname 21 944457306 842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro result_value result_unit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code sample_type_code x M Source Condition Project B Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry result_value Type DOUBLE Rows 16 Time 0 0 0 32 7 fa Save Query button to save the query Close to return to the main HydroGeo Analyst window This query will now appear as a new node under the Queries branch of the Project Browser A warning message may appear stating Do you want to save changes made to the Station List Yes to save and proceed 2 4 2 Recalling and Executing Queries 74 Once a query has been created it will remain available from the main HydroGeo Analyst interface A Station Group Query will appear as a branch under the Station Group node in the project browser The stations which satisfy the query will be automatically added to this new Station Group A Data Query will appear as a new branch under the Queries node in the project browser To see the results of a selected query right mouse click on the query and select Execute option The Query results will then be displayed in the Data Query tab as shown in the example below Chapter 2 Getting Started HydroGeo Analyst Sample_No 23 D Program File
52. 345 745 Status El EEE E 21491 5 3 ZH JI E El Bar e The HydroGeo Analyst Graphical User Interface 1s composed of several controls Data Tabs Provides access to the various parts of the project including the Station List Data Query and Station Data Menu Bar Contains menu commands with access to most features that are available in the HydroGeo Analyst package Toolbar Contains several context sensitive short cut buttons for the most frequently used HydroGeo Analyst features Project Browser Hosts a tree view listing some of the most common components of Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst your project These include nodes for Station Groups Queries Crosstab Maps Cross Sections Reports 3D Views Station Data Borehole Log Plots and Plots Well Profile Provides a borehole log plot BHLP view for the selected station Data Grids Contains the grids for data entry and visualization Data Loading Options Provides settings for managing loading of data this is especially useful when managing a large number of stations and you want to navigate through HGA without loading the entire set of stations in the station group See Data Loading Options on page 20 for more details Status Bar Displays the program status The following sections describe each of these components in greater detail 1 6 1 Data Tabs To facilitate data management the main interface is separated into three tabs that are describe
53. 535584 50 4814300 00 329 90 4 gt 535599 70 4814371 80 330 20 535492 90 4814477 20 331 10 Lesti e 535635 20 4814503 80 330 80 G Load All 535588 40 4814667 30 331 10 Incremental X Boreholes If desired selected stations can be removed from a Station group or the Station group can be deleted as a whole Once the stations in a group are displayed a number of operations can be applied based on the selection For example loading a station group and then selecting the Display on Map option from the Record menu activates the Map Manager component and automatically creates a GIS layer containing all stations from this group HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 103 104 Data Categories The tables in a HydroGeo Analyst database can be organized into a logical grouping by linking them to any one of the provided data categories HydroGeo Analyst provides nine data categories eight of which reflect the most common data categories found for environmental data A ninth category User Defined Category can be renamed as appropriate and used accordingly The Station Data categories can be accessed from two locations e From the Project Browser expand the Station Data node OR e From the main window select the Station Data tab and expand the Data Category combo box ensure that one or more stations are selected in the Station List tab Each of these options is displayed in the figure below H
54. A O Rower aai Angle degree 1 6 degree 1 a E be atl T 444 4 4 4 4 4 4 44 a ig Conversion OF Unit Converter 151 To use the Unit Converter e Select a unit category from the left side panel e Select a unit for this category e Then select a unit category from the right side panel e Select a unit for this category The conversion factor will appear in the fields at the top of the dialog 3 7 Major Components The major components of HG Analyst have separate chapters devoted to an in depth discussion of the features and capabilities of each component The following components are discussed at length in subsequent chapters 1 Project Manager The Project Manager provides a wizard for creating a new HydroGeo Analyst project and an interface for modifying the properties and settings of existing projects For existing projects the Project Manager can be called to see the project properties When a new project is created the Project Manager is called in the form of a Wizard To load the Project Wizard for new projects select Project New from the main menu The wizard displays several windows in an easy to use interface as described below e Database Environment In this window specify the database which will be used for the HG Analyst project and the necessary connection string e Database Template Properties Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new
55. Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter 8 2 6 Select 304 This menu provides options for selecting or de selecting stations on the selected layer in the Map project Typically this involves stations from the HydroGeo Analyst project Once the station s data points are selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol Stations may be selected on the map by e Clicking individually e Drawing a polygon box or circle all stations inside the object become selected e Drawing a line and defining a buffer distance all stations within the buffer distance become selected Multiple station selections may be accomplished with the use of the lt Ctrl gt key Simply press and hold down the Ctrl key after making the initial selection then use one of the tools to select or de select additional stations Chapter 8 Map Manager Each selection option is described below Pointer Allows to select stations one by one When a station 1s selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol When another station is selected the previously selected station is un selected and the new station s symbol becomes selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Rectangle Allows to select stations within a drawn box To draw a rectangle place the cursor in the map window click once with the left mouse button in the area of interest and drag a window around the area then release the mouse button A
56. Chapter 2 Getting Started Data Transfer System Import 7 aa oj xj Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name v x Description J Saye changes to this DTS package Select data source Specify import file name o eee ee Build a connection string Note The Data Transfer System DTS allows you Z to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access and other databases through a three to four step process Data source details Name Value In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations Cancel i EA In the Choose a Data Source window create a data package and select the source file Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type Stations in the box that appears OK The data package will save the DTS import settings and configuration for quick and easy recall later on Sr Ey button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Sample_Stations XLS file located in the Examples folder located in the HG Analyst program folder The default folder is D Program File
57. Create Contours 286 Gridded Data 289 Creating A Borehole Log Report 423 A Report Containing 3D Images 423 A Report Containing a Cross Section 422 A Report for Map Projects 422 Data Query 222 Material Specification 150 New Database Template 174 Reports based on a Data Query 419 Reports from a Data Grid 418 Station Group Query 232 Cross Section Adding Annotations 354 Change Vertical Axis 328 Vertical Exaggeration 329 Cross Sections 317 Cross Tab Queries 241 Data Markers Editor 25 1 Expression Editor 244 245 D Data Acquisition 8 Data Categories 104 Data Entry 105 Data Management 8 Data Queries 221 Data Transfer System DTS Exporting Data 215 Importing 201 Starting the DTS 199 Defining Table Relationships 192 Deleting a Report 424 Deleting a Report Template 426 Display Gridlines in Cross Section 336 Display Intersecting Cross Sections 334 DTS Import Order 207 DTS Import Build a Connection String 204 Data Transfer Package DTP 201 E Export 122 Export Grid 122 Export Model Layers 322 Export Quality Control Analysis Results 495 Exporting Data 215 F Fence diagrams 357 Field Database Settings 195 Field types 195 Files general 517 Find and Replace 125 Frequently Asked Questions 544 Fundamental Concepts 100 G Georeferencing 270 Georeferencing Raster Images 270 Geotransformation 310 Graduated Renderer 545 H Hardware Requirements 13 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 107 Record Options 127
58. Datum dialog select the input datum from the list of projection systems Click Ok Next click the cell located under the To Datum header Again the Choose Datum dialog will open and you can select the output datum for the geotransformation Click Ok Finally click the cell located under the Geotransformation header The following dialog will open Choose GeoTransformation iol xj Please choose a GeoTransformation method Montserrat 1958 To WGS 1984 E Moznet To WGS 1984 Mporaloko To WGS 1984 Mporaloko To WGS 1984 2 NAD 1927 CGQ7 To NAD 1983 2 NAD 1927 CGO77 To NAD 1983 CSAS98 NAD 1927 DEF 1976 To NAD 1983 NT y2 Ontario NAD 1927 To WGS 1984 12 M MAN 1977 Ta WGS 1994 12 Ok Cancel Here you can select the appropriate transformation method Once selected click Ok Once you have configured the geotransformation click the Ok button to exit From this point on whenever you open a shapefile Map Manager will refer to these settings and make the appropriate transformation if required You can define multiple transformations by repeating the steps above Please note that if multiple records exist for the same transformation type e g from NAD 27 to NAD 83 but each is assigned a different method Map Manager will only use the first transformation listed for that particular transformation type To delete a defined geotransformation select a record and click the X Delete button Click Yes to confirm
59. Description Geographic f UTM f State Planar Non Earth Projection Upit C Others NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N meters y Ok Cancel H Help In this dialog there are options for editing the Projection System units and description e In the Name field a new name may be defined for the map project e In the Projection Type frame there will be a list of Projection Systems supported by Map Manager and stored in the Database For each Projection Type a Projection must be defined along with a corresponding Unit The default unit for each projection will be displayed e In the Description text box you may define a brief description of the project NOTE Projects in the Map Manager can use co ordinate systems that differ from those used for displaying stations in the main HGA window Print Loads the map view into the Report Editor where the report may be printed and or saved for later retrieval For more information please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor Exit Exit the Map Manager and return to HydroGeo Analyst 8 2 2 Layer A Map Layer is a set of points lines polygons or a raster image that have geographic coordinates attached to 1t A Map Layer may be imported into any Map Project New Provides options for creating a new map layer A new layer may be created as one of the following file types Description of Menu Items 265 266 e ESRI Polygon shapefile shp e ESRI Line shapefile shp e
60. EA LIM EC 200000 E 00 E CE CA E o OE IEC EII LCR LI 190 ot EIA TOO EC E ALEA EEE EI CIA CIA E E E AS A 1 This analysis compares the spiked measured SM sample to the spiked theoretical ST sample for each parameter with available spiked values and calculates the Percent Recovery Records that are less than the specified Percent Recovery will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template 494 Chapter 13 Quality Control The results for Duplicates analysis are displayed below EDISE 12 0000 ad Bab TAON AM This analysis compares all concentrations measured in the duplicate measured D sample to its duplicate original O sample and calculates the Percent Difference and the CV Records that exceed the specified Percent Difference or exceed the specified Coefficient of Variation will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template 13 4 1 Export Quality Control Analysis Results To export the results of your Lab Quality Analysis to a MS Excel spreadsheet click the Export Results button and enter a filename for your exported data Generate QC Results 495 496 Chapter 13 Quality Control Plotting The plotting component in HydroGeo Analyst allows users to create hydrochemistry and statistical plots of data stored in the HydroGeo Analyst database The plotting provides the following features Create Time Series X Y plots using data from data queries Display X
61. ES epth Point W Field Props Water Level Monitoring Point IV Screen_ID E Examination Event IV date IV time Table relationships Y depth_to_water_level IV Dry_indicator_Yes_No V Comments IV Mining Exploration V Geophysics IV Well History FT User Category H A Primary key Foreign key screen_id station screen_id station station station pa settings ame ater Leve x40b 37 i AE Last Change 07 27 2004 2 04 42 PM E mE In this example the Water Level table is child to the screen and station tables NOTE The Template Manager does not allow changing the units for a primary key field If this is necessary you must first break the table relationship 5 3 2 Modifying Fields and View Settings For any selected table the Template Manager provides the necessary interface to specify the field properties An interface similar to that shown below is displayed whenever a field is selected in the database browser 194 Chapter 5 Template Manager Template Editor sample a E 10 x Environmental y x Tes ad m Use as project default Database structure Field Settings Description a Description a M Database Settings 4 Geologic Description W Lithology Field name IV from soil_type F Donot allow duplicate values V to i
62. ESRI Point shapefile shp e ESRI Text shapefile shp These are Annotation Layers meaning that they can be used to draw various shapes or labels text on your map project The new map layer will use the projection system of the current map project After entering a filename for the layer the new map layer will be created then placed in the Layer Manager and added to the current Map Window HINT For easy maintenance it is suggested that the shapefiles be kept in the same folder as the current map project By default Map projects are created in the Map sub folder of the current Project folder Shapefile Provides options for opening a map layer The Map Manager is able to open any shapefile that has a projection system already assigned to it These shapefiles include all types of ESRI shapefiles polygons lines points and text Once a map layer is opened it will appear in the Layer Manager and 1s added to the current Map Window If the shapefile is not in the same projection datum as the map project the Map Manager will transform its coordinates based on the defined geotransformation settings To define the geotransformation settings go to Settings Config Geotransformation Please See Config Geotransformations on page 310 Surface Provides options for importing 3D surface layers The following surface files are supported e Surfer grid grd version 6 and 7 e DEM DEM e ESRI ASCII asc e Text txt
63. Editor Top ofLayerT Topography Topography Layer Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer gt Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer e Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer AS P xXx 2 Save Cancel 53 Help o II In the Model Layers dialog there are four columns e Order Layer order from top to bottom read only e Name Defines the layer name e Description Defines layer description e Pattern Defines line properties for the model layer In this dialog specify the total number of model layers and the properties for each layer Layers will be ordered from top to bottom the first layer will always be Top of Layer 1 i e Ground surface followed by Bottom of Layer 1 Bottom of Layer 2 and so forth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer i e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer excluding the top layer Additional model layers may be inserted at any location at any time Press the h Add button to add a new model layer The new layer will be added ABOVE the currently selected layer e Press the Y Delete button to remove the selected model layer e To edit an existing layer press the Edit button or double click on the row containing this layer Description of Menu Items 339 Each model layer does not need to appear in all cross sections NOTE The Model Laye
64. HydroGeo Analyst and is ideally suited for analyzing and presenting the spatial orientation of your groundwater or borehole project data Some of the key features of the Map Manager are listed below Import vector maps into a map project Import BaseMap Layers to the Map Project DXF Raster and Shapefile formats including high resolution MrSid image files Georeference and import raster image maps Display Station Groups or Data Queries from the HydroGeo Analyst project as a Map Layer in the Map Project Edit map layers labels order style visibility Draw and edit a point line polygon or text on a map with Annotation tools Create contour color shade and zebra maps of a desired data set Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields Select stations using a rectangle polygon circle line or a single point Create new station groups with stations selected in the map project Send a Map view to the Report Editor Export Map view as Raster images Create a legend for the Map Project Turn layers on off and set their properties using Layer Manager Define locations for cross section lines View Statistics for selected data or station group layers Min Max Sum Standard Deviation Mean Label and symbol renderer allows for creating color ramps gradients shading etc based on specified station data Line measurement tool allows for measuring the distance between two points on the map project 255 3 1 About the Int
65. HydroGeo Analyst must be installed on your hard disk before you can start to use the software Please read the section on system requirements at the beginning of this section to ensure that your system meets the requirements before you start installing the software Place the CD into your CD ROM drive and the initial installation screen should load automatically Once loaded an installation interface with several different tabs will be presented Please take the time to explore the installation interface as there 1s information concerning other Waterloo Hydrogeologic products our worldwide distributors technical support consulting training and how to contact us From the Installation tab you may choose from the following two buttons e HydroGeo Analyst User s Manual e HydroGeo Analyst 4 0 Installation The User s Manual button will display a PDF copy of the manual which requires the Adobe Reader to view If you do not have the Adobe Reader a link has been created in the interface to download the appropriate software for free Installing HydroGeo Analyst 13 The Installation button will initiate the installation of the software on your computer HydroGeo Analyst must be installed on your hard disk in order to run Please read the section on hardware requirements at the beginning of this section to ensure that your system meets the requirements before you start installing the software Ensure that you have administrative rights fo
66. LAN which has a MS SQL Server 2005 Express installation or WHI SQL Express If you do not have a network connection only your computer name will appear in the list of servers e g Computer_Name WHI Choose a server from the Server list at the top of the dialog After the Server is selected HG Analyst will automatically scan the Server for valid SQL databases These databases will then appear in the combo box beside Database If there is an integrated login for the server check the box beside Windows NT Integrated Authorization If a unique password and ID are required de select this option and enter the Windows User Name and Password for the Server computer This will allow HG Analyst to automatically log on to the Server each time you modify the database residing on the specified machine Note If you cannot see your local WHI instance of SQL Express when creating a new project or opening an existing project please refer to 15 7 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s for some troubleshooting suggestions Next select a Database on this Server Database combo box To create a new database select Create New Database from this list Enter a name for the database in the window shown below then click OK Using the Project Manager 169 Database name E e x Hame OF Cancel E Help Next button in the lower right corner of the Project Wizard window to proceed HydroGeo Analyst w
67. Level Management 159 4 1 4 Group Properties The UALM allows you to set permissions to the various modules in HydroGeo Analyst through the Group Properties To load these options e Select Groups from the tree view in the main UALM window e Click on the P Add button to add a new Group or e Click on the Edit button to edit the properties for a selected Group When there is no HGA project loaded the Group Properties dialog for Application Level objects will appear Group Properties Marne Test Description Enter description here Creation Date 2005 11 21 09 48 37 Privileges Database Project User Access Level OF Cancel When a project is open the Group Properties dialog for Project Level objects will be displayed as shown below 160 Chapter 4 Project Manager Group Properties Mame Sample Description Creation Date 20054 1 21 11 06 50 Privileges ovess eeoue vine ooe reso atom fe E 30 View D D Backup Database Borehole Logs DO Charts D Cross Sections D Crosstab D Data Export Data Import Environmental List Editor Manual Data Entry Maps Maternal Specificatt Project Properties Quality Control Queres Reporte Restore Database Template Manager Saas one OF Cancel The Name and Description for the Group can be defined by the administrator the Creation Date is a read only field that is filled automatically by HGA the t
68. Manager e Cross Section Editor e 3D Explorer HydroGeo Analyst comes with several prepared report templates for most database schemas The first two report types listed above can be created through HydroGeo Analyst s main interface while the remaining types are created only while using the respective modules of HydroGeo Analyst The following few sections present detailed descriptions on creating each report type 11 1 1 Creating Reports in HydroGeo Analyst Main Window The main interface of HydroGeo Analyst allows you to create reports in one of the following two ways e From a Grid create a report with the data in the selected grid e From a selected Data Query create a report using the results of a query Creating Reports 417 Creating Reports from a Data Grid Follow the directions below to create a report containing a data grid e Select the desired grid in HydroGeo Analyst for example select the Stations List grid or select the desired table e Press the Print button from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The fields in the selected grid will be added to the report designer and the ADO data control is autom
69. PEST ASP Visual PEST ASP combines the powerful parameter estimation capabilities of PEST ASP with the graphical processing and display features of WinPEST Visual PEST ASP can be used to assist in data interpretation model calibration and predictive analysis by optimizing model parameters to fit a set of observations This popular estimation package achieves model independence through its capacity to communicate with a model through its input and output files Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst is the most comprehensive and yet easy to use environmental data management system providing data validation analysis and visualization The HydroGeo Analyst package integrates a list of flexible and customizable database structures used around the world complimented by state of the art tools for data interpretation statistical analysis GIS mapping data charting and two and three dimensional visualizations For most environment related projects whether they are contaminated sites or municipal water supply projects there is often an abundance of data that has been collected over the years How many times have you had to sift through several paper reports for that one piece of information when compiling monthly summaries on a project Can you be sure that you have not misplaced a report or failed to mention an important piece of data The HydroGeo Analyst package addresses these and many other needs in the industry The system
70. Panel does not appear on the screen click View Navigation tools from the top menu bar Alternately the Navigation Panel can be loaded by clicking the sg Hide Navigation Tools button located on the top toolbar The Navigation tools panel contains several tabs e The Rotate tab controls the rotation of the 3D image around the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e The Shift tab controls the location of the 3D image along the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e The Light Position tab controls the location of the light source for the 3D image e The Time tab allows you to adjust the animation time when viewing Plumes The Plume Browser tab is used when displaying Plumes and provides a summary view of plume data using planar slices or isosurfaces Rotating the Image The Slider Buttons are used to rotate the display window along the selected axis or shift the view within Display Window The X axis is oriented horizontally left and right across the Display Window Y axis is oriented vertically up and down the Display Window and the Z axis is oriented into and out of the Display Window 360 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer The image orientation and location can also be changed by right clicking anywhere in the 3D Display window and selecting one of the following options w Shift Rotate Screen and 7 Rotate Model and Y e The Shift option allows translation of the map region in the plane of the screen by cl
71. Sample Applications I Import MON data 116 Import Reports from MS Access 427 Importing Data 201 Choose a Data Source 201 How to Map and Match Fields 207 Station Related Settings 210 Validation and Report 213 Installation 13 L Lab Quality Example 492 LAS Import 110 Layers Create Intersection 277 List Editor 143 Creating a List 144 Editing a List 147 M Manage Databases 137 Map Manager Display Data Tables 290 Graticule 309 Import Surface Layers 266 Material Specification Editor Changing Soil Classifications 151 Creating a New SCS 150 Modifying and Deleting 151 Material Specifications Editor 149 Modifying and Deleting a Material Specifica tion 151 N New Features in v 3 0 4 New Projects Build Connection String 170 Create Project Dependent Tables 173 Select Server and Database 169 Selecting the Database template for your project 174 Set Database Environment 168 Set Project Properties and Location 175 O OnLine Help 16 Open database from Backup 109 Opening a Report Template 426 P Parameter Query Reports 420 Plot Settings 506 Plots Adding Lines 513 Data source 501 How to add Plots 501 Saving and Exporting 514 Saving plot template 515 Plume Browser 363 Plume Display Settings 374 Plume generation Data source 133 Post Data 128 Printing Limitations 416 Project Database Environment 168 Define Project Information 175 Select Template and Create Project Tables 173 Project Properties 123 Project Wizard
72. Sampling category soil_samples table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below Data Transfer System Import o x St ep 2 Data M appin g Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list j In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheet y Soi Sampling y soil_samples y Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Type Conditions Type Y station_name Y STRING station LONG Y sys_sample_code STRING sys_sample_code STRING L sample_name STRING Y start_depth DOUBLE Wo o S start_depth DOUBLE m V end_depth DOUBLE m y end_depth DOUBLE m Y sample_date DATESTAN sample_date DATESTAMP L collection_quarter STRING L comment STRING L chain_cust STRING L company STRING po composite STRING po X composite_desc STRING L X delivery STRING L X parent STRING L sent_date DATESTAMP E rec_date DATESTAMP L samp_matrix STRING L samp_reason STRING E samp_technique STRING E sample_class STRING E sample_type STRING Li z sampler STRING m source STRING x CO Requires a unit to be selected O Required field Foreignkey O Linked Fields Total of records 125 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Under Destination Soil sampling fo
73. Save As button saves the current borehole log plot with a new name Add button adds a new group column or plot entities depending on the currently active node Columns may be a scale interval lithology plot well construction or other features Delete button deletes the selected group column or plot series Refresh button updates the design and displays the preview of the current borehole log plot for the selected borehole Zoom in button allows you to select an interval to zoom in to and display a magnified portion of the BHLP Zoom out button returns to the original BHLP view 12 2 BHLP Columns The borehole log plotter supports a number of column types that can be presented on a typical borehole log plot A borehole log plot in HydroGeo Analyst consists of a set of desired columns selected from the list of supported column types The plot does not save the data being displayed and as such avoids data duplication A borehole log plot is generated in real time using a BHLP template and data for the selected borehole s 444 For each column displayed on the borehole log plot it is possible to Specify the column type image text plot symbol scale as explained below Select one or more fields of data to display in the column Select the start and end depth for the data being displayed Set the property of the column depending on the selected data type For Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter example if a depth depende
74. Some of the entities have been selected for you When the new Well Construction column appears in the BHLP Designer it will display Lithology Drilling Casing Screen Annular Filling and Scale data for the selected station 1f it has been entered into your database Other entities such as pump locations have to be entered manually To specify the desired entity expand the Well Construction node and locate the specific sub node Use the combo boxes provided to set the data table and fields Settings The Well Construction column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Well Construction node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Columns 457 The Well Construction frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by selecting the Options button see page 447 General x Well Constructia e visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology water level Reduc_4 Wisibilit e Drilling details Iv Water Levels Iv Casings details e Scale Screen details e Pumps e Lithology Reducer Flush Mount Help Apply OF Cancel The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the various components of the
75. T eR TERT THES E OO VI 25 REPOL Sadie a ao pics 25 BIEN TOS EA AE E E A EN EO ATTEN E EA EAE EA 25 B r nole LOS ona a a a a a a ae as 25 PIO a A A EA AA R 25 2 Getting Started AAA AU Terms and Nota aaa ins 28 Creatino a NeW Project sitiar dai anio A a SEE iii 28 Step le Set Database Environment iecicui 30 Selec E SEL VEL and Database Os 30 Step z Create Project Dependent Tables urnas sillin cn 31 Step 3 Set Project Properes and LOCO i 32 Data Manageme y isis AA PP PR OA 34 Entero Data Manually lt a A audaba Auda teatuean je iadaadntestar eames 35 Example Creaune a New SLOAN 35 Example Entering Lithology Data noelia 38 Example Entering Well Construction Data ooooonnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnos 40 Example Enterino Montos Event Data di a ao 42 Importing Data using the Data Transfer System DTS 0oooccccnnncccnnnonononocnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnononnnncnnos 44 Example mporn Stations Trom an Excel Pile aida aid 44 Example Importine Litholosy Data eee 51 Example Importing Soil Chemistry Data oooooonnnnnncnnnononononononononononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 54 Example Enportine Water Level Data ni Ai 60 Ereatine Station CLOUDS aii 66 Example Creaune a Slaton GTO les 67 Viewme Borehole Log PIots sec ccussisvecccecsssesevatesscavccesostvages saoao nieo oa aseensa e EE Toas 68 OUCEVING the DataDaSt sssrin an r E NE 69 Example Querying the Database ud aaa 70 Recallin
76. Transfer System Above the right grid the Filter controls can manipulate what stations will be displayed in the destination right grid By default all stations with the same name will be displayed However you may select any field an operation e g gt Like Is Not and a criteria that will be used to retrieve stations from the destination This feature allows you to locate Stations that may be already in the database but with names that were misspelled or entered incorrectly e g MW 1 MW_1 MW1 etc 6 1 4 Data Validation Report and Finalizing the Import The last step in the DTS involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with the data Data Transfer System Import Step 4 Data Validation Errors Warnings ErorlD Description Field Name of records Preview Latitude 2 GB02 3 GB03 4 GBO4 5 GB05 6 GB06 7 GBO 8 GBOS 9 GB09 10 GB10 11 GB11 12 GB12 13 GB13 14 GB14 15 GB15 16 GB16 17 GB17 18 GB18 19 GB19 16801 80 5547287617745 80 555419821155 80 5563705286688 80 5579316744066 80 5592272673159 80 5605248334986 80 5616525616792 80 5635559603042 80 564939432078 80 5660664890569 80 5668473471 792 80 5545485331505 80 5557312812136 80 5565262
77. Transfer System Import of x z Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list Step 2 Data M ore In each source table stations must be identified by an ID Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheet ind Description station Map source fields to destination fields Conditions unknowr unknowr m m qT oc depth DOUBLE 3 CO Requires a unit to be selected C Required field Foreign key O Linked Fields Total of records 15 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Select the appropriate source field from the list In the example shown above the appropriate field is Elev since it should be mapped to the field Elevation in the Station destination table Select the appropriate Unit for the field if applicable Fields that are shaded orange require a unit selection NOTE The units for station X Y co ordinates will be defined in Step 3 of the import routine Check the Use box beside the appropriate field to include this field for importing Repeat this for other fields until all necessary fields have been mapped to fields in the Destination table NOTE As a minimum one field in the source table must be mapped to the primary key field in the destination table The primary key field is shaded in green and is typically the first field in th
78. Unita Inches Centimeters Cancel The Grid Settings section allows you to modify the grid appearance of the designer window You can set the visibility of the grid by enabling disabling the Show Grid checkbox Selecting the Align Controls to Grid checkbox will automatically snap controls to the nearest grid column Set the number of Grid columns and Grid rows by using the appropriate vertical scroll boxes You can change the units of the ruler that appears above the designer window by clicking on either the Inches or Centimeters radio button Report Settings 415 Report Settings ge Moral Heading Headings Headings Heading4 StrikeThrough False Mew Delete ForeColor Horizontal Alignment Lett Vertical Alignment Top Cancel The Styles section allows you to create remove and modify text styles which can then be selected from the Text Style dropdown box and applied to your text controls Text styles are useful for applying many text characteristics font size bold italic underline etc to your text in just one simple task Click the New and Delete button to create a new style and delete a current style respectively The Font Color and Misc settings in the right frame allow you to set and modify the text characteristics of the selected style 11 4 1 Printing Limitations Although the Report Designer provides a detailed interface for customizing reports and templates it is limited
79. User Access Management component and there is no project opened then you will be able to modify the options for managing Application Level objects If you load the User Access Management component and a project is currently opened then you will be able to modify options for managing Project Level objects Chapter 4 Project Manager In both cases the following main window will appear User Access Level Management i Ioj x x 00 g A Users Restricted Users Users have read only access to the objects Administrators Administrators The UALM window contains the tools for managing users and groups The left side of the window displays a tree with the available Groups and Users The main section of the window displays a table containing Name and Descriptions for the selected Group or User In the upper left corner you will find a toolbar with several context sensitive buttons When Groups is highlighted in the tree view the controls apply to Groups When Users is highlighted in the tree view the controls apply to Users e Use the Add button to add a new Group or User e Use the Edit button to edit the selected Group or User e Use the X Delete button to delete the selected Group or User e Use the Set Password button to set the password for a User this control is only enabled when a User is selected in the tree view e Use the Help button to load the Help details User Access
80. Well Construction column Drilling BHLP Settings i x E ES BHLP Well Constructio a W Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Wi aber level Reduc_4 E E Plot 7 Show Width 8 Color Line Style Straight Straight e Show f Use Image Use Color Help Apply OF Cancel The Drilling tab allows you to define the appearance settings for the annular filling Use the Border frame to set the Visibility border Width and border Color The Line Style dropdown box allows you to select between a Rough irregular border to a Straight flush border 458 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter BHLP Columns The Filling frame includes a Show checkbox which allows you to set the visibility of the annular filling You can display the annular filling in one of two ways Use Image or Use Color The use image option will use the images defined in the List Editor to display the filling Otherwise select use color and specify a color from the color box Casing Well Constructio e Visible Customizatia e Show Border olor f Use Default Color El Use Material Image Color Use Material Ima e Tiled REE Font z Use Casing Color for Cap J Right Justify J Use Casing Color for Mount E Position Help Apply OF Cancel The Casing Settings frame allows you to define the well casing source color view and order and labe
81. a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for each formation e Description of the geologic formation e The depth and or elevation of each layer e Well construction details casing screens annular fill e Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc e and much more using Data Tables and Query Results For more details please refer to Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter 156 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Project Management Project Management is an essential component of any environmental project HydroGeo Analyst provides the tools you need to manage user access to your projects selecting database schemas and geographical details The first section of this chapter 4 1 User Access Level Management describes tools for managing how users access your HGA projects The second section 4 2 Using the Project Manager describes the process of creating new projects and the options available 4 1 User Access Level Management 4 1 1 Introduction The User Access Level Management UALM component allows protecting both file based data e g model inputs outputs etc as well as database based data e g data stored in HGA The following features are available e Create and manage user groups 1 e create edit delete us
82. a data collection process duplicate samples blank control samples and spiked samples are added to sample sets these samples are sent to a laboratory along with the original field samples to be analyzed in a controlled environment using constant techniques instruments and personnel The objective is to identify any sources of contamination that may originate from the lab analysis and provide some assurance to the client that the data is valid and representative of your site conditions HydroGeo Analyst has integrated a Lab Quality Analysis component that allows users to e Define one or more lab quality assessment templates e Analyze Duplicate Spiked and Blank samples e Compare Relative Percent Difference and Coefficient of Variation for Duplicate samples for more details see Check Duplicates Settings on page 489 e Analyze Percent Recovery for Spiked samples for more details see Check Spiked Settings on page 490 e Compare Blank samples to method detection limits for more details see see Check Blanks Settings on page 491 e Execute a Quality analysis on a selected dataset e Display and retrieve assessment results records not meeting assessment criteria will be highlighted e Save assessment results to a MS Excel spreadsheet This chapter is divided into the following sections to help you prepare your data and execute a QC Analysis e Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis on page 486 e Define A
83. access rights For more details on this feature please see Chapter 4 User Access Management X button in the upper right corner to close the User Access Management window The new project will then be created with the necessary tables fields and settings Once this is complete the main HydroGeo Analyst window will appear with the new project as shown below Creating a New Project 33 HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project ES ER a x Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help ea eZzZl ShtxBaAlBORhh BOS Saas in Eg Station Groups J Station List EA Data Query S Station Data H E Plots Loading options Load All Incremental X Borehole Logs If necessary the project settings can be modified at any time by selecting Properties from the Project menu In addition the database view and structure can be modified using the Template Manager For more details see Chapter 5 Template Manager Now that the new project has been created the station data may be entered For instructions on this procedure please continue to the next section 2 2 Data Management 34 There are two options for entering data into the new project e Manually in the grids OR e Importing from other sources using the Data Transfer System DTS To facilitate data entry there are two tabs available in the HydroGeo Analyst window located directly below t
84. activated only if the cursor 1s located within a grid and there has been a change made to the grid The Te button in the toolbar performs the same function Filter by Value The Filter By Value option will locate and display only those records which contain matching values for a selected cell in the selected column Those records which do not meet the criterion will be temporarily removed from the station list Only a value from a single cell may be selected at once The EF button in the toolbar performs the same function All filtered records can be restored using the Show All menu item By filtering records based on a defined criterion 1t will be easier to focus on a sub set of stations and create specific reports plots and cross sections The Filter menu items are only available 1f the cursor is located within a grid Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Hide Selected Rows Use the Hide Rows option to hide all records which are selected in a grid all non selected records will remain in the display All hidden records can be restored using the Show All menu item The button in the toolbar performs the same function Invert Selection Use this command to select all records that are not selected and de select all records that are currently selected The ES button in the toolbar performs the same function Show All Use the Show All menu command to show all records in the database this will restore all hidden records S
85. added additional users with permissions to create projects then login now with the appropriate credentials The Project Wizard will then appear The Project Wizard contains three steps each step appearing in a new window with the various settings for a new project These include e Step 1 Set Database Environment In this window specify the server and database to be used for the HG Analyst project and the connection string if necessary e Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template e Step 3 Set Project Properties Location and Soil Settings In this window specify the project name project folder project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project The project wizard is designed in a sequential fashion after defining the necessary inputs in each window press the Next gt button to proceed The Next button will only become activated after the necessary fields have been defined These required fields are indicated by an asterisk Using the Project Manager 167 4 2 1 Step 1 Set Database Environment 168 The Set Database Environment window shown below is the first step in the Project Wizard and provides the controls needed to select a MS SQL Server and create select a database for the new project _ 5 x Step 1 Set Database Environment Select Server and Database SRV
86. and hold the right mouse button to pan across the map Also you can use the mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out while defining the cross section line At the end point of the line double click the left mouse button to finish This will launch the dialog shown below Defining a Cross Section Line 313 CrossSection Line Hame ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here OF Cancel e For each cross section line specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance 1s projected out perpendicular to the cross section line Click OK to accept the Line attributes e If necessary selected stations can be deselected by clicking on each of them while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key e If necessary extra stations may be added to the selection by clicking on one or more stations while holding down lt Ctrl gt key NOTE Once a cross section line has been created stations can still be added to or removed from the line by selecting the line then right clicking and choosing the Add Remove Stations option Stations can then be added removed by clicking on the desired stations In order to use this feature the station layers on which the cr
87. any HG Analyst database table The DTS allows importing data only for selected fields in the selected destination table however some tables have required fields such as ID from to etc which must be mapped in order for each record to be imported To load the DTS for importing data Project Import Data from the main menu The first window of the DTS will be displayed as shown below Data Transfer System Import E y i E Of xj Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name y gt g Description TS package Select data source o Specify import file name The Data Transfer System DTS allows you to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access and other databases through a three to four step process In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations The figure shown above depicts the interface that is provided to specify the data source for importing 6 1 1 Choose a Data Source The first step in the DTS Import process is to select a data package and the data source file Data Transfer Package DTP A Data Transfer Package DTP is designed to store all settings of des
88. appear in the project browser once it is saved 11 1 3 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section 422 Follow the directions below to create a report containing one cross section created in the Cross Section Editor e Start the Cross Section Editor and open a Cross Section e Show hide the desired interpretation layers in the cross section all visible layers will appear in the report e Press the Print button 4 from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The report editor allows you to either create a new report for the current cross section or add it to an existing one If you choose to add the current cross section to an existing report the report editor adds the new cross section to the report As such multiple cross sections can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current cross section to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each cross section 1s created with its associated legends and key map indicating the Chapter 11 The Report Editor cross section location in plan view The cross section can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime report designer As in the previous report types the report will appear in the project browser once
89. be recalculated dependent on the location of the neighborhood Choose Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file if the mean is not constant and has to be read from an external file Select Kriging with an external drift when only the trend component needs to be estimated and not the residual component where the variable is assumed to be the sum of the trend and the residual component This option is also referred to as Universal Kriging For most situations Ordinary Kriging is recommended and is the default option The SK Mean defines the global mean of the data if Stationary simple Kriging is performed The Drift term defines the drift components if Kriging with external drift is performed Nine drift components are possible e X linear drift in x e Y linear drift in y e Z linear drift in z e Xq quadratic drift in x e Yq quadratic drift in y e Zq quadratic drift in z e XY cross quadratic drift in xy e XZ cross quadratic drift in xz e YZ cross quadratic drift in yz Appendices The Variable Trend Estimate allows the user to choose between estimating the variable or the trend The default is Estimate variable The Nugget constant quantifies the sampling and assaying errors in the data In a Variogram plot the nugget constant is the y intercept value The Use variograms option allows the user to select the type of variogram to be used The Variogram models available include Spherical
90. be defined To do so e Select Tools gt Model Layers from the main menu This will load the Model Layers dialog as shown below Top of Lavery Topography Topography Layer S Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer a Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer x 7 Save Cancel E Help o o o In this dialog you can specify the total number of model layers and set properties for each layer In addition the layers can be numbered in a particular order Layers will be numbered starting with 1 for the top most layer and increase with depth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer 1 e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer Once the layers have been defined additional layers may be inserted at any location at any time Please refer to the section Model Layers section on page 338 for more details Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 347 348 Drawing Model Interpretation Layers Before starting to draw model interpretation layers please ensure that you have defined the model layer settings explained in the previous section You will see that the top of layer 1 ground surface is drawn in automatically for each new cross section This layer can be modified by moving it through its existing vertices adding new vertices at desire
91. can be retrieved later using the Query Builder For more details please see Querying Cross Section Interpretations on page 353 Store Soft Data Points Whenever a layer intersects with a station at only one point 1t could be because of one of the following reasons e The layer truly touches the well at only one location e g pinch out or e There is no contact with the well In either case the following options are available e Consider the actually intersecting point as the top elevation and insert NULL for both the thickness and bottom elevation e Extend the depth of the station fictitiously within the bounds of the cross section to determine the location of the other point These extensions are known as Soft Data Points If this point can not be found within the bound the layer will be considered to be a zero thickness layer with thickness of NULL Save All Contacts Some stations may be crossed by a layer but may not be involved in the interpretation Description of Menu Items 337 e g bad wells or data in those wells did not make sense etc and as such the following options are available e Consider all intersection points as valid contacts this is the option Save All Contacts e Only store contacts where there are vertices within the well e g user snapped to intervals or clicked within a well and created a vertex To do this disable the option Save All Contacts Limitations Although the cross sec
92. can be dealing with hundreds or thousands of stations Likewise for an individual station there may be hundreds or thousands of records common examples are geophysical logs downhole data or water levels recorded in a data logger Reading this data from the database can be a time consuming task In the lower left corner of the HGA main window below the Project Browser you will see the following settings Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Loading options Load All amp Incremental 1000 El MX low 2 ID 2 With the Data Loading Options it is possible to load station groups and data in individual tables in smaller increments The following options are available e If the Load All option is selected then all stations will be loaded in the station group e If the Incremental option is selected and a value is defined default 1000 then only the first 1000 stations in the station group will be loaded Click on the Refresh button to load the subsequent increment of stations load an additional 1000 stations etc Currently this feature is implemented only for the station list For tables other than the station list you can use x Stop button to stop the data loading pressing this button will cancel the data loading and display only those records that have were read from the database up to that point 1 6 2 Main Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to most of the features available in Hy
93. cases where the primary key is composed of two or more fields a button is shown in the cell where the foreign key is to be entered and clicking on this button launches a separate dialog similar to the one given below Set Foreign Key In the above dialog a matching field must be provided for each field in the primary key Working With the Template Manager 193 of the current table The selected matching fields will form a foreign key in the child table When entering data into child tables HydroGeo Analyst limits the values for the fields in the foreign key to only those that are present in the primary key of the parent table This is done by using the distinct list of values in the primary key as a pick list All parent tables to the current table if any are listed along with the primary and corresponding foreign keys in the read only grid Table is CHILD to located towards the bottom of the main window An example is shown below Template Manager Demo Of x Environmental y x fh or Use as project default Database structure Table Settings Descriptions Y Descripti ry M ue Database Settings H Geologic Description Talis tse H Well Construction Table name ow_level YP H Soil Testing Global l H Soil Sampling EJES Global Time 4 Monitoring Event E Depth Interval 4 Chemistry_Sample Examination Event H Chemistry_Results seee Point
94. chemical name is benzene you would enter the following SQL statement into the SQL View Preview tab SELECT FROM chem_test_resultsO WHERE chemical_name Benzene e Next click the Execute Query button to display the query results shown below Query Builder xa Station Group Quem e Data Query Select a Query Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining E sploration Geophysics Well History Source Conditio Project k Rows 174 Time O 0 0 31 Design SOL ViewsPreviews WOT 1422 WOT 154 11421956 114841956 WOT 212 2121996 44 01_4 16 416 1996 WOT 694 104941956 Ww 01_ 4 16 416 1996 Ww 01_8797 WOT 1422 WOT 14 104941956 11421956 114841956 WOT 212 24121996 44 01_4 16 4 16 7996 WOT 69 WOT 1422 WOT 154 104941956 11421996 114841956 WOT 212 2121996 44 01_4 16 471677996 WOT _ 694 WOT 12 WOT 154 104941956 11421956 114841956 WOT 212 21213996 select from chem_test_resulteO where chemical_name Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene Benzene 15 ug L ug L ug L ug L ug L ug L ug L 55 ug L ug L ug L ug L 20 ug L FO ug L 100 ug L 120 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 100 ug L 5 x Station name sie
95. contain only the required table for an HG Analyst database This is the Station Table with the following fields e Name e ID e X Coordinate e Y Coordinate e Elevation e TOC Top of Casing If you select one of the existing Database structures you will see a list of the tables included with this template and the corresponding fields under the Database Structure Preview Take a few moments to review this database structure Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard Creating Projects in Existing Databases At the top of this window there is a list of Projects in the selected Database This option is only available if an existing database was selected in Step 1 If so you may choose from the available HydroGeo Analyst projects on this database and select a database template from an existing project If a NEW database was created in Step 1 the projects picklist will be inactive Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard The database settings may be modified AFTER the project has been created using the Template Manager For more details please see Chapter 5 Template Manager The next step is to define the Project Properties and Location settings 4 2 3 Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location The Set Project Properties and Location window as shown below contains general project information such as project name folder location and so
96. data for all stations except OW 1 are to be imported the criteria should be provided as lt gt OW 1 or OW 1 NOTE For the equals operator you must enter a double equal sign with no spaces ie The DTS understands the syntax described in the following table Bere pow CS Rules Spaces are allowed before and after the operators For example lt 10 Importing Data using the DTS 209 gt 10 10 note that the equal sign is two equal signs together with no spaces in between However spaces between operators is not allowed For example lt 10 is correct lt 10 is not correct 40 is not correct there is a space between the two signs Those records not satisfying the import criterion will be highlighted in yellow under the preview window and a warning message will be shown at the top In order to filter these records select the corresponding warning and click on the Reject button just below the control that lists warnings and errors See section 6 1 4 on page 213 for details 6 1 3 Station Related Settings If the data to be imported contains information for new stations some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed 1f data is imported to the Stations table Data Transfer System Import i J iol x Step 3 Station Related Settings Coordinate system
97. database template e Project Information In this window specify the project name project folder and clients e Project Settings Specify the project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project For more details please refer to Chapter 4 2 Template Manager The Template Manager provides tools to modify the HydroGeo Analyst database structure and define user level views The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and displays database and user settings Some of the features in the Template Manager are available only for database administrators referred to as Power Users in the context of HydroGeo Analyst These features include all operations that alter the database schema and table and field designs Features that are accessible only to Power Users include e Adding deleting tables and or fields defining primary keys defining relationships between tables e Save user templates as a new database schema structure e Export user templates to a stand alone XML file 152 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users e Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats e All features that are available to all users For more details please refer to Chapter 5 Template Manager 3 Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS provides an easy to use interface for importing data int
98. databases since the data cannot be recovered once deleted and there is no undo option unless you have taken a backup Deleting a database does not remove all the files that are related to the projects using the deleted database NOTE Databases may be removed only from the WHI SQL Express instance Databases from other instances of SQL Express or on a SQL Server cannot be removed through HGA Pumping Test Analysis Use this feature to analyze pumping test data in AquiferTest For this feature you must have one or more data queries that contains the required fields for a pumping test analysis namely e Well Name e X Co ordinate for both Pumping Wells and Observation Wells e Y Co ordinate for both Pumping Wells and Observation Wells Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Pumping Start Pumping End Pumping Rate Observed time Observed depth to water level Additional fields may also be mapped and the data sent to AquiferTest these include e Well Elevation e Screen Diameter e Borehole Diameter The following section describes these settings Aquifer Test Bi E i 101 x AquiferT est Settings Pumping Wels Pumping Rate Observation wells Units Side Map meters X Dimensions meters y Time sec v Discharge m 3 sec y Transmissivity m sec v Pressure Pa ig Project information Project Name Project No o Client o Location o Category Map Pumping rate Hist
99. dialog to view an on line help for this component ee Se Click OK once the Data Link settings have been defined to return to the Project Wizard The Connection String will now appear in the Database Environment window An example is shown below Project Wizard il E Step 1 Set Database Environment C Select Server and Database The Project Manager allows you to create a database for your ad a Ae project on a SQL Server of your Windows Integrated Buthoreation choice through a four step Server In this first step select a SQL Server on which your project s database will be created and select create the database on that server geesosscsevessesesescosessscessessecsseeceseseccsoseey Recececesceseeescncecssosescsscesseseseetorsceoeseueneee Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security SSPI Persist Security Info False nitial Catalog T est Data Source SRY q Next gt Cancel EJ Help Next to proceed Chapter 4 Project Manager HG Analyst will then test the connection to the server If a database was selected in the Data Link Properties then HG Analyst will scan and validate the database to see if the required tables exist If no database was selected then there will be a prompt to define a name for the new database as shown below Database name a x Hame OF Cancel E Help type Name of the new database OK For new databases HG An
100. display and manipulation of multiple plot windows in the viewer window Number of columns controls how many columns will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots Number of rows controls how many rows will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots 500 Chapter 14 Plotting For example 2 columns X 2 rows means that 4 plots may be displayed simultaneously in the viewer window Spacing width controls the amount of space between each plot in the horizontal direction Spacing height controls the amount of space between each plot in the vertical direction 14 2 Adding Plots The data source for the plots must originate from a Data Query before you create a plot you must build and execute a data query using the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields for a time series plot The following are required fields for the Time Series plots and as such must be present in your data query e Sample Date or Time e Value for the parameter of interest e g water level chemical concentrations temperature pH conductivity etc The following fields are not required but are recommended for plot and series grouping and to take advantage of additional plot options e Station ID e Station Name e Chemical Parameter name e Measured parameter units e Non detect ND factor e Method detection limit MDL e Uncertainly factor e
101. drawn line and click OK All stations within the buffer distance of the line will become selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol The Buffer distance extends out perpendicular to the line location All All stations on the current Map Layer will be selected None All stations that are selected on the current Map Layer will be deselected NOTE Once selected you cannot deselect individual stations Add to Station Group Provides an option to add the selected stations to a HydroGeo Analyst station group Using one of the Selection tools mentioned above select one or more stations then choose this menu item from the Select menu and the following dialog will appear li Select Station Group Joj x Please select Station Group OF Cancel Stations can only be added to an existing station group Delete from Station Group Remove the selected stations from a HydroGeo Analyst station group The stations will be removed from the station group map layer currently selected and active in the layer 306 Chapter 8 Map Manager manager 8 2 7 Settings Cross Section This dialog allows modifying the display properties of features that intersect with cross section lines when viewing a cross section in the Cross Section Editor Selecting this option launches a dialog similar to that shown in the following figure The dialog makes a list of all line type layers available for selection In
102. enables you to create a project specific database or enhance and build upon your existing database It can collect all of your previous data and reports and consolidate them into a powerful relational database system that can be queried and referenced with ease HydroGeo Analyst also referred to as HG Analyst or HGA operates as a desktop application based on Microsoft SQL Server technology The package supports multiple user levels for controlled data management with structured access privileges for setting up project data structures checking out data to working sub projects and submitting new or modified data Sample Applications Typical applications for HydroGeo Analyst include e Regional water well management e Contaminant site inventory e Regulatory compliance e Geologic cross sections e Public access to information Environmental site assessment Monitored natural attenuation Regional aquifer characterization and management Cross boundary data sharing Aquifer vulnerability mapping 1 1 What s New in HydroGeo Analyst The main interface for HydroGeo Analyst has much of the same user friendly look and feel as the previous version but with some significant improvements to features Some of the more significant upgrade features in the latest versions of HydroGeo Analyst are described below 1 1 1 New Features in v 4 0 The following new features are available in v 4 0 Map Manager GIS Detailed legend for layers w
103. figure above In this example the model layer pinches out at the right side of the cross section Editing Model Layers Once the model interpretation layer lines are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or add more vertices To move a vertex e Select the amp Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once on the desired model layer line to activate e Click on the vertices to be moved e Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 351 e Select the Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the line to activate the line e Select the 4 Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location on the line the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Adding Multiple Vertices To insert multiple vertices along a model line follow the steps below e From the layer manager panel enable edit mode for the Model interpretation layers e Select a model interpretation line from the cross section e Right click the line and select Insert Vertices along Line The following dialog will display Insert ertices i x Insert Werticez along the Lin EE m i By distance m DK Cancel 53 Help You can insert multiple vertices in one of the following two ways e By number inserts a specified number of vertices along th
104. for Data False T ag with column collation when possible False E Help For more details on the Project Properties please refer to Chapter 4 Miscellaneous Settings This dialog provides access to project coordinates and the soil classification system HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 123 Print Exit 3 2 2 Edit Copy 124 Miscellaneous Ed Project Location Projection Type Projection Specify the project location and Geographic NAD 1983 UTM Zone 1 x coordinate related settings a one UTM 3 The Soil Specification contains C State Planar Units soil names and patterns meters y which will be used Others mens to visualize your lithology data in borehole log plots and cross sections Project Location Waterloo Ontario Soil Specification DIN 4023 zi Description Demo Database based on the data from a Visual Groundwater rojec x Required Field Gk Cancel Help If necessary the project projection system or the Soil Classification may be changed in this dialog The Print option in the Project menu loads the selected grid into the Report Designer the Print option is activated only if a grid is visible and selected The 5 Print button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details on printing from the Report Designer please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor This menu item will close HydroGeo Analyst and all related window
105. for contaminants can be specified in HGA and must be added to your data query e Highlighting The options are the same as described in Check Duplicates Settings on page 489 Once you have defined the settings for your analysis Template you can create another template by clicking the Add button delete an existing template by clicking the Remove button or accept reject your changes and return to the HGA main program window You are now ready to apply the lab quality template to your data 13 3 Applying a Lab Quality Template NOTE An example of a Lab Quality Data query is available in the HGA Demo project select the C_Lab_ Analysis query in the Queries node and feel free to follow along with the instructions below To apply a Lab Quality Template follow the instructions below e Select and highlight the appropriate Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA Browser e From the main menu click Tools gt Quality Control and select the Perform Lab QC Assessment option the following dialog will appear 492 Chapter 13 Quality Control Select and configure a template for lab quality validation l loj x Lab Quality Templates Template Description Relative Percent Difference lt 20 a Coefficient of Variation lt 10 Percent Recovery gt 90 Blank lt O Kil Data Sources Data Entity Data Source Station ID id Batch Identifiers BatchID Sample ID SamplelD Sample Date Sam
106. fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers start_depth mid_depth end_depth result_comment sample_matrix_code y Conditions Conditions station toc chem_test_resultsO result gt 1000 X Group By List Field Having Function Field Operator Value Operator M Source Condition Project r Basic Close E Help Time 0 0 0 47 Field Name chem_test_resultsO result_value Rows 14 Conditions Advanced Grouping Options NOTE The Query Builder window is context sensitive The window will contain different settings depending on the selected Query type The Query Builder window contains the following items e Display Fields Select the display fields for the query e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to most of the functions in the Query Builder e Query Type Choose from a Station Group Query or a Data Query e Query List Select an existing query from the list e Available Fields Select fields for the query from the tables in the database e Conditions Displays the Query conditions e Source Conditions Select the source options for the query e Advanced Grouping Options Specify grouping and sorting options NOTE These options are available for Data Queries only Chapter 7 Queries 7 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar provides access to most functions of the Query Builder Toolbar buttons are context sen
107. hyperLink left 75 MultiLine True OutputFormat Style Summary Distir SummaryFunc O ddSFSurn Summary Grou Summary Runr 0 ddSRNone Summary Type 0 ddSMNone Tag text STR_MUMNICIFIO top FS SEENA a Custom oe Description of the property This window serves to access the properties of the controls that are present on the report and it contains an orderly list with the names and values of the properties of the objects in the report presented in the first and second column respectively A combo box with the list of objects whose properties can be edited is provided in the upper part of the window Additional information for the selected property is provided at the bottom of this window Designer Advanced Controls and Settings Types of Controls The runtime Report Designer allows you to add several types of controls to your reports These controls range from those that are currently shown on the toolbar to all controls that are present on your computer The types of controls that are provided on the toolbar can be grouped as follows Data Access Controls ADO data control Provides access to the database using information provided to it Only one ADO control can be added to a given report This control can be added to the report by clicking on the Insert ADO Data control icon CHL on the toolbar Chapter 11 The Report Editor Data Display Controls Controls that can be used to display information that is either
108. important to know and select the correct project system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates Coordinate Exclusion Filter The DTS also provides the option to indicate excluded coordinates Excluded coordinates could be coordinates used as place holders in the source file in cases where coordinates are unknown For example the value 9999 may be entered if the X or Y coordinate does not exist or is unknown If this is the case these coordinate values should be entered in the appropriate field In the screen shot shown above the value 9999 is entered for both X and Y coordinates In this case stations with these values will be excluded from the import These coordinates could also represent erroneous coordinates Add Stations to Group Another feature provided in the Settings tab of the DTS is that of grouping new stations as desired The DTS lists all station groups available for the project All newly imported stations will be added to the Project station group by default If selected these stations will also be inserted in one or more of the station groups listed in this tab You can also enter a name of a new station group in the last row and the stations will be inserted to this new group if desired Duplicate Stations Since Stations can use an ID as the unique identifier the DTS allows you to store stations with duplicate names in your database Duplicate Station names are common in larger proj
109. in source Projection type Projection UTM State planar NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N y Geographic Others Ten Coordinate exclusion filter x 99999 0 i 99999 0 Note This step allows you to specify the Add all new stations to coordinate system used in the data source All coordinates will be converted to WGS 1984 for internal use You can also provide missing coordinate indicators if any All new stations will be included in the PROJECT station group These stations could also be added to one or more of the existing station groups You can also use the last row to add a new station group and include these stations in it Boreholes_with_plot_data E O 00 0 on Lo Jn Please check the boxes next to the station group you would like to group these stations in CO Current project O Existing group O New group lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 210 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Projection Settings The DTS requires you to define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HydroGeo Analyst project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HydroGeo Analyst is provided in Chapter 4 See Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location on page 175 NOTE It is
110. information to log on to the server Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password Heer Cane CO Password l Blank password D Slow saving password 3 6 Select the database on the server F Attach a database file as a database name o Usima the tilername Test Connection Cancel Help The Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box provides all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports You also can open this dialog box by double clicking a universal data link udl file in Windows Explorer The Data Link Properties dialog box contains four tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three tabs depend upon the Provider selected The Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access NOTE HG Analyst currently supports only a Microsoft OLE DB provider for MS SQL Server as specified in the Provider tab Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to it using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you sel
111. it will appear at the top of the Layer Manager panel and as a result will hide the Boreholes station group layer Therefore the new map layer must be moved down To do this Using the mouse drag and drop the SiteMap layer onto the Boreholes layer After doing this the Boreholes station group layer will be displayed on top of the site map as seen in the figure below 80 Chapter 2 Getting Started Propet Laver Got Too Wee Select Settings Me l TOLECELLASF ILEESE r EEEE FE E At this time feel free to experiment with the properties of the Boreholes layer by modifying the symbol properties Adding Labels To add labels to the Boreholes Layer gt Renderer from the main menu of the Map Project window The Renderers dialog will appear B J K A a Background Symbo W Show Background O E Cancel L Add button to add a new renderer and the following dialog will appear with the available Renderer types Mapping the Data 81 Graduated Renderer Value Renderer OF Cancel Label Renderer Se OK and the following dialog will appear Label Renderer Hame Field Mame M Allow Duplicates Font W Spline Text Sample Text e Flip OF Cancel type Label for the Name Name for the Field Name OK to close the Renderer type window OK again to close the Renderers window The stations will now be identified with the appropriate label 2 5 3 Cre
112. it 1s saved 11 1 4 Creating a Report Containing 3D Images A report for your fence diagrams and 3D views can be created by following the directions below e Start the 3D Explorer and open a 3D project file 3XS or load a 3D project from the project browser in HG Analyst e Create the desired 3D view e Press the Print button je from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for your current fence diagram or add it to an existing report If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your Fence Diagram project s can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current fence diagram to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each view of your Fence Diagram is created with its associated legends As with the previous report types the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved 11 1 5 Creating a Borehole Log Report A report for your borehole log plots can be created by following the directions below e Select one or more stations from the Station List e Select then open a BHLP template from the Borehole Logs node of the Proje
113. l Help Miscellaneous Settings This dialog provides access to project coordinates and soil classification system Project Location m Projection Typ Projection Specify the project location and NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N coordinate related settings one e UTM 7 The Soil Specification contains ea Units soil names and pattems meters y which will be used Others aca to visualize your lithology data in C Geographic borehole log plots and cross sections Project Location Waterloo Ontario Soil Specification DIN 4023 ES El Description Demo Database based on the data from a Visual Groundwater Project x Required Field Cancel E Help Using the Project Manager 179 If the projection system is changed existing station coordinates will be converted into the new projection system If the Soil Classifications System is changed existing cross sections with defined geology will be impacted It may be necessary to reassign geological soil types with the new soil classification system and recreate the cross sections 180 Chapter 4 Project Manager Template Manager The Template Manager is one of the most powerful tools provided with HydroGeo Analyst It allows you to edit the structure of your database as well as set an unlimited number of user level views of the database The Template Manager provides the tools to e Add delete tables e Add delete fields e Alter the proper
114. line for a cross section Note A surface layer can only be defined for a cross section line when the cross section is being created in the Map component of Map Manager Please refer to the Surface section on page 266 for information on how to import a surface layer into a Map Project Also please see the Create Cross Section section on page 302 for information on how to create a cross section When a surface layer is present in a map project you will be prompted to select a surface layer when creating your cross section line The following dialog will display Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Select Surface xj OF Cancel This dialog contains all of the surface layers currently present in your map project Select a surface from the dropdown list box and click Ok to create the cross section Be sure to select a surface layer that covers the full extent of the cross section line Leave this dialog blank if you do not wish to use a surface layer 9 4 2 Geologic Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing interpretation layers that assist in defining the geology sand clay till bedrock etc at the site To draw Geologic interpretation layers the polygon draw tool must be used and the polygon must be digitized manually using the mouse Follow the directions below e Activate make it editable the Geology interpretation from the layer manager e Select the M Polygon button from the toolbar
115. list of known servers and create select a database OR 2 Build a Connection String to an existing database on a server NOTE The current version of HydroGeo Analyst supports MS SQL Server 2005 Express MSDE and later other SQL Servers such as Oracle DB2 Sybase Terradata etc are not supported The current supported language is T SQL Chapter 4 Project Manager SQL 92 standard other dialects such as SQL 99 PL SQL Watcom SQL are not supported Any existing database which satisfies a few basic requirements can be selected for your project These requirements mainly have to do with tables and or fields with reserved names For example selecting a database that has a table named Station will not be accepted by HydroGeo Analyst unless this table satisfies the requirements of HydroGeo Analyst s Station table The Station table must contain the following required fields each with a specific data type e ID e Name e X Coordinate e Y Coordinate and e Elevation ground surface If this table structure exists in the database and satisfies these requirements then it may be used to store the Station information Option 1 Select Server and Database If the Select Server and Database radio button is selected you will be prompted for a Server name and a Database name You must specify a server in order for a database to be created As mentioned earlier this may be any computer located on your network
116. main menu or press the Add button in the toolbar A new row will be added to the grid in the Station List tab Enter the following information for this station In the Name column type BH1 lt Tab gt or lt Enter gt key on the keyboard to shift the focus to the next cell In the X column type 537381 50 In the Y column type 4812036 33 In the Elevation column type 347 In the TOC column type 348 To post save the data for this record Record gt Post from the main menu or press the Post button in the toolbar Data Management 35 36 Using the same procedure enter the following information for these new stations Name X Y Elev TOC BH2 535780 7 4813800 1 339 1 340 1 BH3 535111 6 4813600 3 338 1 339 1 BH4 538544 4 4814890 8 350 5 351 5 BH5 533866 3 4811787 2 350 0 351 0 OW 535915 6 4813215 3 340 5 341 5 As long as you remain in the same window you do not need to press the Post button after every entry Do so to finalize the changes you have made before moving to the next window Note the color of the fields you have modified is different yellow once you press the Post button they return to the default state white This feature allows you to easily distinguish between permanent changes and the recent ones that have not yet been saved to the database Once you are finished remember to save the new data The stations should now appear in the Station List similar to the image shown belo
117. mapping Select the appropriate row in the preview grid Click the Delete button X Select the Save mapping to database checkbox to retain the mapping for future MON file import operations Click Next gt to proceed to Step 3 Importing Data into the Database Step 3 Importing Data into the Database Import MON file data a xj Import data Notes A m Select Channel 1 Select one or more enabled channels Iv Level Temperature Conductivity T Flowman selected by default 2 Select the source MON file by checking on the checkbox in the import column see Remarks below a Station lt Location Serial Number Station Name NO1 61667 312 Logger Type CTD Diver 13 File Name CTD_070503132 Import r CTD 3 Click on the Import button when ready Remarks o Rows highlighted in white have correct station name mapping and can be selected o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination hd station 4 b o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there _ lt Back Import Cancel a Help From the Select Channel frame select a parameter 1 e Level Temperature Conductivity Flowman NOTE A selection is not necessary if all the channels are inactive grey HGA w
118. of symbols Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter BHLP Settings x e visible Column Options Border Line Wisibilit FF Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using Iw Visible Feet L Alignmen Horizontal Right Z Vertical Center Help Apply Cancel The Description tab consists of two subtabs Appearance and Using The Appearance subtab allows you to show hide the text label change its Font and change the position of the label by using the horizontal and vertical Alignment dropdown boxes BHLP Settings l x Jw Visible Colum Options Border Line Wisibilit Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using w Using as Numeric Data Format EEEE Decimal places 7 Help Apply OF Cancel The Using subtab allows you to specify the display settings for numeric description data If you choose to include numeric data in your water level description select the Using as Numeric Data checkbox and specify the display format of the data using the Format dropdown list box You may choose from the following formats e General use this format to display numeric data as whole numbers e g 1 e Fixed use this format to display numeric data with a specified number of decimal places e g 1 000 e Scientific use this format to display numeric data in standard scientific notation e g 1 000E 0 For both the fixed and scientific formats you can specify the numb
119. of the Expression fields simply double click on the date field or press the button and a mini calendar will appear as shown below xa as Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview Display Field Select a Query station id EH Chemistry_S ample station name gt o E Chemisty Results ANONY 7 Name station toc sys_sample_code Calendar sample_date chemical_name EN May 2004 June 2004 result_value result_unit Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Sun_Mon Tae weed Teu is conc_ppm reporting_detection_li 23 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 rdi _ppm A 9 10 11 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Fase 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 30 interpreted_qualifiers 30 31 start_depth g mid_depth ZD Today 7 1 2004 end_depth Cancel Help result_comment sample_matrix_code sample_type_code sampling_reason y Source Condition Project s z Advanced Close Help Field Mama cham Fima AN NAN an Select the appropriate date then click OK and the date will be added to the conditions NOTE To add the date to your query you can scroll through the calendar in increments of months If the date you desire is too far in the past it may be easier to type in the date manually in the format compliant with your regional settings Creating Queries 229 Advanced Data Query Options Data Queries may contain Advanced Grouping an
120. on how to transfer stations grids query results maps cross sections borehole log plots and 3D views into a printable report format which can be printed or exported for convenient transfer to your colleagues and or clients The Report Editor provides the following features e Create and save Report Layout Templates e Create and Manage Reports e Import Reports e Design and Preview Reports e Save Export and Print Reports In addition the report editor e Provides an easy to use Office like designer environment e Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions e Provides Barcode control e Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks NOTE This chapter provides a brief overview of the features that the Report Editor offers For more details refer to the Active Reports on line help file This file is named AR2Std CHM and is found in the report folder of the HG Analyst installation folder The default is Program Files Common FilesiData Dynamics Active Reports AR2Std chm Simply double click on the CHM file to load the help file 11 1 About the Interface The Report Editor may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Project Report or click on the sl Report button in most HydroGeo Analyst modular windows Map Editor Cross Section editor 3D Explorer or the main window When this option 1s selected 1f there are report templates About the Interface 393 available for this module there wi
121. on the map to be created or viewed This feature is active only after a cross section line has been selected or drawn in the map window a BHLP button loads a Borehole Log Plot BHLP for the selected station 8 2 Description of Menu Items 8 2 1 Project New The New item provides options for creating a new map project file Map projects are saved with the extension VMP in the project sub directory Map The new map project will use the same projection system and extents as defined in the current HydroGeo Analyst project NOTE Each Map Project has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 5 Profile Settings Open Provides options for opening an existing Map Project only files with the VMP extension can be opened using the Map Manager Save Provides an option to save the current map project file All current Map Layers that are displayed will be saved to the current Map Project file Save As Provides the option to save a copy of the current Map Project with a different name 262 Chapter 8 Map Manager Close This will close the current Map Project If there are unsaved edits there will be a prompt to save changes before closing Reopen A list of recently accessed map projects will be displayed beside the Reopen item This is an alternate method of opening map project files instead of using the Open command Ex
122. pointer button in the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor on this vertex which has been separated e Click once on this vertex and drag the mouse away from its position and place the polygon vertex in the new position if desired Set Features The Set Features option allows for modifying the display properties of most layers in your map project and other cross sections that intersect with the current cross section If this option is selected from the Edit menu a dialog similar to that shown below will be displayed ho x Set Features Fiver 77 0 az Highway lw NAME T well iY ID OK Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more features that are displayed in one or more layers in your map project For instance one or more rivers from the Rivers layer may intersect with a given cross section at one or more points Other features of importance may include roads railway lines lakes etc Features from selected map layers that intersect with a cross section may be displayed as a symbol and or label on 326 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor the cross section line NOTE The intersecting items display options can be defined only at the time when the cross section 1s created currently it is not possible to set these features later on once the cross section has been created Also intersecting items must be selected in Map Manager before the cross section is created Please see Section 8 2 7 for m
123. right clicking on a text box and selecting the Delete option All text added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Lines To add Lines e Select the Edit Lines option from the pop up menu e Click on the Draw Line button on the toolbar e Click once on the desired line location in the cross section window and simply drag and click to create a line with several vertices A vertex can be added to an existing line by right clicking on a line and selecting the Adding Annotations to the Cross Section 355 Add vertex option A line can be deleted by right clicking on a line and selecting the Delete option All lines added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Polygons To add polygons or rectangles e Select the Edit Polygons option from the pop up menu e Click onthe Draw Polygon or Rectangle buttons on the toolbar e Insert the mouse cursor at the desired location e Click and drag the mouse to create the desired shape double click in the case of a polygon to finalize the shape Settings The Settings dialog for Annotations is displayed below Annotation Settings x Please set annotations for Model layer e Line M Poly Cancel For each Amnotation type you may show hide using the Visible check box or edit the display properties by clicking on the preview in the Symbol column You can modify the standar
124. routine Next to proceed to Step 3 of the DTS The next window is the Station Related Settings In here select the Projection Type and Units for the station coordinates in the source file Chapter 2 Getting Started Data Transfer System Import gj NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N E meters y eee For this example there is no need to change the projection since the station coordinates in the source are in the same projection system as the one defined for the project This step also allow you to specify the destination station group Next to proceed to the last step of the DTS The last step of the DTS is the Data Validation window and this provides a preview of the data to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with the data Data Management 49 50 Data Transfer System Import il x Step 4 Data Validation Errors arnings Description Field Name of records Preview XK Y Latitude 7 BHG 80 5592724714619 8 BH 80 5438789290283 9 BH 80 5496881242797 10 BHI 80 54035380561 21 11 8H10 80 5626078477601 12 BH11 80 5655381650221 13 BH12 80 5509871 345989 Note 14 BH13 80 5516285077133 i 3 15 BH14 80 5576698854446 This step allows you to accept reject 16 BH15 80 5672792095427 records with warnings by selecting the 17 BH16 80 5540966339337 warning message in the Errors Warnings 18 BH17 80
125. s will now appear under the Select data source frame shown below HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 117 Select MON files E 10 x Select data source Hotes MON Files C Documents and Settings tw aynetDesktops CTO 070503132027 61667 MON Select one or more files for importing into the project database Suppor MOM files created by LOM Pocket Diver DiverO fice and e SENSE MON File Information A A D DA Channel 1 Identification Channel 1 Reference level 0 000 cm Channel 1 10000 0010 em 10 Channel 1 Altitude ext gt Cance EH Help Below the Select data source frame 1s the MON file Information table This table contains the datalogger information of the selected MON file MON Data on page 116 To remove a MON file from the list select the file and click the Delete button Click Next gt to proceed to Step 2 Data Mapping 118 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Step 2 Data Mapping 0 x Data mapping Notes Select Section Field Select table field H Logger_settings o E Seties_settings ee Turbidity Er Data E Water Level E E Screen_ID A M apping 1 Left tree view lists contents of the MON file while that on the right side displays tables and fields in your database Temperature i E i Conductivity i depth_to_waterlevel oe Flowman i i i Dr indicator Yes Mo e Comments 2 Map one or more components of your MON file with one or more fields in your
126. same function When creating a new project there will be a prompt to enter the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials X User Name Fassword OF Cancel You must enter a valid user name and password for a user that has privileges for creating new projects HGA will then check these credentials in the security document to confirm that this user has these privileges For more details on assigning user access controls please see Chapter 4 Application Level Objects The process of creating a new project is further explained in Chapter 4 Using the Project Manager The Open menu item is used to open existing HydroGeo Analyst projects Only projects with the extension VBH may be opened in HydroGeo Analyst The VBH file contains basic information for the project including a connection string to the Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst database The 1 Open button in the toolbar performs the same function When opening a project there will be a prompt to enter the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials x User Name Fassword OF Cancel The default User Name is Admin with no password Enter the desired password then click OK to continue NOTE Only one user may access and modify a HydroGeo analyst project at a time Open from Backup Use this option to open a back up copy
127. same measured parameters The DTP contains information about the data source the selected destination table s matching between source and destination tables and fields source units and a number of other settings You may create an import package or select from existing packages All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the import routine loads all information stored in the package The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 111 112 After selecting the package select the Data Source please note the following limitations e HGA currently supports LAS v 2 0 e Third dimensional data array handling is currently not supported e Multiple log runs is currently not supported When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping Import LAS File DOS Step 2 Data mapping sz ii Select Section Field y Select Table Field The second step requires field r mapping from the source hile bo F Well Description destination fields in one ot more Log Geologic Description HydroGeo Analyst database Parameter Well Construction tables F ii Select one field from the Sol Sampling source file in the left frame w Mon
128. settings for the table Data Settings X Fields Condition Choose Data Fant Header Row Color Grid Line Color EH Violation Aow Color E Violation Fiel Field Condition Compare To ELEVATION gt Value 5o0d i Field bi Ok Cancel H Help The Header Row Color controls the color of the first row in the layout table The Violation Row Color allows you to assign a color to values in the table that exceed the violation conditions explained below This 1s useful for quickly identifying exceedences on the map The Grid Line Color controls the color of the gridlines in the table Under the Violation Field frame you may specify a condition for one of the display fields Select a Field from the combo box then a Condition lt gt etc and define the Compare To settings There are two options available e Compare to a Value simply type the value in the provided text box OR e Compare to a Field select another field from the data query to compare against The possibilities are limitless but here are some examples e concentration gt 5000 ug l a government guideline or MCL as shown in the screenshot above e depth to bedrock gt 40 feet e overburden thickness lt 50 feet e concentration of a chemical exceeds the criteria limit where the criteria limit is available in another field in the selected data query Description of Menu Items 293 In the Choose Data tab you can speci
129. the Save button to save the current SCS settings NOTE If you want to re use this new SCS in a new project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the SCS will be available For details on saving database templates see Chapter 5 Exporting the current template as a Database template 3 5 2 Modifying and Deleting a Soil Classification System To modify an SCS select the desired SCS then use the button to load this into the edit window on the right To delete an SCS select the desired SCS then use the x button on the lower left corner of the window NOTE Only user defined Soil Specifications can be modified or deleted The Default Specifications USDA USCS DIN 2043 Compton s IAH may not be modified or deleted from the project 3 5 3 Changing Soil Classifications Once a project has been created it is recommended that the SCS not be changed the reason for this is that existing cross sections with defined geology will be impacted by changing the soil names and patterns However if it is necessary to change the SCS this may be done in the Miscellaneous Settings dialog available under the Project Properties menu 3 6 Unit Converter The Unit Converter may be used to convert commonly used units from one form to another Select Tools Unit Converter from the menu and the following dialog will appear 57 29578 degree 57 29578 degree HERA A A
130. the Ef Post button in the toolbar to save the data The remaining fields can be left blank Your table should be similar to that shown in the figure below HsdroGeo Analyst Sample Project CU Program Files HG Anobest Projects SampleProfect NE a Y Bi alaj Project Dt Weer Record ett Took Heb Ey oz tx RA GOR BOS Bae ew Hir Gral la dll Station Lit GE Data Duey 7 Staton Data Select Slaton X ml re E kvaka T j S315 50 41s ETNI 41 50 MESA EA id TA a 15 Tobal 31 seleched 0 As demonstrated here 1t can be quite time consuming to enter data manually If the source data is available in a text file spreadsheet or database it is much more efficient to import the data into the new HydroGeo Analyst project This option is explained in the next section 2 2 2 Importing Data using the Data Transfer System DTS HydroGeo Analyst allows data to be imported from a variety of sources using the Data Transfer System DTS A few examples are provided below Example Importing Stations from an Excel File The following example demonstrates how to import data using the DTS You will import some additional borehole stations to the Sample project The DTS will be briefly covered in this section for more details on this feature please see Chapter 6 Importing Data using the DTS Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu This will load the Data Transfer System as shown below 44
131. the Map Window and the layers within the map project Full Extent This menu item will zoom the map window to its original full extents Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a section of the map that is defined by drawing a rectangle Place the cursor on the map and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the map Click this menu item and the map window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is already in full extent mode Zoom to Active Layer Zooms the map window dimensions to the extent of the selected map layer Previous Extent Zooms the map window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the map window to the next window dimensions Activated only after Previous Extent has been used Chapter 8 Map Manager Custom Extent Allows you to manually set the zoom extents and the center of the Map Window When this menu item is selected the following dialog will appear Change View Ed Window width 2733 m Map Scale IE 17935 Center pu 535903 85 m Y 481 3903 23 m OF Cancel Provide the desired viewable width map scale and X Y coordinates of the map that will be repositioned at the center of the map window As the Zoom window
132. the line symbol and label properties as shown below Settings Mapping Name Ef Line Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Solid E Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serif Spt Font color Wl Black Symbol Triangle Color Gi Blue Size 4 4 Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Visible show hide the markers Chapter 14 Plotting Adding Plots Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line Multiplier select a field that contains a multiplier value use this to apply a multiplier factor to all result values on the plot Bar Color Schema This option allows you to define advanced bar color settings for bar chart plots When this option is loaded the Bar Chart Color Settings dialog will display shown below NOTE This dialog will only be available after you have specified Bar as the Series Type in the Settings tab S Bar Chart Color Settings A a k x Define Color Settings 2 Graduated Color C Classification Selecta field that contains the classification Ea r Min 0 Mas 00 Number of Classifications le Color Value 01011995 17171995 H 03 01 1995 mi 0570171995 54141995 Ed 0770171995 72171995 09 01 1995 94141995 DN 1101195 1114199 E gt 0
133. the top of the dialog this name will appear on the plot The following Line Types are available e Formula e Best Fit Best Fit is the default line type when selected the following settings are available Best Fit type select from Std Deviation Moving Average or Exponential Moving Average Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Period enter a period value When the Formula line type is selected the following settings will be available Form ddPlotLine x Name Line type Formula C BestFit Formula Type Constant y Source Series a y Constant Value fo OK Cancel Formula type select from Constant Exponential Logarithmic or Inverse Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Constant Value When a Constant Formula Type is selected enter a constant value for the location of the line This will result in a straight line drawn on the plot Adding Lines to a Plot 513 Click OK when you are finished to draw the new line on the plot The line series will appear in the tree under the selected plot The line settings can be modified as described below Line Settings When a line is selected for a plot the Settings tab will display the appropriate Line Settings as shown below Settings Mapping Name Ef Line Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Solid El Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Ser
134. this section you will enter well construction data for one of the boreholes This data will be used for creating and visualizing a Borehole Log Plot BHLP Station List tab BH1 from the list Station Data tab Well Construction from the Data Category combo box Chapter 2 Getting Started Station List GR Data Query Station Data Data Category Select Station x m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 Geologic Description eM or y Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling type Description Consister Structure ASTMDe Color Odor i i Monitoring Event Pe e eee m ke y coarse gravel 0 0 0 0 0 Mining Exploration unii loamy sand 0 0 0 0 0 el 88 sandy gravel 0 0 0 0 0 Enter the following well construction information Drilling Protocol tab table from the grid type from 0 to 30 diameter 1 0 method Hollow Stem Auger Next enter the Casing information Casing table from the grid You will be prompted to save the changes Yes For this well define the following info Casing interval from 0 to 30 m Steel material 0 5 m diameter Next enter the Screen information Screen table from the grid You will be prompted to save the changes Yes For this well define the following info Screen ID 1 Screen from 15 to 30 m 0 3 m diameter Plastic material Slot Number 20 Next enter t
135. to be used Add Default Plot will create a new plot using the default plot template Delete button deletes the selected plot or line series Refresh button refreshes the design with new settings or data Zoom in button allows you to zoom into the selected plot page to zoom in on selected plot data within an individual plot refer to the section Zoom on page 500 below Zoom out button returns to the original zoom view Fit to Page button fits all plots to the current viewer window size At the bottom of the window you will find the following buttons The function of these buttons from left to right is Previous Page scroll to the previous page in the plot design Next Page scroll to the next page in the plot design About the Interface 499 Zoom To zoom in on plot data in an individual plot use the mouse cursor to draw box around the desired data a sample is shown in the screen shot below ai m mf we To zoom out to the original extents right mouse click on the plot area and select Zoom Out from the menu 14 1 2 Viewer Window Settings Under the Settings tab you can define the settings for the plot page design Settings Data Source Name ate Number of Columns 2 Number of Rows 2 Spacing Width 10 Spacing Height 10 aterquality_multipleplot Name controls the name of the selected plot series this is read only and cannot be modified The plotting component supports
136. topography will be drawn in for you The Cross section window should be similar to the one shown below 90 Chapter 2 Getting Started NOTE Yours may be slightly different depending on the location of the cross section line and the stations which were selected along the line Map Project Sample_ File Edit View Tools Help mala ZN A fx amp HE y PE IEE IE dep Model uopas s 0143 Topography o LO us o LO us Q t om Geology HydroGeology Elevation m 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 co 310 320 330 A II E HOD a AP 1949 43 282 32 In the Cross Section editor locations for layers must be interpreted and drawn manually using lines or polygons layer types may be Geological Hydrogeological or Model The process of drawing layers is described in the next section For more details on some of the other features of the Map Manager please see Chapter 8 2 6 Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 2 6 1 Drawing Geologic Cross Sectional Layers Once the desired stations have been loaded into the Cross Section Editor the layer locations must be interpreted To draw Geologic layers the polygon draw tool must be used and the polygon must be digitized manually using the mouse To draw a geological cross section layer follow the directions below Click once in the box beside Geology from the Layer Manager panel to activate thi
137. two georeference points are required to create a coordinate system Once the Georeference points have been defined the map region may be modified In the Select Map Region window the map region is represented by an outline of a box with circular nodes at each corner and with arrows pointing along the X and Y axes The map region box can be shifted or expanded to any alignment on the site map using the toolbar options described below These options may also be accessed from the Options menu on the Main Menu bar Resize Region Click and drag a corner of the map region box to stretch or shrink the size of the map region The new map coordinates will be updated to display the new map region E Rotate Region Rotate the map region E Align Rectangle Align the map region with the x axis El Maximize Enlarge the map region to the full extents of the basemap e HINT If it is desirable to use the entire image for the map use the Max imize option to expand the map region to the full extents Adding Control Points You can validate the accuracy of the georeferenced raster by using Control Points Control points are simply locations on the raster image of which real world coordinates are known Real world coordinates can be derived from geographic sources such as topographical maps or GPS units By comparing the georeferenced raster coordinates with their corresponding real world coordinates you can determine if the raster has been georeferen
138. v 3 0 Data Management Crosstab Queries Generate advanced crosstab queries from data queries Format columns rows sorting options display color font settings Send crosstab query to a report or export to HTML and EXCEL Display results with statistical functions Sum Count Average Max Min Standard Deviation Standard Deviation Population Variance Variance Population Quality Control Lab Quality Assessment Define one or more lab quality assessment templates Analyze Duplicate Spiked and Blank samples Compare Relative Percent Difference and Coefficient of Variation for Duplicate samples Analyze Percent Recovery for Spiked samples Compare Blank samples to method detection limits Execute a Quality analysis on a selected dataset Display and retrieve assessment results records not meeting assessment criteria will be highlighted with user defined colors for each QC check Save assessment results to a MS Excel spreadsheet Time Series Charting Create Time Series X Y plots based on data queries Add legends and data marker labels to plots Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot Display non detect uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols Display one or more water quality standard values as a line or symbol for quick detection of samples that exceed the standards Define data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range
139. value will be calculated from the selected data set Min value Controls the minimum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Auto max value Restores the default automatic maximum value which is calculated from the selected data set Auto min value Restores the default automatic minimum value which is calculated from the selected data set Grid Visible Shows hides gridlines on the plot Style Controls the grid line style select from Solid Dash Dot DashDot or DashDotDot 509 Title Text Sets the title for the axis Visible Shows hides the axis title Angle Controls the angle for the axis title for the Y axis it may be useful to have the angle set at 90 degrees Font Controls the font for the axis title Tick Label Format Controls the decimal format for the labeled tics enter 00 to display 2 decimal places to display no decimal places simply enter 0 Angle Controls the angle for the tick labels for date labels it may be useful to select an angle of 45 or 90 degrees for improved display Font Controls the font for the tick labels Horizontal X Axis The Settings for the X Axis are identical to the Y axis with the following exceptions e Log Scale is not available e Min and Max values when you define the min and max format you must select these values from a calendar e You can specify a Date Time format from the following options m d yyyy e MMM
140. width changes the Map Scale changes and vice versa The Zoom window width has equal proportions left and right of center TIP When you save the map project the view extent is saved together with the map project The next time the map project is opened the view extent will be restored Turn on All Layers Makes all layers visible Turn off All Layers Hides all layers View BHLP Allows the you to view the borehole log plot BHLP for any station To view a BHLP make sure that you are in the HGA data layer select this option and click on any station An example taken from the Demo project is provided below Description of Menu Items 303 Map Project Demo Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help JARA ZONA OS MA OF MEDD A4SAN EG SE BHLP 67 GB 44 All Stations o BHLP Template TI CrossSectionLine5 Boreholes AS dep a a ad AirPhoto_Bw _gr bm p Coarse 4 AirPhoto_Color_gr b mp Water Courses a KI Contour Lines xl Airports 1 xl Major Railroads xl Urban reas xl Trees xl Grasslands xl Boulder Croplands xl Layer Informatio Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 44 535 162 4 813 762 1 10 359 From the top of the BHLP viewer select the template from the combo box These templates are defined in the main HG Analyst window under the Borehole Logs node For more information see
141. 0 SEE O E 452 Dept Interval based Ola soci chert e casei 454 A e E wanes ae erase ant A ventaae aateeeae 455 Ciholos Colum has aiden aes aris aon cee edueiatnact sated sea iatad dtowewi oben T 456 o o a E tal Resto essai menu carsanmiatace 456 Well Construction Colla tati pee mauaeol ees 457 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services STIS r a ca acacia atee eh riee cal a ie ents E earn kien 457 Dept Dependent Plot assess tirarse 465 S E E cunett ncaa cennGach scat tnaee 5c Gaon ONE 468 Picture CO OI idas 471 Destienmo a Borehole Los Pl A A AA 472 Adding Lithology Column ll elas 473 Selec CCom WY A E PO a a emt 473 Edit Column Properti s aaa ide 474 Specity Dala SQUICO ist daa 476 Ada W ell CONSTUCUON Colum A A i 417 Add Pror Columns A ean icute nance asaya 417 Ada Plot See io 478 Reorder BHLP COMINS ii 480 Savine the Borehole Los Plot css ssisesesceceecscusthanes casesssustnsstccveeedacustvotes Caseanausenestesveeeenaeees 480 Saving a borehole log plot design template ooooncccccnncccononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnonanonos 481 Exporting a borehole log plot design template oooonnnnncnnncccnononononncnonnnnnnnnnonononinncinnnnnnnos 481 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting ssssscssscccsssssssssscssccccsscsssesees 431 Generating a DOrchole 102 TEPOIC aid dios 481 TS Quality Control ss OS Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis ccsssssssscccccccssssssscsscccccccccss
142. 00 25000 33000 38000 40000 400 93333333333 26 666666666 4 0 1666 6666666 53 333333333 60 63 333333333 66 666666666 The Print Preview window contains a toolbar that allows you to modify the view The following buttons are available settings Use the Use the Use the Use the Use the Use the Use the amp button to print directly from the Print Preview window 2 button to zoom in and zoom out of the Print Preview window EN button to view just one page 00 button to view two pages at once E button to view three pages at once INE button to view four pages at once E button to view six pages at once You can scroll through the pages using the Page vertical scroll bars located in the top right corner of the print preview window Click Close from the Toolbar to return to the Report window Printing Report To send your report to a printer click on the Print button 254 Chapter 7 Queries Map Manager The GIS Map Manager is built on ESRUM Map Objects technology and is packed with an abundance of GIS mapping features that seamlessly connect your project maps with the HydroGeo Analyst database However the GIS Map Manager goes far beyond simple mapping it also acts as a fundamental source for producing cross sections accessing borehole logs and well construction details and developing contour maps elevations concentrations water table etc The GIS Map Manager is an integral part of
143. 00 gt E o AA OCOOO0O0O0O0O Gravel If you have set a Print Scale factor please see BHLP Default Settings on page 446 for more information by default the scale will appear in the lower left corner of the BHLP report Alternately you can use the Report Designer please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor to add a label named Scale in your header footer information The default label will automatically be removed if a label named Scale is added Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter The BHLP Report may be printed directly by clicking on the Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the J Save button or exported to one of several file formats including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the fs Export button If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs For more details on designing and modifying a report please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting 483 484 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter 13 Quality Control When collecting analyzing and interpreting environmental data Quality Control QC can come in many forms and fashions HydroGeo Analyst supports a Lab Quality Control component that allows users to verify the accuracy of the analysis results reported by a laboratory As part of
144. 019 999 GB 04 BottLayerl 99999942426 10001328527 Model 9 4 Reports 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 BottLayer2 99999992914 19999460998 Model aS 3D View 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 BottLayer3 99999983041 19999830406 Model H E Borehole Logs 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 Coarse Gravel 99999977853 19999988853 Geology Plots 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 Fine Sand 00000089323 10001468975 Geology 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 Silt 00000008306 10001000194 Geology 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 Clay 99999942426 10001328527 Geology 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 Sand 99999983041 19999062437 Geology gt 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 upper aquifer 99999977853 19999988853 Hydrogeology 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 aquitard 99999942426 10001328527 Hydrogeology oia 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 lower aquifer 99999992914 19998460804 Hydrogeology g Op 28 535848 6899 4814059 999 GB 05 Topography 00000042445 10001000194 Model Load All 28 535848 6899 4814059 999 GB 05 BottLayerl 99999942426 19999664072 Model 28 535848 6899 4814059 999 GB 05 BottLayer2 99999976018 19999496108 Model Incremental 28 535848 6899 4814059 999 GB 05 BattLayer3 00000026408 10000264076 Model e 28 535848 6899 4814059 999 GB 05 Coarse Gravel 00000042445 10000885683 Geology fi 000 El 28 535848 6899 4814059 999 GB 05 Fine Sand 00000033588 10000911626 Geology 28 535848 6899 4814059 999 GB 05 Silt 99999976018 19999496108 Geology y al Rows 239 Time 0 0 0 109 x cross_
145. 1 01 1996 17171936 Lnn amna Ann In this dialog you may define the color scheme by selecting the Graduated Color radio button or the Classification radio button These options are most useful when displaying the charts on a map in order to see both the trends in the data over time at a single sample location and the spatial distribution trends of all sample locations Graduated Color This option allows for coloring bars from the same sample date the same color on all bar charts For example if your plot data contains sample data from three seasonal sampling rounds spring summer fall you will see 3 instances in the grid at the bottom A different color can be assigned to each sample date Upon clicking OK each bar in the bar chart will be colored with the specified color and all bar charts in the series will share the same color where the sample date exists 505 Classification This option allows for coloring the entire bar chart a certain color based on where it lies within a specified criteria For this you must provide a query that contains a field that will be used for the criteria identification When you select this option you must map to this field and you will then see the min and max available for this field as shown below You can then define the number of classifications default is 3 and the data range will be separated into equal number of parts At this point you can specify the color and the label HE
146. 1 Vertical Scale Column Vertical Scale column displays the vertical scale on the borehole log plot Although a table and respective fields for the starting and ending depth could be provided for this column the BHLP automatically adjusts the scale column so that the scale represents the largest column placed on the borehole log plot One or more vertical scale columns can be placed on a given borehole log plot This feature may be useful in such cases where displaying the vertical scale in more than one unit e g metres and feet and or a combination of Depth from a certain reference e g top of casing and Elevation from a selected datum is desired To create a Scale column click on the op Add icon on the toolbar From the combo box select Scale A new Scale column will be added to the designer window 448 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter In the Settings frame in the lower left corner of the window you can set some of the visual details of the column El ES Design H E Lithology Visible True 7 El Header Text Scale Horizontal Alig Center 7 Vertical Align Center Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape 4 0 To specify the display information for this column expand Scale in the Designer tree and select ScaleEntities El ES Design H E Lithology H E el Construction DataTable Lithology E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField from E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description
147. 10 As AAA A A A ae t 211 Cobrdinate EXCUSA aa corsa dd 211 FACES CAtIONS LO OTI iia 211 Data Validation Report and Finalizing the Import ooooonnnnnnccccnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanononnnanonnos 213 Accepting or Rejecting Errors WarmingS ssssssssssssssssessessssssssssseseceeseceseececceeceeeeeeseeeeseeeess 214 Acceptins or Rejectin Records act Siok Aira alee are eco En ies 214 Emalizine ANCOR tai 214 Exporting Data using the DTS iiss cccsccssscsvesscasettensecevasseccencensesseancsessssuactanestceesssonscesses 215 Specity Data SourcesanG Package sii nic twas te camcnts mind bacaaensvpaadt es enabes aatupawent 216 ECET 8 Cols em wip PO aci Iii iiot 216 Until 216 Station elas CUM ecc 217 dre OQUCTICS ratillo 2 Lo A DOU LMG Interacci n 219 Deserption ot Toolbar He lloro 221 Query TYPES sscceccacesa cic tevesiccaSeceeicouts E A 221 Dait r OUCTICS nara idas 221 Station Group CUCM talla 222 Creatina QUOTES ind aaaea aaea Ea aaaea Oae 222 Dar Ouer e EMDE itodaiads 222 Adding a field which contains a Linked List c ccccsssseeseesesseseseeseeeeseeeneeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 228 Advanced Data Query Opuons o okinawa ed 230 Station Group Query Example ate 232 Query Using SQL Commands Example c cccccccccscsssssssesecssccenecacnssssssnsecaseececsscnseassssseens 299 SEE C Olan A a gnc neeie tas teawmeahansniaase ead eco 235 Belete Command a aio ca 236 Manasina QUCFICS ssrin sesarat araneae ta r
148. 14385 0 Max 4814635 0 ly 40 481 4305 0 481 4655 0 Z of Nodes Min 302 00 Max 324 00 lz 5 302 00 324 00 Interpolation method Inverse distance Advanced Settings FF Interpolate log values Add Data Source Data Source Mame result_value Z result_value Date Field Date Granularity none static distribution Day Static Plume F x poeton Dats FOA erer Date Field F result_value result value i none static distributior H Help OR Cancel E In the 3D Interpolation window specify the various settings related to the grid size HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 133 extents and data mappings 3D Plume Project Name Define the plume project name One plume project can contain multiple plumes e g for one or more contaminants Grid Region Define the various properties relating to the grid size e X Value select a field to be used for the X axis e of nodes define the number of grid nodes in the X direction e X min X max define the minimum and maximum X values for the interpolated grid by default these will be read from the data source however you may modify these values if necessary Similar parameters exist in the Y and Z directions The Z value should be a field that represents the depth or elevation at which the data value sample was observed If you want to display the plume on the same elevation scale as your cross sections whe
149. 2 Set Passwords 165 User Preferences 131 V Value Renderer 282 Volume Estimation 3D Plumes 376 W Well Profile 126
150. 2 331 225 777757 E FXxazo E 323 117 OF Cancel At the top of the dialog specify a Name for the renderer and select a Field Name for the renderer The Value Renderer dialog allows for detailed symbol and label rendering Use the Frequency for display value vertical scroll box to set the label display frequency You can manually specify value symbols and their corresponding labels by clicking in the desired symbol and label field Alternatively specify a default symbol and select the Default Symbol checkbox to apply the same symbol characteristics to each value Use the Ramp function to specify the color scheme and size for the symbols and click OK first to return to the Value renderer dialog click OK again to accept the settings Then also Make sure the Visible box 1s checked and click OK to apply the renderer Label Renderer This renderer allows you to display various labels for the selected layer stations or contour map for example 282 Chapter 8 Map Manager Label Renderer Mame Jlabel Field Mame Propert M Allow Duplicates Fant W Spline Text Sample Text e Flip OF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field Name which will be displayed as a label Customize the settings as desired Click OK to accept the settings Make sure the Visible box 1s checked and click OK to apply the renderer You can add delete and edit differe
151. 3 347 00 348 00 ES Design 3 6 Lithology Lithology ES LithologyEntities Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Visible E Header Text Lithology Horizontal Align Center Vertical Align Center Gravel Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape Angle 0 Close Export Y Print Y Help Column properties are divided into two groups The first group of properties is common to all columns and can be accessed by clicking on the main node for that column These properties include the Visible option and Header related settings The next group of properties can be accessed by clicking on the sub node of the column node This group of properties varies between column types and generally provides the controls through which data to be displayed on the column will be selected For our Lithology example select Lithology Entities from the tree as shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample i oj x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 ES Design ES Lithology Lithology ogyE tities Coarse Gravel DataT able Lithology TopEnti yedun P y Sand Caption Top elevation Description DataField from BottomEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField to ImageEntity Caption Image Description Image DataField soil_type_image TextEntity Caption Text Description Text DataField soil_
152. 347 00 348 Save Save As Add Group Add Plot Series Delete Show Settings Close Espot Y Print Y Help Select Column Type Select the desired column type from the pop up menu and press OK button Designing a Borehole Log Plot 473 Choose Column Type q xj Please Choose a Column Type lot Well Construction Interval Depth Picture A node identifying the column will be added to the tree view under the Design node For some columns such as Lithology and Well Construction the BHLP attempts to obtain data for the borehole that is currently selected in the combo box and displays a preview in the viewer An example is shown below for a new Lithology column Borehole Log Designer Sample E iol x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 E Design Lithology Lithology Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Close Export Y Print Y EJ Help Edit Column Properties Column properties Entities can be set by expanding the Design node and clicking on the sub node to be updated For example to modify a Lithology column expand the Design node and select Lithology from the tree as shown in the following screenshot 474 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Borehole Log Designer Sample MN 10 x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m 537381 50 4812036 3
153. 4 01 99 In this case the first observation from a well will be selected If you select Year for date granularity you will obtain only one data set that will essentially be a static plume In this case the first 1 data set When you have defined the settings press the e Add button to add the mapped fields the values should then be displayed in the table at the bottom of the window To delete an existing 3D Plume simply click on the x Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button HGA will create a 3D plume file in the Plumes sub directory for your project with the file name provided and the extension nc For example TVOC nc in the directory D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Plumes To display the plume please proceed to the instructions in Chapter 9 View 3D In addition HGA will save the gridded 3D results to a TXT file using the same file name and in the same Plume sub directory NOTE Currently there is no method of opening plume projects in the Interpolation tool to make modifications Therefore it is suggested that you save the data query so the 3D project can be quickly re created Crosstab Report This menu item loads the Crosstab query component where you can generate crosstab query reports from your existing data queries Ensure that you have a valid data query selected in the Queries node in the HGA browser before selecting this option For more details p
154. 4814665 30 y 3D View E 535390 00 4814741 90 8 Borehole Logs 535577 40 481447710 Plots 535677 10 4814416 20 535584 50 4814300 00 535599 70 4814371 80 535492 90 4814477 20 td 535635 20 4814503 80 Load All 535588 40 4814667 30 Incremental Ae A I Station Data Tab For a more detailed view of a single Station s attributes the Station Data tab should be selected and an appropriate Data category chosen The Station Data tab provides access to all data related to a single station Once a Station is added to the project detailed information on the station can be inserted edited or deleted through the Station Data tab HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects NewDemo Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help Je e8627 SRh xRalRBRBAS BOS RO aw Nn M Station Groups B Station List EX Data Query Station Data 44 Project A Monitoring Wells ee Select Station x m Y m Elevation m TOL W Boreholes _ GB 01 7 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 M Soil Borinas M W0_Stations Location description_addins a OC_Monitoring_Wells M Boreholes_with_plot_data Station Name daue Deciji am clay thicker than 2 m y 53621269 M soil_borings_with_tce_exceedine Y 4814030 00 E Station Data Elevation 323 50 m y E Queries TOC 324 50 m 4 5 Crossta
155. 59 4 ISO Latin 4 North European 8859 5 ISO English amp Cyrillic Based Bulgarian Byelorussian English Macedonian Russian Serbo Croatian Ukrainian 8859 6 ISO Arabic 8859 7 ISO English amp Greek 8859 8 ISO Hebrew 8859 9 ISO Latin 5 Western European amp Turkish 8859 13 ISO Latin 6 Lativan and Lithuanian ANSI Uses the system code page OEM Uses the OEM equivalent of the system code page ISO Uses the ISO equivalent of the system code page BIGS Uses the ANSI 950 code page also known as Big5 Chinese Taiwan HongKong SAR PRC SJIS Uses the ANSI 932 code page also known as Shift JIS Japanese Appendices EUC Uses the EUC ISO equivalent of the system code page Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes 537 15 6 Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 538 U S Bureau of the Census http www esri com data download census2000_tigerline Data Census 2000 TIGER Line Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage United States Puerto Rico U S Virgin Islands Ameri can Samoa Guam The Commonweath of Northern Mariana Islands and the Midway Islands Datum NAD 83 Layer Roads Railroads Rivers Lakes Legal boundaries Census Statistical Boundaries etc NASA ftp eOsrpO1lu ecs nasa gov srtm Data Shuffle Radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Raster SRTM Geographic Coverage Global SRTM1 30m for USA SRTM3 90m World Datum WGS84 NAVD88 Layer DEM Natural Resources Canada http geograti
156. 6 geo index cfm Data Road Network file Boundary files for provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Canada Datum NAD83 Layer Road and Administrative Boundary Appendices 15 7 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc maintains an online FAQ at the following internet address http www waterloohydrogeologic com FA Q faq htm Please consult the FAQ website and the Help User manual as your first resource If you cannot find the answer please contact technical support at Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc and they will be happy to assist you You may contact WHI at Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc 460 Phillip Street Suite 101 Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2L 5J2 Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws supportOslb com Web www waterloohydrogeologic com Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s 545 546 Appendices INDEX A About the Interface 18 Adding Linked Fields 186 Advanced Data Query Options 230 AquaChem Water Quality Analysis 142 AquiferTest Pumping Test Analysis 138 B BackUp Database 137 BHLP Live Update 443 Reorder Columns 480 Specify Data Source 476 Use Data Query 476 Water Level Data to Display 463 C Changing Soil Classifications 151 Charting 497 Color Shading Zebra Map Settings 288 Connectivity 123 179 Contour Line Settings 288
157. 812036 33 347 00 348 00 Design 5 Lithology Lithology Well Construction 55 Well Construction 53 Scale Coarse Gravel Medium Sand V Live update Apply This BHLP template contains a pre defined structure with Lithology Well Construction and Scaling information The BHLP Report may be exported to an XML file printed directly or saved in several formats including HTM PDF XLS etc For more details please see Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter To proceed with this exercise Close button to close the BHLP window 2 4 Querying the Database Once the data has been successfully entered into the project the Query Builder may be used to run queries on the station data Queries provide the ability to search and find a specific set of data or stations quickly and easily Some examples of this application include e Finding stations located in a specific area of your site search by X Y location e Searching Monitoring event data for groundwater chemistry samples which exceed a guideline level e Finding all wells which exceed a specified depth In addition using the Query Builder you can create Data Queries that provide the data sources for e Map Layers see Chapter 8 for more details Querying the Database 69 e Cross section interpretation results see Chapter 9 Querying Cross Section Interpretations for more details e Quality Control
158. 834671503069 GB16 43 478726238141 GB17 43 486065023726 GB18 43 4770928697195 GB19 43 4826569874823 GB20 43 4770928697195 GB21 Close EJ Help Rows 68 Time 0 0 0 70 e Press Close to return to the main HydroGeo Analyst window e Click Yes when a prompt to save the query appears The new data query will now appear as a new node under the Queries node in the Project Browser If additional Conditions are required for a more advanced query follow the steps below e Create a new Query e Under Conditions press the op Add button Using the same procedure described above select a field from the tree and drag and drop this into the new Expression field e Select an Operator and Expression value for the Condition e Repeat this step until all Conditions have been specified e The Conditions must now be linked with an additional operator On the right side of the window the Operator column can be expanded and one of the following options may be selected AND OR e If itis necessary to enclose one or more conditions double click in the outer fields surrounding the query condition and parentheses will be added to the query condition An example is shown below Chapter 7 Queries 7 Query Builder E 4 10l x XaHAA a Design i i Station Group Quen Data Query gn SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields Bedrock30 y Function Expression Alias
159. 842728 80 5578342692123 80 5589858888123 80 5601026267776 80 5619747219437 80 5632937 953774 oft Y xX lt Back Import Cancel Help Bil Es Note This step allows you to accept reject records with warnings by selecting the warning message in the Errors Warnings grid Records with errors must be rejected to activate the importing process You can also select one or more records in the preview table and exclude them from importing into your database E Error O Waring The data is checked against three conditions namely e Proper Station Locations e Specified conditions for each field if any e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordinates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in any projection system desired Importing Data using the DTS 213 214 Accepting or Rejecting Errors Warnings The records that fail to satisfy each of the above conditions will be indicated in the Errors and Warnings table By default all data marked as erroneous will not be imported However all warnings are ignored by default One or more of these error messages can be selected and the data affected by those errors can either be rejected or acce
160. 99999970673 19999984121 Geology Sy Select_for_deletion 24 536212 6899 4814029999 GB 01 upper aquifer 00000072527 10016369393 Hydrogeology Spe Soil_chem_exceedences 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 lower aquifer 00000057407 10000867341 Hydrogeology Es soil_desc_concatenate 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 Topography 99999922118 19998859363 Model 3 soil_plume_data 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 BattLayerl 00000036182 10000062631 Model toe exceeds 10 mg per kg 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 BottLayer2 00000036182 0 Model AA 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 BottLayer3 00000029919 10000299187 Model igi ec 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 Medium Sand 99999977853 19999575503 Geology o Dirina un 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 Gravel 00000020303 19999984121 Geology E voc exceeds 5000 ug per 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 Coarse Gravel 99999922118 19994426497 Geology Ge ve exceeds 1 mg per kg 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 Fine Sand 00000036182 10000265706 Geology water_elevations_months 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 Silt 00000009611 19999796925 Geology 2 water_levels 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 Sand 00000029919 10000885686 Geology wadata 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 upper aquifer 99999922118 19994426497 Hydrogeology ES Crosstab 25 536156 69 4814049 999 GB 02 lower aquifer 00000036182 10000265706 Hydrogeology 26 536079 69 4814069 999 GB 03 2 Maps 27 535953 69 4814019 999 GB 04 Topography 99999977853 10000354275 Model Cross Sections 27 535953 69 4814
161. A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name 1s provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template The template will be saved with the extension XML and the corresponding lists and templates will be saved in an MDB file The Templates are saved in the folder Program Files HGAnalyst Templates In addition to the current database schema the following entities are saved to the database template upon exporting e Report templates e BHLP templates e Plot templates e User defined Soil Classification Systems SCS e Lists defined in the List Editor e Project Level Security Document PLSD defined with the User Access Management Chapter 5 Template Manager The Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS 1s a flexible tool used for importing and exporting data into and out of a HydroGeo Analyst project When starting a new project it may be necessary to import data from other sources into the HG Analyst database Data may exist in such sources as Text Files MS Excel or other spreadsheets MS Access SQL servers or Oracle databases The DTS is designed to import data from such sources into the HGA database In addition data may be exchanged import and or export between the HG Analyst database and various other data sources during the lifetime of a project Such imports exports in most cases will involve the HG Analyst database and other sources such as spr
162. AA A A E NE E AE NA 305 EC A a E EP o PEO E A 305 A en eee E Pom ter eee Serena bet toe tnt eer rrr tentnn eer m eer Stee Tern ete ntcen tee 305 E TE l S A nt ee th ee 305 O A II emcee AN 305 4 ep sme ere A A A AN A E A IN 306 ROn couse sade dcce a eee ee ere neces ed ceva dace aa sees eens a etch oa ATA 306 ACA O SALON IU ies 306 Delete fom Station Group src o ada 306 NR Annee rer ene nae A eT meee nee nen TC ere er 307 TOSS ee dao o a eo a ea een eee eae 307 O 309 A E a N 310 Hesse a a eita ust Sctia noes ta tate l as Uaaue isles da 313 E ead tated tain A A 313 Define a Cross Section Line sce pysssecs esvicdesautescessavindeseesacastesciadsapuindeiataviveceesevenccssernees 313 Dieritizine va Cross SECU OM Le decia 313 Use Existins Polinesia 314 Modify Butter Distance ti Seed ccaetcteea cee eae 315 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services 9 Cross Section Editor ccccccsccccsscccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccccess OL ADOUE EME INTER TAC daa 318 Deserptionot Toolbar Hen ia doit 319 Description of Menu Iems soricina ANEETA iaa 322 PUE cenn A soot sat acs 322 E E N T T TT E ETA E EE T T EA E A AOE ET 322 VOSS iore E O E E A 322 Export Modol Layer nee E 322 XD OP LAN ASC da 323 PRIE a ae 324 A A EO ETE NATE T OT OTEN 324 Eaa A E A N 324 A E E O N I ANEA A E E NE E A EEEE 324 Delete AM O a 324 E Re E IAT IATE NIA A WER EE E E EI EAEE A E E E EAEE T ETTE NA 324 Delete VEER resimi e N tr 329 EINE Vete a o 325 Remo
163. Add button to add a condition Next define the condition and specify the color scheme in the following fields e Fact Field select a data field from the list e Minimum define a value for the lower limit e Maximum define a value for the upper limit e Cell Style define the display properties for the condition including the BackColor Alignment Font Styles ForeColor Gradient Style GradientBack Color and Progress Bar Color When you have defined the settings press the 2 Apply Changes button To delete an existing condition simply select the appropriate row in the table and click on the x Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button Crosstab Queries 251 The values should then be colored accordingly in the crosstab report Edit Value Markers To edit a value marker simply double click on the desired item from the list of markers Now you may make changes to the cell style properties or the Min Max values Once the changes have been made click the Apply Changes button 7 8 4 Printing Crosstab Reports 202 Crosstab reports can be easily printed directly from the crosstab component Before printing you may want to first define the page and print settings These settings are described below Page Settings From the report window click the Page Setup button to open the page setup dialog shown below Paper Size Source Automatically Select M Orientation Margins
164. Analysis see Chapter 13 Applying a Lab Quality Template for more details e BHLP columns see Chapter 12 Specify Data Source for more details e Crosstab reports see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries for more details e 3D plume projects see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation for more details e Charts see Chapter 14 Adding Plots for more details e Customized Reports see Chapter 11 Creating Reports based on a Data Query for more details 2 4 1 Example Querying the Database In this example you will create a data query that returns all stations that have soil chemistry exceedences for PCE Tetrachloroethylene Follow the directions below to build a simple query Tools gt Query Builder from the main menu or click on the E button from the toolbar The Query Builder window will load as shown below Query Builder lol x xaue D E e C Station Group Query Data Query fred SQL View Preview Select a Query m Display Fields Function Expression station id id station x station y y 7 station name name Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration ay Geophysics fin E Well History J E J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Conditions Expression Operator Expression M Source Condition Project y Advanced
165. Angle vertical scroll bars to change the reducer angle Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter NOTE The reducer angle must be within the range of 5 89 Also the reducer is not drawn to scale and is intended for visualization purposes only Scale BHLP Settings xj Well Constructia e visible Column Options Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale Appearanc Display Unit rn Major ticks interval 10 Label Position Left r Color Font Minor tick interval 5 E Background El Color J Help Apply OF Cancel The Scale tab allows you to modify the scale within the Well Construction column The settings for this scale are identical to those described in Vertical Scale Column on page 448 12 2 6 Depth Dependent Plots The Plot column is designed to display various types of depth dependent graphs It supports both the Depth Interval as well as the Depth Point based data types The following are some example data that may be displayed using this column type e Geophysical investigation results e Analytical results chemical concentration e Analytical results for soil physics moisture content bulk density etc e Soil testing results pocket Penetrometer SPT BHLP Columns 465 Various plot settings are available For Depth Point based graphs the plot column supports the following plot types e Points e Connected vertices line graphs with or without po
166. BHLP report may be generated from within the BHLP designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Borehole Log Designer window open click on the Print button at the bottom of the BHLP designer window and select from one of the print options as shown in the following screenshot Print current borehole Print all boreholes NOTE If you select Print all boreholes a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time If you want to print a BHLP for just the selected station use the Print current borehole Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting 481 482 option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template yourself Select Template x Hame bhip_ landscape bhip_ portrait OF Cancel E Help An example report loaded with the bhlp portrait template is shown in the following figure A 632 mal Ia Siero Arliss 00 88 Contents x E A A A O AS O E F 66 01 Company Name Borehole Log Report Address Project Waterloo Investigation Contact Info Location Waterloo ON Borehole 24 Date January 1 2004 Description GB 01 Well Construction ES E 0 Lithology Coarse Gravel Medium Sand 35000
167. Bar Chart Color Settings ae E a Ee x Define Color Settings i Graduated Color Classification Select a field that contains the classification pH Min D Mas 7 96 Number of Classifications 3 Color Break Value Label 2 65333333 0 265333333333333 MA 520666666 2 65333333323333 5 SUBBGEBREEBRE MA Oe F SOBGGGEG66666 7 96 OF Eancel Upon clicking OK the entire bar chart will be colored with the appropriate color based on where it lies in this criteria 14 3 Plot Settings Once a plot is selected and visible there are several settings that can be modified These settings are sorted into several groups explained below 14 3 1 General Series Settings Some of the most frequently used general plot settings are available when you right mouse click on a plot window that contains a data series and select Edit General Settings The following dialog will appear for line chart 506 Chapter 14 Plotting Plot Settings Line Width fi Line Style Solid y Label Visible Y Marker Visible Preview 10 3 6 4 2 Apply Close The following settings are available Line Width specify the line width Line Style select the line style Labels Visible show hide the data marker labels Markers Visible show hide the data markers Color specify the color for the line As you define the series options the Preview fram
168. Cancel Help Selecting the Database Template for your project In this window you may select from a pre defined Database structure or create a new database structure for the project For your convenience there are several Database structures included with HGA which include the necessary tables for storing and managing environmental data These include e WHI s own Environmental Database Template designed for groundwater data management expands U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 standards e Ontario s Ministry of Environment s MOE Water Well Information System WWIS Template designed for management of water well records and e U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 Environmental Data Models designed for environmental data management All templates are available in both metric and imperial length units In most cases one of these database structures should be adequate for your projects If not you may use the Create New Template option to create a new structure containing only the Stations table Then after the project is created you may use the Template Manager to create and define the required tables and fields for your project For more details on this feature see Chapter 5 Creating a new template If you select to Create a new template a prompt will appear for a name for the new template 174 Chapter 4 Project Manager Template name E x Hame OF Cancel Help The template will be created and will
169. Cross Sections Data has been rotated EM AA Ea Stations Fl Interpretations E Model Layers i E Geology Layers The default axes labels indicate the axes direction and doado Lauer the units but this can be customized to display alphanumeric text A new name may be defined for each of the axes along with label size and color settings Setting m m m m ig D Visible a a E a E 2 Label Sets the label attributes 4 Live Update Apply 10 3 4 Sitemap Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports AutoCAD DXF files and BMP files for site maps The Sitemaps category contains a list of the sitemaps used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings for each individual Sitemap Display Settings 371 To load a site map into the project select File Import Basemap from the main menu In cases where the sitemap is not appearing clearly because of the colors used in the DXF file you can specify a fixed color to apply to all lines and attributes of the DXF file The following settings are available for Site map elements Name sets the image name Visible shows hides the site map image Semitransparent sets the site map image as semi transparent Z Level for bitmap defines an elevation for the site map Bind to surface drapes the map over a surface If there are no surfaces available the only option will be None First load a surface as explained in the following sect
170. DataField ho Using the combo boxes select the table and the fields from which to draw data In the example shown above the Scale column will display a depth scale that goes from the smallest from depth to the largest to depth in the Lithology table Settings The Scale column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Scale node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Columns 449 Scale e Visible Column Options Visibilit Tic Marks Iw Visible Major Tic Mark Interval 110 Display Unit m ka Color Label Position Left Y Minor Tic Mark Font Interval 5 l Background El Color J The Scale frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox To access the Column Options dialog page 447 click the Options button The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox modify the Display Unit and change the Label Position Change the font style and background color using the Font color box and Background color box respectively The Tic Marks frame allows you to set the Interval and Color of the column gradations Clicking on a Color box opens a palette to select from 12 2 2 Depth Point based Column
171. E amp E 320 i aM E Model 310 Topography a y o wv Geology Seosees OM C HydroGeology 300 290 _ E 2 T gt D iw 230 240 250 260 270 280 220 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Distance m 535 872 4 814 505 29 91 226 30 0 50 100 535 137 4 814 510 Grid Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen Level Intersecting Grid Grid Line Color Line Style _ Width in Pixels i E e Wisible for Vertical Lines e Visible for Horizontal Lines Show on Load In the Grid Lines frame set the line style color and width and also set visibility settings for the horizontal and vertical grid lines The Show on Load option will result in the grid being displayed each time the cross section is loaded Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Interpretation Define the data storage options for cross section interpretations Options ee xl Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen Level Intersecting Grid Interpretation W Store Soft Data Points e Save All Contacts Help The cross section editor now saves the cross section interpretations to the project database The interpretations are also linked to the stations that were selected for the cross section and these stations along with their interval data are also saved to the database The interpretations and the wells and corresponding interval data
172. ESRI Shape SHP files from other applications In addition to loading base maps the Map Manager tool also provides the following options e Georeference and import raster image maps e Create Annotation layers for drawing and labeling e Display Station Groups or Station Queries from the HydroGeo Analyst project as a Map Layer in the Map Project e Create contour maps of selected fields eg Elevation GW Elevation concentrations e Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields e Send maps to the Report Editor for printing e Created girded data file GRD For more details please refer to Chapter 8 Map Manager 6 Cross Section Editor The Cross Section Editor provides an interface for viewing two dimensional geological cross sections for borehole data and creating and interpreting cross section layers Cross sectional layers can be digitized using conventional GIS drawing tools Once the cross sections have been defined the images may be loaded into the Report Editor for printing or the cross section image may be exported to a graphics file format Additionally one or more cross sections may be sent to the 3D Explorer for viewing site lithology in a fence diagram format The Cross Section Editor allows for three types of layer interpretations e Geologic layers that define the geologic layers eg sand clay till bedrock etc for the displayed stations e Hydrogeologic layers that define the hydrogeol
173. Editor allows for three types of data interpretations e Geologic containing lithology structure data e Hydrogeologic containing locations of aquifers aquitards etc e Model containing locations of model layer lines which may be used in numerical groundwater modeling The Cross Section Editor provides users with the following key features e Digitize geologic and hydrogeologic layers using the polygon draw tool e Select standard cross section fill patterns from the Geology e Copy zones from geology layers in order to define hydrogeology zones e Display the locations of intersecting layers and other cross sections using symbols and labels e Display water table location in cross section view e Dynamically view the spatial orientation of the boreholes in the Map Preview Window simply move the mouse over the 2D borehole to highlight its location on the map e View the orientation of cross sections as they relate to the Map Preview Window e Define properties of intersecting features other layers or cross sections e Display screened interval in cross section view e Modify labels for lines and polygons e Zoom in out and pan features e Launch cross section for viewing in the HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer e Export cross section view to image format e Export model layer points for use in groundwater models including Visual 317 MODFLOW e Send cross sections to the Report Editor to be included in a report template e Copy wi
174. FA Description Data type Unit oi type STRING IN a Es Patten Unit categor V Consistency gory V Structure z V ASTM Descriptor V Color View Settings Z vaa Field name v formation_name V formation_unit soil_type J Read only IV moisture Default value Unit Y comment II o 4 Hydrogeology 4 Modelling Format Depth rules H V features y 4 Well Construction HM Soil Testing Get values from list 4 Soil Sampling Saut y aera cep maa ONS Soil List Y E Allow values only from list H V Monitoring Event ai A H Mining Exploration Validation rules H Geophysics Left Right 4 Well History v X M User Category x FXAQE I Last Change 06 18 2004 2 44 34 PM Close Help The Database Settings section of the interface allows all users to define Field name this name will be used only for identification in the SQL Server database Data type Unit Category applicable for Double data types only Units applicable for Double data types only The following field types are available e Long Field must contain an integer value e String Text or numbers use for descriptive items e Double Real numbers used for storing measured values such as measurements or concentrations e Bit Field contains a tick box e Image Field can be used to store a raster image e DataStamp Field contains date value e TimeStamp Field contains a time value e DateTimeStamp Field contains a date and time value Th
175. G Rows 15 Time 0 0 0 15 Under the Having frame a condition may be applied to the Group By field For example if the query results are grouped by the field County it may be necessary to locate the MAX result in each county or the total COUNT in each County To do so right click in the Having frame and select Add Row Group By List Field station county Having Operator Value Operator COUNT station county gt 1 z Add Row Delete Row e Specify a Function select from Aggregate options listed below e AVG Returns the average value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e COUNT Returns the number of items in a collection e MAX Returns the maximum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e MIN Returns the minimum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e STDEV Returns the sample standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e STDDEVP Returns the population standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e SUM Returns the sum of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e VAR Returns the sample variance of a numeric expression evaluated Creating Queries 231 over a Set using the unbiased population formula e VARP Returns the population variance of a numeric expression evaluated over a set using the biased population formula Reference http msdn microsoft com library e Specify a
176. G E F sampling_reason STRING CO Requires a unit to be selected O Required field C Foreignkey Linked Fields Total of records 125 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Under Destination Soil sampling for the new Destination Data Category soil_chemistry for the new Destination table Under Source Table Sheet1 if it is not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the field names in the source are identical to the field names in the destination However the station_name field must be manually mapped Under the Source first row in the table Station_name from the combo box Click on the result_unit field Use if not already selected Next to continue Read the warning message that appears Yes to continue A second warning message will appear as shown below 58 Chapter 2 Getting Started Information E x e Destination table soil_chemistry does not hawe a primary key D The imported data will be appended to this table not updated OK to continue The next window is Data Validation If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one shown below Data Transfer System Import J E 0 x Step 4 Data Validation Errors arnings Description Field Name of records Preview x Y Rowl
177. GA project folder and the SQL Server database 1 5 Learning to use HydroGeo Analyst There are several ways of getting acquainted with HydroGeo Analyst including using the Demo Guide located on your installation CD ROM the Getting Started tutorial in Chapter 2 and the On Line Help User s Manual 16 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Please contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic if you require further training on HydroGeo Analyst for yourself or your company or on other software that is developed and distributed by Waterloo Hydrogeologic 1 5 1 HydroGeo Analyst On Line Help This manual is supplied to you in two forms as a printed book and as an On line Help file To view the On Line help version of this manual select Help gt Contents Some HydroGeo Analyst windows and dialogs contain Help buttons which load the appropriate help section for the current active component The HydroGeo Analyst Help window is divided into three main areas e A Navigation Frame on the left displays the Contents Index Search and Favorites tabs e A Toolbar across the top displays a set of buttons to help navigate through the HydroGeo Analyst Help system e A Topic Frame on the right displays the actual Help topics included in the On Line Help The tabs in the Navigation Frame provide the core navigational features as described below Contents The Contents tab displays the headings in the Table of Contents in the form of an expand
178. Group Field the group field must be selected from one of the fields specified in the Group By List e Select an Operator and a corresponding Value e Repeat for additional conditions e Multiple conditions must be linked by selecting an appropriate Operator AND OR e Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query e Click Close to exit the Query Builder and click Yes when prompted to save changes NOTE For Data Queries if aggregation options are selected then the same fields in the Display Fields must also appear in the Group By options 7 3 2 Station Group Query Example A Station Group query is used to segregate stations that meet specified criteria into a separate station group The stations groups that are generated using a query are called Dynamic because the station compliment of these groups may change as new data is entered for the stations The stations groups that are user defined are referred to as Static because they do not change unless the user makes the changes manually Follow the steps below to create a Station Group query e If the Query Builder is not yet lo
179. If the report pages are cut off return to the designer window to re size the chart area or add a page break The Report can be saved now to be recalled later on fa Save button from the toolbar The report will appear in the HGA Project browser under the Reports Queries node Feel free to modify additional properties of the chart by returning to the Report Designer right clicking on the chart control and selecting the Properties option from the menu In the Chart properties you may modify axis symbol and line properties in addition to numerous other features An example is shown below with some of the chart properties enhanced An example of the modified chart is displayed below Creating Reports with Charts 439 440 Report query report This concludes Chapter 11 lor Helge ve 00 an IEA RRA gee os A TVOC Concentrations at Monitoring Wells name w23 nse 800 w23 nse 240 4 TVOC ugl May 1996 Jul 1996 Chapter 11 The Report Editor 12 Borehole Log Plotter The Borehole Log Plotter BHLP is a tool that can be used to display detailed information pertaining to a well borehole Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for each formation e Description of the geologic formation e The depth and or elevation of each layer e Well construction details casing screens annular fill e Charts that display on
180. MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports f Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start Database Fonts Charset Importing options Default ANSI Reports Comment Module Text JV Strip sourcecode typedecls handler prefixes Options V Convert MSGraph Chart Controls JV Use ADO For Data Control instead of DAO Convert Finish Press the Next button to start converting selected reports Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Click on the Next button to start converting the report to the Report Editor s native format A dialog will appear displaying the progress of the report conversion Once conversion is completed the dialog displays the summary report as shown in the following figure 428 Chapter 11 The Report Editor lz Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 eK Starting conversion eK Conversion complete The Following report were converted from database Summary report WJosimar visual Pocos Sistemas Visual Pocos Project xSectionSample mdb to WHI Report gt Relationships for CrosSection Click the Finish button and the converted report will be displayed in the runtime designer Once all desired modifications are done to the report 1t can be saved using the procedure discussed earlier The final report can be visualized by clicking on the Report Preview on the toolbar 11 5 Creating Reports with Charts Various types of charts can be added to your report using t
181. Name and Password This will allow HydroGeo Analyst to automatically log on to the Server each time the project is opened Note If you cannot see your local WHI instance of SQL Express when creating a new project or opening an existing project please refer to 15 7 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s for some troubleshooting suggestions After the Server is selected HydroGeo Analyst will automatically scan the Server for valid SQL databases These databases will then appear in the combo box beside Database You have the options of using an existing HydroGeo Analyst database to host your project or creating a new database on the specified server In this example a NEW database will be created on the local machine Chapter 2 Getting Started Beside Database select Create New Database from the combo box The following dialog will appear Database name Name OF Cancel Help type SampleDatabase Click OK ee Next gt to create the new database and proceed to the Step 2 in the Project Wizard 2 1 2 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables The second step in the Project wizard contains the Database Structure settings which includes the database template for the new project These options are shown in the figure below Project Wizard BEES Step 2 Create project dependent tables Select a Project E This step allows you to create the Templates tables that will be used
182. New Lab Quality Template on page 488 e Applying a Lab Quality Template on page 492 e Generate QC Results on page 493 485 13 1 Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis 486 Your QC Blank duplicate and spiked samples should be entered in the same table and fields as your original samples If a Duplicate sample was collected at an existing station then create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code D You must also define a common batch ID for duplicates to indicate that they belong together If you want to compare the duplicate to its original sample you must add the appropriate Original Sample Quality Code O to each original sample If a Blank sample was collected it can be added as a new station and sample or as a new sample to an existing station Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code B For Spiked samples you must add two types of samples codes and results e The first will be a sample that contains the known spiked concentration for each parameter Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code ST for Theoretical Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the amount of constituent that has been added for every spiked parameter e Next add the analyzed spiked sample as a new sample Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Co
183. OE a od eeaeaatowe 11 3D Subsurface Visualization with 3D Explorer cocccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnononononon nono nn nnnnnnnnnnno 11 Reporte and Prine SAA AO ESA anes uavanad wAccbel os 12 Repor DS GCE o is 12 Interface to Visual MODFLOW and other WHI Software ccccc cc cesceccesceccecescescescecccees 12 Installing HydroGeo Analyst isscsscssscccsssasesssncusvosseondasssesassoswatesanauaanssuaubnedavessaaniacsseseseaueane 13 SV Ste ii RCO IEA edi 13 EIET ETD i E ES O ION 13 Uninstalling Hydrogeo Analyst ult 14 Starine Fry CLOG CO Analys A A A Ad 15 Updatme Old PEO GCIs inmi ii Taaa 15 Learning to use HydroGeo Analyst ccccccsssssssssssscccccccccsssssssssscccccsscssssssssssccsssssesees 16 FydroGeo Analyst On Line His 17 EEE O EAEE EPE EEEE A TD TTT PE RT RS SPT TT 17 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services BSS AU a IPEP ence E NAE TEEN 17 RY OM EEA ae pe aces sce sates bccn Sacer cece ese TAEA OI ec aad og et cae ecco 17 Aboutthe Interact Ebo eae 18 O rete Cen em 19 Sone LAS b o AMA A Oa eaat 19 ata Query TaD sei esis aes e E tnd aacmnemaaanteanmmalabasomnen sae 19 so EV BG N D 1 re Bed A A IR eg Dan O Ot PO RR TEES BE Te LE 19 Mao MBa eenaa e a a 21 Tool a a o e meen ie Me Sere 21 POTS CE BROWSED 1 E E ies se T E 24 OLILE KOLU E E E AT N E E E E E O 24 Station Data Data Cate noreste i E a EEE 24 OS D E A A A PRL aces AEE A T E A T A 24 A EAEI EEES A E A A IIA 25 IV ADDS A O eee 25 A rt RN OU
184. P Ready V Use current projection system Conditions depth to bedrock i pre d Operator description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling MM hd awitharina Ci seact P Source Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 NOTE The Map and BHLP Ready option ensures that the query will contain the required fields enabling it to be plotted on a Map Manager BHLP project The required fields are Station ID X and Y and Station Name If this option 1s checked the required fields must be added and cannot be modified NOTE The Query Builder allows you to create map ready queries in the project s projection system When the queries are executed X and Y coordinates are displayed in the lat long format however when the query is executed through the main HGA window or exported to CSV MS Access or XML the X and Y coordinates will be displayed in the current projection system Creating Queries e Press the F Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string 1s invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the f Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to 225 226 execute the query string e Select the SQL View Pre
185. Picture column and a dialog will appear with options to load the desired graphics for the list item Click in the Check box under the Include column in order to make this list item available to HydroGeo Analyst List items can be turned on off as desired 145 in order to limit the amount of items displayed in HydroGeo Analyst For example a list of chemical names only certain groups of chemicals may be needed at times In those circumstances the list can be shortened by turning off all unnecessary groups of chemicals e Enter a Description for the list item if necessary e Repeat these steps to add additional list items until the desired list is created e Click the 7 button to save the list e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 148 for more details Generating Lists List items may also be generated using existing data The data could be an existing value in the current database for the selected field or could be a list from an external source To extract all existing unique entries from the current database for the selected field e Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for the list e Click on the B Import from current database button at the bottom of the window The List Editor extracts all unique entries that hav
186. Project Manager 166 This chapter presents information on how to create new projects and modify the properties of existing projects HydroGeo Analyst is designed to manage databases storing data for multiple projects A project in HydroGeo Analyst refers to a set of data with common elements Some of these common elements may be location nature of the data or the purpose for which the data is collected and stored A project can be created in an existing HydroGeo Analyst database in which case it will be able to share some of the available existing data For instance if the new project is created in an existing database containing all groundwater monitoring locations in a Province State where the project is located the project may share all or part of the information stored in this database Chapter 4 Project Manager A project can also be created in a completely new database in this case HydroGeo Analyst provides a step by step Project Wizard that assists with the project creation process Loading the Project Wizard The Project Wizard can be launched in two ways e Select Project New from the HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu OR e Click on the E New button on the HydroGeo Analyst toolbar A prompt will appear for the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials X User Name Fassword HGA includes a default user Admin with no password If you have modified this user or
187. Query results grid into the Report Manager see section 7 7 on page 239 below The data displayed in the grid may be exported to an external file or to the Report Manager Right mouse click on the grid and select Export Grid or use the menu command Project Export Grid and the following dialog will appear Save As H EI Save in E Borehole ES ER pal A P station cey File name Jeholes_G edlogic_Descnption _ Hydrogeology Save az Ippe Text Fcey Cancel i Tent cow Select the appropriate file format and enter a file name then press Save 7 7 Printing Query Results Using the WHI Report Editor you may insert Query results into a report template for fast and easy printing To send the query results to the report editor e Select Project Report from the main menu or Exporting Query Results 239 e Click on the print button 4 on the toolbar In the Reporting component the query may be saved or printed For more information please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor 240 Chapter 7 Queries 7 8 Crosstab Queries 7 8 1 Introduction Crosstab queries are special types of queries that allow you to store your data in a normalized manner in your database but generate and display pivoted denormalized outputs from that data In other words crosstab queries let you format existing data queries by rotating rows to columns to see different summaries of the source data for easier analysis an
188. Query tab as described below Managing Queries 237 7 5 1 Data Query Tab The Data Query tab in the HydroGeo Analyst main window provides an interface for executing the queries and searches HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects NewDemo mei i zigi x Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help a ez ShtXxXRAaAlBRBRH S BES SM a n Eaa Station Groups a Station List Gy Data Query E Station Data H S Station Data S E Queries Station Group Database T ables E avg _waterlevel_per_date e od aa x y name layer_name top_elevat thickness interpretatior Ba cross_section_model_interpretat 1 24 535212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 Topography 00000072527 10000001512 Model Eg cross_tab_example 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 BottLayerl 00000057407 0 Model B diver_data 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 BottLayer2 00000057407 10000070855 Model By max_btex_concentration 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 BottLayer3 99999986552 19999865517 Model BB max_water_level 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 Medium Sand 99999908833 19999363255 Geology B pce exceeds 10 mg per kg and 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 Gravel 99999972507 19999151006 Geology ME pluma data 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 Coarse Gravel 00000072527 10016369393 Geology E 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 Fine Sand 00000057407 10000867341 Geology Ey ac_lab_analysis 24 536212 6899 4814029 999 GB 01 Silt
189. RD files created in the map project by interpolating the current layer The gridded surfaces can also be used in the 3D Explorer V3D The V3D folder contains all of the 3D Explorer project files Any saved scene configu rations will also be located in this folder e Name 3XS This is the 3D Explorer project file XML file format e BMP any map image sent from the map project will be saved in bitmap format bmp e BPW any bitmaps tagged with georeference details XSection The xsection folder contains all of the cross section information from your project In the xsection folder there is a subfolder for each cross section created in the project i e AA BB etc The subfolders contain all the shapefiles associated with the cross section X Inter The XInter subfolder contains the shapefiles from the map project for the cross section line BHLP The BHLP subfolder contains image files for any borehole log plots drawn on the cross section BHLP images are saved as EMF format Appendices 15 3 Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing The Microsoft Data Link Properties dialog appears throughout HydroGeo Analyst whenever an option to import data or entities or Build a connection string exists A few examples are e Importing lists in the List Editor e Importing tables in the Template Manager The following section describes briefly an example of how to Build a connection string and import
190. S oiss 200 sccvers A TE T 367 D rme GS a E A A 367 RSet oO pllOns sonnan a a 369 Project Display SeN S sa a a lisa 369 ASAS ASPAS cas 371 Sitemap Display SCCM GS a id 371 Surtaces Display SEUS di 312 IONO eea o ER E e 373 Plumes Dipli Seine Stilo ral 374 BO IE e E A A E A EAS 375 Color Maps eonen A R E a N 377 Bohne MAPS ects tcsacduoastadirddanscedesdunmtanseadiats bod cecuvatied E 379 Dine Color Pale he ad dad nal caster 382 Ine Color Lecend eison id obio iia 384 Cross Section Data Dis play Sets Aoi Aisa 384 CTOSS ECHO SS AROS a ii ld A A nantes 385 Stations DIS Play SE UNOS alcala mintiendo A E ANEN EO daniela 385 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Layer interpretation CUMS oaa a E NAN 385 Creating Slices and Cross Sections sssssssscececccsssssssccecocosssssceccoccosssssccececssssssseeeeossssss 386 reaime a Vertu calle a a 387 Creatinesa Hornzontal SICE cisi r ea ia 388 Selectine a Cross SECHONAL SCE eerren e a Gadensndavuntscddans 388 PEUN S HE ora E a TA 389 MOHO MC ici ri tia 389 Scene COMMOUFATIONS critica 389 Saving and Exporting Options iio ccnceceasasarsvesexavecessestvaccncescacssassvesves eaccecssseecsensesse 390 Savino ba KO 2X6 aii tienta 391 Pru tino the 3D mazo iia 391 11 The Report Editor 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000OIOIOIIIIIAAAAA 393 NN susceiesiwastudededieisadedsoidebecaeuesdwaseudedecsaeseeledasuasdedenusstosensondvacnese 393 Report Destoner VW ING OW sii
191. Senes SeN a A A Add 511 Addine Lines toa Plot aiii ironico iaa rica 513 LEEN Nas 514 Savine and EXPOLIO iii arcaicas 514 sarm Plot Pase Desert eria a T 515 Savine Plotas Lemplate id 515 Deleting Plot Templates a A DOS 515 Export Plot Page to Graphies le sd 516 Copy Plot to CAPI I aieiaa a a 516 EXport Plot Page to DOCUMENT ita 516 A A A AA 516 A AAA e o 17 Appendix A HydroGeo Analyst File Types ccccccssssssssscsccccccccssssssccccsesscees 517 FydroGeo A alyst Marni Module a E 517 Map Manae canara ene oaa S eet ye 517 Cross SecCulOn EMO srana SA eee 518 SID EX PIORCl ys isa 518 A Sadish E E il 518 Appendix B Project Files and Directory Structure cccccssccccccccsssssssseessssees 519 Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing srrrsssssees 521 Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings cccccsssssssscscsssssssssssssssssssseees 529 A o AA e N E 529 Narak Ne DDOL a aba 530 A O ETNE EEI T E A A EN E E E AET 531 Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes ccccccccsssssssssssssscsssssssssscccccccscssssssssssscsees 535 Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources ssssssssssecccececcccccocossssssscsecceccceececosssossssssooe 537 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ S ssssssscososssssssscccceceececcsososssssssoe 544 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Preface Schlumberger Water Services SWS is a recognized leader in the develop
192. Specify whether or not the bottom border line will be displayed if the frame spans across multiple pages Sub Report ReportName Sets gets name for the sub report Chapter 11 The Report Editor Page Break Enabled Allows you to enable or disable the page break OLE PictureAlignment Set the alignment of the contents within the frame Barcode BarWidth Set the width of the thinnest line in the code Caption In barcode the caption is the set of symbols alphanumeric you want to code Direction Set the direction in which the code will be written EnableCheckSum Set whether the checksum is used when the code 1s rendered ActiveReport DocumentName The document name appears in the print spooler and can be used to easily identify the report MaxPages Sets or returns the maximum number of pages ActiveReports will process Once the number of maximum pages is reached ActiveReports will stop processing the report This property can be used to limit the number of output pages when running large reports and distributing the results over a slow connection Report Designer Window 405 WaterMark Adds a specified image to the report s background The watermark image can be positioned sized aligned and placed on specified pages by using the other watermark properties 11 2 3 Using the Report Designer 406 Report Explorer The Report Explorer as shown in the figure below allows you to browse through
193. The Project Manager allows you Server to create a database for y Y Windows NT Integrated Authorization abate oa cala ps pied User Name sa GEO In this first step select a SQL Password Server on which your project s database will be created and Database STE AA y select create the database on that server Build Connection String F Next Cancel B Help HydroGeo Analyst requires a MS SQL server to host the project database A server can be any computer on your network which has MS SQL Server 2005 Express installed or an installation of WHI SQL Express installed The WHI SQL Express can be installed on your hard drive as part of the installation process If the WHI SQL Express is installed 1t will be setup as the default database server This will allow your local computer to act as a server for new projects The MS SQL Server 2005 Express is a data engine built and based on core MS SQL Server technology If you are working on a stand alone computer then the MS SQL server would be your computer and the server name would be the name of your computer as it appears in your General System Properties followed by the abbreviation WHP For example if your computer s name is John the MS SQL Server name would be John WHI Once the server is selected select from an existing database on this server or create a new database HydroGeo Analyst allows you to 1 Select from a
194. Upon selecting this option an Open dialog will display shown below Chapter 8 Map Manager DEM Canada El AF AL txt E AFA1_grid txt NED E Bedrock txt raw ESRI Format binarw grid File grd Surfer calpts grd Files of type All supported files grd dem asc tt Y Cancel ZA Locate and select a surface file and select Open The following dialog will display where you can specify a Name Projection Type Projection system and Description The surface projection system must be the same as the projection system defined for the Map Project For example if your Map Project is set to the NAD83 projection system you must select NAD83 for the surface layer Map Project f x Name Description DEM_UTM This is a zamplel Projection Typ FC Geographic f UTM State Planar f Non Earth Projection Unit f Others NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17H meters DK Cancel H Help Once the surface layer settings have been defined click Ok The Color Settings dialog shown below will appear Description of Menu Items 267 268 Color Settings 3 E x Color Palette 330 3549 356 0289 Zebra 333 56415 336 7734 339 99265 343 1915 ad ddar d xX a S Transparency 2 JO al as eee METE La The Color Settings dialog allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of elevation values e The Cl
195. Water quality standard 14 2 1 Add Plot To add a new plot to the design click the Add button in the toolbar or right click on the Plot Page Design node in the tree view and select the Add plot menu option The following Add plot dialog will appear Adding Plots 501 Plot Details xX Mame Plot Type Time Series Template None M Set as Default Template eee In the Name field enter the name of the plot The Type combo box contains the supported plot type currently only Time Series scatter plots are supported however future versions of HGA will support numerous types of Geochemistry and Statistical plots In the Template combo box select the desired plot template that should be applied to the new plot The plot template contains numerous pre defined settings for axis data series style settings etc If you want to re use the same template again in the future select the Set as the default template check box For details on creating plot templates see Saving Plot as Template on page 515 Click OK when you are finished to display the new plot in the viewer window The next step is to map the fields 14 2 2 Field Mappings 502 Under the Data Source tab you can define the field mappings for the plot as shown in the screenshot below Settings Data Source Query Plot Grouping Series Grouping ae Time Value Units Label ND_factor Detection Limit Uncertainty Standar
196. Waterloo Hydrogeologic Software We also develop and distribute a number of other useful software products for the groundwater professionals all designed to increase your efficiency and enhance your technical capability including e Visual MODFLOW Premium e HydroGeo Analyst e Aquifer Test Pro e AquaChem e GW Contour e UnSat Suite Plus e Visual HELP e Visual PEST ASP Visual MODFLOW Premium Visual MODFLOW Premium is a three dimensional groundwater flow and contaminant transport modeling application that integrates MODFLOW 2000 SEAWAT 2000 MODPATH MT3DMS XVIII MT3D99 RT3D VMOD 3D Explorer WinPEST Stream Routing Package Zone Budget MGO SAMG and PHT3D Applications include well head capture zone delineation pumping well optimization aquifer storage and recovery groundwater remediation design simulating natural attenuation and saltwater intrusion HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst is an information management system for managing groundwater and environmental data HydroGeo Analyst combines numerous pre and post processing components into a single program Components include Project Wizard Universal Data Transfer System Template Manager Materials Specification Editor Query Builder QA QC Reporter Map Manager Cross Section Editor HGA 3D Explorer Borehole Log Plotter and Report Editor The seamless integration of these tools provide the means for compiling and normalizing field data analyzing and reporting s
197. Y plots as a line or bar chart Add legends and data marker labels to plots Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simultaneously Display non detect uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols Display one or more water quality standard values as a line or symbol for quick detection of samples that exceed the standards Define data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Modify display properties including axis labels symbols legends and intervals Print plots to a single or multiple pages Save plot settings as templates for re use Export plots to graphics format Copy plots to Windows clipboard 497 14 1 About the Interface Once you have created and selected a data query you may create a plot with the data set The plot component may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e To create a new Plot Page Design right click on the Plots node on the Project Browser and select New from the pop up menu e Existing plots can be opened from the Plots node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired plot in the available list or by right click
198. _chi 1 pur The chart should be added to the GroupFooter1 section of the report design Ti Chart Object button from the toolbar Using your mouse draw a rectangle in the GroupFooterl area of the report design that nearly fills the allotted space A sample plot image will appear as shown below 436 Chapter 11 The Report Editor FAs Slonn oss lox OMxl io je I I Mc oo E De lad abl a SROs um PBOMOAS ar fear E B MainReport H PageHeader H GroupHeaderl H Detail DA GroupFooter1 OR H PageFooter z sample date E GroupHeader pes Custom Name Chart2D1 Height 2409 Left 213 Tag E E 2 ie a r A ES Top 142 E Ep i sample dates AE EFE A Visible True E GroupFooter z pons be l Width 6874 E PageFooter To modify the chart settings er fi Charts Manager button from the toolbar The dialog shown in the figure below will be displayed Charts Manager Chart D1 El Plot Series On Series Label gt Axis Field Y Avis Field 1 Primary Asis Serie 2 Primary Asie Serez 3 Priman Asie Sered 4 Primary Asis Seret Add Remove Ok Cancel Apply This dialog allows you to add as many series as desired and select the fields that will be used as the data source for the horizontal X and vertical Y axes For this example only one series is required Use the Remove option to delete Series 2 3 and 4 Creating Reports with Charts 437 438 For Series 1 define the followi
199. a N aaaea eaei 237 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services ME UIA fasts cn oe cman EE E a E E E EE E N A E A EE E 257 O E eusansonagaadsbucnasmstesaceneasuinanlasamauecwenatocagsus aud adleck oe saaou S 237 Recalling Queries in HydroGeo Analyst ssssccsscccccsssssssssssccccccccccssssssssscscsesseeees 237 Data Quer Tab iia 238 IX POPUNS Query Results sernir R 239 Printing Query Results ssie aeee ENE 239 AAA PP O 241 o A O 241 CE a Crossta DUI Ir aesSES 241 A O 243 A E Ne ar Oo rn ener Sone PO E MO rrr RO E CTR T E pT Metre heen tom 246 AOE O O Ne oes ET 246 Generation REPON atra osas 247 Crosstab Fable Display Se ines iaa iio di 249 Data Marker Setini S ta Gok aeeaanan een coe seed neces 251 Printing Crosstab Reports as 232 Oe Map Manager ana O ADout Me Intertace cnisa A alan ddelas 256 Groupine Layers oen a a A 258 Description Of Toolbar ems tad T N T 259 Description ot Menu ems sirere e E E E 262 PROP dr rodas caia 262 DS IO COP TEN A II O coon aad eee EAT TEA E EE 262 O 262 Ee a A AEE E E TE EAT E ECE MIEN URES eN E eer E treet Teen eer 262 EA PP E TA T AE TAE EE EEA 262 SE o E E E E E E E ES EEE cts E E E E E EE 263 RECODO A O E ET 263 EXPO A il eo In 263 EXPOLIO 263 A cance E suas nace duasosmanatiassosnaaamauoee oaiincanesGmicaanentseetts 264 A ses tue Gah aenues casneetal ug Gi tantii yeas gets Saae a sya acc agains Aaated seam cneNoanastGd ati cam mane tue oaatacannmanete 265 A O thts tananeettaanassusnde r
200. a Transfer System Import 5 x Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table sheet X Map source fields to destination fields Unit Conditions DOUBLE LONG DOUBLE m DOUBLE vV to DOUBLE m e to_ DOUBLE m V soil_type STRING soll_type STRING v form_desc gt STRING form_desc STRING X consistency STRING E X structure STRING X matgsc STRING X colour STRING X odor STRING E X formation_name STRING y formation_unit STRING E bd moisture STRING L y comment STRING CO Requires a unit to be selected CO Required field 1 Foreignkey Linked Fields Total of records 78 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Under Destination Geologic Description for the new Destination Data Category Lithology for the new Destination table Under Source Table Sheet1 if it is not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the field names in the source are identical to the field names in the destination However the ID field must be manually mapped and the units must still be selected for the length field types m for the units for the From_ and To_ fields Use for both th
201. a Vertical XZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the Y axis and the Y axis values are displayed in the fields labelled Y1 and Y2 Alternately a Y axis value can be typed directly into this field Creating Slices and Cross Sections 387 For a Vertical YZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the X axis and the X axis value is displayed in the field labelled X1 and X2 Alternately an X axis value can be typed directly into this field When the desired location for the vertical slice has been defined click the Close button to save the vertical slice type and location The new vertical slice will appear in the Surfaces window 10 4 2 Creating a Horizontal Slice To create a horizontal slice through the domain click the Horizontal button to open a Horizontal slice properties window as shown below A yellow outline of the horizontal slice will appear in the Display Screen Horizontal slice properties Ea 2 value 31 0 0 The Slider Bar moves the horizontal slice along the vertical Z axis and the corresponding slice elevation is displayed in the field labelled Z value When the desired location for the horizontal slice has been selected click the Close button to save the slice type and location The new horizontal slice will appear in the Surfaces window 10 4 3 Selecting a Cross Sectional Slice When adding a color map or isoline map you may also utilize cross section lines that were
202. a list of projects that have been recently opened The most recent project will appear at the top Simply select the desired project and it will be loaded into HydroGeo Analyst Import Use the Import option to import data or reports into the project database data may be imported from source files using the Data Transfer System package Data Using DTS This option allows data to be imported into the HydroGeo Analyst project database using the Data Transfer System DTS Data may be imported from the following sources e Text CSV TXT ASC TAB e MS Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as a MS Access Database MDB For more details on how to import data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Station Data This option allows for importing data from an LAS Log ASCII Standard file a standard format introduced by the Canadian Well Logging Society in 1989 The LAS file contains two types of sections e Well Information Section data related to the station location driller etc e Parameter Curve Information Sections descriptive and or measured data for one or more downhole parameters When importing the LAS file in HGA the following options are available e Import the Well Sections and Parameter Curve sections use this option if you Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst want to import a new station and one or more measured parameters for this s
203. a may be pasted into a grid cell or a text box An entire record may not be pasted in a single operation Find This menu item loads the Find window with an option to search for records which satisfy the specified criteria The Find window is shown below Find Find what Find Hest Cancel Look In id Match ny Part of Field ae Search Down Match Case 53 Help When the Find window is loaded the value in the current grid cell receiving the focus will be identified in the Find What field Beside Look In select from one of the columns in the current grid All columns which appear in the current grid will be available for selection Beside Match select from one of the following options Any Part of Field Find will attempt to locate any part of the search term in the existing records HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 125 3 2 3 View 126 Whole Field Find will locate records which match the whole field only Start of Field Find will locate records that match the start of the field The More Less button can be used to create a simple or Advanced find The Advanced find provides additional Search options Beside Search select from Up Down or All The Match Case option will match the case records with the defined option To execute a Find e Enter a word or number in the Find What field e Select a grid column from the Look In combo box e Select a Match option e Specify a Sea
204. a was imported directly to the SQL Server database it is not necessary to Post Save the changes Example Importing Water Level Data In this section we will import water level data for each station in our HGA project In most of the data models provided with HGA water levels must have an associated Screen Id When importing the water level data you need to import the Screen Id first in the Parent Tree of the database screen table THEN import the water level data into the gw_level table child table Import Screen Id Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type Screen_ld in the box that appears Ok gt a Chapter 2 Getting Started In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls screen_id xls file located in the Examples folder under the installation folder The default installation is D Program FileslHGAnalaystExamples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the screen id values will be imported to the Well Construction category screen table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below E Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pic
205. ability to use image pattern or image for 2D 3D casing e Support for reducer pipe fittings on well casing e Display annular fills in boreholes and between piezometers e Enable Disable live update e For plot columns e Allow superimposing several graphs sharing one vertical axis e Added options to show plot axis primary and secondary scales log or normal define the range for horizontal axis mix max interval e Show gridlines from the primary or secondary scale e Adjust label settings e Display a legend for the plot series e Improved options for displaying water levels on the BHLP e Show min max earliest latest observed sample e Show average water level e Customize water level symbols and labels Time Series Charting e Display time series graphs as bar charts e Display X axis data in various date time formats e Advanced color classification and graduated color options for bar charts Integration with SWS products e Export data to AquiferTest for pumping test analysis e Export data to AquaChem for water quality analysis e Import datalogger data from MON files General e Improved environmental imperial metric database templates e Improved data display for Interpretation Results e Revised and updated demo project e More unit options for storing field and lab data e Support for more image export formats in 3D explorer What s New in HydroGeo Analyst 3 1 1 2 New Features in v 3 0 The following new features are available in
206. able collapsible tree Closed book icons represent Table of Contents headings that have sub headings Index The Index tab displays the list of Help topics You can scroll to find the index entry you want or you can type in the first few letters of the keyword in the text box and the index will scroll automatically as you type Double click an index entry to display the corresponding Help topic Alternately you may select an index entry and then click the Display button to open the Help topic Search The Search tab is used to search the On Line Help documents for a word or phrase of interest Simply type the search word s or phrase s then press lt Enter gt or click the Display button Favorites You can add frequently accessed Help topics to a personal list of favorites which is displayed in the Favorites tab Once you have added a topic to your list of favorites Learning to use HydroGeo Analyst 17 you can access the topic by double clicking it Click Add to add the currently displayed topic to your favorites list Select a favorite and then click Remove to delete a topic from your favorites list 1 6 About the Interface 18 When HydroGeo Analyst is first loaded a blank window will appear indicating no project is loaded To create a new project select Project gt New to open an existing project select Project gt Open Once a project is loaded the main window will appear the HydroGeo Analyst demo project is displayed b
207. aded select the Query Builder option from the Tools menu e Select Station Group Query as the type e In the toolbar click on the New button 232 Chapter 7 Queries Creating Queries 5 New Query d x Name Description OF Cancel E Help In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the new query e g TOC Elevation Exceeds 325 m In the lower left corner of the Query window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then the combo box below will become activated From here select the appropriate Station Group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database Expand the tree on the left side of the window Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below XH amp e Station Group Query Data Query Select a Query TOCElevationexceeds325m T Description E Location Station Name T Elevation tag station type total depth depth to bedrock description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Source Condition Project v Design SOL View Preview Display Fields Function Expression
208. age 379 for more details Refer to the respective sections for instructions on how to create these display elements and for details on the display settings associated with each one The display settings shown below controls the global settings for all Plume display elements E Setting Name result_value _ Palette Visible Test size 0 015 Text color x Frame Frame line color Frame fill color Li lt i Jaga The Name option controls the display name for the plume in the tree view The Palette option controls the color scale used on all Plume display elements A description of the Palette options is available below see The Color Palette on page 382 The Color legend settings are used to modify the appearance of the color legend as it applies to all color map display elements A description of the Color legend options is available below see The Color Legend on page 384 Isosurfaces An isosurface is a 3D planar surface defined by a constant parameter value in 3D space Isosurfaces are typically used for demonstrating the spatial distribution of a selected parameter For groundwater modeling purposes isosurfaces are generally used for representing the spatial distribution of concentrations HGA 3D Explorer allows you to create and simultaneously display multiple isosurfaces for the one or more plumes in your project Creating Isosurfaces To create an isosurface click on the desir
209. aid in the interpretation e Dummy wells can be displayed at intersecting cross sections to aid in your cross sectional interpretations e When printing a cross section a legend for the cross section wells can now be displayed HGA 3D Explorer e You may display isolines contour lines for any surface that is included in the 3D project e You may specify a cut off for upper and lower contour values e You may change the color from palette for surfaces Query Builder e You may display map ready queries in the project s projection system When such queries are executed X and Y coordinates are displayed in the current projection system Borehole Log Plotter e Itis now possible to hide the well casing above ground surface 1 e display a flush mount well casing e Improved reporting features including displaying of borehole names in report table of contents TOC e Core logs images can now be added to borehole log plots from any image type field in the database General e Itis now possible to delete unwanted HGA SQL Server databases e A wide list of map projection systems have been added e A number of defects were addressed since v 1 0 What s New in HydroGeo Analyst 7 1 2 About HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst is implemented through a number of modules each performing a specific task This approach allows HydroGeo Analyst to be memory efficient flexible and expandable In addition with most of its data and settings impl
210. ails To create a Data Query select the Data Query radio button from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Queries node For more information on how to build a Data Query see Data Query Example on page 222 7 2 2 Station Group Queries Station Group Queries provide the foundations for new Station Groups these queries can be built and executed for the purpose of organizing the stations into specialized groups To create a Station Group Query select this option from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Station Groups node NOTE Station Group Queries do not have options for modifying the display fields or advanced grouping options For more information on how to build a Station Group Query see Station Group Query Example on page 232 7 3 Creating Queries 7 3 1 Data Query Example 222 Follow the steps below to create a data query e If the Query Builder is not yet loaded select the Query Builder option from the Tools menu e Select Data Query as the type in the upper left corner
211. al fields and tables for each Station are available through the Station Data tab discussed later in this section Station Data Data Categories The Station Data node displays the visible data categories under which project tables are organized Clicking on any of the data categories activates the Station Data tab if it is not already active and displays a tab for each of the tables classified under the selected data category The Station Data tab displays information pertaining to the station currently selected in the Station List tab As mentioned earlier in this manual data categories are provided to enable logical groupings of your tables Queries The Queries node lists all the queries that are created and available for the current project Double clicking on any of the queries under this node executes the query activates the Data Query tab and displays the returned results 24 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Crosstab The Crosstab node lists all the crosstab query reports that are created and available for the current project Double clicking on any of the crosstab reports under this node will load the crosstab query component where you can modify print or export the report Maps The Map node lists all map projects that are available created for the current HydroGeo Analyst project Double clicking on a map project under this node loads the Map Manager if not already loaded and opens the selected map projec
212. alyst database template Therefore a field must be manually selected from the available list and mapped to the appropriate source field The Destination frame contains the data categories and tables in the current database structure From this frame select a Category then a Table from this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Data Requirements In the previous version of HGA the DTS required all source tables to contain a numeric Station ID in order to map data to the correct stations in the stations table The benefit of this design is that the database could support duplicate station names the disadvantage was that in many situations numeric station ID was not available and had to be manually added to the source tables either by hand or through the use of queries Although numeric Station IDs are still the ideal unique identifiers for stations this is no longer a requirement You may now use Station names as a unique identifier in source tables in order to map data to the correct stations When you import stations and only the Station Name is mapped the following confirmation message will appear before Step 3 in the DTS Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System CA Station ID not currently mapped is used to uniquely identify stations in HGA 2 Would you like to use Station Names as unique identifiers For this transaction You will be prompted for action if stations wi
213. alyst project quite often it is helpful to relate this data to features on a base map and create contour maps or thematic maps Pie or Bar charts for interpreting the data This can be done using the Map Manager The first step is to create a new map project 2 5 1 Creating a Map Project In this section the Borehole stations will be loaded onto a new map project To create a new map project Mapping the Data 75 Tools gt Map Manager or right click on the Map node and select New A prompt will appear to enter a name for the new map project as shown below HE New Map Project Name Sample OF Cancel Help type Sample OK A new Map window will appear To load the stations from HydroGeo Analyst on to the map project Layer gt Load HGA Data from the menu in the Map Project window The following window will appear Load HGA Data x e Station Group C Data Query OK Cancel EJ Help Use this option to load Station Groups or Map Ready Data Queries into your map project Ensure the Boreholes Station Group is selected OK The Borehole Stations will then be plotted on the Map in the Map Project window as shown below 76 Chapter 2 Getting Started Progect Lever Cot Tool View Selec Settings Hep ETICA Hadjar POG UTM fore 29h 58441 4 012 440 Note By default Map Manager uses the projection system that is defined in the project settings Step 3 Set Pr
214. alyst will create the required tables Please be patient during this process If the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this 1s the case please select another server or database for your project or verify the connection to the selected server The next step 1s to select or create the Database Template for the project 4 2 2 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables The next window in the Project wizard contains the Database Structure settings This includes tables fields and relationships In this window choose from one of the existing database templates or create a new one as shown in the figure below Using the Project Manager 173 10 x Step 2 Create project dependent tables Select a Project E This step allows you to create the Templates tables that will be used to store your data The tables will be Environmental metric created based on a selected Database Structure Preview nadaa He Tables Fields Please select create a template y browse through the tables and Location fields that will be created and click description_addins on the Next button to proceed Geologic Description Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features Well Construction Drilling Protocol Casing Screen hd Description Copy All Stations to Project lt Back Next gt
215. ama rn atiasadaanetes Sesssaeae nonstate niieee aeeontseieatias 265 AP A o dundee ssoodsease 265 ING A O O A a PR 0 E A 265 OPE adi cas 266 Edad HAD isc died 269 TUNA A 270 A O 211 DE eA A E N Connie 211 Creal O giei E A 2I AN A E E T II A E O eset 217 SAS UCS eran a Eee aos 278 Render aaa dais ais 279 Create The mato Map nuroa 283 M od y Tire taal Map io rte caes lion 285 Create CONLOUES at ll 286 Create Gridded Dita eS 289 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services A A 297 C a T E a SO 298 COD e e O 298 PA a O A 298 ID Y AA AA A A AA A Ee A O AS 298 PS A e A 298 AN o o dd e a a rn e 298 Delete Vertex A A A NN 298 Copy Map tO CAPO dro oo cada 299 A eal E ce elses ace mate aes ees eee gees 299 o A O e Oo o O iat 299 o mmr err beT neta tent tere Veten ser eey ere CeRC Twn meer eT er ten ee 299 CIC A AE 299 A A A A NN 300 A A RC 300 O A A rakes aaa ciecna sas ei 300 A NO 300 y ASRS sires A O A II RS E A A EA 301 Denne Cross SECO ideas 301 Create Cross2S e e La a dee GRE One 302 IR shan tna aan aan EEEE ETIR eee eis ehh bia is ole A S EREE AA 302 DS A fa a a A aa E S EAS 302 DOO TAN Ne eft Nae teeta Sega he ata aoa este be Beer Sac ee a soa ce ae anaes anew 302 NOMA CN ais esata A a cle ies a a dos de ad le 302 ZOOM tO ACUE LAVET mn ee oia cda 302 SS O T 302 NA A A A A 302 A A O A A A A Y EEEE O le NO 303 TU On AM AY a an 303 TUTO A ay CMs A A ii 303 WOW A A iesaaieasbearautoosbeouets 303 O E 304 NS
216. an Excel file using the Data Link Properties For more details please refer to the context sensitive Help buttons in this module The example below applies to importing a list of fields in the template manager from an excel file To load the Data Link Properties window e Click on the Build Connection String button The following dialog will appear Es Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Excel Files f Use connection string Connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password T Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test Connection OF Cancel Help e From the top of this dialog click on the Provider tab as shown below Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 521 3122 Under the Specify the source of data E Data Link Properties Ed Prowider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DE Provider s Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DE Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for DTS Packages Ie OLE LE iS for Intenet ES Micros OLE DE zE for OLA qna Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape SQL Server Replication OLE DB Provider for DTS
217. and drag the folder to a new position in the folder list The BHLP will be re organized to reflect the order of the sub nodes under the Design node 12 4 Saving the Borehole Log Plot Once the desired BHLP design is obtained there are several saving and exporting options available e The BHLP template can be saved to be recalled later on e The BHLP image itself may be exported to a Report or an external file e The BHLP image may be printed 480 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter 12 4 1 Saving a borehole log plot design template To save a BHLP template e Click on the Save button on the BHLP designer toolbar To save a copy of a BHLP template with a new name e Click on the H Save As button on the BHLP designer toolbar 12 4 2 Exporting a borehole log plot design template It is possible to export the design and data composing a borehole log plot This is helpful if the user wants to create an XML file from the database To do so click on the Export button at the bottom of the Designer window and select from one of the export options as shown below Export current borehole Export all boreholes You can either Export the Current Borehole or Export all boreholes in your project using the current BHLP template The exported file will be saved in XML format Note To export a BHLP report to a file please see below 12 5 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting 12 5 1 Generating a borehole log report A
218. ange PassWord lianas aio iso UI osea 131 User PrI TENCE Sai ii lips 131 EOL oa aN 132 Query Bulder arroll a dae 132 Map Mana accio ados cisco 78 152 Wile Wr CLOS CECI E a 132 A e cane citesns EE 133 COSSA RGD ONL to ciclo oda 136 QUV CONU IS AO 136 Uncle 137 BackUp Database iaa 137 Restore Database ridiculos 137 Manase DADA doo 137 Pampin Testanalysis ri clio 138 Water Quality Ana SIS ca Sindeigen E ET EAE Rad eens Red aaa ts 142 A O r N aa 142 O 142 A AN 142 Template VIANAGEN sssecsenecccessspececeeacdcecacensansteacecescdepenedesasecscecensncsdesvenscedunesactesvecdeceensecess 143 PPT DOS Ce iiss hii O A AN 143 pe Me tC SC iON O ON 143 List OQ iia ii asd densssicesseussacasuneneasaseisicans 143 TANG ASU Biot cite eats see hs tush s cas haat iee anlanembeta nanan aaaieeaaasuartastiate ete sces tas donendent 144 Addie Lists Manually ads 145 Ei O ein ee de ase a caluaaciad oer nae aca estat 146 BRIMMING PISS sees terse ert canta O Ouida cepa Dac eae ee kusuanedeteaadsed satan aaeuae bee 146 Grime LIS pe 147 Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager occcccncccnonononocnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnannncnnnnnnnnos 148 Material SpeCiications Editor scccsssscessdescscssesiscccensiacdusbusascwesetaaceseussuccensdacaustusaccessesiaate 149 Creating a New Soil Classilication Systemi isineun oe coe E 150 Modifying and Deleting a Soil Classification System oooonnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnos 151 Copyright Schlumberg
219. arities and other undesirable effects may be lessened by incorporating the gradient factor The gradient influence on the results can be manipulated by two tautness parameters that the user can enter These parameters allow the interpolated surface to vary from purely linear interpolation to one which is well rounded and has the gradient factor In all cases the slope discontinuities are removed and the resulting surface has slope continuity everywhere The advanced settings parameters for the Natural Neighbor method are described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Appendices Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation pro cess and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than other wise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value o
220. art dialogue will appear allowing you to go through the procedure again and change various aspects of the chart Description of Menu Items 285 Create Contours Provides options for creating contours with data from a selected field from the selected points layer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Data to be Contoured fp Interpolator Settings Choose Field Interpolation Method Min Value 321 og Data Min 321 09 Natural Neighbours hos Advanced Settings Max Value 340 49 Data Max 340 49 Contour Type V Contour Line Name Settings Color Shade Name Settings Zebra Name Settings F Use Only Selected Stations Restrain within Domain Create Cancel Help The gridded data can be represented as the following Contour Types e Contour lines e Color shaded map e Color zebra zonations Select the desired Contour type and enter a name for the layer For each type there are additional settings that can be accessed by clicking on the Settings button See the sections below for more details on these settings Data to be contoured e Select a Field that contains the data you want to contour e Define the Min and Max values or accept the defaults Interpolation Settings e Under Interpolator Settings select the interpolation method choose from Natural Neighbor Inverse Distance or Kriging To use the advanced interpolation settings cli
221. assify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals e The Ramp option loads the following dialog Ramp ie xl Color Ramp z kd Start Color oOo End Color oOo Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 To display the value intervals in discrete color zones rather than continuous shading select the Zebra checkbox Once the color settings have been defined click the Ok button Chapter 8 Map Manager y The grid size For the selected surface exceeds 300000 nodes 4s a result loading and displaying the surface may require several a min
222. asssetialsavacnecabeesenstundaoctaesontnonnsehoedusctamennincsageeaads 419 Creating Parameter Query Reports sxccscis ees each A ieee anceean es 420 Creatine a Report Containine a Map Project isa aie nett ha Hea asec 422 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section ias 422 Creating a Report Containing 3D mages ossein epaia eai aa aS 423 Creating a Borehole LoS Repo illa 423 Eartame ter OU REPO boss 424 Managing RED OLUS seids ictcccecstcsseseastvetccdssovacesacestacedceuscesaceatecdacecuseievseseseseuestaasssesesssscentessee 424 Openins an Existin REpOrt e R anni 424 VACA A O 424 Savio REPO pal ld ae 424 a AS a O nn A a O E 424 EXportino Seneraled Te pOr ici rra ir 424 Creating and Managing Report Templates csccccssssssssssssssscccccccccccssssssssccsoees 425 Creatine A Report Template idad 426 Openinio a Report Template savas aves at iS 426 Delete A Report Lem plate cs 426 Setting a Report Template as Default Template occcccccnnnnonncnnnncnnnnnnnnnonononnnncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonoss 426 Import Reports from MS ACCESS cccccccccssssssssssssccccccccsssssssssccscccscssssssssssscssssssseees 427 Creatin Reports with Charts Sia ia 429 EXIME a it o 430 12 Borehole Log Plotter sisas 44 About the INTEFACO ico coi conectas 442 Description of Designer Toolbar Mems od 444 BHEP OU riada 444 Supported Columna Pes rl dit E 445 BEEP Delano taa as 446 Y LUCA CA OMA a 448 SEARS iS 449 Depth Poimt based CAU a li 45
223. atically created An example is shown below for the Lithology table a Spee TAA ee EA JOM BEG nana MEZZO E aaa TEEF ea BODSS erie als ele iaa The layout of the report can then be modified and unwanted fields can be removed from the design If the fields do not immediately show up in the Design window press the Refresh button in the Fields frame as circled above To see the ADO Data control for the report click on the button FA ADO button in the Detail section of the Report body design also circled above Then right click and select Properties A dialog similar to the one shown below will appear 418 Chapter 11 The Report Editor Properties oe x Provider Po DataSource ame Po UserlD FO Password FO ConnectionString Frovider SGLOLEDE 1 Integrated Security sspi Build Source SOL SELECT FROM lithology WHERE Station 27 ORDER BY Station Cancel Apply In the ADO properties under Source SQL you can see that the SQL string has been automatically created for you based on the table selected in HydroGeo Analyst In this example the SQL string basically states Select all fields from the Lithology table where the Station ID is 27 and order by Station If you are familiar with the format you may modify the SQL string here and update the report design After the report is saved a node will be created in the Project Browser under the Reports node wi
224. ating a Contour Map Contour maps may be created to quickly visualize a measured result value soil or groundwater concentrations or elevations surface or water table data In this example you will create a contour map of the surface ground elevations Boreholes layer from the Layer Manager panel to ensure that the data layer 1s active If the layer 1s active 1t will appear with a baby blue background in the layer control 82 Chapter 2 Getting Started Layer gt Create Contours from the Map Project main menu A Contours dialog will appear as shown in the following figure Elevation from the Choose Field combo box at the top of the dialog type ContourMap in the Name textbox Settings for the Contour Line contour type Contour Line Settings In the Contour Line Settings dialog type 2 for the Contour Interval Ok Create Mapping the Data 83 84 The contour map will now show up as a new map layer in the map project The contour map properties may be modified including the line thickness and color To do so ContourMap layer in the Layer Manager panel to make this active Layer gt Properties from the menu The following dialog will appear Line Style line ft Sample OF Cancel Feel free to experiment with the line properties It may be helpful to change the color and line thickness Once you are finished OK to apply the new properties T
225. ation Caption concentratior Description Description DataField D ataField k E YalueEntity Caption pressure Description DataField In the first row of the table under the Name column select the data source for the plot There are two options available Data Table or Queries If Data Table is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data tables from your database schema for which you may select one table If Queries is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data Queries available in your HGA project for which you may select one table The advantage of using Data Queries is that the fields may originate from one or several tables in your database Queries 7 tce exceeds 10 mg per kg 7 DataT able Queres The Caption corresponds to the text you entered in the Label text box of the Add a Plot Series window You can add several plot series depth and interval to one plot column All lines and shapes will be drawn in the default color and will be semi transparent so that when they overlay each other every plot is visible Be careful however with displaying plots with vastly different scales on the same plot column The plots will be shown on the same scale relative to each other so it may appear that one of the plots is hidden from view BHLP Columns 467 468 Settings The Plot column settings are shown in the following screenshots As mentioned previously the settings ca
226. axis appearance and scale settings For both the Primary and Secondary Scales there are settings for Normal or Log as well as showing the gridlines and defining the color Finally you can define the axis range for each scale accept the default Auto option in which case the data min and max will be read and used as the min and max for the axis Or de select this option and enter user defined Min Max and Interval values BHLP Settings y x Plot Are General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend Appearanc MT Show Grid Lines Color J Left Right W Show Color EI e Show Labels Font EI Label Direction Horizontal Apply OF Cancel In the Vertical Axis tab shown above you can modify the appearance settings of the vertical axis For both the Left and Right axis axis labels can be enabled disabled by selecting the Show Labels checkbox You can also change the label color by clicking on the Color box and change the font by clicking on the Font box Label Direction can be modified by making a selection from the combo box choose from horizontal or vertical direction BHLP Columns 469 BHLP Settings i x Plot re General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend i Background Color e W Outline Colar Shadow Color Under the Legend tab there are settings that control the Visibility and the Background and Outline visibility and color The specific settings for the Depth su
227. ay also display isolines These settings are displayed below Surfaces Cross Sections Data _Name SS VIBE Iv Max value 340 9045 Min value 321 0938 ElLine properties Color from palette Iv Color Width 11 _ Style Solid v BAuto intervals A S AMES yyy E SSE SESS lv Text color O Text size 17 31625 B Decimals 3 gt Box labels Box depth 3 46325 Box color You may modify the isoline properties intervals and label settings Line properties e Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type e Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color Display Settings 373 e Width is the contour line width e Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals e View shows hides the automatic lines e Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted e Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted e Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Labels The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the co
228. ayer This feature is active only when an object is selected Add Vertex button allows a vertex to be added to the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature 1s active only when an applicable object type is selected Delete Vertex button allows a vertex to be deleted from the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is selected Zoom In button allows zooming in on the map window Draw a rectangle in any direction around the area you wish to zoom in to Chapter 8 Map Manager Des eN y tt About the Interface Zoom Out button allows zooming out from the map window Pan button allows panning the current map view left right up or down Full Extent button restores the map view to the full extent of the map s coordinates Previous Extent button allows restoring the map view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button advances the map view to the next zoom extent Select Single button allows individual objects such as stations to be selected This feature 1s active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations 1s visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Rectangle button allows selecting all stations within a rectangle that 1s drawn by the user This feature 1s active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations 1s visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Polygon but
229. ayers may not have to continue from first to last borehole However to have a meaningful view of your cross sections in the 3D Explorer you must avoid creating overlapping interpretation layers When defining Geologic interpretation layers there is an option to snap the vertices of one polygon to adjacent polygons For instance if after drawing polygons and the cross section still contains gaps the gaps may be filled in by linking the vertices of the polygons using the Link Vertex option To use this option please refer to the Link Vertex section on page 325 in the Edit menu NOTE Moving a vertex of a selected polygon will also move the linked vertex of any polygons or lines that might have been linked through the Link Vertices operation Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 345 9 4 3 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing layers that define the hydrogeologic layers Aquiferl Aquitard1 Upper Unconfined Aquifer etc based on relevant data in the stations that are displayed in a cross section The hydrogelogic layers must be drawn using the polygon tool The procedure for drawing and editing these layers is identical to drawing geologic layers as explained above The position of the hydrogeologic interpretation layers may be defined based on the position of any Geological interpretations that may already be available This option is discussed below Translating Geologic Interpretati
230. b Total Depth NULL m Maps Station Type Borehole Depth to Bedrock NULL m Cross Sections Reports 3DView A Borehole Logs E Plots Data Transfer System DTS If the project database is going to store numerous stations it may be more efficient to import the data using the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS allows for importing data from the following source types e Text CSV 106 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as MS Access Database MDB SQL Server etc The DTS can be loaded by selecting Import Data from Project menu the first DTS window is shown below Data Transfer System Import y ii 10 x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name y X Description ave changes to this DTS package Select data source Note The Data Transfer System DTS allows you 2 to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access and other databases through a three to four step process Data source details Name Value In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations N
231. b node are shown in the following screenshot x E Es BHLP Depth Series ES Scale e Visible J E Plot F pop oe Plat Style Line x Jepth Seri Line Style Solid mn E well Construction Line width 4 ES Lithology ES Interval Line Color I Symbol Rect E Symbol Size 3 Symbol Color E Horizontal scale Primary axis Apply OF Cancel Plot Line and Symbol options can be configured and the Depth Series can be shown hidden using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Horizontal Scale for the plot series choose from Primary or Secondary axis 470 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter The specific settings for the Interval sub node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings t x E ES BHLP Interval Serie ES Lithology 7 Visible ES Well Construction i Scale Fill calor Ml EES Pt Trans El parency 50 EES Plot Area i ES Interval Seri Apply OF Cancel The Interval Series can be shown hidden and the Fill color and Transparency can be Set 12 2 7 Picture Column e Visible Column Options HE Lithology l Pattern Symbol Descriptio Bee Well Construction a T E 7 Visible 7 Visible Font Width 72 100 Use numeric format Image Draw Mode Centerec Format Genet Humber of digits Help Apply OF Cancel The Picture column settings are shown in the above screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted
232. bar This will load the Save Scene Configuration dialog Scene Configurations 389 se Save scene configuration for E 2 pal x Configuration Hame Ad Cancel Type the desired name of the scene in the Configuration Name field and click OK This scene configuration including attributes rotations and shifts can be loaded during a later session by selecting File Load scene configuration from the main menu bar or by clicking the A Load scene configuration button in the toolbar 10 6 Saving and Exporting Options The displayed image can be saved by selecting File Export Diagram from the top menu bar or by clicking the EH Export Image button in the toolbar The following Save picture as graphics file window will appear Width Height In the Image Size field opening the combo box shows a list of several different sizes for the image size to be saved The desired size of the image may be selected or customized by entering new Width and Height values The image can be saved to three graphics formats e GIF e Bitmaps bmp e JPEG Image File jpg 390 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Any of these graphics formats can be imported into most word processing software packages Alternately the image may be copied to the Windows clipboard by selecting Edit Copy from the menu This image can be pasted into most word processing and graphics editing programs NOTE The resolution of the graphics
233. be the same as the unit system used for the HGA project for example if your HGA project is using UTM set the AquiferTest units as meters for some State Plane set the AquiferTest units as feet Currently there is no conversion for these units Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Aquifer Test RequiedData MatchtoFied DBUnt Multiplier Soe Pumpi ping Rate pumping_rate El dida ES start_date_time Y DATE TIME STAMP End Time DATE TIME STAMP name Rob H 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 start_date_time end_ date time pumping_rate EU o zi 7293 2745 2705257 856 PWI 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw In the Pumping Rates tab the workflow is the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map the well name pumping rate and the start and end interval HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar Aquifer Test DATE TIME STAMP 86400 Pp i 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW 98 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW 98 316728 3268 2703074 082 Ow1 98 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW 141 In the Observation Wells tab the workflow is the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map the well name X Y coordinate and the observation date time and observed depth to water level Once all the required fields are defined click the Analyze button to
234. bject that is a polygon or a line depending on the active interpretation type e Click on the a button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex e Repeat the last two steps to add more vertices at other locations on the selected object 324 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex e Activate the desired cross section interpretation e Select an object that is a polygon or line e Click on the Be button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be deleted the mouse cursor will change to an X e Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object e Repeat the last two steps to delete more vertices from the selected object Link Vertex The Link Vertex option allows for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines It is intended to assist in filling in gaps between adjacent polygons or lines thus creating continuous interpretations The end result is that polygons or lines will be able to share a common linked vertex or vertices To Link Vertices on polygons or lines Select the desired interpretation layer and make it editable Select the polygon or line whos
235. ble and fields e g required fields ID X Y Elevation etc may not be deleted The Add Linked Fields button is activated whenever a field is selected in the Database Browser If this option is selected the dialog shown below will be displayed requesting the user to provide the fields that should be linked Chapter 5 Template Manager Select desired set of fields E X f Complete set of fields Short set of fields Consists of three required fields Name Value Unit field OF Cancel EJ Help The concept of linked fields is introduced in HydroGeo Analyst in order to enhance data integrity If two or three fields are linked together HydroGeo Analyst tracks changes made to values under one field and makes appropriate changes to all other linked fields as appropriate Currently a maximum of three fields can be linked together Linking three fields may be useful in storing data such as chemistry results e g chemical names result values and result units If such fields are linked you may change the result unit for any record and automatically see the result converted to the new unit This avoids the problem of changing result units without converting the result values to the appropriate unit At times 1t may be necessary to link only two fields For example when storing depth related data with variable units an additional field to store the unit for each record is required In those circumstanc
236. both within and outside station intervals Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor e Continue to move the mouse cursor across the cross section using the left mouse button at each station to add a vertex at the desired location for the model layer e At the right cross section boundary click once more with the left mouse button to add a vertex and complete the line when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the line will snap to the boundary The selected model line will be drawn at the specified location NOTE The model line is drawn using the attributes that were defined for it at the time it was created Most attributes of a model interpretation layer can be modified by right clicking on the desired model interpretation layer and choosing Properties from the pop up menu e A dialog similar to that shown below will appear Model Line E3 Mame Description Pattern Coo CM si 5 Sample OF Cancel e Provide a Description Line Style Line Color Fill Pattern for the model interpretation layer the Name for the layer cannot be modified as the name is defined in the Model Layer Options dialog e Click OK to close the dialog e Once this is finished repeat the same sequence of operations for other model layers within the cross section domain Restrictions on Model Layers The following restrictions apply when drawing model interpretation layers e The model layer line must star
237. bove the station When you are finished with the Display Settings click OK to return to the layout window Click OK once more to create the layout on the map as seen in the examples below Description of Menu Items 295 Example of Display Data Chart PARIO o Deaf cmo As xi liar 2549850 ao You can see that sample values that exceed the specified conditions TVOC concentration result value greater than 5000 ug l are shaded red for easy detection Example of Display Data Plot Project Layer dt Took Wer Select Settings Hep Joheals cmex A O4 XA kee Ree SOG ean ES55583 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o When stations are clustered 1t may be necessary to modify the display location of the callout boxes You have the option to manually move individual callout boxes to a new location to improve presentation This 1s explained below 296 Chapter 8 Map Manager Edit Layout Setting To edit the position of the callout box e Right mouse click on the map window and select Edit Layout from the pop up menu e Click once on any callout box to select it the box will become highlighted in a color outline indicating it has been selected e Left click on the callout box and using your mouse drag the box to the new location When you have done this the result could be similar to the example shown below Propet Layer Edit Too View elect Salio Help coma
238. by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Picture node from the BHLP Settings window The Picture frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button see page 447 The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the image pattern modify the Width and change the Image Draw Mode BHLP Columns 471 The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose to display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box Please refer to the Depth Point Based Column page 450 section for more information on this option 12 3 Designing a Borehole Log Plot 472 In HydroGeo Analyst only the borehole log plot templates are stored This is done so that the data for the plots will not be duplicated HydroGeo Analyst reads the necessary data for a borehole log plot from the database when displaying the plot To design a borehole log plot template select at least one borehole in the Station List grid Alternately activating a Station Group suffices for this purpose as all boreholes are assumed selected if there 1s no specific selection made in the grid Once a station group containing the desired boreholes is opened and at least one borehole is selected right click on the Borehole Log
239. cal Exaggeration f 7 Stay on top Iv Default Settings a 5 6 HGA3D Sand Eee tend A ee E Er Axis 534000 535000 E O 537000 538000 H Site maps Boulder Clay E Surfaces H 6 Cross Sections Data Clay 4815000 Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Gravel 814900 L Medium Sand 4 Sand 48130 Silt lt 1 41 Rotate Shit Light Position x Lal Y 4 z LJ IV Live Update Apply Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side The Geologic Interpretations will be displayed by default To better visualize the fence diagram make the following changes to the view and grid orientation At the top of the 3D window locate the Vertical Exaggeration factor field type 10 for the Vertical Exaggeration Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 95 96 lt Enter gt on the keyboard Next rotate the grid so that you can view the fence diagram from the side To do so locate the Navigation Tools at the bottom of the window these tools contain 3 tabs that control the Rotate Shift and Light Position options By default the Rotate tab will be selected and will contain three slider bars one for each of the X Y and Z axes X Slider bar and slowly drag this to the left Watch the 3D grid rotate as you do this Stop when you have reached a satisfactory side profile of the fence diagram Next Y Slider bar and slowly drag this to the right
240. can be renamed both in the database as well as in the template view settings Table Property Settings Information related to all user tables can be edited through the Template Manager The Template Manager allows all users to set the visibility status of any selected table To make a table visible or hidden check or un check the tick boxes that are provided in front of the table name in the Project Browser Adding Tables A table can be added by selecting a data category in which the table is to be created and then either by clicking on the oF Add button at the bottom of the window or by right mouse clicking and selecting the Add table pop up menu item Template Editor Demo N z oj x environmental_june30c n pai iA ay Fm I Use as project default Database structure Category Settings Descriptions iption T Database Settings Table name A gy IV from IV to IV Description V soil_type JV Pattern IV Consistency IV Structure V ASTM Descriptor V Color Y Odor V formation_name JV formation_unit JV moisture V comment H Hydrogeology H Modelling H V features V Well Construction V Soil Testing V Soil Sampling V Monitoring Event 4 Mining Exploration V Geophysics IM Well History View settings FT User Category ha i o Deo iS 7 ame eologic Description OX 2 QE ID H Last Change 06 30 2004 1 31 40 PM Ee Hel
241. ce a report is generated and displayed on the Viewer it can either be saved in the Report Editor s native binary format printed or exported to various formats that are supported by the Report Editor Using the button on the toolbar reports can be exported to e Portable Document Format PDF e Microsoft Excel e TIFF e Hyper Text Markup Language HTML and e Rich Text Format RTF Please see Exporting generated reports on page 424 for more details Saving Reports Saving the report design as opposed to the final report is preferable as the design requires a smaller storage space for most reports and the reports that are generated from a saved report design are dynamic they are up to date with the data stored in your database However reports that are saved from the Viewer are static and they may not reflect the exact content of the current data To save the report press the fa Save button from the Viewer window s toolbar The Report will be saved as a RDF file archive file HydroGeo Analyst stores and manages all report designs in your project database All reports that are created for your project will be retrieved from the database and are listed in the Project Browser when your project is loaded into HydroGeo Analyst 11 4 Report Settings The Report Settings dialog can be accessed by clicking the Page Report button from the Main Toolbar This dialog consists of four sections Page Setup Printer Set
242. ced accurately To add a control point e Click the button from the toolbar e Click a location on the raster image where the real world coordinates are known A dialog similar to the one shown below will display Controlpoint AS 2 536997 2879747 Ye 481 3771 400565 P 485 p 303 e Coordinates shown in the above dialog X2 Y2 represent the interpolated coordinates derived from the two or three specified georeference points for that particular location on the image You can validate the accuracy of these Description of Menu Items 213 coordinates by comparing them to the real world coordinates of that location Note To improve precision you may want to Zoom In directly on the location before adding the control point e Click Ok to accept the Control point You can add additional control points by simply clicking on a different location on the raster image All control points are stored in a table Shown below which can be accessed by clicking Edit Control Points from the menu bar E 536997 287974739 4813771 40058556 meen 535061 246412517 461 4493 1 401 4687 gt 537074 361637415 4013506 30015671 536355 327178395 4012577 93076004 535631 637094599 4015653 15720517 1537571 759289336 4012201 09712205 534812 301152791 4015042 0023390236 538122 215810651 4013272 3201155 Cancel Here you can review all of the control points To delete a control point simply click th
243. cessary grouping 11 5 1 Example 430 The following example illustrates the procedure for creating a time series chart in the HGA Demo project For this example you will chart the TVOC chemical concentrations observed at the Monitoring Wells The first step is to create a data query which will contain the fields of interest To do this open the Demo project then load the Query Builder For help please see Chapter 7 Queries Tools Query Builder from the main menu Data Query radio button E New button Define a name for the query in the dialog that appears type Chart TVOC OK In the lower left corner of the Query Builder window select the Source Conditions The options are Project Station Group and Database Station Groups Monitoring Wells Next add the fields for the query For charting purposes it is not necessary to define conditions for the fields simply add the fields to the Display fields Also the coordinates are not necessary so the Map Ready option can be disabled Check the box beside Map Ready to turn OFF this feature The fields for the query can be selected from the tree structure on the left side of the window beside Monitoring Wells Chemistry Results Chapter 11 The Report Editor Sample_Date Click once on the field and drag this field into the Display Fields at the top of the window Repeat this for Result_value field Result_Value Click once on the f
244. ck the Advanced Settings button and advanced options will be displayed as shown below for Natural Neighbor 286 Chapter 8 Map Manager Interpolator Options Settings Values a P Start 60 571 3902578462 End 20 54004651 40058 m Nodes 50 Start r 43 46741103231485 End Y 43 464907541 59692 YY Nodes 50 Use Log Interpolation no Restrict Min Value O Restrict Max Value E Value Min Value Max Real Min Real Maz Mags Mag r Mag No Value 995 0 Allow _E strapolation Sdip Tautness_1 1 5 Tautness 2 Fi Use Gradient O j OF Cancel Least easting Kal OO ojo i ea a a a a a Pe a a a a AH You may modify the interpolation settings then click OK to return to the main window For more details see Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings on page 529 Use Only Selected Stations When selected the contour component will use only those stations that are selected on the layer as the data source for the contouring The option is only enabled when one or more stations are selected If not selected all stations on the layer will be used Restrict Within Domain This option allows you to clip contours lines to a selected polygon layer Select Domain x Please choose a polygon layer as the clipping domain domaint h E Cancel EJ Help You may select any polygon shapefile from the combo box Then click OK to continue The calculated contours will then be clipped at the e
245. contour lines an example is shown below xj Rec Ho 31 Pe Pigg Sale ee ee ee HID 31 NAME 1831 ELEVATION 346 ETOC a47 TEH Save Close 53 Help To load the Information dialog e Select a layer containing HG Analyst station data e Select Information from the Tools menu or click on the Information button in the toolbar e Click once on any station within the selected layer This window will display Station ID Name Elevation TOC and any other fields depending on the layer type If there are stations that share the same ID and are hidden behind the selected station then the scroll arrow buttons in the lower left corner can be used to view the information for other stations 300 Chapter 8 Map Manager NOTE The information tool can only be used on shape layers that are visible and active Measure Provides an option to measure distances on the map window To use this utility e Select Measure from the Tools menu or click on the 2 Measure button in toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the start point for the line The mouse cursor will change to a cross hair e Click once with the left mouse button to start the line e Drag the mouse cursor to the end point of the line e To add a vertex to the line click once with the left mouse button then continue drawing to the new location e As the line is drawn the distance from the start point to the end point 1 e the current mouse cursor locat
246. ct Browser e From the BHLP designer press the Print button e Select the desired report template e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications e Print the report as is or save to one of the supported formats Creating Reports 423 11 1 6 Parameter Query Reports For details on this option please see Creating Parameter Query Reports on page 420 11 2 Managing Reports 11 2 1 Opening an Existing Report All reports saved in your project are listed under the Reports node in the Project Browser To open a report you may either double click on the desired report or select the Open Report pop up menu item by right clicking on the desired report All reports are opened in the Report Designer by default The designer displays the report layout and allows you to modify it before generating the report The print preview of the report can be generated by clicking on the Print Preview button on the toolbar 11 2 2 Deleting a Report To delete a report that is registered with HydroGeo Analyst select it in the project browser right click on it and select Delete from the pop up menu The selected report will be deleted both from the tree view as well as from the file 11 2 3 Saving a Report A report can be saved at any time by clicking on the Sa
247. ct tree However for some of the tasks commonly performed in HydroGeo Analyst retrieving the complete list of stations in the project may not be necessary Moreover retrieving all the stations when only few of them are needed may be a time consuming process especially for large databases containing hundreds or thousands of stations The solution is to create Station Groups Grouping stations into their logical groups allows efficient management and quick retrieval of data stored in the database For instance all stations which contain groundwater chemistry sampling data can be grouped together under a group named as GW Sample Locations Whenever these Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst stations need to be updated with a new groundwater sampling round selecting the GW Sample Locations group displays only those stations that belong to this group Station groups can be created based on any criteria Common examples include e Locations of the stations e g locations sorted by City Project Sites etc e Station type e g Monitoring Locations Boreholes etc or e Purpose of Study e g remediation site monitoring There are two ways of creating Station Groups in HydroGeo Analyst e Directly Select two or more stations directly in the Station List tab right mouse click and select the Add to Station Group option from the pop up menu e Indirectly Using the query builder define a more advanced search criteria and build a station
248. cted to go back to previous tabs and specify a new data source and or table for importing To close the DTS and return to HG Analyst Close button at the bottom of the DTS window 6 2 Exporting Data using the DTS HydroGeo Analyst supports exporting data to other destinations in two ways e The first and more direct way of exporting data uses a gridded data format This option is available under the Project menu Export Grid The current active grid can be saved in CSV XML MDB SHP or HTM formats e The second method of exporting data allows data transfer from one or more selected tables to practically any OLE DB supported destination These destinations may include MS Access database SQL Server database Oracle databases and many others A dialog similar to that used for importing data into HG Analyst database is launched whenever this feature 1s requested To export data using the DTS select the menu option Project Export Data and the following window will appear Data transfer system Export Step 1 Data source Package name y Xx Description Select data destination Speci evport He name pret II guida connection sting Data destination details Name Value Next Cancel Help Exporting Data using the DTS 215 6 2 1 Specify Data Source and Package Similar to data importing the first step in the data transfer operation is to provide the desired de
249. d a Delete Vertex feature 1s used for deleting a vertex from the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected Link Vertex feature is used for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines This feature is only available if an interpretation having at least two polygons or lines is activated and at least one of them is selected 320 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Tey D 4 About the Interface Remove Links feature is used for breaking the vertex link between two or more polygons or lines This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected For more information see Link Vertex on page 325 Zoom In option is used to zoom in on an area of the cross section defined by a rectangle Zoom Out option is used to zoom out from the current cross section view Pan button allows the user to pan the current view left right up or down Full Extent button restores the cross section view to the full extents of the Cross Section s coordinates Previous Extent button restores the cross section view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button switches the cross section view to the next zoom extent Information button displays information for the selected station Moving the mouse cursor overtop of a station wi
250. d station sys_sample_code chemical_name 1 BH1_10 10 2002_6 4 cis 1 2 dichloroethylene 1 BH1_10 10 2002_10 9 Trichloroethane Note 1 BH1_10 10 2002_15 9 TYOC P 1 BH1_10 10 2002_24 4 Tetrachloroethylene Lael ca a aca 1 BH1_10 10 2002_26 9 Vinyl Chloride 2 BH2_10 10 2002_14 7 Vinyl Chloride This step allows you to accept reject 2 BH2_10 10 2002_19 2 Tetrachloroethylene records with warnings by selecting the 2 BH2_10 10 2002_24 2 Tetrachloroethylene warning message in the Errors Warnings 2 BH2_10 10 2002_27 7 Tetrachloroethylene grid Records with errors must be rejected to 2 BH2_10 10 2002_8 2 Tetrachloroethylene activate the importing process 3 BH3_10 10 2002_13 5 Trichloroethylene 3 3 BH3 10 10 2002 19 TWOC You can also select one or more records in 3 BH3_10 10 2002_21 5 Trichloroethane the preview table and exclude them from 3 BH3_10 10 2002_24 5 Trichloroethane importing into your database 3 BH3_10 10 2002_28 Tetrachloroethylene 3 BH3_10 10 2002_4 5 cis 1 2 dichloroethylene 3 BH3_10 10 2002_9 5 Trichloroethane 4 BH4_10 10 2002_14 4 Trichloroethane of E Ero YX O Waming lt Back Import Cancel Help NOTE Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted to the database OK Close to close the DTS
251. d Sorting options providing a more detailed search of the database To add grouping options press the Advanced button at the bottom of the Query Builder window and options will appear as shown below 101 xi xa Station Group Query Data Query eee SQL View Preview l m Display Fields Select a Query VCE xceeds20 y Expression station id id soil_samples a s Soil Chemistry Bere Se sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date am from P x J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system to chemical_name Conditions result_value Expression result unit soil_chemistry chemical_name T soil_chemistry result_value conc_ppm m m soil_chemistry sample_date fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment Trichloroethane 2003 11 28 bd rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code x sample_type_code M Group By List sampling_reason Field Having fal Rack Corina El Function Operator Value Operator Source Condition Project y Basic Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry sample_date Type DATESTAMP Rows 15 Time 0 0 0 15 Under Group by List any field may be added for additional grouping options For example if the Query Results are to be grouped by County or City simply select this field and drag and drop the field into the Group By List Additional rows
252. d below Stations List Tab This tab hosts a grid displaying a list of stations for the selected station group Only a few selected columns are displayed in this tab including Station Name X and Y coordinate Elevation and TOC Top of Casing elevation The purpose of this list is to provide an overview of multiple stations and to perform general operations based on one or more selected stations For a more detailed view of an individual station the Station Data tab should be selected Data Query Tab This tab displays results from an execution of any selected data query It can be activated by double clicking on any query under the Queries node on the Project Browser or by directly clicking on the tab itself In addition through this interface you may delete all records from a selected table Note Use this feature with caution as records will be permanently deleted from your database For more details on creating and editing queries please see Chapter 7 Queries Station Data Tab This tab allows the user to enter and view the data for a single station This tab can be activated in two ways e Select a data category in the Station Data node in the Project Browser this will About the Interface 19 20 activate the selected data category and the related tables will be loaded for viewing and or editing e Click directly on the Station Data tab and the most recently used category will load or the Description categor
253. d containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu For an Interval Plot column you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the TopEntity select the from field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the BottomEntity select the to field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu Once you have entered all required information click the Refresh button to see the data on the plot column An example is shown in the following screenshot Designing a Borehole Log Plot 479 Borehole Log Designer sample E aj xj Select Station m r m Elevation m TOC m ODJ aa T 6212 65 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 E ES Design H E Lithology Lithology Well Construction H E Well Construction HES Plot Coarse o ls ia Gravel T E 1 Medium Sand Gravel i Fine Sand Pi Hame Value 100 Close Expat Y Pint Y H Help 12 3 4 Re order BHLP Columns If you have added several columns to your borehole log plot and you would like to change the order in which they appear you can simply click on one of the sub nodes under the Design node in the tree to highlight it then click
254. d locations or deleting existing vertices To draw model layers follow the directions below Activate the Model Interpretation Layer in the Layer Manager Select the Line draw button from the toolbar As soon as this option is selected the following Model Layers dialog will appear Select Model Line Top of Layer 1 Topography Topography Layer i O Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer a E 0 Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer A OK Cancel 53 Help In this dialog choose the desired model layer by selecting the radio button from the first column in this grid Each model layer may be selected and assigned only once Interpretation layers that are already drawn in the cross section are colored in orange and are not selectable Click OK to continue Place the mouse cursor at the left boundary at the desired depth of the intended model layer when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the cursor will snap to the boundary Click once on the left boundary to add a vertex at this location and start the line Slowly move the mouse cursor to the right across the cross section to the interval in the first station which represents the model layer When the cursor is within the specified buffer distance from the station s lithology interval snapping will be activated With a left mouse click add a vertex at desired and appropriate locations
255. d properties for Text Line and Polygons as described earlier in Chapter 8 To save the annotation changes you have made you can either deselect switch annotation types or click the Save button from the button bar 356 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with HydroGeo Analyst Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for viewing geology and hydrogeology data The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using a complete selection of graphical formats and features These include e 2D and 3D views of the grid e Station representation showing lithology e Imported Surfer Grid surfaces e Display contaminant plumes in the form of isosurfaces or color maps e DXF and Bitmap overlays on surfaces e Light source position control e Semi transparent objects e Auto rotate tools continuously rotate the image around the X Y Z axis e Record grid rotation to an AVI file T
256. d reporting Suppose you want to display a pivoted view of your chemistry results whereby each row represents a different sample at each station and each column represents results for each analyte Another common example within the environmental industry is to show analyte names reporting units and regulatory limits along the left column while sample names date and or depth ranges are shown along the top row and result values and qualifiers shown in the intersecting cells Storing your data in such a way in a table would break the first normal form which disallows repeating groups Crosstab queries provide a solution to this problem HydroGeo Analyst uses a state of the art crosstab component that is easy to use to produce dynamic crosstab queries and reports The data in your crosstab reports can be highlighted with the format you specify allowing you to flag values that are outside user defined range values for example above guideline levels Once you are satisfied with the crosstab query you created you may save the query for later use send it to a printer or export it to either an Excel spreadsheet PDF or an HTML format All formatting details will also be printed and or exported 7 8 2 Creating a Crosstab Query The crosstab query starts with a data query which can be designed using the Query Builder See Data Query Example on page 222 for more details The data query should contain the desired data set along with the de
257. d to identify the sample type Typically found with the Sample ID in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table see Defining Quality Codes for Data on page 486 for more details The following fields are not required but are helpful for easily identifying samples in the results page e Station Name located in the Station table e Sample Name this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Sample Date e Units e Unit conversion factors 13 2 Define A New Lab Quality Template To create a new lab quality analysis template click Tools gt Quality Control from the Main Menu then select the Manage Lab QC Templates option The Lab Quality window will open as shown in the following figure Lab Quality l x Lab Quality Templates Template Description zl Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than i Coefficient of variation less thar i Highlighting Font Background olor Border Ealar Add Remove Help Apply OF Cancel Me To create a new template click the Add button and enter a name for the template The newly created template will then appear in the Lab Quality Templates list To configure your template click on the to expand the template tree As shown in the 488 Chapter 13 Quality Control following example screenshot the three Ch
258. data analyzing blanks duplicates and spike samples This feature is outside the scope of this exercise For more details please see Chapter 13 Quality Control 2 2 3 Creating Station Groups 66 Once the data has been successfully entered into the project it may be convenient to sort the stations into logical groups Grouping stations allows for efficient management and quick retrieval of data stored in the database Station groups can be created based on any criteria Common examples include e Locations of the stations e g locations sorted by City Project Sites etc e Station type e g Monitoring Locations Boreholes etc e Purpose of Study e g remediation site monitoring All station groups created for a project are listed in the Project Browser under the Station Groups node Clicking any of the sub nodes corresponding to a station group will display the appropriate stations belonging to that group in the Station List tab Station Groups can be created manually or through the use of the Query Builder The following example demonstrates how create a station group manually containing the Borehole stations Chapter 2 Getting Started Example Creating a Station Group To create a Station Group Station List tab OW1 ensure this row becomes highlighted similar to the image shown below HydroGeo Analyst SampleProject C Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject ag E 81 xj Project Edit view R
259. database by nodes and clicking on the Map button Source Fields Destination Fields 3 To remove mapping select the mapping in the table at the bottom and select the delete button at the bottom baa bapane Waele ase baa Daa Dans Waste me CON CC ECC EAT B Required Mappings 1 You must map a field in the source with the Station name field in the Station table 2 You could not mapp screen id Save mapping to database 5 lt Back Next gt Cancel ES Help The next step in the MON data import operation is to map the MON file fields source with the appropriate HGA fields destination To map a source field with a destination field Select a source field from the MON file in the Select Section Field frame Select the matching destination field from the Select Table Field frame Click the Map button Rules for Mapping e The Station Name field of the Location table must be mapped e All destination tables and fields must already exist in the HGA database e All mapped channel tables e g Level Temperature Conductivity Oxygen in the database must include a Screen ID e All mapped tables in the database must have primary key s mapped e Data type of mapped fields must be compatible The mapped fields will now display in the table at the bottom of the Make Mapping dialog Repeat this process for additional fields HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 119 120 To remove
260. de SM for Measured Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the measure amount of constituent that was recovered for every spiked parameter Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch Batch ID which relates the samples to each other Defining Quality Codes for Data When importing adding sample data quality codes need to be added to indicate the type of sample in order to be used in a Lab Quality Analysis The following are the codes required by HGA Sample Type Quality Code Duplicate Original Duplicate Measured Spiked Theoretical Spiked Measured Chapter 13 Quality Control Sample Type Quality Code Using the Template Manager you can create a field that will store the quality codes This field may be added to any table but typically it is found in the Chem_sample table with the Sys_sample_code These quality codes are saved in the file Program Files HGAnalyst Whi QualityAC dll config If necessary the codes may be changed to reflect the codes used in your data Simply use a text editor to open the config file and modify the quality codes under the section lt QualityCodes gt 13 1 1 Data Requirements Quality Control starts with a data set before you can apply a quality control template you must generate a data set by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data que
261. ded for demonstration purposes 318 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Active Menu Window Bar Map Project firstmap gt N zA Bi ioj x ile Edit View Tools Help Toolbar asl ZONA XALAPA ONE er a a 8 SecondLine C Model del 0 360 Topography uolgas sso15 Geology 340 Gravel Sandy Gravel Cross Sections amp Interpretations Layers control 320 Coarse Gravel Clay rich 300 Fine sandy gravel Silty Sand Elevation m 280 HydroGeology Cross Section Window 260 240 220 200 Site Map 500 oO 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 533 931 4 813 102 Distance m 538 305 4 814 234 937 18 382 97 X Z coordinates Pag The Cross Section Editor window contains the following items e Menu Bar Contains program menu commands e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Cross Section Editor e Layer Control Manages cross sections visibility and editability of interpretation layers Right click a layer to access additional options such as Move up Move down View 3D and Properties e Cross Section Window Contains the cross section view for the selected cross section line e Site Map Displays the selected cross section line as it appears in the map project The selected stations for th
262. defined in the Map Manager provided they have been added to the current 3D project To select a vertical cross section through the site domain click the Cross section tab to open the Cross section window as shown in the following figure This window displays a list of the available cross sections for the current 3D project 388 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 4 Select create slices a xi Slices CroseSechons Cancel Help Simply select the cross section from the list then click the Select button 10 4 4 Deleting a Slice If many different slices have been defined during the current session and the list is becoming too long and cumbersome to work with any entry in the Surface list can be deleted by highlighting the slice in the list and clicking the Delete button 10 4 5 Modifying a Slice The location or orientation of any slice can be modified by highlighting the target slice in the list and clicking the Modify button This will open the Slice Properties window where the desired changes can be made 10 5 Scene Configurations When using 3D Explorer to display and animate data it is important to be able to save the various display settings for fast and easy recall during a presentation or for comparing different views 3D Explorer is able to save the display settings by selecting File Save Scene configuration from the top menu bar or by clicking the ss Save Scene configuration button in the tool
263. dges of the polygon NOTE If the polygon is greater in extents than the selected station layer the contouring will end at the furthest point Currently extrapolation to the edge of the polygon is not possible When you are satisfied with the settings click the Create button to create the contour map Description of Menu Items 287 Contour Line Settings Click on the Settings button beside Contour Lines and the following dialog will appear Contour Line Settings d x Intervals M Contour Line Settings C Contour Interval fi 9400 Contour Line Style Number of Intervals fo Nececsscsssssscesecsscssscssccsscesscesssesces E Label Renderer Sample Text Custom Interval Decimal Places 4 i P X Ok Cancel EJ Help e Specify Intervals you may select to define the Contour Interval e g 0 5 1 0 5 etc or the Number of Intervals 5 10 20 50 etc You may also define Custom Contour Lines in the grid in the lower corner Use the and X buttons to add remove contours respectively e Under Contour Line Settings specify the line color thickness style and label settings Label Renderer will add a label to the lines Color Shading Zebra Map Settings Click on the Settings button beside Color Shading or Zebra and the following dialog will appear Color Settings x Color Palette x amp go Transparency o OK Cancel Help The Color Sett
264. dited before it can be accepted for importing Once a record is edited it can be accepted using the Accept feature for records For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data Read the confirmation message Chapter 2 Getting Started Information El gi Urecords were updated and 1 15 records were inserted OK Close to close the DTS Example Importing Lithology Data In this section you will import Lithology data from a file This data will be later visualized in 2D cross sections and with the 3D Explorer Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type LithologyData in the box that appears OK Sr ry button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Sample_Lithology XLS file located in the Examples folder under the installation folder The default installation folder is D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the Lithology data will be imported to the Geologic Description category Lithology table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below Data Management 51 Dat
265. ditor tool that provides the ability to create and customize lists for any field allowing for efficient and effective data entry A list in HydroGeo Analyst may be considered as a lookup table Template Manager 143 Linked Lists contain a specific list of values that may be used to supply a list of potential values for one or more fields Linked lists are especially convenient if the number of values for a field is fixed and limited Linked Lists may be created manually generated from existing data in the project or may be imported from an external source text spreadsheet or another database In HydroGeo Analyst there are several examples of linked lists One example can be found in the Soil Sampling category in the Soil Chemistry table A combo box populated with a list of chemicals is provided for each cell under the Chemical Name field column Simply click on the combo box in any cell under this column and a list of chemical names is displayed for the selection This field is linked to a list of chemicals This eliminates the step of having to re enter chemical names in this field for each sample and minimizes any error that may occur as a result Below are some examples of using linked lists that you may create for the demonstration project 1 In the Stations table located under the Description category it may be useful to create a field named County or Municipality in order to organize s
266. droGeo Analyst see HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar on page 107 for more details 1 6 3 Toolbar The toolbars that appear beneath the menu bar are dynamic changing as you move from one window tab to another Some toolbar buttons become available only when certain tabs are in view For example the Add and Delete toolbar buttons are only available when the focus is on a grid Some toolbar buttons are available only in a particular context for example the Paste button is only available after the Copy or Cut command has been used The following tool buttons appear at the top of the HydroGeo Analyst main window For a short description of an icon move the mouse pointer over the icon without clicking either mouse button New button loads the Project Manager to create a new project About the Interface 21 22 lz le E E E E x Open button opens an existing HydroGeo Analyst project Print button sends the data item that 1s currently active to the Report Manager This data item could be a list of stations data from any table or a query result This feature is available only if a grid is active Refresh button refreshes the current view by updating the project browser and all opened grids Copy button copies selected character s in a grid cell to the clipboard Paste button pastes text from the clipboard to the active cell Add button adds a new record this feature is available only if a grid is active D
267. droGeo Analyst double click on the desktop icon as shown in the figure on the left or by accessing WHI Software gt HydroGeo Analyst from your Start gt Programs Windows menu 1 4 Updating Old Projects HydroGeo Analyst v 4 0 is fully compatible with projects created in earlier versions The first time you open a project from v 1 0 v 2 0 or v 3 0 you will be prompted to convert your database to the new format A dialog similar to the one shown below will display x For optimal performance one or more system tables need to be upgraded A It is strongly recommended that you make a backup of your database before you proceed Would you like to make a backup now Yes No Cancel At this time you will have the option to create a back up copy of your database which is highly recommended Click the Yes button to create a back up copy of your database Otherwise click No to continue with the table upgrade Updating Old Projects 15 In addition it is recommended that you create a backup of the Projects directory before you open projects in the new version of HydroGeo Analyst This can be done using the options in My Computer or Windows Explorer NOTE Projects from v 1 0 and v 2 0 used Project Manager passwords for controlling access to the project Once a project is upgraded to v 4 0 this password will be ignored and replaced by a username Admin with no password user credential login with the Admin
268. ds Multiplier Bar Color Schema Chapter 14 Plotting Adding Plots Query select the data source for the plot from the combo box currently the data must come from data queries Plot Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping plots Series Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping series at least one field must be selected for grouping the plot series Time Axis specify a field to be used for the Time X axis This should be the date field from your query Value Axis specify a field to be used for the Value Y axis This will be observed result value for the parameter s of interest Units loads the following dialog allowing you to make unit conversions unes x Unit category TE Units sec y Unit conversion C None Constant Conversion Factor Factor Label C From field YaxConversionF actor Ok Cancel Select the unit category then the units from this category If the units categories are not compatible for instance Time and Length then the buttons are disabled You may also select a field to be used for the unit conversion or create constant conversion factor in this case enter the factor and an appropriate field The units conversion component implements full SI units including temperature electric current and luminous intensity Label select a field to be used for the symbol label The next two fields are used to control non det
269. e View Settings section of the interface allows all users to define e A name for the selected field A Default value Data display format Unit for data entry whenever applicable Validation Depth rules A list of values to be used for the field Working With the Template Manager 195 The name for the field provided in the View Settings is the one that will be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst Whenever the field s data type allows a unit for data entry can be set to something different from that which is in the database For instance if a well depth is set to use the British Imperial system of units e g feet in the database and the new data to be entered is in the metric unit system e g meters the unit in the View Settings section can be set to be in the metric system All data entered in this system will be converted to the appropriate unit system used in the database The Template Manager also allows providing validation rules for the selected field If provided these rules will be used to protect the user from entering erroneous data into the database In HydroGeo Analyst all data that does not comply with these rules is highlighted with a yellow background In some cases it may be convenient to pre define a list of values for some fields For example instead of typing chemical names for each record you may want to pick from a pre defined list In order to link to a field s data source to a list e Select the
270. e Settings Use Only Selected Stations Restrain within Domain Choose Domain Create Cancel E Help Elevation from the Choose Field combo box at the top of the dialog Contour Line checkbox to disable this contour type Color Shade checkbox to enable this contour type type ColorShadeMap in the Name textbox Settings for the Color Shade contour type Color Settings E x Color Palette d a E Transparency 2 J0 a p E EEN The Color Settings Renderer allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of values You can use the Classify button to set the number of intervals HGA will automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals Use the Ramp option to define the color palette You can experiment with different classifications and color schemes For demonstration purposes lets keep the default settings Ok button to exit the Color Settings dialog Chapter 2 Getting Started Create button A message will display indicating that the color shade map was successfully generated Ok button Mas Prel Welle Poed Layer dk Took Ver elect Getting lisp Geek TOON A OF KAR Se Pee PASSER AG mal By default the new color shade map layer will appear at the top of the Layer Manager panel and as a result cover up the other layers From the Layer Manager panel Using the mouse drag and dro
271. e appropriate row in the table and click the Delete Row button Click Ok to close the table If there is a significant difference between the georeferenced coordinates and real world coordinates check the precision of the georeference points and reassign if necessary Once the georeferencing is completed click OK in the Georeference window A confirmation dialog will appear as shown below ad File attributes Source file name Wayne DAVB Projects Demo_Project temp temp_img bmp Name in the project WwayneiDWB Projects Demo_Project temp temp_geo BMP Cancel Click OK to continue The Raster Image will then appear as a new Map Layer in the Map Project 274 Chapter 8 Map Manager CAD The Map Manager also allows you to import CAD files into a map project file Supported formats include AutoCAD files DXF DWG and MicroStation files DGN CAD layers may be built in a Projection that is different from that used for the current map project therefore when a CAD file is selected the projection system and units may need to be converted to the current projection system and units In addition CAD files may contain graphic features on different layers as such there are options to select the layer to import These options are explained below HINT If you are having difficulties importing your CAD drawing please try exploding all blocks and re saving as a dxf file before attempting to import into HGA
272. e Al button to delete the selected soil Use the button to move the selected soil type up Use the button to move the selected soil type down 3 5 1 Creating a New Soil Classification System 150 To create a new Soil Classification system SCS follow the steps below e Click the New button e Enter a name for the SCS e You may now proceed to create or add soil types to this SCS Soil types may be added manually or copied from an existing SCS To add new soil types manually e Press the Add button in the lower right corner e Enter a Name for the new soil type and select a Pattern To select from one of the available patterns select the button beside the soil type and choose from one of the pre existing images for the soil pattern To use your own image right mouse click on the picture field select Get Own Picture and locate the image file To copy one or all soil types from an existing SCS into the new SCS use the following buttons e Choose the desired SCS from the left side of the window e To copy a single soil type use the button e To copy all soil types use the button Use the following buttons to arrange the order of the soil types within the selected SCS e To move the selected soil type up use the F button e To move the selected soil type down use the 1 button To delete the selected soil type within a SCS press the x button Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Press
273. e BHLP to the right of the selected well a negative offset will shift the BHLP to the left of the selected well e Image Width set the width of the BHLP image In the grid in the middle of the dialog select which stations should display the BHLP on the cross section selecting too many stations may result in a crowded display 9 2 5 Help Contents Launches HGA Help placing the focus on the Cross Section Editor section 9 3 Creating the Cross Section As mentioned earlier cross section locations must be drawn using the Define Cross Section Line option or the CrossSection Line button 3 in the Map Manager See Chapter 8 Defining a Cross Section Line for details on this procedure Once the cross section line is defined the corresponding cross section can be created from the Map Manager as follows e In the Map Manager select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the main menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button Ml on the toolbar e Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section Creating the Cross Section 341 line will be used as the cross section name e If surface layers are present in your Map Project you will be prompted to select a surface layer Please see Loading Surface Layers section on page 342 e The cross section editor opens the selected cross section and displays the stations and related information The cross section shows projections of the borehole lit
274. e Double click anywhere on the cross section using the left mouse button to close the polygon the Geology Layer Pattern window will appear Geology Layer Pattern Ea Mame Description Pattern Ok Cancel H Help In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the layer a brief Description and select a soil Pattern If the geologic layer you have just digitized in the current cross section has already been created you may select 1t from the combo box instead of typing a new name Click on the blank area beside Pattern to load the pattern options as shown in the following figure Fill Patternz Pleaze chooze a pattern Dolomite OF Cancel Select a pattern sand is located in the top right corner of this dialog OK OK once more The polygon will be filled with this pattern an example 1s shown below Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 93 94 Fie ot View Toole Heb ALICIA ES KARE Oe Pee nonn Repeat the same sequence of operations for other layers within the active cross section The result will be a layered structure of the geological domain The cross section may contain some gaps where polygons do not completely touch adjacent polygons this can be easily fixed by selecting a vertex on a polygon and using the pointer tool to re position the vertex Alternately gaps between polygons can be filled by using the Link Vertex option These options are explained in Chapt
275. e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex e Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable e Select an object on this layer all its vertices will be highlighted Chapter 8 Map Manager e Click onthe 4 Delete vertex button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be removed the mouse cursor will change to an X e Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Copy Map to Clipboard Copies the entire Map Window to the clipboard The map window can then be pasted as an image in other applications 8 2 4 Tools The Map Manager provides annotation tools which allow for drawing shapes and inserting text labels on the map The drawing tools are available in both the Tools menu and in the Map Manager toolbar The options for the annotation tools allow modifying the color and style of the annotation objects The annotation items are only available on map layers with the corresponding object
276. e already been entered if any into the current database under the selected field Once this is completed a verification dialog will appear displaying the number of entries returned for this field e Click Yes to import these values to the list e Edit the list as desired by adding or removing items e Click the button to save the list e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 148 for more details Importing Lists The list items may also be imported from an external data source To do so e Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for which a list is to be imported e Click on the 4 Import from external database button at the bottom of the window The following dialog will appear 146 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Import List from External DB x Data Source Connection String fimport udi 3 a Table Field Description Values Total Items e Click the Data source button in the upper right corner of the dialog e The Data Link Properties dialog will appear Select the desired data source For help using the Data Link Properties please refer to Appendix B e Click OK on the Data Link Properties dialog to close e Click on the Refresh button to refresh
277. e at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series will appear using the selected settings If you have selected Bar as the series type the following dialog will appear General Bar Series Settings Label 7 Visible Fort a Bar Color C m Preview 10 4 2 D Apply Close In this dialog you can modify the following settings Font Specify the label font style size and effects Visible Show Hide labels Font Color Specify the color of the label text Bar Color Specify the color of the bars 507 14 3 2 Style and Display Settings Settings such as Axis Line and Legend can be modified in the Settings tab as shown below Data Filter Title Background Color C White Legend Vertical Asis Horizontal Axis Senet Type Line The following settings are available Common Name Enter the Plot name and optionally specify a Background color Size Specify the Height and Width for the plot Location Origin Specify the X Y origin for the plot The origin 0 0 is located in the upper left corner of the plot window Data Filter Set a data filter for the plot data this 1s useful when the plot contains a large number of data points and you want to filter out repetitive or unnecessary data or values where this is no significant change Active Use this option to enable disable the filter Value Set the filter value Any consecutive
278. e cross section are highlighted in this Map preview window e Coordinates Displays the X Z coordinate for the current mouse cursor location e Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section window 9 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The Cross section editor contains a toolbar with short cut buttons to some of the About the Interface 319 commonly used features Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance For example the option to add a vertex is active only when a polygon or a line is selected Save button saves the current cross section project Print button sends the current cross section view to the report editor he Selection Pointer feature is used for selecting objects in the active interpretation E ll Draw Polygon feature is used for drawing a polygon or a rectangle in the active layer Draw Line feature is used for drawing a model layer line in the selected layer Delete Selected Object feature deletes the selected object shape from the AL Add Text features is used for adding annotation to the selected layer currently activate layer A Add Vertex feature is used for adding a vertex to the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an object is selecte
279. e data for the selected station A preview is shown on the right side of the window in the image above The following display settings are available e Fill Color set the fill color for the callout box e Outline Color set the color for the outline of the callout box e Transparent set the transparency select from True or False e Box shape select the box shape choose from Rectangle Round Rectangle or Oval e Tip style set the tip style choose from Triangle or Line e Padding set the padding thickness The higher the padding value the larger the box shape will be around the tabular values in the layout e Shadow display a shadow around the callout box select from True or False e Shadow Color select the shadow color only used if Shadow has been set to True e Offset X set the X Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed horizontally from selected station e A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed to the right of the station e A value of O will center the call out box over the station e A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed to the left of the station e Offset Y set the Y Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed vertically from selected station e A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed below the station e A value of O will center the call out box over the station e A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed a
280. e depth of the domain these are based on cross sections available in the 3D project These slice objects define the locations where color maps and contour maps can be plotted for concentration visualization To define the slice locations select Objects Surfaces from the top menu bar A Select create slices window will appear as shown in the following figure The Select create slices window displays a list of the available slices which have been additional slices or to modify delete existing slices previously defined The Select create slices window also has options to create Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer m Select create slices loj xj Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel E 10 4 1 Creating a Vertical Slice To create a vertical slice through the project domain click the Vertical button to open the Slice Properties window as shown in the following figure A yellow outline of the vertical slice will appear in the Display Screen vd 481 4493 0 Te 481 4493 0 both sliders synchronized The Slice type options define the planar orientation of the slice e Vertical XZ refers to the plane along the X axis extending through the entire depth of the site e Vertical YZ refers to the plane along the Y axis extending through the entire depth of the site For
281. e destination table The primary key is the Station ID 1D Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS Some of the additional features and options available in the Data Mapping window are explained below Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Unit Conversion The DTS allows conversion of data from source units to the unit specified for each corresponding destination field If a destination field with a matching source field has a unit the DTS requires that a unit be selected for the source field before proceeding with the data import operation A unit can be selected from the list of units available for the specific unit category Importing Criteria The DTS allows specifying a simple criteria condition for each field that is selected to be imported The criteria will be used to filter the source data For example you can import data only for a specified station i e Elevation gt 300 or Name OW 1 and so forth If a criterion is specified based on a field with numeric data types it should be compared against values that have been converted to the destination field s unit This version of the DTS supports only one condition per field The condition should be provided through an operator lt gt or lt gt followed by the value for the condition For instance in the above example if importing data only for the station OW 1 is desired the condition should simply be stated as OW 1 Similarly if
282. e display settings can be accessed from the tree view These are shown below Setting Value Name leosurface_1 Visible e Color LI P Semitransparent Iw Isozurface value 35000 0 0 Max value 38034625 Color from palette Iw Show borders Iw Volume estimatation 99153 Visible check box shows hides the isosurface Semitransparent check box sets the isosurface image as semi transparent The Volume Estimation value represents the calculated volume that the isosurface encompasses for lower isosurface values will result in higher Volume Estimations higher isosurface values will result in lower Volumes The volume estimation works in Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer the following manner When you ran the 3D Interpolation to create the plume data set you specify the grid size grid cells in the X Y and Z direction The volume estimation uses the number of grid cells and the X Y and Z extents to calculate the size of each grid cell The interpolated concentration value is calculated for each node of the grid cell A grid cell in the plume grid has eight nodes with associated values v1 v2 v3 There are three possibilities 1 all values at the nodes are less than the isosurface value a In this case the cell volume is not added to plume volume estimation 2 all values at the nodes are greater than the isosurface value a In this case the entire cell volume is added t
283. e distance Advanced Settings Press this button to see advanced settings for the selected interpolation method For more details see Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings on page 529 e Interpolate log values This option will interpolate the log values of the data points and then invert the log value distribution This option is useful when interpolating data with a high degree of variance Add Data Source Define the various properties relating to the data source e Data Source select a field from the data query that contains the data to be interpolated e g concentration or result value e Name define a name for the parameter e Date Field select the field that contains the sampling date if available e Date Granularity This option controls how to accumulate the data items of various date stamps For example assume you have data for the following sample dates e 5 stations sampled on 03 05 99 e 6 stations sampled on 03 14 99 could be from the same or other stations e 4 stations sampled on 03 19 99 e 5 stations sampled on 03 27 99 e 6 stations sampled on 04 04 99 e 5 stations sampled on 04 15 99 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 135 e 4 stations sampled on 04 25 99 If you select Day for date granularity you will obtain 7 data sets to interpolate and If you select Month for date granularity you will obtain 2 data sets to interpolate e 20 stations sampled on 03 01 99 and e 15 stations sampled on 0
284. e general user settings for the software The second file Project VBH is used to store general information about your project This file stores the project identification and information about the location of your database and the necessary settings for connection Each one of these data files must remain in the same directory as they are originally created These files are listed below where projectname 1s the name assigned to the project A description of the content of each file is given below 15 1 1 HydroGeo Analyst Main Module projectname HGA projectname UDL projectname WHI History XML 15 1 2 Map Manager projectname VMP projectname ALS projectname BPW mapname DXF mapname BMP JPG etc projectname WDL projectname MAP projectname LYR projectname DBF projectname PRJ projectname SHP projectname SHX projectname XML Appendix A HydroGeo Analyst File Types 517 15 1 3 Cross Section Editor projectname V CP projectname DBF projectname SHP projectname SHX projectname XML 15 1 4 3D Explorer projectname 3XS projectname BPW projectname BMP 15 1 5 Reports 518 projectname W RP projectname WTP projectname RDF projectname RPX projectname TPX projectname XML Appendices 15 2 Appendix B Project Files and Directory Structure An HGA project consists of many different files and folders related to the different components within HGA Please refer to the information below to determine what data is stor
285. e in the project tree Right click on the chart tvoc query Execute from the menu that appears The query will be executed and will be displayed in the Data Query tab Chapter 11 The Report Editor HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help asa ORn t xXBAaAREGBRS BOS das ini P sa Station Groups B Station List k Data Query Station Data ES Station Data Query List Station Group Data Category chart tvoc y 1 0 Hl ee Cross Sections result_we Reports P Station Groups gt q aA E 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 P Cross Sections 08 09 1996 02 017027 199 E Borehole Logs a x z 3DView 04 16 1996 4 1 Borehole Logs T 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1939 01 08 1996 02 12 199 04 16 1996 08 09 1 99E 01 02 199 01 08 1939 y P Rows 230 Time 0 0 0 40 Borehole Logs OD ODOOO 50000000000 000o00o0 0 eH fa aonNnno Project Report from the HGA main menu bar A prompt will appear to select a Report template this is optional OK The report preview window will be displayed In order to add the chart you must return to the report designer Return to Designer button fr
286. e map E 0 xj File Edit View Tools Help Belk Enix A sz ty 5 E EEIE TE uopas s2013 Topography BottLayer2 Geology Medium Sand Gravel Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Silt 280 HydroGeology Elevation m upper aquifer lower aquifer 00 400 500 600 800 300 Distance m 536 211 4 813 946 0 100 2 536 195 4 814 914 NOTE In order to see intersecting cross sections in the cross section editor the corresponding Map Manager project must be open For more details on managing intersecting layers in the cross section editor please see Intersecting Layers on page 334 308 Chapter 8 Map Manager Graticule Provides settings for the graticule also referred to as gridlines on the map The following dialog will appear Graticule Settings JN UE Ti Appearance Foreground Color ia Line Color z Line Style E Font Sample Text e Show Thousand Separator Minor Tic Numbers b Minimum Pixels between Minor Tics 20 5 Minor Tic Width ja Major Tic Width B Intervals en jo 13 Auto f Manual Right 50 Bottom 20 e f Y f e Visible Rotation 0 eal e Visible Rotation 0 nal e Visible Rotation E Bottom e Visible Ratation 0 E OK Cancel H Help Appearance In the appearance frame you can edit the line color style font Tic Allows defining the number of minor and major tics Paddings Controls the amount of buff
287. e model line at regularly spaced intervals e By distance inserts a vertex at a specified distance interval e g every 50 metres along the entire model line Select the desired method specify a value and click Ok to insert the vertices Other properties of model layers such as name pattern and description can be edited by using the Tools gt Model Layers menu option described in the Model Layers section on page 338 Linking Vertices between Model Layers Once Model Layer lines are drawn their vertices can be linked following the procedure described in the Link Vertex section on page 325 in the Edit menu 352 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor 9 4 5 Remove Stations from Cross Sections When working with a cross section in the Cross Section tab one or more stations can be removed from the cross section line by right clicking on the cross section and selecting the Remove Stations option Then simply click on a station to remove it from the cross section Stations can also be added to removed from a cross section line in the Map tab as described in Defining a Cross Section Line section on page 313 9 5 Querying Cross Section Interpretations In previous versions of HGA the cross section interpretations were saved in shapefiles and along the cross section line The cross section editor now saves the interpretation results to the database for various uses including e displaying the results of each interpreta
288. e or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc In a typical borehole log report there may be one or more instances of the items listed above The number of columns and their order of display is flexible and can be set at the time of designing the borehole log plot and edited at any point thereafter Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated for any or all boreholes in the selection through the use of the Report Editor Borehole log reports once generated can be exported to various formats including HTML RTF PDF that are supported by the Report Editor The borehole log plotter can also be used as a data entry assistant in HydroGeo Analyst by displaying well construction details as data is entered in tables that are related to the Borehole log plot Moreover the borehole log plotter is an invaluable tool in the process of making geologic and hydrogeologic interpretations of your data under the Cross Section Editor 44 12 1 About the Interface 442 The BHLP may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Existing BHLPs can be opened from the Borehole Logs node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired borehole log plot in the avai
289. e project browser The selected active node will remain active after collapsing Expand All Use the Expand All command to expand all nodes of the project browser The selected active node will remain active after expanding The same function is available by right mouse clicking on the project browser Refresh All Use the View Refresh item to refresh all nodes of the project browser as well as the active grid with data from the database It is useful to Refresh the view after making changes to the database template or modifying stations or station groups You can perform the same function by clicking the Refresh button in the toolbar or by right clicking in the browser window and selecting Refresh All 3 2 4 Record The Record menu provides several options for performing activities which affect the records rows within a grid This includes stations in the Station List and rows in the Data Categories These menu items are context sensitive which means that the menu items will perform different functions depending on which grid is active NOTE The Record menu items are only available when a grid is active and the cursor is located within the grid A detailed description of each menu item is provided below Add The Add option adds a record to the last row of the active grid Records may be added to the grids in the various Data Categories in the Station Data tab or added as stations in the Station List tab You can perf
290. e second Expression field For this example type 1 In addition add this field to the Display fields in the upper frame Click once on the result_value field and drag this field into the Display Fields frame Once the fields have been added the Query Builder display should be similar to the one shown in the figure below Chapter 2 Getting Started f Query Builder eee Xa a amp Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields PCE_exceedences y Ea Function Expression i station id id Description gaon x Geologic Description rara ere Well Construction soil_chemistry chemical_name chemical_name Soil Testing 7 soil_chemistry result_value result_value Soil Sampling soil_samples I Soil Chemistry i 4 op dE Y Map and BHLP Ready IV Use current projection system sys_sample_code Sample_name Conditions sample_date chemical_name Operator Expression soil_chemistry chemical_t Tetrachloroethylene soil_chemistry result_walu gt 1 result_unit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code sample_type_code i M Source Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry result_value Type DOUBLE Rows 0 Time 00 00 00
291. e template will be provided Use as Project Default The Use as Project Default option allows you to set this template as the default when the project is opened Tables and Fields Toolbar A second toolbar is provided below the Database Browser Tree View The items on this toolbar allow manipulating the database through the Database Browser A description of each of the items on this toolbar is given below The Add button allows adding tables and fields to the database depending on which node in the Database Browser is currently selected For example if a data category is active at the time this button is selected a table will be added in that data category Similarly if a table 1s active when the Add button is selected then another table will be added to the same category A field will be added if this button is pressed while any field in the desired table is active Both tables and fields are added at the end of the list By default the Template Manager names the new table field as type_ tld_ where HH stands for a number generated for the added item When a new table is created press the Add button again while the table is receiving the focus to add the first field to the table The Delete button allows deleting the selected node This button is activated when either a table or a field is currently selected Data categories as well as some required tables e g the Station ta
292. e up just over 1 page when printed in portrait mode The scale factors must use the same units For more information see Generating a borehole log report on page 481 Column Options Column Options X Bod Color E wia H Header text Font Angle y Scale rn Align Center k e Word Wrap Cancel The Column Options dialog allows you to specify unique display settings for each column in your BHLP In this dialog you can modify the Header Color and Body Color by clicking on the appropriate color box Use the Width vertical scroll bars to change the width of the column Under the Header Text frame specify the Font Angle and Alignment of the column header text Select the Word Wrap check box to ensure that the header text remains visible within the defined column width In the Header Text text box specify a header name for the BHLP column The Column Options dialog is available in the settings for each BHLP column and can be accessed by clicking the Options button shown below BHLP Columns 447 BHLP Settings e x Scale e Visible Column Options Visibilt Tie Men e Visible Major Tic Mark ze Interval 110 Display Unit m ka Color Label Position Left r Minor Tic Mark Font Interval 5 E Background E Color J Help Apply OF Cancel Individual column settings are described in the following sections of the manual 12 2
293. e vertex will be linked with another vertex e Click the Link Vertex option from the Edit menu or click the button from the toolbar Click on the desired vertex source vertex that will be linked with another one the color of the vertex changes to green to indicate it has been selected e Move the mouse cursor to the desired destination vertex to which the previously selected vertex will be linked The mouse cursor will change to a red square outline when a vertex is identified Click on this red square and the vertices will be linked e The Linked Vertex will turn orange to indicate that the vertex is linked and shared by two or more polygons or lines NOTE Link Vertices option is activated only if there are at least two objects on the layer Once two vertices are linked they behave as a single vertex Remove Links The Remove Links option allows for separating previously linked vertices Description of Menu Items 325 To use this option e Select the interpretation layer containing at least two polygons or lines whose one or more vertices are linked e Make this layer editable e Click the Remove Links option from the Edit menu or click the E button from the toolbar e Click on one of the linked vertices in the selected polygon linked vertices are colored orange e Upon clicking on a linked vertex the vertex will change back to blue color to indicate that the link has been successfully removed e Click on the
294. eadsheets delimited text files and other database formats such as MS Access The DTS is designed to 1 Import data into the HG Analyst database from such sources as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Delimited Text files e g Comma separated text files e Other databases e g from one or more tables in a MS Access database 2 Export selected data to destinations such as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Text files e Other databases e g to a table in an MS Access database 3 Export one or more HG Analyst tables to an external database MS Access SQL Server This chapter describes in detail the Data Transfer System DTS provided with HydroGeo Analyst Starting the DTS The DTS can be used for both importing and exporting data In HG Analyst the DTS may be launched as follows 199 200 Project Import Data from the main menu or click on the Data Import button i on the main toolbar Project Export Data from the main menu or click on the Data Export button 1 on the main toolbar The DTS Export Process 1s explained in Exporting Data using the DTS on page 215 The first window in the DT S Import Process is shown in the figure below Data Transfer System Import on E oj x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name v x Description J Save changes to this DTS package Select da
295. easier to incorporate these data formats directly into your model HydroGeo Analyst allows you to export pumping well and observation well data directly to your model by mapping the required data to Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst the fields stored in the GIS shapefiles or the database In addition HydroGeo Analyst through the use of the cross section editor enables you to create and export layers created from 3D Model interpretations of your geological data in the database You can directly link HGA station data with AquaChem and AquiferTest for in depth water quality analysis and pumping test analysis respectively Also HGA is now available as a conceptual groundwater model builder for FEFLOW 1 3 Installing HydroGeo Analyst 1 3 1 System Requirements Please refer to the HGA_Dongle_Install_Guide pdf for details on the system requirements for HydroGeo Analyst If you have any problems with your particular system configuration please make sure that you followed the installation instructions precisely If the problem is still unresolved contact your hardware experts Finally if you are still having trouble see the section in Preface on How to Contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic 1 3 2 Installation Please refer to the HGA_Dongle_Install_Guide pdf for details on the installation of HydroGeo Analyst This file can be found on your installation CD ROM or can be downloaded from the FTP site The following is a brief excerpt
296. eck types Duplicate Spikes and Blanks will be listed To activate a Check type click in the checkbox beside it Lab Quality l x Lab Quality Templates Template Description Y First Test Relative Percent Difference lt 20 Check Duplicates Coefficient of Yariation lt 10 CJ Check Spikes la O Check Blanks Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than z0 Coefficient of variation less than 10 Highlighting Font i UU _ Background Color _ Background Color Border Color Color Add Remove Help Apply OF Cancel re The Template Description field is filled in by default with a verbal description of the Settings used for the template You can modify the Template Description with any text you would like to use by simply typing over the existing text Each Check type has its own Settings which can be adjusted by clicking on the Check type to highlight it The Settings will then appear to the right Settings for each Check type are described in the following sections 13 2 1 Check Duplicates Settings A field duplicate is a QC sample which is used to determine the precision associated with all or part of the sample collection and measurement process Field duplicates are two independent samples which are collected as nearly as possible from the same point in space and time The two field duplicate samples are collected from the same source using the same type of samplin
297. ecome active Clicking OK will run the Lab Quality Analysis and once completed the Lab Quality Validation window will appear If your template included more than one Check Type you can use the pull down menu in the upper left corner to switch Generate QC Results 493 between each type and the Lab Quality Validation Results table will automatically update The results for Blanks analysis are displayed in the screenshot below l Parais IC CO A terore P ELA ESO vanes atoanan COI IS CS COR LO LS IE CEEE EE ES IE C E E LS CEEE pere Jr Se AE L C E fw Se 0 IE ea ara O LN OO AHHH asas bia ense rzooo1an Ettore gt Jr Se fr CA ca CE 7 COIE EE Etybercene TOU ug Sz CA CC COIE EA IS ug Se Cs coa rar 3 Ja 9 f L waansass e anenserzoooran rober gt fr fs ff eee ee a a a A CONEA EA e CS CENA E A E e RS LL E LU CENENA IE CC 20000 COS EIA 0 IE COI A CN J C J E a e E a L CEC are safe fot ff L CEA LEE Mpeg ae PEE C EI IE CS LIA EII LS IE COIE Ec CC EIA L IEA Ie EM O E A LE EE e 5 fg Sd EA EI IS foot DEE EA Bercere __ WALTER bie ET TEA A we E Records that exceed the method detection limit will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template The results for Spiked sample analysis are displayed below AA ELE SM Eyre 0 wad ug oo CA E ia ica su tae fei ALEA EIA
298. ecord Settings Tools Help J e2 SR xXBa RBOR SH Eo Mae in a Station Groups Station List E Data Query Station Data q et StationN_ X _ Y Elevation TOC Station Data 7 m n m m E Description 537381 50 4812036 33 ES Geologic Description 35780 70 4813800 10 E Well Construction 535111 60 4813600 30 E Soil Testing 539544 40 4914990 80 E Soil Sampling 533966 30 4811787 20 35000 E Monitoring Event 535646 83 4813320 23 ES Mining Exploration 535892 00 4813306 00 E Geophysics 536420 15 4813671 51 Well History 537173 50 4813964 30 E Queries 535369 60 481473910 ES Crosstab 535141 10 481311650 H E Maps 536309 50 4814708 30 9 Bi een 36267 70 4812838 80 535772 80 4814009 30 Reports 534994 40 4814246 70 Y 3DView 536063 10 4813914 90 4 4 Borehole Logs 536174 31 4813496 90 Plots 535789 80 4814600 40 536724 10 4814078 90 536746 69 4814507 50 Loading options Load All Incremental fi 000 Pi x Geologic Description Total 21 selected 1 Record gt Invert Selection This will highlight all the Boreholes and de select the observation well OW 1 Right click on any of the selected Boreholes and select Add Station Group as shown below Data Management 67 Hilrobaro Analy ok Sangi Praja E Preg Ple HG Aaa Pre perl Sample rg 7 E alj x Project Edt We Record Settings Took Hep Ges SOO x Bhal ROR O ee S
299. ect results When the query returns null records for the result value the method detection limit if available and 1f selected can be displayed on the plot Optionally the method detection limit multiplied by the non detect factor ND_ Factor can be used instead of the method detection limit For example if an ND_Factor of 0 5 is provided and a column containing method detection limit values is provided then the plot will display the method Detection Limit DL value multiplied by 0 5 the ND_Factor If ND_Factor is left empty then the DL will be displayed ND_ Factor specify a field that contains the factor for non detects 503 504 Detection Limit select a field that contains the detection limit value Uncertainty select a field that contains a value for the uncertainty for the plotted series This will plot uncertainty bars directly on the plot Standard This option allows you to display water quality standards as a plot series on the plot This is useful for quickly identifying which values exceed the standard When you load the options for standards the following dialog will appear Click on the Add button to add a standard value and select a field that contains the standard value Click on the Delete button to remove existing list items from the list When you are finished click on the Close button The new standards will appear as a plot series under the Plots node in the tree You can then modify
300. ect the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be entered In the Connection tab there will be options to specify the server and database settings 1 Select or enter a server name Choose a server from the Server list at the top of the dialog The list will display all computers on the LAN that Using the Project Manager 171 172 Se ee Se have MS SQL Server 2005 Express support If the current machine is not networked then the list will display the name for the current computer provided the WHI SQL Express instance is installed 2 Enter information to log on to the server If the selected server requires security validation enter the windows login information user name and password 3 Select the database on the server If it is preferred to create a new database then leave this field blank 4 Press the Test Connection button in the lower corner of this dialog to ensure that a valid connection to this Server exists The additional tabs in the Data Link Properties window include Advanced includes default network settings All view and edit all OLE DB initialization properties available for the OLE DB provider Properties can vary depending on the selected OLE DB provider For more details press the Help button in the Data Link Properties
301. ection 4B e Click Yes to open the cross section in the Cross Section editor This will load the cross section editor For more details on creating cross sections you may refer to Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Modify Buffer Distance To modify the buffer distance of a cross section line e Select the cross section layer from the Layer Manager panel e Select a cross section line e Right click and select Update Buffer from the pop up menu Defining a Cross Section Line 315 316 CrossSection Line Name ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here OF Cancel e From the CrossSection Line dialog specify a new buffer distance e Click Ok Map Manager will now regenerate the cross section line using the new buffer distance Note Buffer distances for cross sections generated in past versions of HGA cannot be modified Chapter 8 Map Manager Cross Section Editor The Cross Section Editor is designed with easy to use tools for interpreting geological and hydrogeological data as well as interpreting data for groundwater flow models Generating model layers for use as modeling layer elevations in groundwater modeling packages such as Visual MODFLOW Pro has never been easier In addition the Cross Section Editor is seamlessly integrated with the HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram view The Cross Section
302. ects that may involve stations from various sites If you attempt to import duplicate station names or import a station name which duplicates one already existing in the database the DTS will present the following interface Importing Data using the DTS 211 212 Preferences for Stations with Conflicting Names 5 E x M Stations in Source Choose the Matching Station from the Destination Table All Stations y Filter Name y y BH11 a Operation name x y Match ID Name X ES Zone Append BHG 535646 83 481332023 a 153 BH11 80 56553 43 47207 _ Reject BH 536892 4813306 Update BH8 536420 15 4813671 51 Append y BH9 5371735 48139643 2 Update gt BH10 535369 6 48147391 2 f Update BH11 535141 1 49131165 2 Update y BH12 5363095 48147083 Append y BH13 536267 7 48128388 Append gt BH14 5357728 48140083 Append gt BH15 534994 4 4814246 7 Append gt BH16 536063 1 48139149 Append y BH17 536174 31 48134969 Append BH18 535789 8 48146004 Append BH19 536724 1 48140789 Append BH20 536746 69 49145075 4 gt 4 gt OK Cancel EJ Help If the DTS finds one or more stations in destination with same name as in source they will be displayed and managed in this table All Stations in the Source table with conflicting names in destination will be listed in the left grid sorted alphabetically by station names The right grid displa
303. ecute the query Adding a field which contains a Linked List If a field is added to the Conditions which contains a Linked List then the Expression field for the Condition may be chosen from a linked list An example is illustrated below For example it may be necessary to do a chemical exceedance query such as Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ug l The chemical name Vinyl Chloride may be selected from the combo box since this chemical name is part of a linked list See the example shown below 228 Chapter 7 Queries Xeus e Station Group Query Data Query Design SQL View Preview Display Fields Select a Query VCExceeds20 HH Function Expression station id id i soil_samples station x igo ee a sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date from to chemical_name result_value result_unit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment y Source Conditio Project X X J Map and BHLP Ready JV Use current projection system Conditions soil_chemistry chemicalname F soil _chemistry result_value cis 1 2 dichloroethylene Tetrachloroethylene Trichloroethane Trichloroethylene TYOC Vinyl Chloride Advanced Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry result_value Type DOUBLE Rows pils Time 0 0 0 15 Likewise 1f a date 1s necessary for one
304. ed vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices and Cross Sections on page 386 below m Select create slices Ioj xj Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A color map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Color map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Color Map Display Settings Once the Color map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below 378 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Setting a Name Colormap_2 Visible W Max value 39999 9793 Min value 0 0 Upper limit 40000 Lower limit 0 0 Clip at limits P Semitransparent lt 1 Slice e Name is the name for the color map e Visible shows or hides the color map e Max value is the calculated maximum value for the plume e Min value is the calculated minimum value for the plume e Upper limit is the data value above which the color map may be clipped out not displayed e Lower limit is the data value below which the color map may be clipped out not displayed e Clip at limits indicates whether the colo
305. ed in which folder ProjectDirectory e Root e Map e Data e Selection e Plumes e Surfaces e V3D e XSection e XSI e XInter e bhip e XS2 Root Project vbh is a text file and contains the information on the connection string to the HGA project such as SQL server name database catalog name etc Project vbh bak is a backup of the vbh file Map The map folder contains all of the shapefiles associated with the map project In the root you will find MapProjectName VMP This is an XML file that contains details on the map project such as the projection system renderers settings cross section lines intersections etc Each map project has a unique VMP file Selection When you create a new map layer from an HGA station group or selected stations a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory i e boreholes shp boreholes shx boreholes dbf Appendix B Project Files and Directory Structure 519 520 Data When you create a new map layer from an HGA data query or a map project a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory e g Chem_Exceedences shp Chem_Exceedences shx Chem_Exceedences dbf Plumes The plumes folder contains all of the files associated with the plume data once the 3D interpolation has been conducted on a query The created nc files are used when viewing the plumes in the 3D Explorer Surfaces The surfaces folder contains all of the gridded surfaces G
306. ed plume data set in the Model tree to highlight it then right click on the element and select Add Isosurface from the pop up menu Alternately isosurfaces may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create isosurface icon located above the Model tree This will open the Isosurface properties window as shown in the following figure Display Settings 375 376 m Isosurface properties ioj xj Isosurface name Plume_4 blinimum value 0 Masinunn value 32721 lsosurface value fi 7092 lzosurace color Show borders Color from palette This window is used to set the display settings of the isosurface as described below Isosurface name defines the name of the isosurface as it will appear in the Model Tree under the selected element Minimum value is the calculated minimum value from the interpolated data set Maximum value is the calculated maximum value from the interpolated data set Isosurface value is the element value for which the isosurface will be created Isosurface color is the user specified color of the isosurface double click the color box to customize the color Show borders will display a color map of the element values on the borders sides of the model domain when the isosurface intersects the edge of the model domain Color from palette will use the element color palette to automatically color the isosurface according to the specified isosurface value Once the isosurface is created th
307. ed value checkboxes The following buttons are available jul a Select all field values Unselect all field values OO o e eo Invert selected field values Filter by Condition When this filter option is selected the Filter by Condition frame will become active Here you can access the Expression Editor by clicking on the button Within the Expression Editor define a filter condition For example this method would be useful for a Date field when you would like to only show the dates that fall within a particular time period e g between Jan 1 and June 1 Please see Expression Editor on page 245 for more information on using the Expression Editor Chapter 7 Queries Once the filter settings have been defined click Ok to apply them to your crosstab report Data Marker Settings e Use the 4 button to load the Data Markers Editor where you can highlight data in the crosstab report Edit Marker Fact Field JHCO3 ini Maximum o Minimum J22 Masimum 340 O Hcos J22 340 Cell Style BackColor MA Red Content ligament MiddleCenter Font Arial 10pt ForeColor B black Gradient None GradientBackColor Ml Black ProgressBarColor MN Blue BackColor Determines the cell text background color In the Data Markers Editor window there are several options available for setting the display properties of data fields and defining colors for conditions Click the ap
308. eft panel select the fields for map Move fields to the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt button Next to proceed to the next window ELEVATION Max Size 40 Points TOC Min Size 20 Points Preview In this dialog specify the field color by clicking on the colored rectangles to the right of 284 Chapter 8 Map Manager each field and specify the chart size in the Max size and Min size fields A preview window in the lower right corner displays a preview of the true size and color of the thematic map as it will appear in the Map Manager OK to create the map The thematic map is an entity of the selected layer when this layer is hidden the corresponding thematic map will also be hidden The Bar Chart is created in much the similar way Choose Bar Chart from the Layer Create Thematic Map menu and choose which fields you wish to map The following dialogue will allow you to choose colors for the bars representing different fields as well as the max height and width of the bars ELEVATION Height TOC Paints 30 width jad Points Preview Back OF Cancel Modify Thematic Map Provides options for modifying the properties of an existing Pie or Bar chart Thematic Map Ed a g W Bar Chart Delete Cancel Select the map you wish to edit by clicking on the check box beside the name you entered for that map and click Modify The same Bar Ch
309. eft side of the window and e The Destination tables and fields on the right side of the window The Data Mapping window is displayed below Importing Data using the DTS 205 206 Data Transfer System Import of x Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table Category Destination table hga_stationst Description station b Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Type Unit Conditions M stationid LONG E m M stationname STAING M x_utmnad83 DOUBLE unknowr x DOUBLE degree M y utmnad83 DOUBLE unknowr y DOUBLE degree E X e zone LONG ft jug m oo tag STRING iM elevation DOUBLE m elevation DOUBLE m X n toc DOUBLE m L depth DOUBLE L export DATESTAMP E region STRING Total of records 147 C Primary key O Requires a unit to be selected lt Back Next gt Cancel Help The Source database table which contains the data to be imported can be selected from the list of tables available on the left side of the window Note that if the data source is a text file or a spreadsheet only one table will be available for importing The DTS makes an effort to automatically map fields from this table with those in the selected destination table If the field names are identical then the fields will be matched automatically Unmapped fields will appear blank this indicates that the DTS was unable to match the source field to a field in the HydroGeo An
310. egrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box This dialogue also allows you to specify the size of the symbols or if you wish the start and end size for a range Click OK to return to the renderer screen At the bottom of the Renderer dialog there is a toolbar with additional options These are described below r x amp From left to right the function of these buttons are e Add a new row to the renderer table with a new value and symbol color e Delete the selected row from the renderer table e Order the values by Ascending order e Order the values by Descending order e Reverse the order of the colors symbol lowest will be flipped to highest and highest will be flipped to the lowest When you are finished click OK again to confirm the renderer settings Make sure the renderer you ve created has a check mark in the Visible column and click OK to apply the renderer Value Renderer The Value renderer function is very similar to the Graduated renderer The Value Renderer dialog is shown below Description of Menu Items 281 Yalue Renderer l x Mame Elevation Field Mame ELEVATION e Display Value Font Frequency for display value 3 W Default Symbol Total 323 117 325 144 3er 17 329 198 329 198
311. elect All Use this menu item to select all records in the grid This item is activated only if a grid is active Sort Ascending Use the Sort Ascending option to sort records in the selected column from lowest to highest characters are sorted from A to Z while numbers are sorted from 1 to 9 The 4 button in the toolbar performs the same function Sort Descending If chosen this option will sort records in the selected column from highest to lowest characters are sorted from Z to A while numbers are sorted from 9 to 1 The 4 button in the toolbar performs the same function Display on Map This menu item allows you to create a GIS map layer for the data that is being displayed in a grid This data could be a list of stations in the Station List grid or the result of a well formed query that contains sufficient information If a GIS layer is created using selected stations from any station group elevation and top of casings will be added to the layer Any query that has an ID station id x and y coordinates for the stations in addition to any number of columns displaying desired data can be displayed on a map Such queries should be created using the Query Builder with the Map Ready option selected HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 129 The GIS layer will be created with the same name as the station group or the query If there is an existing layer with the same name you will be prompted to overwrite the existing layer
312. elete button deletes the selected record this feature is available only if a grid is active Post Data button saves posts all changes made to the project this button is activated if changes to a record have been made Find button displays a dialog for searching in a grid with a user specified criteria Filter by Value filters the grid using the value in the active cell Hide Selected button shows only the selected data records rows Inverse Selection button will select all records that are not selected and de select all records that are currently selected Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst 114 11 About the Interface Sort Ascending button sorts records in ascending order based on the selected column Sort Descending button sorts records in descending order based on the selected column Template Manager button launches the Template Manager List Editor button launches the List Editor Material Specifications button launches the Material Specifications Editor Query Builder button loads the utility for building simple and advanced queries Well Profile Viewer button loads a window displaying the profile view of the selected station This includes data for Lithology and Well Construction drilling procedure filling materials screen and well casing materials Map Manager button loads the Map Manager by default the most recently used map project will be loaded View Cross Section button la
313. elow with the well profile view activated Menu Data Bar Tabs feet Edit View Record Settings Toss Help Toolbar Ba s SA txXRBaAlRORs B0R t ll Staten Groupe Profle 58 011 pr wea eroten wel concn a dl Borcher dll Sol Doro gt all W0_Ststiona 3614070 00 Ery Pro ect Ai Chay thicker than 2m E E bal 28410 00 2 00 23 10 J sbi bce 10 ging 5354 60 een sakii 04 00 EE 00 Pm Staton Dela SHAA 01 4070 00 700 50 11 90 B rowser SHI Queries 5 bo 4814050 00 54 00 344 00 TA a AAA bl SHIHA 00 4 Ln TA Sd ae a EWEEN ABT 4060 00 was 10 50 5556 48141000 00 70000 135 00 A 4814000 00 54 50 Hi E Ee a 214251 5 2 E 253 EHAN ARVAT 1H 105 05 Well SEDES 76 amaia 20 2105 14 05 SALH 4814251 30 ik ik TAHE BH 2914343 40 2h SE 27 5 Profile SETTE ES 20142505 00 2039 mH 57662586 4014253 10 109 mg 53551450 4614305 60 150 14 41 14 4 bl 20141 El 1 E 2 6 Data 535208 TE 61 4255 10 TE DE 5 re A290 11759 110 59 A LE HA aa Grids ESE SETAA Sal 226 2E Be A ABT ABE 20 125 01 pd 57808 GO 4014497 90 126 12 17 12 5006 19 481465510 Pr aa ee Sel He 504525 00 22545 TH 4H 050253 2814501 20 YH 24 TA P 5550 7 01455440 1004 111 9 Data Loadin 8 553 ITE ir iir D edo 2414534 00 ih ao ot samy ABTABOT 90 4049 141 49 Options Lasing optiont 53620000 4014061 50 321 09 122 09 a SSA LEE nii iii im bosdi a i 2814870 5 E 15 5599310 ABTATTA OO ES TES Incremental 5507 15 Pipe oe shel cree A 5744 08 4814731 50
314. elow will appear Description of Menu Items 331 332 Options m Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen Level Intersecting Grid Snapping Butte Well Snapping Buffer fio Pixels Boundary Snapping Buffer 5 Pixels Vertex Snapping Buffer E El Pixels Cancel E Help Editor Tab In this tab there are options for specifying the snapping buffers for the selected cross section and its elements The Snapping Buffers are specified in pixels The buffer values determine the distance to which lines and vertices will snap i e join to the nearest line or vertex If a low value for the Snapping Buffer is specified the mouse cursor must be very close to a vertex or line in order for snapping to occur If a high value for the Snapping Buffer is specified then snapping will occur at a distance further away from the destination vertex or line Snapping allows for exact placement of vertices and eliminates the need for repetitive use of zooming in to specific locations If the snapping is used the vertices will be connected but not linked at the desired locations Well Snapping Buffer The default Well Snapping Buffer is 10 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 10 pixels of another well borehole then the borehole will be highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this station s lithologic interval the line will be automatically snapped to the closest vertex
315. emented in the Extensible Markup Language XML there are unparalleled and unlimited possibilities to develop third party components to work with the software Some of the modules that come with HydroGeo Analyst include e Data Transfer System e Template Database Schema Manager e Query Builder e GIS Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e Borehole Log Plotter e Report Designer e 3D Visualization A brief description of each module is provided in the following sections while a more detailed discussion is presented in later chapters 1 2 1 Data Acquisition Data Entry Most environmental data is inherently spatial as observations are taken at specific map coordinates over time In HydroGeo Analyst these sampling locations are referred to as Stations HydroGeo Analyst comes with standard easy to use data entry grids equipped with drop down combo boxes and many other features to facilitate data entry and validation for virtually any type of Station data Importing and Exporting Data The Data Transfer System DTS is designed to assist in the process of importing exporting data to from the database Using the DTS station data can be imported from practically any source including delimited text files MS Excel spreadsheets MS Access Databases SQL Server Databases and more 1 2 2 Data Management HydroGeo Analyst supports virtually any database structure including those with multiple levels of relationships among two or m
316. emperature 1 Select one or more enabled channels I Conductivity IE Flowmen selected by default 2 Select the source MON file by checking on Import File Name Logger Type Location Serial Number Station Name the checkbox in the Iv CTD_O70503132 CTD Diver 13 Station X a 8056322954265 4 Import column see CTD Remarks below NO1 61667 312 W 01 3 Click on the Import button when ready C Documents and Settings Wayne Desktop CT D_070503132027_61667 M0N Remarks o Rows highlighted in white have correct station name mapping and can be selected CL LL III iii iii iii iii o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination gt station gt o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there y Back Import Cancel E Help Upon clicking Import a progress bar will display shown above If the import is successful a confirmation message will appear similar to the one shown below HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 121 122 AA x i The Following files were imported successfully Ci Documents and Settings WaynelDesktop 2TD_070503132027_61667 MON 83 Records Export Use the Export option to export data from the HG Analyst project data may be exported to external files in various formats using the DTS Ex
317. en Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING ex material If you have multiple well casings you must add an additional field e CasingID field type LONG used to distinguish different well casings This allows to assign multiple screens to multiple well casings Filling Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex material Hydrogeology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex formation name Water Level Tables must have one fields with type DOUBLE depth_ and one field with type STRING ex comments In the Water Level tab you may also select the reference datum for measuring depth to water levels select Ground Surface Elevation or Top of Casing Pump Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ two time fields named start_ and end_ with type DATE TIME stamp one description field with type STRING ex comments NOTE The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths and not elevations As such the BHLP and Cross Section editor require that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark About the Interface 185 186 The Save as DB Template button allows you to save all changes made to a new user template A separate dialog will be displayed where the name for th
318. en you are finished click OK to return to the Contours screen Create Gridded Data This feature allows you to interpolate data for the current layer and create a grid file GRD for use in HGA 3D Explorer or other applications For example if you have a station layer selected you can create a grid file based on station elevations or TOC top of casing elevations Select this menu item and the following dialog will appear Description of Menu Items 289 Create Gridded Data E xj Name ElevationGrid Calculating Fiel Choose Field Elevation Min 111 Max 111 Interpolato Chooze Interpolator Natural Neighbours ka Advanced Settings Create Cancel E Help m Enter a name for the grid file and select a field containing the source data Click the Create button to create the file The grid file will be created in the HGA project s folder in the Surface sub folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Surface test grd NOTE As with contours you can select an interpolation method and customize interpolation settings by clicking on the Advanced Settings button Display Data This feature allows you to display data in a plot or tabular format on the map for the current points map layer Fields are based on points data loaded from Station Groups or Data Queries created using the Query Builder You may define conditions for fields and highlight rows in
319. er 9 Once a layer is created in one cross section it will be available for selection in all other cross sections that you create for your project Altering the properties of a given layer will be reflected in all cross sections Once the desired view has been obtained the cross section may saved To do so File gt Save from the main menu or click the 7 Save button from the toolbar Then remove the editable status for the Geology interpretation To do this ee Edit check box beside Geology in the layer control For information on drawing model layers or hydrogeological interpretations please see Chapter 9 In the next section you will view the cross section in 3D Explorer Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 6 2 3D Visualization Fence Diagrams The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer allows for visualizing multiple cross sections in three dimensions and combining cross sections for creating fence diagrams In addition you may visualize transient contaminant plumes for one or more chemicals in your project To load a cross section into 3D Explorer View gt View 3D from the main menu or click on the View 3D button from the toolbar In this dialog you may select which cross sections surfaces or 3D plumes should be added to the 3D project OK to accept the default settings This will load the 3D Explorer window as seen in the following figure File Edit View Settings Help a A om WS 8 ES verti
320. er Size J Proportional Height js Width ja Min Value jo Minimum Height p Width JO Max Value 1120 Maximum Height E Width E Preview Min 0 Max 120 F x Apply Close The following settings are available Symbol marker select the symbol marker type from the combo box Marker Size Height specify the symbol height Width specify the symbol width Proportional use this option to create proportionally sized symbols dependent upon the result value Min value specify the min value for the smallest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value Max value specify the max value for the largest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series symbols will appear using the selected settings Chapter 14 Plotting 14 4 Adding Lines to a Plot Best fit lines or lines calculated with user defined formulas can be displayed on any plot to do so right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Add Line from the pop up menu The following Add Line dialog will appear x Name 0 Line type Formula BestFit BestFit Type Std Deviation y Source Series Ic a v Period 2 OK Cancel Enter a line Name at
321. er Water Services Chanemo Sol E last ato ii 151 UNI CONVOCA Aia 151 Major COMPONEN S IA E A ani 152 4 Project Management ssiicssiccccsscscsccccscsscccsssocccssocsscsscecssssscssesscesess LO User Access Level Management sccccsccossssssssssssscccccccccsssscssscccccscccsssssssscccsssssssees 157 AAA e O PER o uae teeueodeceentace 157 Secutit DOC MENT alarde 158 Mana Ms Users and Groups oia 158 ST OUP PEOPDEIES iio 160 Application EVE OD CCUG a eset sted eachtcs cated cua a a 162 Project bevel ODEO arxce dered n co gd tea a E a 162 User Properties a N 164 OEP ASS O o ies es ange es vse odo eee 165 EXpPortino PLSD et 166 Usine the Project Manager iii 166 loadin the Project Wizard ura an 167 Step Is Set Database Environment a ias 168 Option 1 Select Server and Database oleo 169 Option 2 BuilldsG Onne chon SINE do 170 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables aut did 173 Selecting the Database Template for your project occccccnncnccnnnnnnnnonnnnnonononononononnnnnnnnnnnnannnannnnnnno 174 Step Set Project Properues and Location dll E 175 Modiin Project Properes enea tara nepsacceeeswaadeenssodeubareeeusasaesiesecnoene 178 CORMCCUW O ana idas 179 Miscellaneous Setini Se er a io A E E E EA 179 S Template Manara LOL Understanding the Template Manager cccccccccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssscccccccsssseees 181 ADOUt the IMterace aint adidas den tad 182 Description OF Toolbar Hess Rca 183 Template
322. er groups e Manage users in user groups 1 e add remove edit users in existing user groups e Assign access rights to User Groups for each object Data Management Maps Cross Sections etc e Set user ID names description and access passwords for users e Enforce access levels for each user group as per the specified security document e Store Users and User Groups in database templates for re use in future projects HydroGeo Analyst has two levels of user access management e Application Level used to control high level features such as creating new projects and managing databases and e Project level used to control access to individual modules within a project e g User Access Level Management 157 Data access maps queries BHLP etc NOTE HGA enforces user access to HGA projects only The SQL Server database that stores the HGA data can be accessed by any user using Enterprise Manager provided they have the permissions SQL Server Enterprise Manager provides similar tools that allows for user access management and should be utilized as needed 4 1 2 Security Document The user access management settings are stored in a Security Document This 1s a document that contains user groups users system security policies access rights to application and project level objects This document is created using the User Access Level Management component and is managed by HGA In HGA there are two types of security doc
323. er of decimal places by using the Decimal places vertical scroll box BHLP Columns 453 12 2 3 Depth Interval based Column The Depth Interval based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various intervals As in the case of the Depth Point based column the data can be displayed using graphics text or both Examples of data that could be displayed using a Depth Interval based column include screen locations interval based samples and their descriptions etc To create a Depth Interval based column click on the Add button to add a new column and select Interval from the combo box that appears A new Interval column will be added to the designer window Expand the Interval node and select IntervalEntities ES ScaleEntities E ES Depth ES DepthEntities E ES Interval DataTable E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField Select the data table or query and the fields for the top and bottom entity In this column the data table or query is any data source that contains from to interval data and the top and bottom entities are mapped to these from and to fields As in the Depth column once the intervals have been established the value field has to be defined To do so right click anywhere in the Settings frame and select Add Entity Lap I Op Hewa Description DataField from E Bo
324. er space between the edge of Map Manager window display and the labels on the axis It may be necessary to increase this value when the X and Y co ordinates contain many digits Intervals Controls the space between the major graticule lines You can accept the system calculated Auto values or enter Manual values Mark Text Controls the axis labels For each axis you can set the visible status rotate the label Description of Menu Items 309 310 and control the gap between the label and the axis itself Code Page Use these settings to convert accented characters into a shapefile format that can be recognized by the Map Manager The following options are available Choose Code Page X Please choose the 150 code page for the shape files Memo r Central Europe Latin 2 OF Cancel From the combo box select the Code Page that should be used for the shapefiles in your map project The Map Manager provides several ISO standards For a complete list of which standard you should select based on your language and regional settings please see Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes on page 535 NOTE This option is available for new shapes files only existing shapefiles cannot be converted Click OK when you are finished Config Geotransformations This menu item allows you to configure the geotransformation settings for a Map Project These settings must be defined so that Map Manager can properly conver
325. er tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to it using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format This tab opens by default when you double click a data connection in Server Explorer Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you select the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be furnished For more information about the Data Link API visit msdn microsoft com open the MSDN Library Online and then the Platform SDK to find the MDAC SDK which contains the Data Link API Reference or see Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing on page 521 Once the connection string has been defined click OK to accept it e Click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping 6 1 2 Data Mapping The next step in the data transfer operation is to match a source table with a destination table The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames e The Source table and fields found on l
326. erface Map projects are created and modified within the Map Manager application linked to HydroGeo Analyst The Map Manager can view and modify one map project at a time In addition the map projects should be modified by only one user at a time A map project may have an unlimited number of map layers The Map Manager may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Tools Map Manager from the Main Menu of HydroGeo Analyst e Select Record Display on Map and the selected HydroGeo Analyst records will be loaded onto a Map project In the HydroGeo Analyst toolbar click on the ai Map button e From the HydroGeo Analyst Project Browser select a map project branch from the Map node Once the Map Manager window is loaded the display should be similar to the one shown below Active Window Men _ p leha A smes AO KA KI Artar Bar 7s Toolbar a Coi e er anos AN Layer oie y A Manager Map Window MEA Layer Cord HAD 1960 UTM Zara 17H Informations s Projection System Coordinates Scale 256 Chapter 8 Map Manager The Map Manager window contains the following elements e Menu Bar Contains program menu commands e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Map Manager e Layer Manager Manages activating a layer visualizing and or editing layers e Map Window Contains the visible layers for the map project e Layer Information Displays t
327. ermines the type of summary to be used Check Mark Value Allows you to determine whether the starting condition of the checkmark is True checked or False unchecked Image LineColor Style Weight Set the properties of the lines borders for the object Picture Select the picture you wish to display in the frame Supported graphics formats are bmp ico cur jpg gif and wmf Report Designer Window 403 404 Line SizeMode Specify how the picture will be displayed in the frame Clip will display the picture at original size and if the frame is larger than the frame it will be cut off Stretch will adjust the image proportions to fit the frame even if it means distorting the picture Zoom will adjust the size of the picture until the entire image is visible in the frame and there is the least amount of unfilled space possible AnchorBottom Anchors bottom of vertical lines to section bottom x1 yl x2 y2 Specify the coordinates in pixels of the start and end of the line Shape Shape Specify which shape you wish to display rectangle ellipse or rounded rectangle Rich Text MaxLength Specifies the maximum number of characters a user can enter in the control The default for MaxLength is 0 indicating that the text is limited only by available system resources Any number greater than O indicates the maximum number of characters Frame CloseBorder
328. es Marne Test Description Enter description here Creation Date 2005 11 21 09 48 37 Privileges Database i a Project User Access Level OF Cancel Databases you may assign rights for Manage which allows deleting databases and projects Project you may assign rights for Creating Projects User Access Level you may assign rights for Managing user access levels Users with this privilege will be able to modify the Project Level objects when a project is opened Project Level Objects Settings for Project Level objects can only be defined when the project is opened The Group Properties for Project Level Objects are shown below 162 Chapter 4 Project Manager Group Properties Mame Sample Description Creation Date 20054 1 21 11 06 50 Privileges ovess eeoue vine ooe reso atom fe E 30 View D Backup Database F Borehole Logs Charts Cross Sechons Crozstab Data Export Data Import Environmental List Editor Manual Data Entry Maps Maternal Specificatt Project Properties Quality Control Queres Reporte np 0 Ap 00 O nn HA O Restore Database Template Manager ar i OF Cancel The administrator may control user access to the following application level objects Backup Database Allow Yes or No Restore Database User Access Level settings Manually Add Remove data DTS Import Data Import Station Data DTS Export data Template Manager Database vi
329. es An Image Entity will allow you to display a graphical representation such as an image photo or formation pattern in addition to text BHLP Columns 451 452 In the Settings frame select the field that contains the appropriate information for the entity you have chosen DataT able 64 in E log E DepthEntity Caption Depth Description Depth Caption Text Description Text DataF eld Value Settings The Depth Point based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Depth node from the BHLP Settings window e Visible Column Options Border Line Wisibilit Outline Appearance Description Genera M Visible width 10 Heightf10 4 Image Symbol Image Settings Symbol Setting E Draw Mode Tied y Symbol Line Color Symbol Fill Color The Depth frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking on the Options button see page 447 Use the Outline checkbox to show hide the column border line The Appearance tab allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox You can also select from the available Draw Modes change the Width and Height of the images or modify the appearance
330. es the two fields can be created as linked fields enhancing data integrity The Set Primary Key button is activated only when a table is active and receiving the focus It allows defining the primary key for the table If selected a separate dialog as shown below will be displayed where one or more fields can be selected to form the primary key for the table Set Primary Key xl PERS e SSS from a DO to_ ES E form_dezc E L soll type E E pattern E L consistency E Ll structure E L matgec E E calour E Ll odor E Ll formation_hame P formation unit moisture I eomment hd Delete duplicate records OF Cancel El Help About the Interface 187 Te The Apply Changes button allows you to save all changes made to the current user template JL The Move Down button moves any selected table or field one level down in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in the order they are shown in the database browser T The Move Up button moves any selected table or field one level up in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in the order they are shown in the Database Browser 5 3 Working With the Template Manager 5 3 1 Modifying Tables and View Settings The Template Manager displays all user tables under their logical categories Information on categories as well as tables and fields can be di
331. escription of Menu Items 263 EMP Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file as shown in the following figure Scale Factor Quality Scale Symbolo f No Symbology Scaled 256 Colors Default f Half Tone O Web Safe 24Bit Color C Graps With System Colors Line Symbology Not Scaled C Source Depth All Symbology Scaled OK Cancel H Help There are several options for modifying the image Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEG export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Meta File EMP Properties The Map Project Properties dialog contains general settings for the map project This dialog is shown below 264 Chapter 8 Map Manager Map Project E E xl
332. ese fields Next to continue The next window is Data Validation If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one shown below Chapter 2 Getting Started Data Transfer System Import of x Step 4 Data Yalidation Erors wWamings Description Field Name of records Preview x Y Rowld station 7 0 6 5 Coar 7 6 5 26 Fine 7 26 52 Grav 7 52 69 Fine 7 69 100 Silty 8 0 4 3 Coar 8 43 17 Fine Note 8 17 48 Grav i y 8 48 66 Fine This step allows you to accept reject 8 66 94 Silty records with warnings by selecting the 9 94 100 Silty warning message in the Errors W amings g 0 4 Coar grid Records with errors must be rejected to g 4 8l Fine activate the importing process 3 8 33 Grav You can also select one or more records in 3 33 33 5 Silty the preview table and exclude them from 3 82 ae fine importing into your database 5 Silty 9 87 5 100 Silty 10 0 8 Coal gt Ml Error O Warming Y xX lt Back Import Cancel Help NOTE Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted to the database OK Close to close the DTS The new lithology data should now appear in the project To confirm select one of the new Boreholes fr
333. eside each cross section name Or to select all cross sections place a check mark beside the Select All check box at the top of the dialog Select any Surfaces you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Gridded surfaces can be created in the Map Manager see Chapter 8 Create Gridded Data for more details Select any Plumes you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the Same manner Plumes can be created in the HGA main window see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation for more details When you are finished OK This will load the 3D Explorer window For more details on how to use 3D Explorer please refer to Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Information Provides a wndow containing information on the selected station After selecting this option you may place the mouse cursor on a particular lithologic column within a selected station A small text box appears displaying specific information about the layer layer type top and bottom elevations and thickness If the station in question has screens the Information feature can also highlight their pertinent features Preview BHLP Allows you to view the borehole log plot BHLP of any station in the cross section To view the BHLP select this option and click on any station in the cross section 9 2 4 Tools Options Allows setting line snapping options for lines drawn on the cross section If this feature is selected the dialog shown b
334. esired then click the Edit Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst List button to load the List Editor This will allow for creating editing a list for the selected field The following figure depicts an instance of the List Editor List Editor Demo T i 10 x Select a Fiel List Items zoil_type ie Name Include Picture Description 2 geologic description lithology La Fields a a colour Color comment consistency Consistency form_desc Description formation _ name formation writ matgs0 ASTM Descriptor moisture odor Odor structure Structure to_ to la Js lEs ls JEs ls ls JEs Es JEs Es Es JE Es JEs Es Es E jEs PTI F Total Items 46 Ok Cancel EJ Help The List Editor window contains the following parts The Tables combo box Allows you to select the table containing the field for which a list is to be created or modified Fields Allows you to select a field for which a list is to be created or modified List Items Displays the list for the selected field if available Each list item may have a Name Image and Description Adding Lists Manually To create the list for a particular field follow the steps below List Editor Select the Table and Field for which a List is to be created Click the Add button to add a list item In the first column enter a Name for the list item If necessary define a Picture for the list item Click in the
335. eters is described below dE Interpolator Options HEO O a Nodes Stat End Y Y Hodes Use Log Imterpolatior 1 Aestict hin Value __Flestict Max Vake _ Value Min Value Mas Real Hirn Real Has TEn Mir bimmingimt Max trimming limk Ponts per Block along Block size along Y Block size along gt Min ponts for block kriging Max paints for block kriging 47 blas radiis Min radus _ West radius Angel Angle Angles 1 Engngbps o o SE Mean O Ga Dit ll Vatiable Trend estimate Estimate vanable Nugget constar 02 Else Wa ograms MT OF Cancel Least easting TA Appendices Start X End X X_Nodes Start Y End Y Y Nodes Use Log Interpolation Restrict Min Value Restrict Max Value Value Min Value Max Real Min Real Max Min Trimming Limit Max Trimming Limit Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid Number of grid nodes in the X direction Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting 1s useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation pro cess and de
336. etween the station and where the screen is placed The larger this Gap value the further away the screen will be from its respective station Intersecting Layers During a cross section interpretation knowledge of other interpretations is essential In this dialog you can define display options for intersecting cross sections 334 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid View intersecting While E ditin Interzecting Layer Symbo Outline Color Outline Style ___ width in Pixels 6 H e Model Layer I Geology Layer e HudroGeology Layer El Help Specify the color and line style under the Intersecting Layer Symbol frame In the View Intersecting While Editing frame specify the view options for different interpretation types By default all modules will be active The intersecting cross sections will be visible when you set one of the interpretation types to visible and editable In the example screen shot below you can see that cross sections EE and BB along with their interval locations are visible while interpreting cross section ZZ Scale Specify a new view scale More to come with GUI Description of Menu Items 335 336 Map Project Site map File Edit view Tools Help aa ams AXA A 98 o Pramac OCR E E E uolgas sso15 340 330 BE
337. ew Layer Group X Please enter the name for new layer group Cancel e Enter a name for the layer group e Click Ok The new layer group will now appear in the Layer Manager panel Chapter 8 Map Manager Adding Layers to a Group To add a layer to a layer group simply drag and drop the desired layer onto the layer group Removing Layers from a Group To remove a layer from a layer group simply drag and drop the desired layer out of the layer group Removing Layer Groups To remove a layer group follow the steps below e Right click on the desired layer group e From the pop up menu select Delete e The component layers will ungroup and return to the root of the layer list All layer types including layer groups can be moved up and down within the Layer Manager panel by simply dragging and dropping the layer into a new position 8 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar in the Map Manager provides access to most of the same features available in the Main Menu Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance New button creates a new map project Open button opens an existing map project Save button saves the current map project Print button sends the current map view to the report editor Selection P
338. ews Templates e g Environmental template Queries Read Write Delete and Execute Quality Control User Access Level Management 163 3D Explorer Read Write and Delete Borehole logs Charts Cross Sections Cross Tab Queries List Editor Map Manager Material Specifications Editor Reports Project Properties Read and Write When you are finished click OK to save the settings for the Group and close the dialog 4 1 5 User Properties 164 The UALM allows the administrator to add and edit the properties for the various Users in the project To load these settings e From the main UALM window select one user under the Users node in the tree view e Click on the P Add button to add a new User or e Click on the Edit button to edit the properties for the selected User The following User Properties dialog will appear Chapter 4 Project Manager User Properties User Name First Mame Last Name Description E mail Phone Password Confirm Password Belonging to Groups L Restricted Users lv Administrators a JAdministator m a OF Cancel xl Define the User personal and contact information including User name First Name Last Name Description EMail Phone Password and Confirm Password Belonging to Groups Select the User groups to which the User should belong When you are finished click OK to save the settings for the user and cl
339. ext Cancel E z The DTS also allows exporting data from a project to one of the following formats e Text files CSV e Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Other databases For more details on how to import export data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 3 2 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar The HydroGeo Analyst menu items have been specifically designed for optimal flexibility and ease of use The items in the menu bar are context sensitive this means that one or more menu items may be greyed out if a specific feature is not applicable for a particular view The top menu allows access to all of the functionality of the project browser tree view and all of the tabs Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help The following menu items are available in HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 107 e Project e Edit e View e Record e Settings e Tools e Help The following sections describe the items which appear in the main menu 3 2 1 Project New Open 108 Selecting the New menu item will launch the Project Manager with the option to create a new project The Project Manager allows the user to select a server for the database select or create a database for the new project provide project related information name location soil classification settings etc and select a database structure 1f a new database 1s to be created The New button in the toolbar performs the
340. f the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Mag X X co ordinate magnification factor Mag_Y Y co ordinate magnification factor Mag Z Z co ordinate magnification factor No_ Value Value assigned to nodes located outside the convex hull of the data points where interpolation is not performed Allow_Extrapolation Is a flag to use extrapolation for nodes outside the convex hull of the polygon formed by the data points In this case linear regression is used to fit a plane through the data set and calculate the interpolated value This should be used with caution since extrapolation is less reliable than interpolation Sdip Calculate the aspect and slope at each grid node This can be used to augment the elevation information The aspect is measured in degrees or radians clockwise from north and the slope is measured positively below the horizontal plane in degrees or radians Tautness_1 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Tautness_2 Controls t
341. field type to a field Choose from Fact Only Dimension only and Both SortOrder Assign a field data sorting order Choose from Ascending or Descending Crosstab Queries 245 Style Sheet The Style Sheet tab in the DataCube wizard allows you to define the appearance properties for the crosstab report DataCube wizard A Layout Style sheet ctBor Feld ontionStyle Report GroupT otalStyle MainT otalStyle OddRowFactStyle Elements TableCaptionStyle ata aaa a BackColor EE Maroon Content lignment MiddleCenter Font Arial Spt style B old ForeColor White Gradient one GradientB ackColor Black ProgressB arColor ES DarkOrange Style Preview Properties BackColor Determines the cell text background color 4 OK Cancel The Report Elements list contains all the report elements that can be customized The Properties dialog is context sensitive and allows you to change the appearance properties for the selected report element The changes made will then be shown in the Style Preview frame Click Ok to accept the style settings Auto Format The crosstab component contains a variety of color scheme templates that can be applied to your crosstab report To access the color scheme templates open the Auto Format dialog shown below by clicking on the Auto Format button located above the Layout tab Here you can select a color scheme template from the Styles list and preview its propert
342. file image will depend on your screen resolution and on the size of the Display Window In order to maximize the image quality you should maximize the Display Window to full screen 10 6 1 Saving Project The 3D project can be saved to file by selecting File Save As from the Main Menu or click the H Save As icon from the toolbar The following Save to file dialog will appear a AB 3xs aa VEX3D 3x5 sa All Sections 3x5 la BE 3xs lam CC 3xs laa cube 3xs Save as type Visual Borehole Cross Sections file 3x2 Cancel 4 The 3D image is saved with the extension 3XS and will be saved in the HGAnalyst Projects Project_Name V3D folder by default Save an existing project by selecting File Save from the Main Menu or by clicking Ss Save icon from the toolbar 10 7 Printing the 3D Image To print the desired 3D view select File Print or click the El Print button from the toolbar This will load the Report Manager where the 3D image may be placed into a Report template or printed as is For more details on modifying images in reports please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor Printing the 3D Image 391 392 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 11 The Report Editor The WHI Report Editor included with the HydroGeo Analyst package is used to create professional reports containing data and 2D and 3D views you have generated for your projects This chapter presents information
343. from a Data Query Upon clicking on this menu item the following dialog will appear Description of Menu Items 269 270 Load HGA Data x f Station Group O Date Muer Ok Cancel H Help In this dialog select the data source type and choose from the appropriate combo box the desired Station Group or Data Query The data will be used to create a new Map Layer and the layer will be displayed in the Layer Manager as well as in the map window This option is available only if a map project is open The resulting shapefiles will be saved as follows e for Station groups the shapefiles and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Selection e for Data Queries the shapefiles and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Data Import This menu item provides options for importing basemap layers to the current Map Project Basemap images may be Raster Images sid bil tif grc bmp jpg tga AutoCAD files dwg dxf or MicroStation files dgn Each format is explained below Raster Image A critical element of any Map Project is registering the image map with the correct real world coordinates This procedure is called Georeferencing Since raster images do not contain information on the site s projection system or length units these details must be manually added using Georeferencing Georeferencing assigns points with known coordinates to the image the image is
344. fy which stations should display the data table This is useful if you have a station group with numerous stations and are interested in displaying the data summary table only for a few stations Data Settings xx Display Fields Condition Choose Data Select one or more stations for which data will be displayed 4 4 Lo rd e e e e Get Selection from Map Cancel H Help Simply place a check box beside the stations that should display the data summary table If you click on the Get Selection Map button then the Map Manager will get only those stations that are selected on the map layer on the map project and use only those for the Display Data This button is enabled only if you have at least one station selected in the map layer Once you are finished click OK to return to the layout window From the Layout Setting dialog click on the Display Settings button in the Callout Box column and the following dialog will appear Callout Box Settings x Setting Fill Color E Outline Color ia Transparent False gt Bos Shape Round Rectan gt Tip Style Triangle gt Padding is shadow False gt shadow Color Difset X jo 3 E Offset r 60 DK Cancel H Help 294 Chapter 8 Map Manager In the Callout Box Settings dialog you can modify several display properties for the callout box The callout box is the box oval or bubble that contains th
345. g and bx eCUtine QUuerICS adas 74 Mappine Me Data sesini es svecesticccecdessyceedsccceds E E E 75 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Cr ate a Map Proein a 75 Importing and Georeferencing a Site Map ooooocccnncnnncnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss T1 Addie GeoreketenCe POMS onneen E tros 78 Addie Tae tl lcd 81 Cr eatinea Contour Map as 82 Creatinesa Color Shade MAD 85 Dennine Cross Secuon Line cido died 88 Creatina Te LOSS CUM chats eoatecnetteaesauiacnnsitccnatasigdwenicaenotaceoashsne tocaakeeunahic esas ee seas 90 Interpreting and Viewing Cross SectiOns sccccccccccsssssssssssscccccsccssssssssscccsccssssesees 91 Drawing Geologic Cross Sectional Layers csser EEEE Eaa rta 91 2D Visualization Fence Diagrams slds 95 Prepar ina RED A E a 97 Creatine Data Reports TONT GNAS alo ade 97 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst ccssccccssscccsssscccsssscccssscccsssscccsssscees DO HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts cccccccssssssssssssscccccccssssssssscccsssssssees 100 roduc TOM at ute opos a a 100 SONE YDE S aE nn o II uses temas sun a uesneud eraser iene aise ate 100 SS UNL ONS A ce S vane teaMecl seaneaes 101 A O abniesta hiaadainas suiet sates 102 Vata Ale SOMES tilo coil 104 Data So acota 105 Station last Tab a e UNOS 105 AE Ue aa aea a ti deus Je coms Mose als aati aaa saea tay 106 Data Transter System DIES sia A A A 106 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar s
346. g equipment Ideally analyte concentrations in the duplicate sample should be identical or very close to the original sample to which it is being compared The following settings are available Define A New Lab Quality Template 489 Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than z0 E Coefficient of variation less than Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e Relative percent difference less than This criteria is used to compare how close the result from a duplicate sample D is to the true original field sample O It is expressed as either a positive difference the sample result is higher than the true value or negative difference the sample result is lower than the true value When used with duplicate samples the Relative Percent Difference measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results must be to be considered acceptable It can also measure accuracy when one of your results is the true value such as the quality control lab results for a split sample or the actual concentration of a known or unknown sample Coefficient of Variation CV less than The standard deviation as a percentage of the average The CV is a unitless quantity indicating the variability around the mean in relation to the size of the mean When used with duplicate samples the CV measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results Highlighting If a record is
347. g the current template The functions of the buttons are described below The Copy Template As button allows you to make a copy of the selected template Clicking on this button displays a dialog where a name for the new user template can be entered x The Delete Template button removes the current template from the collection of templates available for the project and loads the default template in its place Te The Save Template button saves all changes made to the current user template About the Interface 183 184 Profile Settings The Set Profile Settings button allows you to provide information that will be used for displaying well profiles BHLP in HydroGeo Analyst as well as the Map Manager and the Cross Section Editor Clicking on this button launches the window shown below that can be used to specify which tables and fields are to be used to obtain information related to geology and well construction details Define Well Profile Parameters Lithology Drilling Casing Screen Filling Hydrogeology Wi aber Level Pump Select table lithology T Soil Description Field zoil _type T Table description Field description o Y Hote Requires a depth interval dependent table with at least twa depth fields named from_ and to with type double one material specification field with type string This window contains several tabs e Lithology e Drilling e Casi
348. geologist working on the project may only need to view tables that are related to geological investigation data The Template Manager allows you to hide all unwanted tables and or fields from such users and display only a smaller set of relevant tables and or fields All user modifications to the database views can be saved either in the currently active template or as a new name All such modifications to the project s database are automatically reflected in all copies of user settings The Template Manager allows you to export the currently active database structure as a new database structure for use in creating similar projects More information on the detailed options that are available in the Template Manager is provided later in this chapter 5 2 About the Interface 182 The Template Manager may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Settings Template Manager from the Main Menu e Click on the A Template Manager button from the toolbar The Template Manager window is shown in the figure below Template Toolbar Template Editor Demo a E agi o x Database environmental_june30c y Ie T ag m M Use as project default Templates Database structure Category Settings D escriptions H Description D H Geologic Description Database Settings W Well Construction Table name Description 4 Soil Testing 4 Soil Sampling H Monitoring Eve
349. group with those stations that satisfy the query criteria All station groups created for a project are listed in the Project Browser under the Station Groups node Clicking on any of the sub nodes corresponding to a station group will load the Station List tab and display the appropriate stations belonging to that group An example is shown below HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalystProjects NewDemo SS TA 0 xj Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help aegliAantxBalRPBORRFy BNS 8 Gas 10 a Station Groups Station List E Data Query Station Data aii Project Station Name x Y Elevation 44 Monitoring wells Mi Boreholes 535320 00 4814610 50 330 80 a Soil Borings E 535300 00 4814339 40 331 10 a WO_Stations 535504 70 4814750 20 329 90 a OC_Monitoring_Wells l 535472 00 4814704 70 290 60 l 535548 40 4814637 30 i a sale ete td 53545940 4814704 90 330 80 de eena 535476 10 4814781 10 330 90 48 soil_borings_with_tce_exceeding w 535469 50 4814652 70 330 60 H E Station Data W 535484 70 481 4546 50 329 90 H E Queries 535626 90 4814652 90 329 50 H Crosstab lv 535545 90 4814553 50 332 10 4 Maps 535637 70 4814582 90 330 20 f 535800 00 4814637 50 329 90 i 5 cd Tw 535674 60 4814800 00 330 40 a 535687 40 4814665 30 330 50 BQN ID View p 535390 00 4814741 90 329 90 61 fl Borehole Logs Ew 535577 40 4814477 10 329 30 Plots F 535677 10 4814416 20 330 50
350. h as PocketDiver LoggerDataManager DiverOffice and e SENSE MON files consist of three sections Logger Settings Data Series and Data The Logger Settings section contains the current settings of the logger including the location sample method sample rate serial number and available channels The Data Series section contains information on when field measurements were taken The Data section contains all the measurements for each channel ordered by date and time To import MON file data into your HGA database follow the steps below e STEP 1 Select MON Data Files e STEP 2 Map Data Fields e STEP 3 Import Data into the Database Please note that the MON data import procedure can accommodate multiple MON files simultaneously However for demonstration purposes only one MON file will be used in the following guide Also before you import data from MON files into HGA the water level values need to be calculated with respect to the top of the well casing This can be done through SWS datalogger software DiverOffice Data Logger Manager by performing barometric compensation on the MON data using the Top of Casing method Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Step 1 Select MON Data Files q Select MON files The first step requires specifying a MON data source Click the Open Folder button Locate and select a MON file s and click Open MON ASCII Standard File MON E The selected MON file
351. hapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter contains values for the well casing orders Screen Well Constructor e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Wi aber level Reduc Appearanc Labe f Use Default Color E Visible Font Use Material Image Color E a J Position he Draw Border Color Right Justify Ail Ene ev only Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well screen e Use Default color Use Material Image color use this option if your well screen materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color e Draw Border and e Fill Full 2D View only use this option to apply a solid color to the well screen Under the Label frame define the text settings for the screen labels NOTE In order to see the well screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities e Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screens table that contains an image e Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screen that is type string and contains the descriptive inf
352. he Annular Fill information Annular Fill table from the grid You will be prompted to save the changes Yes For this well define the following info Data Management 41 O Annular Seal Concrete e Annular Seal Bentonite Filter pack Peastone Once the data has been entered Record gt Post from the main menu or press the 4 Post button in the toolbar to save the data The grid should appear similar to the one shown below i HydroGeo Analyst Sample__ D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects S ample_1 Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help aez Sh txXBRa A REGRBHS BOS 8 Mik i gt a Station Groups Station List A Data Query Station Data a des Data Category Station Data ay aS Select Station X coor m Y coor m Elevation m TOC m Ei Queries BH1 535130 4814200 330 331 I Crosstab Maps Drilling Protocol Casing Screen Annular Fill Monitoring Points Cross Sections Reports 3DView Z Borehole Logs 1 00 Plots 8 00 Loading options e Load All Incremental Station Data ID 201271 name filling_volume ffilling_volume DOUBI filling_volume Description m 1 00 Annular seal Concrete gt 8 00 Annular seal Bentonite 13 00 Backfill Cuttings 13 00 15 00 Annular seal Clay 15 00 30 00 Filter pack Pea Stone Example Entering Mon
353. he chart control To add a chart to a report click on the Chart icon on the toolbar and place it at the desired location following the procedure outlined earlier in this chapter Once the chart control is placed on the runtime report designer its properties can be set by activating the control and clicking on the Charts Manager icon on the toolbar The dialog shown in the figure below will be displayed E Manager TEN 1 Primary Asis wa Chloride sample_date result value 2 Primary Asie TCE 3 Primary Asie PCE Mame 4 Primary Axis 1 1 BCE chemical_name sample_date result value resulto unit More Options gt gt Add Remove Ok Cancel Apply The dialog allows you to add as many series as desired and select the fields that will be used as the data source for the horizontal X and vertical Y axes The fields are obtained by loading a data query into the report See the example below Indicate whether a series will be plotted on the primary on the left side or secondary on the Creating Reports with Charts 429 right side vertical axis The properties of the chart can be set by right clicking on the chart control and selecting the Properties pop up menu option When you are finished designing the chart s and other parts of your report you can generate a report preview by clicking on the corresponding icon f1 on the toolbar Plots of data can be grouped by location and or any other field by creating the ne
354. he desired font settings then click OK to return to the Options dialog Rulers Tab Controls the appearance settings for the axis of the cross section plot For each ruler vertical and horizontal you may define e Foreground Color e Background Color e Marker Width e Min Tic Pixels e Tic Numbers e Font Vertical Exaggeration Define the vertical exaggeration scaling factor for new cross sections There are two options Default value or User defined Specific If the default option is selected the map manager will automatically calculate and assign the most appropriate vertical Description of Menu Items 333 exaggeration factor NOTE Please see Change Vertical Exaggeration on page 329 for information on how to change the vertical exaggeration once a cross section has been created Screen Water Levels Controls the appearance settings for how screens and water levels are displayed on the cross section These options are shown below Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid Screen Symba Water Level Symbo Gap between Wells fa H pe 4 and Screen Pixel Eaj Size 12 al Fill Color Color P Fill Pattern A Has Outline Yes o Outline Color i Outline Width f al E Cancel H Help In this dialog there are options for the view settings color style etc for both the screen and the water levels The Gap between Well and Screen controls the distance b
355. he image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Vertical Exaggeration sets vertical exaggeration factor for the project Extend model to plume region When you load plume Setting Background color Vertical Exaggeration Factor Interpretation type ElStations Label Properties Wisible Color Size ETitle Title Visible _ Text color Text size T ext frame ET ime Label itle Text size gt Text frame ElLegend Visible Title Text size Text color Frame Frame line color Frame fill color 5 0 Geology O 9 96 HGA3D5 E E 0 03 Date 5 15 2000 v E 10 04 Iv Geology 10 015 E lv O O files into existing 3D projects they may lie outside the 3D domain created based on the cross section extents Use this option to re size the 3D domain to include the plume Interpretation Type sets the cross section interpretation type currently in view Only one interpretation type may be viewed at one time Choose from Geology Hydrogeology or Model The default is Geology Station Label Properties e Visible shows hides station labels e Color sets color of station labels e Size sets size of the station labels Title e Title field allows for entering a project title e Visible shows hides the title e Text color sets the color of the Project title text The default is white e Tex
356. he influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 531 Use_Gradient Blends the gradient calculation and the linear interpolation calculation to produce a smoother surface 15 4 3 Kriging 532 Kriging is a geostatistical method that produces visually appealing maps from irregularly spaced data Anisotropy and underlying trends suggested in raw data can be incorporated in an efficient manner through Kriging The program used called kt3d is available in the public domain from the Geostatistical Software Library GSLIB distributed by Stanford University and is well documented by Deustch and Journel 1998 The program kt3d from GSLIB performs simple Kriging ordinary Kriging or Kriging with a polynomial trend and uses the standard parameter file used by GSLIB If the semi variogram components have already been modeled by the user they can be incorporated into the program by choosing the appropriate set of parameters in the parameter file The semi variograms available include Spherical Exponential Gaussian Power and the Hole effect models If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 The Interpolator Options window for the Kriging method is shown in the following figure while each of the settings param
357. he main toolbar Station List and Station Data tab e Station List Tab This tab hosts a grid displaying a list of stations for the selected station group Here you can enter the basic location information for the stations Name X and Y coordinate Elevation and TOC Top of Casing elevation e Station Data Tab This tab allows entering and viewing data for an individual station This tab can be activated either by clicking on a data category node in Chapter 2 Getting Started the Project Browser or by clicking on the tab itself provided at least one station 1s already selected Each table in the selected Data Category will be displayed in a separate tab under the Station Data tab The data is displayed for the Station selected at the top of the window To change the active station simply select a new station from the list above the grid Now that you are familiar with the data entry options a few brief examples are provided below 2 2 1 Entering Data Manually If there are only a few stations to be entered into the project or if you have data as a hard copy then the quickest method may be to manually enter the data for each station If you have a large data set in a source file s feel free to skip ahead to the section Importing Data using the DTS Example Creating a New Station beside the Station Groups node in the project browser Project under the Station Groups node in the project browser Record gt Add from the
358. he map project with the contour map should now be similar to the one shown in the figure below Chapter 2 Getting Started BEE Map Project Sample_ Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help Hamel a amen AOS xs amp n E En dep A M ContourMap uolgas sso15 BA M Boreholes B M Sample Map bmp menna aa d f f 1 1 t t g L 1 1 E Layer Information Shape File Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 14 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 533 874 4 812 410 1 23 184 2 5 4 Creating a Color Shade Map Color Shade maps may be created to further visualize a measured result value soil or groundwater concentrations or elevation surface or water table data In this example you will create a color shade map of the surface ground elevations Boreholes layer from the Layer Manager panel to ensure that the data layer is active Layer gt Contours from the Map Project main menu A Contours dialog will appear as shown in the following figure ee Mapping the Data 85 x Interpolator Setting Data to be Contoure Choose Field Elevation Min alue 330 1 Data Min 330 1 Interpolation Method Natural Neighbours g Advanced Settings Max Value 350 5 Data Max 350 5 Contour Typ Contour Line Name Settings IW Color Shade Name ColorshadeMarl Settings Zebra Mam
359. he new Destination table Under source Table Sheet1 if it is not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select the appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the field names in the source are identical to the field names in the destination m for the units for the depth field Use for the depth field Next to continue Information Bl x s Destination table qw_level does not have a primary key 1 The imported data will be appended to this table not updated Ok to continue in the information message that appears 64 Chapter 2 Getting Started The next window is Data Validation If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one shown below Data Transfer System Import Step 4 Data Validation Errors Warnings Description Field Name of records Preview X Ej 1 1 2 1996 1 1 8 1996 12 00 1 2 12 1996 12 00 1 4 16 1996 12 00 1 8 9 1996 12 00 1 1 2 1996 12 00 1 1 8 1996 12 00 1 2 12 1996 12 00 1 4 16 1996 12 00 1 8 9 1996 12 00 1142 1996 12 00 1 1 8 1996 12 00 1 2 12 1996 12 00 1 4 16 1996 12 00 1 8 9 1996 12 00 1 1 2 1996 12 00 H E E 0 0 0 WOM MMMM Ll dl ll l 1 1 8 1996 12 00 1 2 12 1996 12 00 b l0 x Note The preview shows how your data will be stored in the database This step allows you to accept re
360. he system for the selected layer e Coordinates Displays the X Y coordinates for the current mouse cursor location and the Map Projection system e Scale Displays the scale for the map window e Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section Editor window The Layer Manager allows you to manage the layers in the map project The icons at the top of the Layer Manager provide some insight into the functionality Layer Manager These features include Toolbar Y 7 LineLayer Y PolygonLayer E Group Control Expand and collapse group layers e Visible Set the visibility status of the selected layer Station Layers Monitoring Wells MD TextLayer Y Contour Layer e Editable Make the echo com selected layer editable or O not by checking or AA ee unchecking the check box A a Currently only those ee oe shapefiles created in the Map aan i Manager are editable Aunort color bmp e Label Displays the ee Layer name 329 9 330 14 O e Symbol Edit the a e symbol identifying the layer pp on the map DEM_UTM17 356 0289 The Layer Manager will contain a Layer ID 12 Image Layer numerous types of layers each represented by a different symbol type In the example shown here the layer types from top to bottom are as follows e PointLayer Point shapefile represented by a point symbol These include station groups and data query layers imported into
361. here you can specify a directory and filename for the HTML file Use the button to export the report to an MS Excel file A dialog will appear where you can specify a directory and filename for the XLS file Use the to export the report to an PDF file A dialog will appear where you can define the page and export settings and the filename for the PDF file Note HTML Excel and PDF export features do not support gradient coloring As a result report elements that contain a gradient appearance will export as a solid color Use the amp button to open the DataCube Wizard Here you can modify the crosstab query format and style as described in the previous section Use the button to define modify data markers for the data points See Data Marker Settings on page 251 for more details Enable the amp button to have the crosstab report automatically refresh when changes are made to the format or style Use the button to manually refresh the crosstab report when the automatic refresh is disabled and changes are made to the format or style Use the button to access the electronic help document The Crosstab results window provides flexible management of the columns and fields Click on the button to expand the full results Click on the button to collapse the view for an overview of the results Using conventional drag and drop you can shift columns to the left or right or rows up or down or move fields from r
362. his chapter provides a detailed description of the features and functionality of the various options for preparing and customizing a three dimensional presentation of your HG Analyst data 10 1 About the Interface 3D Explorer may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e In the Project Tree select a project from the 3D View node e Through the Cross Section Editor select a cross section and choose the View 3D option from the View menu About the Interface 357 When the 3D Explorer window is loaded it should appear similar to the figure shown below Menu Display Window Bar y Hyiiredonn Amay Hi Feplorer gt FS Program Piles Anat Projects ema Sroject VADHGAJO ele x De dt View Getting Hele Toolbar pee ct RSA SES wwii JN E Sm 299 Display Tree Display Settings Navigation Panel The 3D Explorer interface consists of the following components e Display Window Displays the 3D image of the selected elements e Menu bar Provides menu commands for most of the functions e Toolbar Provides shortcut buttons for some functions e Display Tree A tree structured list of the available project elements e Display Settings Displays settings associated with each element e Navigation Panel Contains a set of navigation tools to control the position and orientation of the 3D image and adjust the light source location 10 2 Working with 3D Explorer 10 2 1 Positioning the Panels
363. hologic columns on the cross section plane By default the top of model layer 1 ground surface will be drawn in for you The starting point of the cross section line will appear on the left side of the cross section window the end point of the line will appear on the right side of the window Locations for layers must be interpreted and drawn manually using lines or polygons layer types may be Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model The process of drawing layers is described in the next section NOTE Each Cross Section has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 5 Profile Settings 9 4 Drawing Cross Section Interpretations Interpretation of the cross section is a considerably creative process however the cross section editor makes it easy for you Once the selected stations have been loaded into the cross section editor the appropriate layers must be manually drawn and interpreted Start the interpretation by selecting the layer type from the layer manager Choose from Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model Each of these is explained below Hydrogeologic interpretations can be copied from geologic interpretations As such it is a better practice to first perform geologic interpretations of the cross section 9 4 1 Loading Surface Layers 342 Surface layers e g DEM Surfer GRD in a Map Project can be used to generate a detailed topography model
364. i iii cian 394 Report Destener Tools a a AA A nia 395 Man Toba acen 395 Display Settines Tools sta dardo 396 Formate Lo oe 397 Gone ral TOOLS eranen A 398 SS A AA 400 Toolbox options tor General TOONS 1 ia 401 A A EE E E A E E AE 401 A E E E EE E EE EEEE E ETE EEEE ETON E E E E E 402 CME A A E E a A 403 A a E 403 VENUS EE EEE A E EE A A AE N NEIE EA A EA T E 404 SIAC AE AE E E E E E EA E E A E A O E E E E ned 404 KERT oea E 404 FE AA R T E T en eee aoe 404 SUD REDOM aaa o ao t 404 Pise A PA ee nn ne fee 405 OEE ei oe ss oo ag tase aan Salven aa 405 Barcode sai dales 405 PRCUNGINCIODE o llos 405 Usme These POM iDEN iso 406 Repor EXPONE codos 406 Data Fields EXpIore E Gon iener a a Nr e ie 407 Report Properties TOOUDOK escri prada tds 407 Designer Advanced Controls and Setting cccscesssssssssssseessseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeeeseseeeeeeeaess 408 Report Preview VV INGOW iia aae 410 REDOM VAC WER LODOS alle tds 411 NavicatOn OO Saberlo rior 411 ste the Report Vie WE sieusesstidaed O 413 Savio REPO Salina a EOE O AOE OEO 413 Report SCCEMNOS iii 413 LAA cal usd 416 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services A A N 416 Usinenon detault pace dimenSiOns resonar iniae aai 416 Ereatino Reports nas 417 Creating Reports in HydroGeo Analyst Main Window oooonnccccnncccncnonononnnncnnnnnnononnnnoninnnnnnos 417 Creating Reports mona Data Grid uta it lica 418 Creating Reports based ona Data Query dcc co asassedu
365. ialog will appear once more The connection string to the data source will now appear in the connection string field as shown below E Data Link Properties x Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Betesh Use connection string Connection string DEG D Pragram FilesiHydroGeoBasetSam Build 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password l Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use OO O O O O OOOO O O Tcen Test Connection OF Cancel Help e Next you must select the initial catalog to use from the bottom of the Connection tab as shown in the figure below Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 527 E Data Link Properties x Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name E E Betesh Use connection string Connection string DEG D Pragram FilesHHydroGeoBasetSam Build 2 Enter information to log on to the server Uzer name Password IT Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use D Program Files HydroG eoB ase 4nnular fill nevy final D Program Files HydroG eoB ase Annular fill new niulti D Program Files HydroG eoB ase 4nn
366. iate conversions will be made by the DTS For instance a ground surface elevation that is stored in metres in the database can be exported in feet in the destination table Once the mapping is complete 216 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS 6 2 3 Station Related Settings Similar to the import procedure if you export station data you must specify the projection type and projection for the stations in the exported file Data transfer system Export o 9 s meters el Once this 1s complete Export button and Close button to complete the process Exporting Data using the DTS 217 218 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Queries This chapter provides a detailed description of the Query Builder and Crosstab queries Within a HydroGeo Analyst project it may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering reporting and management A few examples of data queries are provided below e Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier than 2000 e Select wells with discharge over 500 gpm e Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet e Select boreholes where the overburden thickness exceeds 20 feet e Locate groundwater concentration exceedances for BTEX In the Query Builder window the query fields and conditions can be quickly defined Once the queries have been created they may be easily accessed from the Project Bro
367. icking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired direction e The Rotate Screen X and Y rotates the display around the fixed axes of the Display Window by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer along the X or Y direction e The Rotate Model X and Y rotates the display around the 3D image axes by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired rotation direction Animation Controls The tools located on the right hand side of the Navigation frame may be yg gt alo used to continuously rotate the image around the X Y and Z axes and z ee animate plume objects i Browser W Time Simply select the desired axis and click the Play button to start rotation a You can record the rotation as an AVI file by pressing the Record button For more details see Recording Animation to AVI file on page 364 below al The rotation can be stopped by clicking the Stop button The Browser check box when selected will activate the player controls for static animation of the selected color map or Isosurface For color maps the map position will span in a loop along the specified plane through the project extents Isosurface values will be animated similarly in a loop however as the scroll bar moves the isosurface value will change The Time check box when selected will activate the player controls for time animation Both color maps and isosurfaces may be animated in time Clicking on the Options button displays the An
368. ided driver included with graphics acceleration hardware If problems are encountered with the vendor provided drivers display performance inadequate then 3D loj x OpenGL drivers Use hardware accelerator Explorer provides the option to use the Mos Microsoft Driver for Open GL The OpenGL settings can be modified by ps selecting Settings Options from the main menu bar then select the OpenGL tab The 3D Explorer must be closed and re opened before the new Open GL driver will be used 10 2 5 Loading Projects 366 To load a 3D project select File Open from the main menu and navigate to a directory where the desired Cross Section is located or click the 4 Open button from the toolbar Supported files are HG Analyst Cross Section converted files with the extension 3XS Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 10 3 Display Settings The Display Tree Panel should appear as shown in the figure here If the panel is not visible click View Model tree from the main menu bar or click the button from the toolbar The upper section of the Display Tree Panel contains a tree structured list of the elements which can be visualized while the lower section of this panel contains a table of the Display Settings for the selected display element The Display Tree Panel can be used to selectively view stations cross sections interpretation layers and legends or alter the display settings of the selec
369. identified as not meeting the Template criteria specified above it will be highlighted according to the settings entered in this frame By default the record s Background Color will be changed to yellow However the user has the option to modify the Font the Background Color and the Border Color of the record by clicking on the appropriate button s 13 2 2 Check Spiked Settings 490 A matrix spike is an aliquot of sample that is spiked with a known concentration of target analyte s prior to sample preparation Ideally there should be 100 recovery of the spiked concentration or very close to this The following settings are available Chapter 13 Quality Control Spike Settings Minimal percent recovery 95 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e Minimal Percent Recovery The percentage of the substance added to a spiked sample that is detected It is the difference between the concentration detected in the spiked sample and that detected in the un spiked sample divided by the concentration of the substance added to the spiked sample Minimal Percent Recovery measures accuracy the higher the percent recovery the greater the accuracy must be to be considered acceptable NOTE The analysis assumes that the sample that is being spiked is a blank and does not contain any detectable concentrations of any of the contaminants You may not use a field original sample for a spiked sample analys
370. ield and drag this field into the Display Fields at the top of the window If your data is contained in different fields and or tables select these fields now Once you are finished the Query Builder window should be similar to the one shown below 7 Query Builder NE o x xa a z Design i i C Station Group Query Data Query o SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields chart tvoc_ Function Expression station name name im E Description chem_test_results0 sample_date sample_date z E T chem_test_resultsO result_value result_value Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling l Monitoring Event El Mining Exploration Map Read Geophysics F X j z if LE AA Well History REZA Expression Operator Expression _ FSource Condition Advanced Close Help Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 gt amp Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string 1s invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning S Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the window below Creating Reports with Charts 431 432 7 Quer
371. ies 246 Chapter 7 Queries amp Auto format Inactive fields Sample DataCube X Y w 7 ro fal Classic 4 le Y m x1 2 Total X1 x2 Total Gradient 1 0 0 UI 8 e Gradient 2 Gradient 3 Gradient 4 Gradient 5 Gradient 6 Gradient 7 Modern 1 Modern 2 Modern 3 Modern 4 Modern 5 Multicolor Gradient 1 Multicolor Gradient 10 Multicolor Gradient 2 Multicolor Gradient 3 Multicolor Gradient 4 coca Once you have selected a template click Ok to apply the template to your crosstab report 7 8 3 Generating the Report Once the layout and style settings have been defined click the OK button in the DataCube Wizard dialog to generate the report A table will be generated with the query results as shown in the following screenshot Crops TAB reprot 4001 3434 2 0 0 inactiva felda y a come E At the top of the crosstab results table window there 1s a toolbar with several buttons that control options for editing printing exporting and modifying the display properties of the query Each button is described below Crosstab Queries 247 248 Use the fa button to save the crosstab report Use the button to print preview the report Use the button to define the page settings Use the button to set the printing options Use the button to print the crosstab report Use the button to export the report to an HTML file A dialog will appear w
372. if Spt Font color MM Blac Symbol Triangle Color Gl Blue 5 4 4 Name set the line name Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Show hide markers on the line using the Visible option Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line 14 5 Saving and Exporting There are several options available for saving exporting and printing your plot page design 514 Chapter 14 Plotting 14 5 1 Saving Plot Page Design Once you are satisfied with the current plot page design click on the Save button on the toolbar The new plot will appear under the Plots node in the HUA tree 14 5 2 Saving Plot as Template Once you have designed the current plot to your style and data needs you can save the design as a template for re use in future plots To do so Right mouse click on Plots and select Save as a plot template from the menu Enter a name for the plot template and OK The template will be available next time you create a new plot in the Add Plot dialog under the Templates combo box Deleting Plot Templates Plot templates can be deleted from the main HGA window Right mouse click on Plots in the HGA project browser tree and select Plot Templates The following dialog will appear lx Select the template you
373. il settings Using the Project Manager 175 176 Project Wizard Step 3 Provide Project Location Settings Project Name SampleProject Project Folder D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject E Client A Project Location Soil Specification A sl This step allows you to set project properties and assign project personnel Define a project name and select a project folder all folders and files that will store project related information will be created under the provided Project Folder Select or create a client for the Description ele a Select a Soil Specification Projection Type for the project The Soil 3 Projection Specification contains soil names C Geographic and patterns which will be used e Z to visualize your lithology data in UTM borehole log plots and cross State Planar Units sections Others x Required Field Finish Cancel Help In the first line enter a project name This may be any combination of numbers and letters but should not contain spaces use _ or to substitute for spaces The project name will be used to define the HG Analyst project folder As the name is entered an identical folder name will be created and will appear in the Project Folder field You may modify the project directory by clicking the folder button ll and the following dialog will appear Select Directory eS xj Directory Hame D Progra
374. ill read the station name in each MON file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current HGA project If one is found you may proceed Otherwise the field will display a color and you must specify the appropriate destination station name The color displayed in the information table represents the number of station names that can be matched with the location information in the MON file White indicates that a single station name has been found Red indicates that a matching station name could not be found Yellow indicates that two or more matching station names exist in the database Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst If a row is either red or yellow click the button and manually specify a destination station name from the HGA Get Station amp Screen E 1 Pleaze select Station and screen database O x List Matched ena o ass eeoa ro wm asi oe fa 9 20 pa Ha AEST y pa 20 WeT2 80 55930275 4348331684 dl Ok Cancel re From the Get Station amp Screen dialog select a destination station and a screen id Click the List Matched button to open the List Matched dialog This dialog will display all the possible station and screen_id combinations that match the MON data After selecting click Ok Click the Import button to Import MON file data o finalize the data import 10 x Import data Notes A mM Select Channel IV Level E T
375. ill then test the connection to the server and scan the database to see if the required tables exist in this file For new databases HG Analyst will create the required tables Please be patient during this process NOTE When using SQL Express the database will be created in the default directory Program Files Microsoft SQL ServeiMSSQLSWHIDatal with the file extension mdf Be cautious when un installing SQL Express as this may result in the loss of your data If the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this 1s the case please select another server or database for your project or verify whether the connection exists Option 2 Build Connection String If the Build Connection String radio button is selected in the Database Environment window there will be an option to locate an MS SQL Server and build a connection to a database on a network server Build Connection String radio button from the Database Environment window Build connection string button located in the lower right corner and the following Data Link Properties dialog will appear 170 Chapter 4 Project Manager Ea Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to SQL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name oOo Refresh 2 Enter
376. imation Properties window as shown in the following figure Working with 3D Explorer 361 Animation Properties x Rotate Time Flume Browser AutoR otate Ares AutoR otate speed O Screen Aves amp Model Aves alow fast Cancel Automatic rotation can be performed around the Screen Axes or the Model Axes The AutoRotate speed may be adjusted by pressing and holding the left mouse button on the Slider Button and setting it to the desired level Time Animation The Time tab is available when displaying a transient plume When the Time tab is selected the following window appears El Rotate Shift Light Position Time Pume Browser F lalo J ZE Options 12 1 2000 Browser Time 5142000 Time Animation Options Clicking the Options button will load the Animation Properties Time window as shown below Animation Properties l x Rotate Time Pume Browser Time steps 50 Start Time x 172000 5 1 2000 Finish Time fiz 1 2000 124142000 Animate in selected interval Cancel 362 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer The Number of time steps for animation value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or 1t may be decreased to make the animation proceed faster HGA 3D Explorer uses interpolation in time for the case where the time step falls on a date where there is no data The Start time value indicates the simulation time when the an
377. imation will begin The Finish time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will end The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish time Plume Browser The Plume Browser tab is the location where you can select from pre defined color maps or isosurfaces for a preliminary assessment of the plume As such there are basic options for color maps and isosurfaces Once you have a better understanding of where the contaminants lie and at what time steps you can use the more advanced options in the Plumes node in the tree including e advanced isoline maps with color fill and line settings e color maps with clip at cut off options e display color maps on cross section lines e isosurface options including color from palette show borders and display volume estimation When Plume Browser tab is selected the following options will appear El Rotate Shift Light Position Time Plume Browser F lalo Y Flume result_value J E Options y gt 2 i style Colormap on Plane l Position 50 100 E Browser Save Colormap Time Visible fy When the 3D project was created 3D Explorer will display the plume in the form of an isosurface by default The default isosurface value will be 5 of the maximum concentration value calculated as a result of the 3D Interpolation In the Plume combo box you may select the plume data field u
378. ime stamp will be read from the computer s CPU at the time of creating the group The Privileges to the various HGA objects are described further below In HGA an object is any item that requires access control An object could be a dialog a database a table in a database a file a template etc An object may be classified into a group based on common properties such as a number of access levels e g a database and a dialog may have different levels Objects that have the same list of access levels may be grouped together For instance all objects that require only two levels of control e g Full or Read only access may be grouped together In HGA objects are sorted in two groups e Application Level e Project Level Simply place a check mark in the appropriate access levels for each object or use the Select All option to enable full privileges for all objects By default the Administrator User Group will have full access to all objects and the ALSD NOTE The level of access to an object are defined on a user group level and not for each individual user User Access Level Management 161 Application Level Objects The Administrator may control user access to the following application level objects e Databases e Projects e User Access Level Application Level Objects can only be modified when HGA is running and NO project is opened The Group Properties for Application Level Objects are shown below Group Properti
379. in e Max e Average The color of each option can be changed by clicking on the corresponding color box Finally the Labels frame allows you to specify the Visibility Font and Alignment settings for the data labels NOTE In order to see the water level dates displayed beside the symbol you must map the appropriate Well Construction Drilling Water Level Entity fields as shown below the data source may be a table or query E5 Scale 3 6 Well Construction Scale 3 6 Drilling Lithology B E WaterLevel E WaterLevelEntities 5 Pump 6 Plug 6 Filling 5 Casing ES DrillingEntities H E Lithology gt BH EX AAS Name Value DataTable Water Level DepthEntity Caption Depth Description Depth DataField E TextEntity ie i ae Description Tex DataField Reducer BHLP Settings i x E ES BHLP Well Constructio e Visible Column Options Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale Appearanc f Use Casings Color Angle 45 5 89 Use Default Color E Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Reducer tab the appearance frame allows you to modify the display settings for pipe fittings that connect casings of different diameters shown below Select Use Casing Color to use the predefined casing color or select Use Default Color and specify a different color Use the
380. in the following ways e You cannot print multiple copies within one print event e You cannot select specific pages to print e You cannot select a page range to print If you wish to print your reports using these settings you can always export the report as a PDF and print the report s from a PDF Reader Using non default page dimensions If you wish to print to any non default paper size e g plotter paper you must first specify the page dimensions in three different areas within the Report Desinger To do so follow the steps below 416 Chapter 11 The Report Editor 1 Inthe Report Designer select the Page Setup button from the main toolbar e Select the Printer Settings button e Specify the page size from the PaperSize dropdown box Alternatively define the page dimensions by selecting Custom Paper Size from the PaperSize dropdown box and then entering the Width and Length values below e Click Ok 2 Select the Printer Settings button from the main toolbar e Select the desired plotter from the Name dropdown box e Again specify the paper size e Click Ok 3 Manually define the page size within the Report Desinger by increasing decreasing the page extents with the mouse cursor Now you are ready to print your report 11 1 Creating Reports Reports for your project can be created from the various modules within HydroGeo Analyst including e Data Grids e Borehole Log Plotter BHLP e Data Query e Map
381. inches C Portrait Left ft Right fi Landscape Top ft Battom fi Cancel Printer Here you can define the paper size paper source page margins and page orientation Once these settings are defined click the Ok button to return to the report window Print Settings From the Report window toolbar click the Print Options button to open the Print Settings dialog shown below Chapter 7 Queries Print settings x Ignore colors Dimensions on every page T Field captions on every page J Title on every page Cancel The following options are available e Ignore Colors Show Hide report color scheme If selected the report will print in grey scale e Dimensions on every page Show Hide row and column headings on all pages after the first page e Field captions on every page Show Hide field captions on all pages after the first page e Title on every page Show Hide report title on all pages after the first page Click OK to save the settings and return to the report window Print Preview Finally you can preview the page settings for your crosstab report using Print Preview From the report window click the Print Preview button to the open the preview window shown below Crosstab Queries 253 EN Print preview 42 0088 8 TCE_and_BTEX_for_Year2000 12000 18000 25000 30000 33000 333 33333333 800 120 1666 6666666 2000 6000 140
382. including the required fields colored in blue Selecting any one of the sample tables and clicking on the Save button at the bottom creates the table with all the required fields After a table is added as many fields as desired can be added to the table In addition all settings such as defining or refining the primary key and relationship to other tables can be undertaken Importing Tables A new table can also be created based on a table structure read from any OLE DB supported database To import a table source structure right click on a data category select the Import table structure option from the pop up menu and the following window will appear Working With the Template Manager 191 1S Copying Table Structure to Database Source Connection String Table Station ID Data Exampl sl sl Total Records e Click on the 7 button to build a connection string to an existing database or file The Data Link properties dialog will be displayed For assistance on using the Data Link Properties please see Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing e Once the data source is selected click on the Refresh button e Select the Table from this database and the field which should be used as the StationID from the respective picklists A preview will appear in the lower half of the window e Click OK to begin the import The Template Manager creates the new table by import
383. ine dl Sono 1 Data Guay T Staton Data METIA E iv Ekson TOC m m Li 1 150 T Morbo Event 7 Mig Pacha dE Well Contraction Total 21 selected 20 In the dialog that appears enter a name for the new station group type Boreholes OK The selected stations will be added to the new group Boreholes and this Station Group will appear as a new node branch in the Project Browser These stations will also remain in the Project Station Group Once the stations in a group are displayed a number of actions can be taken based on the selection For example loading a station group and then activating the mapping component will automatically create a GIS layer containing all stations from this group This option will be demonstrated later in this chapter 2 3 Viewing Borehole Log Plots 68 In this section you will see how to create a Borehole Log Plot BHLP for one of the Stations Boreholes station group BH1 station since this station contains data for well construction casing screens etc Next locate the Borehole Logs node in the Project browser beside Borehole Logs to expand this node Chapter 2 Getting Started se Double click on WHI1 BHLP1 to load this Borehole Log Plot template The BHLP will appear similar to the following figure Borehole Log Designer bhip1 i gt iol x Select Station X m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 gt 537381 50 4
384. ing all fields and their settings into HydroGeo Analyst The created table will have the General structure The Template manager does not attempt to capture primary key settings so this must be defined after the table and its fields are imported In addition as with any table the user has the option to modify the properties of the table All newly imported tables automatically become child tables to the Stations table Deleting Tables A table can be deleted by selecting 1t from the project browser and then either by clicking on the x Delete button at the bottom of the window or by right clicking and selecting the Delete table pop up menu item NOTE The stations table is required in all projects and may not be deleted However it is possible to modify some of the fields in this table with the exception of the station ID name and X Y co ordinates Defining Table Relationships Once the primary key is set for the selected table a relationship between the current 192 Chapter 5 Template Manager table and other tables in the database can be established To create relationships in the Table is PARENT to grid select one or more tables to which the current table would be a parent table Then for each table select one or more fields that will serve as a Foreign key in each table An example is shown below
385. ing and selecting the Open pop up menu option NOTE A data query containing the required fields see below must be selected in order to launch the plots mode from the HydroGeo Analyst main interface A typical plot window is shown in the following figure Viewer Plot Page Window Design F J ITA EAT EAT ROD Samplidg_Di te IA AAA AAA TANAAN sampliNg Dabe Humber of oler a Humber l Flora 2 Apacra Wa vih Spacing Hagi 10 Chloride Time Series Plot Sulfate Time Series Plot BES Plot Settings amp Data Source BERESH EES LUGAR Fieri 126A sa Samplhg Date TATA 1260100 1280 00 ee SampliNa_Di be event J The plot window contains the following items e Plot Page Design Tree A list of all available plot page designs plots and series such as Lines and Standards e Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the plot design e Plot Settings and Data Source Contains the settings for the selected entity and data mappings e Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the plot page design 498 Chapter 14 Plotting 14 1 1 Description of Designer Toolbar Items The plot designer toolbar provides the controls for designing the plot page The following buttons are available FAA Save button saves the current plot design Save As button saves the current plot design as a new name Add button provides two options Add Plot will prompt you to select a template
386. ing these tools raw data can be transformed into meaningful spatial data sets HydroGeo Analyst offers a collection of standard and custom modules for interpreting vast amounts of spatial data Some of these modules are briefly described in the following sections Map Manager The Map Manager built on ESRI s MapObjects technology provides a spatial view of any set of selected data Basemaps of the site can be quickly imported allowing for meaningful interpretation of borehole and well data The Map Manager is designed in such a way that most files required for a desired map view are generated automatically The Map Manager also provides a link to groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW The true power of GIS is harnessed when it is used for spatial analysis of multiple data sets These spatial data sets can be combined to provide e Groundwater recharge flux maps e Aquifer yield capacity e Aquifer vulnerability e Contamination risk assessment e Geologic cross sections e Completion diagrams Contour Mapping In addition to creating and displaying selected data on a map the Map Manager also allows you to create contour maps and other thematic maps for any selected data from your database For example you can create and run a query that returns the maximum concentration of a given chemical over a certain period of time and transfer the result to the Map Manager Once the map with this data is created you can create and view
387. ings Renderer allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of values e The Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals 288 Chapter 8 Map Manager e The Ramp option loads the following dialog xl Ramp Color Ramp z kd Start Color oOo End Color Po Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 The remaining options are similar to those for Graduated Renderers Add Value Delete Value Ascend Descent Change Color see Graduated Renderer on page 280 for more details Wh
388. ints e Bar charts For depth interval plots the area under the plot may be filled in To create a Plot column click the Add icon and select Plot from the combo box provided A new Plot column will be created in the BHLP Designer window To create specific plots within this column select the newly added Plot sub node from the Designer tree and click the Add button again The Add a Plot Series window shown in the following screenshot will open Add a Plot Series x Plot Series Type f Depth i Interval Plot Properties Label Description Category Time Unit Concentration Recharge Equivalent Concentration tei From this window you can define the Plot Series Type and select a plot Category and Unit to use The categories are based on the unit categories available in the current database template Enter a Label for the plot and click OK Depending on whether you selected Depth or Interval for your plot the Entities displayed in the Settings window will be slightly different 466 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Depth Interval E IntervalEntities E DepthEntities EE Plot BE Interval El E DepthPlotE ntities fae ES IntervalE ntities E Es Plot EST DataTable E TopEntity DataTable E Depth ntity Caption Top elevation Caption Depth Description Description Depth DataField DataF eld r E BottornEntity E ValueEntity Caption Bottom elev
389. ion Project y fig Interpretation Results 444444 444444 444444 E E E E E E E Adwanced Close Help Table Display Name Interpretation Results Name in DB Interpretation_Results Rows 192 Time 0 0 0 47 Querying Cross Section Interpretations 353 The Interpretation Results table is read only and stores data from the cross section interpretations By default the following fields are included e Station ID e Station Name e X using project coordinates e Y using project coordinates e Slice Name e Layer Description e Top Elevation e Thickness Below Slice e Interpretation type Simply select the desired fields from the tree view and move these into the Display Fields or Conditions as required When you are finished Generate and Execute the query An example of the results is shown in the screenshot below AA AE Ho E SUL Win Pirate y Bain l C panipi E fate PSS y labor rae AS rare Pepret Aenda leper AS Laper_Harre i pasion risposi Pest hairan AG Thakre inderpesbation Peeni rd bit 3 mean fs Inher Laie ID En O LEFT OA frire set OH Eta ad pa resis Eaton WHERE Marian solo Dh Al caren od lair E P Morinang vent la F ha Top_elenaton Theria Mirage sapdca sher A AAA E A eg E OOS Model lieophpuez A Ses NOAA Gin Dotted n AA Obs wsdl Hiniee Sa Ses NO Gin Poteet 7 Sou red AA Mode A A AAA E Dot ae
390. ion then select a surface for the draped map 10 3 5 Surfaces Display Settings gt gt gt Stay on top e 9 8 Site maps EE E sen E Surfaces Ef Cross Sections Data Bo AA Level for bitmap Bind to surface E Surface to bind Map e Live Update Apply The 3D Explorer supports Surfer Grid GRD files to be used as surfaces in the 3D project Common surfaces may be a contour map of ground surface elevations or a water table contour map Once a surface is loaded there is an option to drape a site map to the surface for a truly 3D perspective 372 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer E E YBH Project The Surfaces category contains a list of the surfaces i i used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings ia VEXEDA for each individual surface Sie Cross Sections Data To load a surface into the project select File Import H AA Surface from the main menu The following settings a are available for surfaces ee OO e Name sets the surface name e Visible shows hides the surface i ee u u e Color selects a color for the surface a e View selects a style for the surface choose 2 a sold A from wire or solid Color from palette rg e Semitransparent sets the surface image as semi transparent e Color from palette assigns colors from a palette based on the surface value e g elevation gw elevation etc Isolines For surfaces you m
391. ion is displayed in a status bar at the bottom of the Map Manager window This is indicated in the sample image below Layer Information Station Layer Coord GCS WS 1984 Datum DES 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 30 ls eg 54 22m Line 520 06rn 535 986 4 073 623 11 5 564 e There will be two values displayed here The Seg value is the distance from the current cross hair to the previous vertex location 1 e the distance of the line segment The Line value is the total line distance from the start point including all segments e To finish the line and end the line measurement double click the left mouse button Define Cross Section Line Allows you to create a cross section line Make sure you are in one of the HGA data layers before drawing a cross section line Please see the section Defining a Cross Section Line on page 313 for more details Description of Menu Items 301 Create Cross Section Loads the cross section editor for the selected cross section line This menu item is activated only when a cross section line is selected highlighted There are two ways to highlight a cross section line e Choose the cross section line on the cross section line layer e Draw a new cross section line on a station layer For more details on creating cross sections please see Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor 9 2 5 View 302 This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of
392. ion system aie Conditions total depth ss depth to bedrock H description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling MH hd awiberine Ci misk x Source Condition Project s Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 e Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank Conditions field under the Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the H Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually 101 xi IX e Station Group Quern Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOC_E xceeds_320m y Expression Al i station id Description station x E Location station y y Station N y station name name ation Name op I J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system station type total depth depth to bedrock description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling MH hd amiterinag Erin zi Source Condition Conditions A pression CS ios os ba z Advanced Close Help
393. ired import export operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing lab analysis results to the database which follow a consistent format The DTP contains Importing Data using the DTS 201 202 information about the data source the selected destination table matching between source and destination tables and fields and a number of other settings All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the DTS loads all information stored in the package The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation Data Transfer System Import a A a axi Step 1 Choose a Data Source mSpecify a data transfer package Package name New Package Description stations Select data source At the beginning of the import export operation you can select the option which saves the changes you made to the package in each step of the procedure Specify a data transher package Package name Description e Save changes to this DTS package A new data transfer package can also be created in which case all information provided to the DTS during a specific data transfer operation will be saved to the package once the transfer operation is completed successfully Select the Data Source Once a data package is selected or created the data
394. is e Highlighting The options are the same as described in Check Duplicates Settings on page 489 13 2 3 Check Blanks Settings A blank is a quality control sample used to detect and identify contaminants introduced to samples during the measurement process A laboratory blank is an analyte free matrix that is carried through all or part of the analytical process for identifying contamination introduced during analysis Types of laboratory blanks include method blanks carried through the entire preparation and analysis sequence calibration blanks matrix matched reagent water used for calibration and storage blanks placed in sample storage areas In the field an analyte free matrix is carried through a portion of the field process to identify contamination introduced during field or transportation operations Types of blanks associated with the field are trip blanks these accompany samples through the transportation process equipment rinsates collected after decontamination and field blanks collected on site during the sampling event Ideally analysis of the blank samples should return no detectable concentrations of any of the analytes i e concentrations are below the method detection limit MDL Define A New Lab Quality Template 491 Blank Settings Any concentration above the sample detection limit will be highlighted Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e The detection limit
395. isplay element listed in the Display Tree 10 3 1 Default Settings The Default Settings are used to define how selected objects are initially displayed when a project is first opened If Default Settings of the selected objects are modified the new settings may be saved and applied to all HG Analyst 3D Explorer projects The Display Settings Default Settings include e Background Color e Title Color and Size e Axis Text Color and Size and Line Color 367 368 e Legends Text Color The modified Default Settings can be saved by selecting either File Save scene configuration from the main menu bar or clicking the eS Save Scene Configuration button in the toolbar The following Save scene configuration dialog will appear A iG Configuration Mame Delete Cancel na Save scene configuration for HGA3D Ioj x Using this window the most recently viewed scene configuration can be saved by entering a name for it When you close 3D Explorer the scene configuration you have at that moment will be automatically saved as Default When HG Analyst 3D Explorer re opens this project it is opened with the Default scene configuration Any other user defined configuration can be loaded by pressing the Load Scene Configuration button and selecting it from the presented list Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Title e Tex
396. it is not already selected from the combo box Chapter 2 Getting Started The DTS makes an effort to automatically match fields from the source table with those in the selected destination table If the field names are exactly the same the fields will be mapped automatically Unmapped fields will appear blank this indicates that the DTS was unable to match the source field to a field in the HydroGeo Analyst database Therefore a field must be manually selected from the available list and mapped to the appropriate source field In this example some of the fields have been detected and mapped automatically ID Name X Y and TOC but the Elevation field needs to be mapped manually NOTE As a minimum each source table must contain either the Station ID or Station name for each record These fields are required to match the source data to the appropriate stations in the database Under the Source table Click on the blank field directly above TOC this field corresponds to the Destination field Elevation A list of available fields will appear as seen below Data Transfer System Import of Xx Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheetl Es Description bd station 5 Map source fields to destination fields Unit Conditions STRING STRING DOUBLE unknowr DOUBLE degree DOUBLE unknowr DOUBLE degree DATESTAMP Total of records
397. ith graduated or value rendering Detailed label rendering for contours Allow restricting contour lines within a polygon Create contours using only selected stations Create map layers from an intersection of two other layers Display time series plots linked to stations on a map Allow creating map layers with Arabic attributes Display graticule on map Allow creating color shaded zones map layers with option to clip color shading at the boundary of a polygon Load surfaces such as DEM Surfer GRD ESRI GRD Define cross section line from existing polyline layer Pan Zoom when digitizing a cross section line Snap cross section line to stations when digitizing a line Modify buffer distance for existing cross section lines Georeference raster images using more than two control points Group map layers Support for datum shifts Cross Section Editor Show vertical axis on exported image of cross section Ability to rearrange order of legend elements Adjust vertical axis in cross section Adjust vertical exaggeration in cross section Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst e Automatically insert vertices along the model layers e Replace basic topographic representation with detailed high resolution Surface elevations from DEM Surfer GRD ESRI GRD files Borehole Log Plotter e Improved restructured graphical user interface e Allow multiple casings piezometers within a well and display on BHLP e Improved display settings such as the
398. itoring Event Data In this section you will define water level data for OW1 the monitoring well that was defined previously in the Station List To do so 42 Chapter 2 Getting Started OW1 from the combo box at the top of the window under Select Station First the screen details must be defined in the well construction category Well Construction from the Data Category combo box Screen tab table from the grid Define the following details Screen ID 1 from 10 to 20 m diameter 0 3 m type plastic slot no 20 Hidrolca Anaya Gripe Es Program Fides Hina Prod Gamper Er la x Project Edt Mew Piscond Settings Toos Help D E CHTO AROC BOs 2059 m0 wa Staion Lia E Ota duey Staton Data Dala Category Select ai ihe bel Elvin my TOCA Wel Conitrucior Enel RATA O ean HiS 4150 Drilling Pestocel Coning Seitan Anria FA Monitoring Points Abandonment 54 Ibe 201277 norma ekrur Sick Pa Now you can define the water level Monitoring Event from the Data Category combo box Yes to save the changes for this record Water Level tab table from the grid Enter the following information in this grid For the ScreenID 1 from the combo box In the Date column type 5 5 2004 In the Time column type 1 00 00 PM In the Depth to Water Level m column Data Management 43 type 15 33 Once the data has been entered Record gt Post from the main menu or press
399. ject records with warnings by selecting the warning message in the Errors arnings arid Records with errors must be rejected to activate the importing process ou can also select one or more records in the preview table and exclude them from importing into your database E Error O Warming lt Back Import Cancel Help NOTE Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warning present Import to import the data A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted to the database Ok Close to close the DTS Data Management 65 The water level data should now appear in the project To confirm select one of the Boreholes from the Station List load the Station Data and view the Monitoring Event data category Water Level table An example for OW1 is shown below jUydrobeo Analyst SompleProject C Program Files MGanalyst Propects SampleProject AO 18 x Project Edi Yew Record Sellings Took Hap te e g CO FxRARAOF 2 603 da in dll Station List Tf Dota Quey Statin Date Dats Cabegon Select Staton 15 Ira Yml Maratona E vark ow 0560 401321530 Eleweton rm TOC mm 40530 441 50 mMm A AU ea OTS 1200008 be PAMTE 1 00 001 54 Ms LAUR E E Dee 1200008 be Using the HGA Lab Quality Control tools you may now perform a quality control assessment on your
400. ject This step allows you to set project ES properties and assign project Project Folder D Program FilestHGAnalystiProjectsiS ampleProject E personnel Client 2 Define a project name and select a project folder all folders and Project Location files that will store project related information will be created under Soil Specification OoOO i the provided Project Folder Des Select or create a client for the escription project Select a Soil Specification Projection Type 5 for the project The Soil s Projection Specification contains soil names C Geographic and pattems which will be used M to visualize your lithology data in C UTM borehole log plots and cross C State Planar Units dia Others x Required Field Cancel Help In this window specify a project name folder and client s In the first line type SampleProject for the Project Name In the next line the Project Folder is defined By default the project name will be used for the folder name and the project will be created in the HGAnalyst Projects folder as shown above If desired the project directory can be changed now by clicking the folder button cl The next line is used to define the Client information this field is optional and is not required for this exercise Enter the Project Location Chapter 2 Getting Started type Waterloo Ontario Next specify the Soil Specificatio
401. k list 10l x Data Transfer System Import Step 2 Data Mapping In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Destination Category Destination table wel Construction Y creen station DOUBLE i LONG screen_id DOUBLE i LONG from_ DOUBLE E DOUBLE to DOUBLE 3 DOUBLE diarm_ DOUBLE lam_ DOUBLE screen_ type STRING screen_ type STRING slot_number DOUBLE slot_number LONG CI Requires a unit to be selected C Required field Foreign key O Linked Fields Total of records 80 Back Next gt Cancel E Help Under Destination Well Construction for the new Destination Data Category Screen for the new Destination table Data Management 61 Under Source Table Sheet if is it not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the field names in the source are identical to the field name m for the units for the from_ to_ and diameter fields Use for these three fields Next to continue Yes to continue in the warning message that appears The next window is Data Validation If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one below Data Transfer System Import Y Ag Oj x Step 4 Data Validation Errors Warnings Description Field Name of records Preview Y Rowld station
402. l settings Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well casing e Select the View 2D or 3D e Casing Order left to right right to left centered etc e Define Label properties NOTE In order to define well casings within another parent casing you must define the parent casing value in the Casing table If you do not have this field it must be added to your data structure If you want well casings draw individually not within a parent casing define a value of O for the Parent_casing_ID Under the Customization frame define color source for the casing Draw Border Use e Draw Border e Use Default Color e Use Material Image color use this option if your well casing materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color e Use Material Image will use an image from the database for the well casing if you select this option you must add an Image Entity to the Well Construction Drilling Casing entities as shown below and map to an image field in the database 459 ES Design E ES Well Construction H E Scale E E3 Drilling H 6 Lithology H 6 WaterLevel H E Pump E ES Plug ES Filling ES Casing H E Screen E BES sande ES DrillingEntities 8 6 Interval gt wea EX P Name Value DataTable Casing E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField from E BottomEntit
403. lCustom Values e Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted e Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted e Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Custom values The Custom Values setting is used to assign custom contour values in addition to or in replacement of the regular interval contour values Press the browse button to load the Custom contour values window as shown in the figure below Display Settings 381 e Click to add a value e Click E to insert a value e Click W to delete a value This setting is commonly used to set logarithmic contour interval values for concentration data Labels Semitransparent Max value Min value The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels e Visible shows or hides the labels e Text color controls the color of the label e Text size controls the size of the labels e Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value e Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line Distance sets the distance value between each label smaller distance values will result in more labels e Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label The labels are plotted on the top and bottom surface of a flat 3D rectangular box The size of the box will be automatically adjusted
404. lable list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option e To create a new BHLP template right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Browser and select the New pop up menu option NOTE A station group containing at least one borehole needs to be selected in order to launch the BHLP from the HydroGeo Analyst main interface The BHLP can also be launched from the Map Manager and Cross section editors by e Clicking on the Al 4 View BHLP button in the toolbar or View gt BHLP from the menu and c icking on a Station to select it You may also view a BHLP in the HGA main window by selecting View gt Well Profile from the menu and clicking on the desired station in the station list The BHLP will load and display a borehole log plot of the selected station using one of the available BHLP templates The template being used can be changed using the pull down menu at the top of the BHLP window A typical BHLP window is shown in the following figure Please note that a BHLP opened through the Map Manager Cross Section editor will not have as many options Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Viewer Available Stations Window Borehole Log Designer bhlp2_lith_well_constrn Select Station x m Y m ElevatioNm TOC m GB 01 y 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 3 amp _ El Scale m Designer Tree H E Lithology 53 Well Construction Designer Toolbar
405. late The selected template will be deleted both from the project browser as well as from storage 11 3 4 Setting a Report Template as Default Template 426 To set a selected template as the default template right click on the template and select the Set as default option from the pop up menu in HydroGeo Analyst The selected template will be set as the default template Every time a new report is created the default template will be used to furnish the header and footer sections Chapter 11 The Report Editor 11 4 Import Reports from MS Access The Report Editor allows you to import reports that are created in an MS Access 2000 database environment This may be useful in cases where you migrate existing data from MS Access into HydroGeo Analyst and want to import existing reports as well The MS Access Importing wizard can be activated by clicking on the Import Access Report button on the Designer s toolbar The wizard guides you through a number of steps to import the desired report These steps are explained in the following sections The following figure depicts the first screen of the wizard that presents some introductory text Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start This wizard assists you in converting your Microsoft Access 2000 Reports to WHIReports 2 0 format The converted files can be loaded into WHIReports designer for further modifications Press the Next button
406. lation folder The default installation folder is D Program File HG AnalystExamples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the soil chemistry data will be imported to the Soil Sampling category soil_chemistry table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below Data Management 57 Data Transfer System Import p 7 0 x Step 2 Data Mappin Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list us Peing In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Source Destination Table Category Destination table soil_chem bi Soil Sampling w soil_chemistry Ma Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Type Conditions Name Type Iv station name STRING station LONG MV sys_sample_code STRING sys_sample_code STRING po X sample_name STRING po z sample_date DATESTAMP V chemical_name STRING STRING 2 M result_value DOUBLE DOUBLE gt M i result_unit STRING SaaS Ss po y conc_ppm DOUBLE E X fractioncode STRING po X interpreted_qualifiers STRING E bd reporting_detection_limit DOUBLE E gt result_comment STRING E bd rdl_ppm DOUBLE E E sample_matrix_code STRING L sample_type_code STRIN
407. lation folder The default installation folder is D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the water level data will be imported to the Monitoring Event category Water Level table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below Data Management 63 Data Transfer System Import iol x Step 2 Data Mappin Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list Pring In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheet y Monitoring Event y Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Conditions Type Iv station DOUBLE station LONG MV screen_id DOUBLE screen_id LONG lV date_ gt DATESTAN date_ DATESTAMP MV time_ gt DATESTAN time_ DATESTAMP M depth_ DOUBLE y depth_ DOUBLE m IV dry indicator_yn STRING dry_indicator_yn STRING Y remark Y STRING remark STRING O Requires a unit to be selected O Required field 1 Foreignkey Linked Fields Total of records 147 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Under Destination Monitoring Event for the new Destination Data Category gw_level for t
408. launched from two locations e Select the Material Specifications option from the Settings menu or click on the lt j button in the toolbar e Inthe Project Wizard click the E button provided in Step 4 Provide Project Settings The Material Specifications Editor will appear as shown in the following screenshot Material Specifications Editor Demo_Project E 3 O x Existing Material Specifications Active Material Specification DIN 4023 7 Name Picture Gravel Coarse Gravel Medium Gravel Fine Gravel Sand i Coarse Sand e Medium Sand Fine Sand Silt Clay FPXoOHM etx TF ss The left side of the window displays the soil types belonging to the selected Soil Classification System SCS which may be chosen from the combo box in the upper left corner The right side of the window provides the interface for editing an existing Material Specifications Editor 149 custom material specification or creating a new one In the lower left corner of the window there are four buttons e Use the button to modify the selected SCS e Use the xx button to delete the SCS e Use the p button to set the selected SCS as the project default e Use the button to export the SCS In the lower right corner there are several buttons that control the soils belonging to a SCS Use the button to create a New SCS Use the button to save the SCS Use the 42 button to add a new soil Use th
409. lease see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries Quality Control This menu item loads the Quality Control component with these tools you can manage Lab Quality Control templates and perform a quality control assessment For more details please see Chapter 13 Quality Control 136 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Unit Converter Use the Unit Converter to convert commonly used units from one form to another For more details on this tool please see the Unit Converter section in this chapter BackUp Database Use this option to create a backup copy of the SQL Server database used by the current project A backup of the database is helpful in order to preserve data or to detach and send the database to colleagues or WHI Technical support Select this menu item and provide a name and directory path for the file It will be saved with the BAK extension If the entire project is to be backed up simply make a copy of the HGA project folder however 1f you have map projects in another directory then copy these additional folders as well NOTE Backup and restore works only if you are running HGA on the system that also hosts the server the server can be MSDE or SQL Server NOTE SQL Server does not permit saving the back up copy of the database to a mapped network drive it can be saved only to a local drive Restore Database Use this option to restore the SQL Server database in case of accidental data deletion or loss due to mecha
410. lect tools are described in this section however if you require further information please refer to the ActiveReport help file included with the installation in the Reports folder If you cannot find a description of a specific property see the previous descriptions in this section Label Angle Allows you to change the angle at which the text appears in the label ClassName Sets the overall text style of the label caption e g Heading1 Hyperlink Allows you to change the label into a hyperlink To do so enter an internet address inside the Hyperlink field Report Designer Window 401 402 Left Determines how far in pixels from the left edge of the report the object 1s located You can either enter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired location Multiline Allows you to set whether you want the text to move to the next line when it reaches the right border of the object Multiline True or if you want to force the text into a single line Multiline False Top Determines how far in pixels from the top edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired location Vertical Alignment Allows you to set how the text is aligned in the object vertically Top will start the text at the top of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text i
411. led in a borehole by casing the borehole and developing the well Station attributes for an observation well include Well ID site ID Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst coordinates elevation well depth screen locations casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type water level measurements and groundwater chemistry analysis results Surface Water Observation Point This station type may be a point on ariver or a stream equipped to take water samples and measure river discharge and water level Station attributes include Station ID site ID river ID coordinates elevation type of observations type of equipment water chemistry flow rates etc Weather Station This station may be an observation point equipped to measure weather characteristics Station attributes include Station ID site ID coordinates elevation construction date type of measurements observations start observations end temperatures precipitation solar radiation air quality etc Stations Table The Stations Table stores all the station location information for all projects residing in the database All additional tables you create in your database are directly or indirectly linked to the Stations Table The Station Table may contain an unlimited number of fields Though as a minimum the Station Table must contain the following fields e Station ID 1D e Station Name Name e Station Coordinate X e Sta
412. licking the button for the color you would like to change Each color can be selected from an RGB 16 million color palette Adding Color Intervals In order to display more than seven color increments additional colors can be added to the color scale by clicking on one of the colors in the color value table and then clicking the Add button A new color entry will be added with a value midway between the previous and next value Deleting a color To remove a color increment simply select the color from the Color Value table and click on the Delete button Resetting the Color Palette The color settings can be reset to the initial default values by clicking the Reset button 383 The Color Legend The Color Legend is a scale of the element values associated with each color The values and colors shown in the Color Legend are defined by the Color Palette settings for the selected data type element see previous section Other display settings including Title Text size Text color and Frame color can be customized using the display settings options shown in the figure below Setting Value T OL Palette o Auto reset palette ElColor legend Visible a Oo Title Textsize 0 015 Textcolor O O Z o Frame Frame line color Framefillcolor EL The color legend will automatically appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen whenever a display object using the color palet
413. ll appear ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup RAEI Wate Source Hame Description Cancel Database Version SE eit Workbook Select Workbook Use Curent Directory Options gt e In this dialog select the Excel version from the combo box e Press the Select Workbook button and the following dialog will appear Select Workbook Database Name Directories mm OF ch odbedata sources ilil Cancel fo cs E gt Program Files 2 Common Files AEE E gt ODBC WA ead Onl E gt Data Sources z j List Files of Type Drives Excel Files sl Sc Network e From this dialog browse to the drive and directory that contains the source file Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 525 e Click OK to select this file e A confirmation dialog will appear listing the Excel format and filename as shown below ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup EA ES Vata soume Hame escapo B Ose Euren me cta e Click OK to proceed Select Data Source Data Sources EE DataSourceName Passos NH e Select the DataSourceName that was created e Click OK to proceed 526 Appendices ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup RAEI Mata Source Hame Description Canes Database Help Version Workbook D 4 S ample_Stations xls Select Workbook Use Curent Directory me e Click OK again to proceed e The main Data Link Properties d
414. ll be a prompt to Select a Report Template before proceeding e The Report Editor may be loaded from the Project Browser in the main window simply double click on an existing Report or Report template under the Reports node The report editor consists of two main windows e The Runtime Designer Designer and e The Viewer Each component of the Report Editor comes with 1ts own set of toolbars and icons that perform specific tasks related to the window The following few sections present a detailed description of the toolbar icons for each component 11 2 Report Designer Window The Report Designer allows you to design the contents as well as looks of your reports All report designs can be saved and opened for editing and or generating the final report A sample of the designer view 1s shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes Property Toolbox fe WHI Arnii PRAT OA O Ce E Toolbar ar at le oe NEST Weare toe hohe er emi eon Mice A Earl my I A FEE AA E TA iege elde 14 gt IAS li 1 E E FO E Prepet Bas EER Demorei ti r 0 00 x ny waterloo Project Manager TheManager ul E Dei Company iii ooo as D dle Explorer p Borehole Field moe a eee aiii d ed BPE on BEER Layout Designer Window Fields gt Lo 394 Chapter 11 The Report Editor The designer window contains the follo
415. ll display the information View 3D button loads selected cross section s into 3D Explorer View BHLP button loads a BHLP for the selected station 321 9 2 Description of Menu Items 9 2 1 File Save This menu item will save all current edits for the cross section to the current cross section project file VCP Close Closes the currently open cross section Export Model Layers This option allows you to export the model layer lines for all cross sections to XYZ text file format These files can in turn be used to define layer elevations in groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW When this option is selected the following dialog will appear Export Model Layers 3 x Select Model Layers Name Export as Topography Topography Top L2 Top L2 Top L3 Top L3 Top L4 Top L4 Top L5 Top L5 Bot L6 Bot L6 OOOO Select Cross Sections Select All Cross Section Cancel EJ Help In this dialog select the model layers you wish to import Each model layer will be exported as a separate file for each file you may define the name under the Export As column Next select which cross sections should be considered in the export Click the Create 322 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor button to generate the files The files will be generated in the Model sub folder of the Project folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Model Topography txt
416. ll stations within the box will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Polygon Allows to select stations within a drawn polygon Place the cursor in the map window at one point of interest click once with the left mouse button and digitize a polygon around the area of interest To add a vertex to the polygon continue to click with the left mouse button To close the polygon double click the left mouse button at the final vertex All stations within the polygon will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Circle Allows to select stations within a drawn circle To draw a circle place the cursor in the center of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and drag an expanding circle around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the circle will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Line Allows to select stations near a drawn line To draw a line place the cursor at one end of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and digitize a line through the area of interest To add a vertex to the line click with the left mouse at the vertex location To finish the line double click the left mouse button at the final vertex location This will open the buffer distance window Description of Menu Items 305 Buffer Buffer meters OF Cancel Enter a buffer distance from the
417. m Files HG Analyst Directories Files gt DA ACI ea CustLine w Level dll UA le CustPoly dll Er eee OA CustPoly_Shift dl Ey bhip CustRend dll data DBFOLL dll re a dbwhi ll Eg Projects hd Drives E d new volume Cancel Help Select a new directory then click OK to continue The next step is to define the Client for the project Client information is not a required field for new projects The Client information is selected from a list saved in the current database to select a client from the list press the Edit button to load the Client List dialog Chapter 4 Project Manager General Business Address Contact Notes Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Mame prasts Hydrogeologic Inc Fhone Fax E 3 746 1798 E 3 609 5162 Logo x Xx la Es ES In this window define the client applicable to the project A list of clients may be defined in this window for use in future projects Follow the steps below Ss Add button in the lower left corner to add a new client For each Client name enter the Company name address and contact info A logo may also be defined for each client Once this is complete al Save button to save changes to a client OK to load the selected client into the project manager for this project Other functions in the Client window are summarized below e Use the El button to remove the selected client from the lis
418. m a pick list as shown below Choose Column Type xx Please Choose a Column Type Scale Lithology Plot Well Construction Interval Depth Picture One or more instances of these column types can be displayed on a borehole log plot in any sequence Each column can have its own header BHLP Columns 445 446 BHLP Default Settings There are several default view settings and properties that can be defined for the BHLP To load the BHLP Settings e Right mouse click anywhere in the BHLP Viewer window and select Properties or e Right click on Design in the Designer tree and select Show Settings The BHLP Settings window will appear similar to the following figure ES Scale m ES Scale ft E5 Plot E ES Plot Area ES res ES Well Construction BHLP Settings l x Default for All Columns Column Properties Header Properties Height Auto 41 Alignment Center y Angle Q Color El Font al Width 75 Color EN gt Depth J Auto Fired Depth Ie General Fit width to page J Print scale factor 1 o 0 fit to report template Apply OK Cancel The Header Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance of the column header for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modified Height Set the default height of the header space Select the Auto checkbox to ensure that the header
419. mages to your report You can link 1t to a data field in your project or to an image file outside of the project Line Add simple lines in your report Shape Add shapes rectangle square circle to the report Rich Text Control Add a text box with a RTF text to your report Frame Add a frame in and or around the report Similar to the square Shape tool however the emphasis is on the border not fill Subreports Add any number of subreports to the report The subreport will be limited by the width of the control but the height will grow to accommodate the length of the subreport Page Break Add a page break in the report at a desired location OLE Object Add an OLE Object Linking and Embedding object such as a picture to the report Bar Code Insert a bar code into the report ADO Control Click on it to add a ADO ActiveX Data Object datasource control on the report Chart Object Drag it to the designer to add a chart to the report Charts Manager Set the properties of the selected chart Report Designer Window 399 400 A Well Profile Add a borehole log plot to the report ActiveX Controls Add any ActiveX control that is registered on the current computer to your report For more information on the available options see Toolbox options for General Tools on page 401 Alignment Tools an oa Bring To Front Move the selected item to the front of the overlay view Send
420. may be added to the Group options by right clicking and selecting Add Row Group By List Having Function Field Operator Value Operator Add Row Delete Row Add Station ID field Once the Group By conditional options have been specified an aggregate function must be defined for the Display Fields a common aggregate option must be selected for each Display Field as shown below 230 Chapter 7 Queries Query Builder XH B w Station Group Query Data Query Select a Query Display Fields VCExceeds20 y Expression Description E aes station name name X El description_addins station elevation Y M x_elevation X station_guide pda_guide user_stamp ap and BHLP Ready Use current projection system photo purpose location_name Expression Trichloroethane E location description well_owner address city or town county state province Design SOL View Preview station id station station y id x y Hiv il 10 AND 2003 11 28 Z z Zip Postal Code Installation_D ate x status Group By List Geologic Description Having El ithalini i description_addins coun Operator M Source Condition Project y Basic Close Help Field Name description_addins county Type STRIN
421. ment and application of innovative groundwater technologies in addition to offering expert services and professional training to meet the advancing technological requirements of today s groundwater and environmental professionals Waterloo Hydrogeologic Software WHS developed by SWS consists of a complete suite of environmental software applications engineered for data management and analysis modeling and simulation visualization and reporting WHS is currently sold globally as a suite of desktop solutions For over 18 years our products and services have been used by firms regulatory agencies and educational institutions around the world We develop each product to maximize productivity and minimize the complexities associated with groundwater and environmental projects To date we have over 14 000 registered software installations in more than 85 countries Need more information If you would like to contact us with comments or suggestions you can reach us at Schlumberger Water Services 460 Phillip Street Suite 101 Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2L 5J2 Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 General Inquiries sws info slb com Web www swstechnology com www water slb com Obtaining Technical Support To help us handle your technical support questions as quickly as possible please have the following information ready before you call or include it in a detailed technical support e mail e A complete descripti
422. message in the Errors Warnings 2 BH2_10 10 2002_27 7 27 7 grid Records with errors must be rejected to 2 BH2_10 10 2002_8 2 82 activate the importing process 3 BH3_10 10 2002_13 5 13 5 3 BH3 10 10 2002 19 19 You can also select one or more records in 3 BH3 10 10 2002 21 5 215 the preview table and exclude them from 3 BH3 10 10 2002 245 24 5 importing into your database 3 BH3_10 10 2002_28 28 3 BH3_10 10 2002_4 5 45 3 BH3_10 10 2002_9 5 9 5 4 BH4_10 10 2002_14 4 144 of E M Ero YX O waning lt Back Import Cancel Help NOTE Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted to the database Chapter 2 Getting Started OK Close to close the DTS The new sample codes should now appear in the project Now you are ready to import the soil chemistry analysis results for these sample codes Import Chemistry Results Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type Soil chemistry data in the box that appears OK Sr a button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Soil_chemistry_data XLS file located in the AExamples folder under the instal
423. mouse button to dock the panel at the desired docking area Closing Panels The panels may be removed from the 3D Explorer interface by clicking the Close icon X The panels can be re opened using the View options from the top menu bar The panels can be toggled on off by clicking the E Hide project browser button and i Hide Navigation tools button on the toolbar 10 2 2 Vertical Exaggeration In HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer the vertical exaggeration factor can be changed at any time to obtain a more desirable vertical exaggeration of the project domain The vertical exaggeration factor is available to provide an improved 3 dimensional view when the scale of the X and Y axis far exceeds that of the Z axis When opening 3D Explorer the default value of exaggeration factor is set to 1 The Exaggeration factor can be changed in two locations e In the Display tree under the Project Name folder OR e In the toolbar top toolbar of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window as shown Working with 3D Explorer 359 below Exaggeration factor 0 Simply enter a new value in the field and press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard 10 2 3 3D Navigation Tools The Navigation Panel should appear on your screen as shown in the figure below Slider Buttons l Rotate Shit Light Position de Alo oo E pe Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side If the Navigation
424. mple J E Of x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 E ES Design 3 6 Lithology Lithology Well Construction ES Litho Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Well Construction Horizontal Align Center Vertical Align Center Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape Angle O Gravel 0 0 0 Epo Close Export Y Print Y Help 12 3 3 Add Plot Columns To add a plot column to your BHLP right click on the Design node and add a Plot column Once the Plot column has been added the Plot Series options must be defined Designing a Borehole Log Plot 471 478 Add Plot Series To add a plot series right click on the Plot column in the Design tree Alternately you can click on the Add button on toolbar after having highlighted Plot in the Design tree Select the Add Plot Series option as shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample e 5 ioj xj Select Station m r m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 481 2036 33 347 00 348 00 El ES Design E ES Lithology Lithology Well Construction E LitholoayE ntities H E Well Construction Save Save s Coarse Gravel Add Group Add Galumn Add Flot Series Delete Visible El Header Text Horizont Show Settings Vertical Align Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape Angle 0 Gravel Close Expat Y Pint Y EJ Help The Add a Plo
425. ms frame select a field item and click the gt gt button to add the field item to the group Similarly you can use the lt lt button to remove an item from a group Note A field item can only belong to one group The Edit button allows you to modify the name of a selected group Use the Delete button to remove a group from the groups list Clicking the Clear button will remove all groups from the groups list Once the groups have been defined select Ok Crosstab Table Display Settings You may show hide data from the crosstab report using tools built into the crosstab component Each data field that is displayed as a row or column includes this functionality Click on the ES button beside the field and you will see options similar Crosstab Queries 249 250 to those shown below EJE Filter f By value f By condition Filter by value Filter by condition 0K Cancel For each data field you will see the results returned In the example above the query returned seven instances of station name but 1f the selected field was chemical names then you would see all the chemical names that are included in the data query results You can show hide data from the selected field using one of two methods By Value or By Condition Each method is described below Filter By Value When this filter option is selected you can manually specify which field values to show hide by selecting unselecting the desir
426. n be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Plot node from the BHLP Settings window The settings for the Plot node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings g xj e Visible Column Options Help Apply OF Cancel The Plot frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can modify the general column settings by clicking the Options button see Column Options on page 447 The Settings for the Plot Area sub node are shown in the following screenshots Plot Area General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend Appearance E Background Color E Page Background Color Bottom Apply OF Cancel In the General tab specify the background color and page background color Under the series frame you can set the order of the plots to have one plot above below the other Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter BHLP Settings xj E ES BHLP Plot Are ue Scale General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend E Well Construction Appearance ES Desc ES Grain Size Show Grid Lines Color J E ES Plot t 56 as Primary Secondary e Show Color F Auto Show Labels Font Min E38 Logarithm hian 1E38 Interval o Apply OF Cancel In the Horizontal Axis tab shown above you can modify the
427. n by a factor displayed in the Current width drop down menu Using this factor you can make the wells thinner or thicker on the cross sectional display Change Vertical Axis This option allows you to extend the vertical range of the elevation axis When this option is selected the following dialog will display 328 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Set Vertical Axis i X Please set vertical axis Bottorn 216 0036 m DK Cancel H Help Specify a Top value and a Bottom value Click Ok to accept the new values Change Vertical Exaggeration This option allows you to change the vertical exaggeration of the current cross section The vertical exaggeration is simply the ratio of the vertical scale to the horizontal scale Set Yertical Exaggeration X Please input the vertical exaggeration r OK Cancel H Help Specify a new vertical exaggeration and click the Ok button The cross section will then be regenerated to reflect the new vertical exaggeration Copy Window Provides an option for copying the current cross section window to the Windows clipboard The window may then be pasted into a supporting application such as a document or image editor or slide presentation 9 2 3 View This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Cross Section Window Full Extent This menu item will result in zooming out the cross section window to its original full extents Desc
428. n for the project The available soil settings include e USCS Unified Soil Classification System e USDA United States Department of Agriculture e DIN 4023 Deutsches Institut fur Normung e V e AH International Association of Hydrogeologists e Compton If these settings are not adequate a new Soil Specification can be easily created For more details on customizing the soil settings please refer to section 3 5 Material Specifications Editor in Chapter 3 DIN 4023 for this example There is an option to enter a Description of the project location at the bottom of this window not a required field Next define the Project Location Settings information such as the projection system and coordinate settings Under the Projection Type frame specify the coordinate system used for this project You may choose from the following list e Geographic e UTM e State Planar e Other For this sample project UTM Once the projection Type is selected choose the Projection from the combo box on the right side of the window The Units will be selected automatically based on the selected projection type e g UTM will use m State Planer will use feet etc NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N Finish to complete the Project Wizard The first time the project loads the settings for User Access Management will be presented As the creator of the new project you will have Administrator rights where you can add remove users and assign
429. n layer with another polygon layer The following dialog will appear Please choose a polygon layer to make the intersection domaini Name of the new layer OK Cancel EJ Help Select the desired layer and enter a name for the new layer Click OK when you are finished and the new layer will be added to the Layer Manager panel Properties Provides options for modifying the symbol for the shapes point line polygon on the Description of Menu Items Zid current active layer in the Layer Manager The options dialog is shown below Point Style Patten A fr Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x Fil as Border FP Sample x OF Cancel The dialog shown here is for point shapes There are similar dialogs for line and polygon shapes The available symbol Patterns include circle square triangle cross or any symbol from all true type fonts that may be available on your system If the latter is selected you will have to select the desired font from the Font combo box and the desired symbol from the Symbol combo box Choose a symbol size from the combo box in the upper right corner Finally the symbol Fill color may be chosen from a color palette If a border around the symbol is desired select the check box beside Border and provide a border color Statistics Displays statistics for the selected data field of a selected layer These include Count Maximum Minimum Sum Mean and Standard Deviati
430. nagement System UALM these tools can be used to add edit users user groups and assign permissions to user groups and control how users access your projects and the HydroGeo Analyst application For more details see Chapter 4 User Access Level Management Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Change Password This menu allows you to change the project password this feature is available for administrators only The following dialog will appear ioi Old Password New Password Confirm Password Enter the Old Password in the first line Enter the New Password in the second line Confirm the new password in the third line When you are finished click OK For more details see Chapter 4 User Access Level Management User Preferences In this dialog specify the user preferences There are several tabs explained below AquiferT est AquaChem Select the location of the Aquifer Test application exe file C Program Files 4quiferT est41 VAquiferT est exe ul OK Cancel In order to use the AquiferTest analysis feature you must first have AquiferTest 4 1 installed on the local machine and specify where the AquiferTest exe is located HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 131 Preferences xl AquiferTest quaChem Select the location of the AquaChem application exe file C Program Files 4 quaChem5114 quaChem52 exe ES Select the location of the AquaChem database aqc file C Pr
431. nate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation pro cess and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than other wise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 529 Num_Neighbors Number of nearest data points to use when calculating inter polated value for each grid node Z_Only Allows the user to select between outputting the original X and Y values plus the interpolated value x y f x
432. nce your report arrives at the viewer it is ready to be printed saved in the native binary format of the Report Editor or exported to the various formats A report preview can be generated by clicking on the 5 Preview button from the Designer window s toolbar A sample of the Report viewer window 1s shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes Report 0200 a air daa Navigation HER x mj O E FESH ea ifieea nal Ae STE CEE Tn OS EEES Toolbar ns Table EE of Contents Po rre TS Main Body of Report aan a qe ml a art a E a qi a E ml a qt a a a ml a E qe ml Chapter 11 The Report Editor The Report Viewer contains three main components e Report Navigation Toolbar provides a number of toolbar icons that allow you to interact with the report described in detail below e Table of Contents can be displayed by clicking on the TOC icon on the toolbar The table of contents allows you to jump to any desired section in the report e Main Body of the Report Preview The main body of the report displays the final report as per the report design and data 11 3 1 Report Viewer Toolbars The Report Editor Viewer offers an extensive list of navigation tools the figure below shows the toolbars used in the Viewer window Bese EAEL e Ea E Ae Ho s4 ooloo The following sections describe the toolbar buttons of the viewer window Navigation t
433. nd 7 GBA 69 1668 Silty clay Silt 8 6608 0 4 3 Co0a4rse Gravel Coarse Gravel 8 6B08 4 3 17 Fine to med sand Hedium Sand 8 6608 17 48 Gravel Gravel 8 6B08 18 66 Fine sand Fine Sand 8 GBO8 66 94 5ilty clay Silt 8 6808 94 106 S5i1ty to Fine Sand Sand NOTE It is recommended that you have a header in the first row of your source file to simplify data mapping in Step 2 The method of selecting a data source mainly depends on the type of the data source There are two options e Specify Import File Name quick and easy for text files spreadsheet and MS Access Database data sources on a local or network machine OR e Build a Connection String to a file using the standard Universal Data Link UDL properties dialog More appropriate for data sources on a server or network computer Specify Import File Name To specify a file directly select the radio button beside the Specify Import File Name option then click on the E Open file button to load the following dialog Importing Data using the DTS 203 Look in E My Computer Ej 3 Floppy 4 S Soft A J 0 3 D Y E Removable Disk H 0 File name fr est Files of type EE o mdb y S Access mdb enya txt csv tab asc Excel xls db Cancel Select the appropriate file type Browse to the folder containing the file Highlight the desired file Click Open Click the Next g
434. nd select Edit or Edit Dynamic Once in the Query Builder make the necessary changes to the query generate a new SQL statement execute it and Save 7 4 2 Saving As One method of quickly creating multiple queries with similar conditions is to use the Save As option press the H Save as button in the toolbar To do so define all the necessary inputs for a query Then Save As the query under a new name Then simply make the required changes to the new query and execute and Save This is convenient for many cases For example if the only difference between the queries is in the Value field Query 1 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ppm Query 2 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 500 ppm By duplicating the first query using the Save As option the second query can quickly be created by making a small change to only the Value field 7 5 Recalling Queries in HydroGeo Analyst Once queries have been created they will be available from the main HydroGeo Analyst interface A Station Group query will appear as a new branch under the Station Group node in the project browser The stations which satisfy the query will be automatically added to this new Station Group A Data query will appear as a new branch under the Queries node in the project browser To see the results of the selected query right click on the query and select Execute Query option The query results will then be displayed in the Data
435. nderlayh False Visible True Locate the DataField entry in the Property Toolbox this 1s circled in the image above Expand the combo box beside DataField and select Name from the list If there are no fields available in the list type Name in this field By specifying this option the Report Editor will group the data by the station Name field The chart can now be added to the report GroupFooter1 in the report design window and enlarge the space allocated to this component see the design below The GroupFooter will contain the time series chart and as such there must be adequate space allocated Creating Reports with Charts 435 New Report 2181 x egale J EM EA E ie PA EA aaa E H MainReport H PageHeader A a Bannan Bane E GroupHeader Ro eo e e Hore gae a PERS salik a ad E e 4 E Name GroupHeader H PageFooter B TE Ee ee BackColor __ El GroupHeader BackStyle 0 ddBKTrar vlna ae i CanGrow True A EEEE are EERE Fete pert E eE e a reo ren ea E CanShrink False ARRIA fos ssccs PARRER HERAA PARERS RRA eel eee PA RE Ge PARERA oe PI True HA E CTS SP A A A DataField GrpKeepT 0 None Chines RE ere ee Reed AS DESEO eae E height 360 a E KeepToge False A NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Repeat 0 None Underlayh False Visible True Adobe FrameMaker 2 Manuals Yersion 11EndlishivBoreHole
436. ndow to clipboard 9 1 About the Interface The Cross Section Editor may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select a cross section from the Cross Sections node then click Tools gt View Cross Section from the HydroGeo Analyst main menu e Select a cross section from the Cross Sections node then click on the Show Create Cross Section button on the toolbar e Inthe Project Browser double click on an existing cross section from the Cross Sections node The Cross Section Editor may also be launched from the Map Manager in one of the following ways e Activate the Cross section lines layer from the layer manager and select a Cross section line by clicking on the desired cross section e To create a new cross section select the Create Cross Section menu option from the Tools menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button on the toolbar This option will create a new cross section based oe selected cross section line e To open an existing cross section based on an existing cross section line click on the Show Create Cross Section button li on the toolbar This opens the cross section editor with the corresponding cross section e Click on the Cross Section tab in the upper right corner of the window see figure below to activate an existing cross section from a list of cross sections that are available for your project The Cross Section Editor window is shown in the figure below with a cross section loa
437. next section you will import soil chemistry data for the boreholes Example Importing Soil Chemistry Data In this section you will import soil chemistry data from a file In most of the data models provided with HGA chemistry samples must have a sample code the field name is sys_sample_code in many database schemas When importing the chemistry data you need to import the sys_sample_code first in the Parent Tree of the database Soil_Sample table THEN import the chemistry data chemistry data into the Soil_Chemistry table child table A unique sys_sample_code should be assigned for each sample the same sample code may be used for multiple parameter analysis Import Sample Codes Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box Chapter 2 Getting Started type Soil sample codes in the box that appears OK Sr button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Soil_sample_codes XLS file located in the Examples folder under the installation folder The default installation folder is D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the soil sample codes will be imported to the Soil
438. ng The Octant Search option is an exhaustive search option available to make sure that data are taken on all sides of the point being estimated and is especially recommended for 3D data If the user specifies Max points per octant to be greater than 0 an Octant Search is employed to find the neighborhood of points for interpolation Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 533 534 The Max radius and Min radius defines the search distances in user specified units in the maximum horizontal direction and the minimum horizontal direction for determining the neighborhood of points for interpolation For isotropic data the two radii are the same Enter the Vertical Radius value if 3D Kriging is to be performed If the total number of points in the data is large gt 200 computation time for Kriging may be reduced by specifying a smaller radius for the search The Anglel Angle2 and Angle3 parameters define the search ellipsoid for situations in which anisotropy is present in the data The Kriging type options are e Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean e Ordinary Kriging e Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file e Kriging with external drift The following guidelines are recommended for selecting the type of Kriging Choose Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean if the mean value is known and is constant throughout the area Select Ordinary Kriging if the mean is not constant everywhere and needs to
439. ng e Screen e Filling e Hydrogeology e Water Levels e Pump For each category provide the table and the field that stores the patterns to be used in all the graphical displays For example in the Lithology tab select a table which contains the Lithology information for your project then select a field from this table which contains the Soil Description information The information provided in this window will be used when displaying profile diagrams in HydroGeo Analyst The Chapter 5 Template Manager geological data and the corresponding patterns will also be displayed in the cross section editor and in the 3D Explorer Only tables with the following parameters can be displayed in this dialog Lithology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING soil_type Drilling Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING method Casing Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING ex material If it s desired to have multiple well casings or nested piezometers you must also define two additional fields e Casing ID field type LONG used to distinguish different well casings e Parent ID field type LONG required only if a well casing exists within a parent casing if so for the selected well casing set the ParentID equal to the CasingID of the parent casing Scre
440. ng aggregation types are available Sum Count Min Max Avg Standard Deviation Estimate of Standard Deviation Variance Estimate of Variance Median Skewness Kurtosis DisplayExpression Use the Expression Editor shown below to create an expression property for a field header Expression Use the Expression Editor to create an expression property for a field Chapter 7 Queries Expression Editor E Expression editor E Ioj x Operators Functions E Operators ese Arithmetic H Comparisons H Boolean E Strings H Other OF Cancel Line 1 Column 1 The Expression Editor allows you to construct logical and arithmetic expressions for determining values for both facts fields and dimension fields in your cross tab report The editor provides a list of source fields from the data query and various Operators and mathematical Functions You can define the expression by simply arranging the source fields and operators functions into the space below using the drag and drop with the mouse Once the expression has been defined click Ok The following buttons are available in the Expression editor Check Expression Use this button to Verify that the expression does not contain any syntax errors e 2 Open Expression Use this button to Open an existing expression from a text file e Save Expression Use this button to Save an expression in text file format FieldType Assign a
441. ng settings For the Series Label type TVOC ug L For the X Axis Field sample_date from the combo box For the Y Axis Field result_value from the combo box The remaining settings can be left as is OK to return to the Report Designer When you are finished designing the chart s and other parts of your report you can generate a report preview gt lo Report Preview button from the toolbar Please be patient during this process as 1t may require a few minutes to pass the data from HydroGeo Analyst to the Report Preview the report contains approximately 25 pages Once this is complete you should see the preview window with the table of contents as shown below Report query report_0 New Report 0 11211996 O 0 118 1996 O IE 01 2424996 01 411611996 911996 idad i Ar TYOC ug 11211996 A 118 1996 A l Chapter 11 The Report Editor The report preview displays the first station W 01 by default Since there are no observed concentrations for this well the time series chart 1s not useful in this case Scroll ahead a few pages to see a station which contains data Or select a station from the table of contents on the left side of the window to see the respective time series chart e W 12 from the table of contents The report preview will jump ahead to this station and display its respective data and time series chart
442. ng the image provided in this dialog Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option 1s available only 1f the JPEGs export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size 1s also directly proportional to this value Description of Menu Items 323 Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Metafiles EMP Print Loads the current cross section into the report editor s runtime designer Please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor for more details on managing reports Exit Exit the Cross Section Editor and return to the main window of HydroGeo Analyst Note that this menu option also closes the map manager 9 2 2 Edit Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all shapes from the currently active cross section interpretation Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex e Activate the desired cross section interpretation make it editable e Select an o
443. nical failure Before selecting this option ensure that the appropriate HydroGeo Analyst project is open Then select the Restore Database option and locate the BAK file which was created using the Tools Backup database option NOTE If you are using SQL Server 2005 Express you cannot restore a database that was backed up using Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine 2000 MSDE Manage Databases Use this option to remove unwanted databases from the local or network instances of WHI SQL Express This option is available when HGA is first loaded and no projects have been opened The following dialog shows the options that are available HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 137 138 Database Management Server waynetwhi e Windows NT Integrated Authentication User Name sa Password Database whi w Refresh Projects on database whi x 3 Close El Help In this dialog select the Server and the Database that you would like to delete Once the database 1s selected a list of projects using the selected database will be listed at the bottom the project list is read only and displayed in order to assist you to decide if the selected database can be safely deleted Click on the x button to delete the selected database Click on the button to compress the file size of the database to save disk space After the database has been compressed you may continue to work with it NOTE Use caution when deleting
444. nt 4 Mining Exploration Geophysics b W Well History Tree View E User Category Oo Settings Oo Window View settings e a Name Description Tables Fields gt amp a E 25 Toolbar Last Change 06 30 2004 1 31 40 PM Close Help Chapter 5 Template Manager The Template Manager window contains the following items e The Template Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect templates as a whole e The Database Templates Contains a list of the available database templates e The Tree View Contains a view of all data categories tables and fields for the selected template e The Settings Window Contains the interface for editing tables and fields e The Tables Fields Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect the selected field or table 5 2 1 Description of Toolbar Items The Template Manager provides two groups of toolbar items e The Template Toolbar Upper Toolbar consists of buttons that affect database templates as a whole e The Tables Fields Toolbar Lower Toolbar consists of buttons that affect the selected field table in the selected template Template Toolbar Global Template Options The buttons on the upper toolbar located at the top of the window immediately beside the list of Database templates contains buttons that allow copying an existing template saving changes made to the current template exporting the current template as a database structure template and deletin
445. nt graph is selected it is possible to set the properties of the graph If a text column is selected the font attributes can be set Note that each column may utilize different data fields for its start and ending depth information For example the start and ending depth information for Lithology patterns may be different from that of the well construction and may come from different tables For details on how to pre define the data mappings for some of the BHLP column types please see Chapter 5 Profile Settings Supported Column Types The borehole log plotter supports many data types including e Scale e Lithology eg geologic formation details soil patterns descriptions etc e Plot e Depth dependent plots data measured as depth value e g Geophysical investigation results Neutron Resistivity Gamma Chemistry results etc e Interval dependent plots data measured as from to value e g core recovery sample technique e Well construction casing screen annular filling etc e Interval based data e g well screen indicators text etc e With text entity e g comments on well drilling observations e With image entity e g photos of soil or split spoon samples Depth based data e g symbols for water level indicator etc e With text entity text label showing water level values e With image entity e Picture e g any image that should be applied to the entire BHLP column The column type may be selected fro
446. nt renderers using the toolbar located under the renderer list x 4t Lt Background Symbo OK Cancel H Help The renderer may also apply a background to the data symbols this background can be modified using the standard Point Style dialog Create Thematic Map This menu item allows the user to create a thematic map for any of the active Map Layers containing numeric data A thematic map shows the spatial distribution of one or more specific data values in the form of a Pie or Bar chart Thematic Maps can only be drawn on layers that contain data such as stations contour maps etc They are not applicable to annotation layers A common example of the applications for a thematic map would be displaying the distributions of multiple chemicals To create a Thematic Pie Chart for HG Analyst station data A HydroGeo Analyst Data layer from the Layer Manager to ensure that Description of Menu Items 283 this layer is active e g a Station Group or Data Query layer such as Boreholes Monitoring Wells etc Select the menu option Map Create Thematic Map Pie Chart from the Map Manager main menu A Thematic map window will appear as shown below Create Thematic Map Fields in Table Fields for the Theme ELEVATION TOC Sil re Hent Cancel E Help Enter a name for the map in the Name field This name will appear in the thematic map list should you choose to edit it later From the l
447. ntour labels e Visible shows or hides the labels e Text color controls the color of the label e Text size controls the size of the labels e Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value e Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line e Distance sets the distance value between each label smaller distance values will result in more labels e Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label 10 3 6 Plumes Display Settings 374 HGA 3D Explorer is capable of displaying and animating 3D Isosurfaces volumetric plumes of soil or groundwater chemistry data The 3D Plume must be generated from a data query in the main HGA window before displaying it in 3D Explorer For details on how to generate the plume please see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation The plume can be added to the 3D Project when working in the cross section editor for more details see Chapter 9 View 3D You may also import a plume into an existing 3D project to do so select File Import Plume from the main menu The plume may be visualized with one of the display formats shown below when you right mouse click on any data plume in the model tree Region a po Add Isosurface E A Add Colormap a E Add Isolines Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer e Add isosurface see Isosurfaces on page 375 for more details e Add color map see Color Maps on page 377 for more details e Add isolines see Isoline Maps on p
448. nts or conversions for georeference coordinates that are in a different projection system To set a georeference point e Click on the first map location where the X and Y world coordinates are Description of Menu Items 271 212 known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location zal 5351 22 1 fas 2033 lt p 220 pb 293 OK Cancel Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point Click OK Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Click OK A box will appear around the map region similar to the window shown below br T Srirrt Map Regier Ha 55124 445m Y 4612800 ddim LE l Cancel The Georeference utility will convert the Raster Image to project coordinates in the top right corner of the window the two Georeference Points will be displayed These values cannot be modified unless one of the georeference points 1s deleted and a new georeference point is assigned A box will appear in the map window defining the image corners The image region can be modified as explained below To delete a georeference point e Click the Delete Point button in the toolbar e Select one of the georeference points to delete it Chapter 8 Map Manager NOTE When a georeference point is deleted a new georeference point must be added since
449. o dates starting date and end date The report component will then retrieve all the records that contain that station name or all the records that fall between those two dates You can use criteria in a query to restrict the set of records that the query returns You can then send the query results to the report component for generating a report If querying the data for different records each time you generate a report is desired you may want the report component to prompt you for criteria to enter for example Station name A query that prompts you for criteria is called a parameter query The following paragraphs show you how to create a dynamic report based on parameter queries The following is the format of the parameter query that you can create for use in the reporting component SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt table gt WHERE lt value gt lt Key Required Optional Caption Optional Default Value gt The following table summarizes the parameters that are typically included in a parameter query Default Value Sets or returns a string expression containing the query parameter s default value Select a station Select DISTINCT Name as Name from station in the query shown below Key Sets or returns the query parameter s key name Station Name in the query shown below Caption Sets or returns the string expression to be used as a prompt for the query parameter Select a station in the query shown below
450. o or exporting data from a HydroGeo Analyst project The DTS in HydroGeo Analyst is designed to allow for efficient data transfer between the database and external applications Data may be quickly imported into new or existing projects from various formats When creating a new project it may be necessary to import data from other sources into the HG Analyst database Data may exist in sources such as MS Access SQL server Oracle databases or in text files or spreadsheets The DTS is designed to import data from these sources into the HG Analyst Project database In addition data may be exchanged import and or export between the project database and various other data sources during the lifetime of the project Such imports exports in most cases will involve the project database and other sources such as spreadsheets delimited text files and even other databases such as MS Access The current version of the DTS is designed to e Import data into the HG Analyst database from such sources as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Delimited Text files e g Comma Tab delimited text files e Other databases e g from one or more tables in a MS Access database e Export selected data to destinations such as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Text files e Other databases e g to a table in a MS Access database e Export one or more HydroGeo Analyst tables to an external database MS Access SQL Server
451. o HydroGeo Analyst Getting Started This chapter is a tutorial which provides instructions on how to Get Started quickly using your own data sets There is information on how to create a new HydroGeo Analyst project then enter manipulate and visualize the data The user is encouraged to refer to respective chapters in this manual for more details on each module The chapter is organized into the following sections 2 1 Creating a New Project e Database Environment e Template Settings e Project Settings 2 2 Data Management e Entering Data Manually e Importing Data Using the Data Transfer System DTS e Grouping Stations 2 3 Viewing Borehole Log Plots e Selecting a Template e Saving and Printing 2 4 Querying the Database e Creating a data query e Recalling and executing queries 2 5 Mapping the Data e Creating a Map Project e Importing and GeoReferencing Site Maps e Creating Contour maps e Defining Cross Section Lines 27 2 6 Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections e Creating Geological Cross Sections e 3D Visualization of Cross Sections 2 7 Preparing Reports e Creating Reports with Data from Project e Creating Charts Terms and Notation The following terms and notations will be used in this exercise type Type in the given word or value e Click the left mouse button where indicated er Double click the left mouse button where indicated lt Tab gt Press the Tab key on your keyboa
452. o box e Ifthe field should be fixed to contain only values from the list enable the option Allow Values only from List by placing a check mark in the check box e If the list items should be read only in the field then place a check mark in the box beside Read Only e If necessary press the Edit List button to load the List Editor to edit the list Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Press the Save button to save the changes to the template and close The list items should now show up for the selected field column in HydroGeo Analyst Fields that contain a linked list will contain an arrow with a combo box on the right side of the field Simply click on this arrow to see the list items available for the field NOTE If you want to re use these lists in a new HGA project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the lists will be included For details on saving database templates see Chapter 5 Exporting the current template as a Database template 3 5 Material Specifications Editor The Material Specifications Editor provides options for editing material specifications specifically creating editing soil classifications for your project This Editor displays a list of standard soil specifications shipped with HydroGeo Analyst and allows the display of the soil type names and patterns for each classification The Material Specifications Editor may be
453. o plume volume estimation 3 some values are greater than the isosurface value a and some are less In this case the isosurface crosses the cell green polygon on picture and the linearly interpolated portion of cell volume is added to plume volume estimation only a part of the cell volume is added to the plume estimation The volume estimation value will be in the length units for the X Y co ordinates specified in the database For example 1f you use UTM and X and Y are entered in meters then the volume estimation value will be in cubic meters Color Maps The Color maps elements allows you to create a color shaded map for the concentration data that will plot distributed colors A color legend for the Color map will also appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen Creating a Color Map To create a color map click on the desired element in the Model tree to highlight it Display Settings 377 then right click on the element and select the Add color map option from the pop up menu y Alternately color maps may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create color map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window shown below with a list of the available surfaces slices The color map can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desir
454. of the HydroGeo analyst project and database This is useful if a remote client or colleague needs to open your HydroGeo Analyst project and SQL Server database A back up of the SQL Server database can be made using the BackUp Database option available in the Tools menu explained later in this chapter A copy of the HGA project can be made by simply copying the project folder and its contents using Windows explorer Restore Databases i x Server WAYNESWHI y ie This dialog allows opening a project and restoring related database to the 5 selected local server Project D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project pr Ey Please select the desired server provide the project file and the Backup File D TestB ackup BackupD atabase bak amp Scena p PES to the server OK Cancel Help In the Backup database dialog specify the Server The Server can be the WHI instance or SQL Server provided it is on the local machine Specify the Project to open VBH file and specify the Database BackUp File BAK file HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 109 110 NOTE The user must have permissions to the Manage Databases and Create Projects objects in the ALSD in order to use this option NOTE If you are using SQL Server 2005 Express you cannot open a backup database created by Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine 2000 MSDE Close the project which is currently open Re Open This menu item provides
455. of the window e In the toolbar click on the New button and the following window will appear Chapter 7 Queries Creating Queries x Name Description OF Cancel E Help e Enter a Name for the new query e g TOC Exceeds 320m for this example and a Description optional e Click OK NOTE Query names should contain alphanumeric characters only Do not use characters such as lt gt 1 etc e In the lower left corner of the Query Builder window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then a second combo box will become active From here select the appropriate station group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the current project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database e Expand the tree on the left side of the window e Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below 223 AT A XHEMA Station Group Quen Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOCE xceeds_320m y Expression station id id Description station x x Location station y y 7 station name name gt Station Name PX Y Map and BHLP Ready V Use current project
456. ogic layers eg Aquifer Aquitard1 Upper Unconfined etc for the displayed stations e Model layers that define unique model layers eg Model Layer 1 Model Layer Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers may be used in numerical groundwater flow models For more details please refer to Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor 7 3D Explorer The HG Analyst 3D Explorer provides a three dimensional view of one or more cross sections defined in the Cross Section Editor Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats Additionally base maps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for viewing geology and hydrogeology data The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using e 2D and 3D views of the grid e Bitmap overlays on surfaces e Enhanced label positioning and controls e Light source position control e Transparent objects e Animation sequence pausing and looping e Auto rotate tools to continuously rotate the model image around the X Y Z axis e and much more For more details please refer to Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 8 Major Components Report Editor The Report Editor p
457. ogram Files 4quaChem51 Demo aqe SJ 9 ce In order to use the AquaChem Water Quality Analysis feature you must first have AquiferTest 5 1 installed on the local machine and specify where the AquaChem5 1 ex is located and where the AquaChem project file AQC resides 3 2 6 Tools The Tools menu hosts a number of menu items which provide links to the tools and components of HydroGeo Analyst These menu items are linked to the Project Browser and are accessible by selecting the appropriate node in the project browser The following sections briefly describe each item in the Tools menu Query Builder This menu item loads the Query Builder which provides options for tasks related to queries In the Query Builder there are options for creating new queries or loading previous queries The E button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 7 Queries Map Manager This menu item loads the Map Manager The Map Manager can be used for creating and viewing site maps creating thematic and contour maps and defining cross section lines The gy button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 8 View Cross Section This menu item loads the Cross Section Editor This component can be used for defining and displaying geological hydrogeological and model layer cross sections The dl button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Cha
458. ointer button allows objects in the active layer to be selected h 7 51005 Draw Polygon button allows a polygon to be drawn in the active layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable About the Interface 259 260 o Draw Rectangle button allows a rectangle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is visible and set to be editable Draw Circle button allows a circle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Draw Line button allows a line to be drawn in the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a line shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Draw a Point button allows a point to be inserted in the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a point shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Insert Text button allows for text to be inserted on the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a text file layer is selected and set to be editable Information button allows the information for the selected station or any other object such as contour lines to be viewed Measure button allows the distance between two points on the map to be measured Delete Selected Object button allows the selected object polygon rectangle circle line point or text to be deleted from the active l
459. oject Properties and Location on page 32 You can change the projection system by clicking on Project gt Properties and selecting a new projection from the dropdown menu list In the Map Project you may create a new map layer that contains a map image from any of the following sources e Raster Images BIL TIF GRC BMP JPG TGA e AutoCAD files DWG DXF or e MicroStation files DGN This feature is demonstrated in the next section 2 5 2 Importing and Georeferencing a Site Map An example of how to import a map is provided below Layer gt Import gt Raster from the Map Project main menu Sample_Map bmp file located in the folder D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples A warning message will appear verifying that the image must be georeferenced Yes to continue A prompt will appear to define a name for the new site map Mapping the Data 71 Enter the name Sample_Map_GR bmp where GR indicates that the image will be georeferenced Save to continue The Georeference window will appear as shown below Pi er Edi ptima QA 2 65 48040 e A In order to map the pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have at least two georeference points with known coordinates A third georeference point can be used to improve accuracy However for demonstration purpose only two points will be used in this guide These georeference points must be assigned a
460. om the Station List load the Station Data and view the Geologic Description Lithology table An example for BH10 1s shown below Data Management 53 HydroGeo Analyst SampleProject C Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject 18 x Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help Jee P g AAhtxBaAl ROOF BOS Sea ln wi Station Groups J Station List BP Data Query Station Data a Project Data Category J E Station Data Cea DEESA 7 Select Station X m Y m Elevation m TOC m E Description g Hid 535369 60 4814739 10 347 00 348 00 E Geologic Descr E Well Constructii Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features E Sal Testing soil_type Descriptic Consister Structure ASTMDe Color Odor formation formation moisture corr Soil Sampling Pim Ez Monitoring Evel Coarse Gravel y Coarse Grav ES Mining Exploral j Clay Silty clay S Geophysics Fine Sand Fine sand E Well History j y Silt gt Silty clay EA Queries E 73 50 i Sand y Silty to Fine 77 Crosstab 2 Maps Cross Sections 2 Reports 3DView 1 Bl Borehole Logs Plots Loading options Load All Incremental Total 21 selected 0 x Geologic Description j Since the data was imported directly to the SQL Server database it is not necessary to Post Save the changes In the
461. om the toolbar The designer window should appear as shown in the figure below Creating Reports with Charts 433 New Report HECEECAIIAA Ae Ea Il If I O Re BEEDLE EME BOCA o SRE rea E eegee A A A A A A O perty ToolBow i E B MainReport Detail H PageHeader 3 Litt Detail H 5 PageFooter z Name Detail BackColor BackStyle O ddBKTrar CanGrow True CanShrink False ColumnCo 1 Lere eE EE Column 0 Downer ColumnSp 0 height 223 KeepToge False NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Visible True For display purposes 1t will be advantageous to add a group header to group the data by station name To do this Right click on Detail in the report design window as circled in the image above A pop up menu will appear Insert Group Header Footer A new Group Header and Group Footer will appear in the Report Designer window GroupHeader1 in the report design window E Properties button from the toolbar The Property Toolbox frame will appear as shown below 434 Chapter 11 The Report Editor New Report El Y fie O AAA Do cer E B MainReport H PageHeader H GroupHeaderl H Detail H GroupFooter1 a PageFooter E GroupHeaderl le sa si J S Ree 4 Ze E RN 4 E ea e GroupHeader 1 Name GroupHeader1 BackColor BackStyle 0 ddBKTrar CanGrow True CanShrink False A URGE i U height KeepToge False NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Repeat 0 None U
462. ome gaps where polygons do not completely touch adjacent polygons this can be easily fixed by selecting a vertex on a polygon and using the pointer tool to re 344 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor position the vertex Alternately gaps between polygons can be filled by using the Link Vertex option These options are explained below Once a layer is created in one cross section 1t will be available for selection in all other cross sections that you might have for your project Altering the properties of a given layer will be reflected in all cross sections Editing Layers Once the interpretation layers are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or fill in the gaps between any two adjacent layers to create a continuous layered structure To move a vertex e Select the pointer tool from the toolbar e Click on one of the vertices of the polygon e Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex e Select the pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the polygon to activate the object e Select the 4 Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Geologic interpretation layers can have a free form and do not have to conform to a conceptual model e g a sand layer may appear more than once in an individual cross section L
463. on as shown in the figure below Statistics x Field ELEVATION Count fie Masinnum 346 000 Binaria 3320000 Sum 6103 0000 Mean 239 0556 Std Deviation EE OF 278 Chapter 8 Map Manager Renderer Provides options for a Map Renderer The Map Renderer allows assigning labels to objects on the map layers B g rx wp Background Symbo IY Show Background O E Cancel A new Renderer may be added by clicking on the H Add button The following dialog will appear with the available Renderers from which you can select Renderer Type x Typ C Value Renderer Label Renderer OF Cancel e The Graduated Renderer provides a way of classifying features into categories or classes by drawing different symbols for features based on numeric attribute values and their ranges e The Value Renderer provides a means of representing features of a map layer by drawing a symbol for each unique data value e The Label Renderer can be used to display labels on contour maps or to place labels on stations or any other object Select the desired type and click OK For each Renderer type there is a corresponding settings dialog which is launched automatically when you create a new renderer this can also be loaded by selecting the Edit button after selecting the renderer you wish to change Description of Menu Items 279 Graduated Renderer Graduated Renderer allows you to graphically displa
464. on of the problem including a summary of key strokes and program event or a Screen capture showing the error message where applicable e Product name and version number e Product serial number e Computer make and model number e Operating system and version number e Total free RAM e Number of free bytes on your hard disk e Software installation directory e Directory location for your current project files You may send us your questions via e mail fax or call one of our technical support specialists Please allow up to two business days for a response Technical support is available 8 00 am to 5 00 pm EST Monday to Friday excluding Canadian holidays Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws support slb com Training and Consulting Services Schlumberger Water Services offers numerous high quality training courses globally Our courses are designed to provide a rapid introduction to essential knowledge and skills and create a basis for further professional development and real world practice Open enrollment courses are offered worldwide each year For the current schedule of courses visit www swstechnology com training or e mail us at sws training slb com Schlumberger Water Services also offers expert consulting and peer reviewing services for data management groundwater modeling aqueous geochemical analysis and pumping test analysis For further information please contact sws services slb com
465. ons into Hydrogeologic Interpretations A hydrostratigraphic unit will generally include one or several geologic layers and the boundaries of a hydrostratigraphic unit will usually conform with the boundaries of the geologic layers As such you can copy one or more of your geologic interpretation layers and use them as a startup for hydrogeologic interpretation layers To do so e Select the Hydrogeology option from the Layer Manager to make this layer visible e Right mouse click on this interpretation layer and select Copy from Geologic Layers and the following dialog will appear Select the Layers to Copy Bedrock ok Cancel EJ Help e In this dialog select one or more geologic interpretation layers to copy e For each layer to be copied provide the name pattern and description of the 346 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor corresponding hydrogeologic interpretation layer Aquifer or Aquitard Once this is complete the cross section editor draws the selected hydrogeologic interpretation layers 9 4 4 Model Layer Interpretations This option allows for defining the unique model layers Model Layer 1 Model Layer 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers can be used for numerical groundwater flow models or for general purposes The layer positions for model layers must be drawn in manually with the mouse using the Line tool Defining Model Layers Before drawing model layers the layer attributes must first
466. ontrol mainly uses the connection string and SQL statement as its input to provide access to the data stored in your project s database Currently HydroGeo Analyst provides basic inputs for this control However advanced users may want to modify these inputs in order to produce advanced reports that are supported by the Report Editor One interesting feature provided by the Report Editor is that of generating a report based on specific values For example a report that displays chemical data for all stations can be modified to only generate reports for a given station and or chemical Report Designer Window 409 The SQL statement is usually composed of the following four parts SELECT Field1 Field2 Field3 FROM Table Name WHERE Condition AND OR Condition2 ORDER BY Field Field2 Field3 where the highlighted words are internal to the SQL language and the terms in the brackets are optional To modify the data source information of the ADO control in your report e select the ADO control by clicking on the appropriate icon on the toolbar e Display the Properties explorer window if it is not already visible e Select the Custom properties option by clicking on the button next to this item e A dialog will appear Provide or modify the desired options 11 3 Report Preview Window 410 The Viewer allows you to visualize the final report as 1t would be printed It can be considered a print preview of your reports O
467. ools gt Open Static Report Opens a previously saved static report Save Static Report Saves the current report in the Report Editor s native format 6 Export Report Exports the current report to the desired format K Report Designer Displays the Report Designer window be Print Report Sends the current report to printer Show TOC Displays the table of contents for the current report Report Preview Window 411 JA Li Show Ruler Displays a ruler ay Search Text Allows you to provide text to search for t Find Text Searches for text provided in the Search Text text box Copy Page Copies the current page to windows clipboard Show Single Page Displays report one page at a time de Show Multiple Pages Displays multiple pages of the report at once 5 Zoom in Zooms in to a selected area of the report 100 Zoom in percent Sets the zoom level to that selected in here r Zoom out Zooms out the report El First Page Moves to the first page of the report a Previous Page Moves to the previous page in the report 2 3 Page Moves to the page specified in this text box Next Page Moves to the next page in the report E Last Page Moves to the last page in the document m Back Moves back to the previous page in a list of recently accessed pages 412 Chapter 11 The Report Editor H Forward Moves forward to the next page in a list of recently accessed pages 11 3 2 Using the Report Viewer On
468. or M Color M Odor IV formation_name IV formation_unit V moisture Y comment M Chemicals Result_Values Result_Units H V Hydrogeology H Modelling H V features Well Construction 4 Soil Testing 4 Soil Sampling 4 Monitoring Event 4 Mining Exploration Fx24QE l 4 A Last Change 06 18 2004 2 44 34 PM x 3 ad 10 x Use as project default Linked Fields Settings Description Database settings Value field name Unit field name Unit category Parameter field name Chemicals z Result_Values View settings Parameter field name Value field name Unit field name Default value Data format Default unit Chemicals Result_Values Result_Units I Get names from list Close EJ Help e The names of one or more fields involved in the linked fields set A new database template may be created during the project creation phase using the Project Wizard The new template will contain only the Stations table The template can be further enhanced using the procedures listed above It is not possible to create a new The default unit A default value Data display format An option to link the first field in a three field linked fields to a list 5 4 Managing Templates 5 4 1 Creating a new template blank template using the Template Manager Once a project is crea
469. ore details In the Set Features dialog there are several options e Name Name of the intersecting layer read only e Visible Defines if the element is visible or not e Field Allows you to select a field to use as a label for the intersecting feature e Symbol Allows you to select a symbol to represent the intersecting feature e Label Allows you to set properties of the label representing the intersecting feature The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view Double click on the desired cell in the Symbol column to load the dialog where a symbol can be selected and its properties set Point Style xl Pattern rs ld Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x Fil Boder T Sample x OF Cancel NOTE You will only be able to change the Font and Symbol of the point 1f the Pattern is set to True type The Label Properties dialog may be loaded by selecting the button the properties that are available are shown below Description of Menu Items 327 Label Renderer Font Angle 45 Vertical Alignment Horizontal Aligment Left i a OF Cancel Change Well Width Provides options for increasing the display width of stations wells and boreholes plotted on the cross section Change Well Width a X OK Cancel 53 Help You can change well width as it appears on the scree
470. ore entities This provides an unparalleled flexibility for projects that may have variable needs For example the project database structure may need to satisfy requirements of the United States 8 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Environmental Protection Agency US EPA or Ontario s Ministry of the Environment MOE For these and many other needs HydroGeo Analyst comes with a number of customizable templates implementing various commonly used database structures These structures include e Ontario s Ministry of Environment Water Well Information System MOE W WIS Metric Units e Ontario s Ministry of Environment Water Well Information System MOE WWIS Imperial Units e Generic Environmental Metric e Generic Environmental Imperial e US E P A Region 2 Metric e US E P A Region 2 Imperial e US E P A Region 5 Metric e US E P A Region 5 Imperial These templates also include commonly used and customizable data queries and report templates Template Manager If your database needs cannot be satisfied through one of the database templates that are provided with HGA you may use the Template Manager to create and customize your own database structure The Template Manager is provided to handle such tasks as creating editing and importing database schemas for your project databases It provides a set of categories that allows organizing your database tables Existing database structures can al
471. ore proceeding close the 3D Explorer s File gt Exit from the main menu 2 7 Preparing Reports The Reporting component included with the HydroGeo Analyst package allows for creating reports containing any data from the database in addition to charts maps cross sections and 3D views 2 7 1 Creating Data Reports from Grids Select any grid then press the print button on the toolbar If a template is available there will be a prompt to select a template For example 1f you want to print the station list E Station List tab er a Print button from the toolbar A print template may be selected 1f esired OK This will load the Report Viewer An example is shown below Preparing Reports 97 98 New Report a Contents M Company Name Station List Address Project Waterloo Investigation Contact Info Location Waterloo ON Date January 1 2004 valet a6 epa 308 o lema soss sao oa al A A SS lene soss eel wos as po lem ss esar HOB al alma sss 4548 HO L alao soss ese oa l s S Print button once again to print the contents as is or view the eport Designer to change the report format Please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor for more details on printing and modifying reports This concludes Chapter 2 Getting Started Feel free to experiment with many of the features that HydroGeo Analyst has to offer which have not been covered in this chapter To e
472. orm the same function by pressing the E Add button in the toolbar or right clicking on the grid and choosing Add HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 127 128 If the record being added is a new station the new station will always be added to the Project Station Group and will also be added to any station group that is active and selected at the time After a record has been added to the grid the changes should be saved using either the Ta Post Data button in the toolbar or the Post menu item in the Records menu Delete Use the Delete option to delete the selected record s from a grid A station record may be deleted from the Stations List or a data record row may be deleted from the selected grid in any of the data categories The x Delete button in the toolbar performs the same function NOTE Use caution when deleting stations from the Project station group as they will be permanently deleted from the database Duplicate Post Use the Duplicate option to create a duplicate of the selected record in the active grid the new duplicated record will be added to the last row of the grid This can be used to quickly copy existing records and make minor modifications After the new record has been added to the grid the changes should be saved using the 2 Post Data button in the toolbar or the Post menu item in the Records menu The Records Post item saves all changes made in a grid to the database The Post item is
473. ormation on the screen type material e ParentID use this option to define what casing each screen belongs to You must select a field from the screen table that is field type double and contains values for casing ID in most cases select the Casing ID BHLP Columns 461 Lithology xi E BHLP Well Constructio ES well Construction I Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology water level Reduc_4 pon p R Fn Borde e Show Width f el Calor Help Apply OF Cancel The Appearance frame allows you to change the position of the lithology images layers within the cell construction column Choose from Right Left Both on each side of the well drilling The Border frame allows you to define the lithology border settings You can set the visibility using the Show checkbox change the width of the border using the Width vertical scroll boxes 0 10 and change the color of the border using the color box Water Level xi E BHLP Well Constructia Ens ES Well Construction e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc Symbols Data Labels Appearance Water level position for multicasing Inside Use Marker i Use Fort Size 10 Chace Style HZH Line Color E Fill Color Font Char Map Help Apply OF Cancel The Symbols tab allows you to define the symbol to repre
474. ory y Screen Diameter Construction y Water Level History y Borehole Diametr Construction y Elevation Description Y required information Analyze Cancel Help In the first tab define the project units you would like to use for AquiferTest and populate the Pumping Test information HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 139 140 LIT lolx AquiferTest Settings Pumping Wels Pumping Rate Observation wells Data Source Wells Location and Construction pumping_rates is Data map Required Data Match to Field Multiplier Name X _ x co ordinate Y co ordinate Screen Diameter Borehole Diameter Elevation y 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw required information Analyze Cancel Help In the Pumping Wells tab select the data query that contains the required fields for this module for your pumping test analysis Then in the grid below map the appropriate field to each required field If the unit for the field is defined in the database template then the unit will be automatically populated Otherwise this will be left blank If needed you can manually enter a conversion factor to convert the data from the HGA source to the AquiferTest project target units NOTE For station X Y co ordinates the AquiferTest project units must
475. ose from available plot templates that were created using the chart component For details on how to create plot templates please see Chapter 14 Saving Plot as Template In order to display the plot in the map the following requirements in the template must be met e Plot Grouping and Series Grouping must be done by station ID e The plot template must contain data for the selected stations The remaining settings for the plot are similar to those described in the sections Choose Data tab below Tabular For a tabular display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear Data Settings x Fields Condition Choose Data Layer Fields Display Fields ID Ok Cancel H Help In the Data Settings dialog you select which Layer Fields from the layer should appear as Display Fields in the layout table as well as define the Display settings Select the desired fields from the left panel under Layer Fields then move fields to the Display Fields under the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the Chapter 8 Map Manager gt gt button To remove fields from the Display Fields click on the lt or lt lt buttons respectively Use the 1 button to move the selected field up Use the JL button to move the selected field down Click on the Condition tab and you will see options for defining validation rules for one of the selected fields along with display
476. ose the dialog HINT Be sure to keep your password in a safe place as 1t will be needed each time the project is accessed Set Passwords The administrator may also set passwords for various users in the project To load this setting e From the main UALM window select one user under the Users node in the tree view e Click on the Set Password button The following dialog will appear User Access Level Management 165 Mew pazzword Confirm pazzword OF Cancel Enter the New Password in the first line Confirm the new password in the second line Click OK when you are finished to apply the new password and close the dialog NOTE If an administrator password is lost it cannot be retrieved You are recommended to keep the project administrator password in a safe place or to create multiple project administrators for multiple users for both the projects and on an application level as a backup 4 1 6 Exporting PLSD Once you have defined a security document for a project users user groups access rights these are saved to the project database These settings can be re used in future projects by exporting the current database template Upon exporting the PLSD will be saved and will be included in new projects created with this specific database template For more details on exporting database templates see Chapter 5 Exporting the current template as a Database template 4 2 Using the
477. oss section are based e g Boreholes must be set to Visible in the Layer Control The cross section can then be created as follows e Select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the Main Menu or click on the Cross Section button H on the toolbar Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used for the cross section name Use Existing Polyline You can create a cross section line from an existing polyline layer To do so follow the steps below e Right click the desired line segment and select Convert to Cross Section Line from the pop up menu 314 Chapter 8 Map Manager CrossSection Line Ea Hame ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here OF Cancel e Specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected out perpendicular to the cross section line e Click Ok to accept the line settings The Select Station Layer dialog will display e Select the appropriate station layer from the dropdown list box and click Ok Select Station Layer Ea Select Station Layer OF Cancel e The following message will display Confirm NS Y Do ou Want to create cross s
478. ould be used in the crosstab report e Style Sheet Specify the style settings for the crosstab report Each tab is described in detail below 242 Chapter 7 Queries Layout The layout tab consists of a Source field list which contains all the fields from your data query There are also four DataCube fields Inactive Fields X dimension Fields rows Y dimension fields columns and Facts fields X Dimension Fields are the fields selected from a data source or created by a user for column dimension formation Y Dimension Fields are the fields selected from the source field list or created by the user for row dimension formation Facts fields are those fields that will be used to produce the values in the pivot table cells Fact fields can be selected from the source field list or created by the user Inactive fields will appear as headers in your crosstab report but will not affect pivot table formation Use these headers to apply filters to your crosstab data You can organize the crosstab report by dragging fields from the Source field list and dropping them into the DataCube fields where they will appear in the view at runtime Multiple source fields can be added to any frame You can modify each field list using the following buttons Move a field up one position in the list Move a field down one position in the list Add a field to the list Delete a field from the list x gt Field Property Editor You can change
479. ows into columns or from columns into rows Right click on a field header to access additional options These options are contextual and affect only the field that was selected e Accent Sort results in ascending order e Decent Sort results in descending order e Collapse All Collapse the view e Expand All Expand the view Align Field Width Automatically align a field width to the widest display value within the field e Move to facts Move a field into facts e Move to rows Move a field into the rows dimension e Move to columns Move a field into columns dimension e Move to ignore Ungroup a field from pivot table calculation e Group settings Open the Groups Editor widow see below Chapter 7 Queries Groups Editor The Groups Editor window shown below allows you to combine multiple field items and display them as a single field item in the cross tab report For example if your crosstab report contains a countries field you may wish to group its field items by continent e g North America Europe South America etc E Groups editor l x Group settings lems El Europe France gt Germany United Kingdom E North America Camada south merica United States i Brazil Add Edit Delete Clear To create a group e Click the Add button to insert a new group item The group item will appear as a tree node under the Groups frame Here you can specify a group name e From the Ite
480. owser Options Clicking the Options button will load the Plume Browser Options window as shown below Animation Properties X Rotate Time Plume Browser Humber of steps 20 Start value 5 jo Finish value 32 100 Animate in selected interval Cancel The Number of steps value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or 1t may be decreased to make the browsing proceed faster The Start value indicates the value at which the browser will begin must be a value gt 0 The Finish value indicates the value at which the browser will end must be lt 100 The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish values Recording Animation to AVI file HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer supports recording any animation rotation plume animation over time isosurface or color map spanning to an AVI file for playback during presentations and demonstration using any compatible AVI file player 364 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer To record the AVI locate the Record button in the lower right corner of the window Click on this button and a Video settings window will appear as shown in the following figure a Yideo settings El E 2 x Custom frame size Awl File name A Projects a0 SH G430 1 yl pe Frame size Full window size Compression Full Frames Uncompressed Height 240 Frames per second i 0
481. ox The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the pattern modify the Width and change the Image Draw Mode The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose to display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box BHLP Columns 455 Please refer to the Depth Point Based Column page 450 section for more information on this option 12 2 4 Lithology Column 456 The Lithology column is specifically designed to display geologic formation details It allows the use of soil lithologic patterns together with an optional description for each formation To add a Lithology column click the P Add button and select Lithology from the combo box provided A new Lithology column will be added In the Designer tree expand the Lithology node and select LithologyEntities Using the combo boxes provided select the data table top bottom image and text entities Lithology column is a specialized version of the Interval column which is described on page 454 Settings The Lithology column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Lithology node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Settings xj F Visible Column Options Border Line isibilit
482. p A table can be created based on any one of the provided data table types depending on the nature of the data to be stored in the table Working With the Template Manager 189 Template Editor Demo a E 10 x environmental _june30c y T y m I Use as project default M Database structure Table Settings Descriptions MV Description aeae D 4 Geologic Description AS IM Table name jitholoy Table type IV from Global F to Example Global Time Depth Interval from_ to_ Param 3 Param 4 Param 5 Pararr Y Description Examination Event Y soil_type 2 0 0 JV Pattern 0 70 35 210 Monitoring Point IV Consistency Depth Point l IV Structure l description Monitoring Point M ASTM Descriptor Examination Event 4 Color z Y Odor CT able relationships IV formation_name Table is parent to 4 formation_unit Primary key Table Foreign key V moisture from_ 5 Y comment to_ V Hydrogeology 4 Modelling IV features Well Construction Primary key Soil Testing Soil Sampling IV Monitoring Event IV Mining Exploration V Geophysics M Well History View settings MT User Category sl N lithology tX AVES ame gy Last Change 06 30 2004 1 31 40 PM fe Help Table is child to KIKI KI H E Fe
483. p the color shade layer onto the Boreholes layer Disable the SiteMap_gr bmp layer by unchecking its visibility checkbox When used with contour lines the color shade map layer allows you to easily visualize detailed information about the surface elevation in our area of study shown below Mapping the Data 87 2 5 5 Defining Cross Section Lines 88 The Map Manager also provides an interface for drawing and defining the locations of cross sectional lines Since the Map Manager provides a plan view of station data it is a simple task to draw lines in the location s of the desired cross section s Cross Section lines are defined using the CrossSection Line option A line is drawn through the desired stations then a buffer distance is provided to specify which stations to include A large buffer distance will result in selecting stations further away from the line a small buffer distance means that only stations close to the line will be selected Only the stations within this buffer distance become highlighted and selected for the cross section interpretation The cross section may then be created using these selected Stations An example is provided below on how to define a cross section line in the Map Manager Before proceeding hide the ContourMap as it will no longer be needed ContourMap layer from the Layer Manager panel Remove the check mark for the Visible status for this layer This layer will now be hidden from
484. pective of the entire site through its ability to display multiple cross sections simultaneously this perspective is not possible when viewing individual 2D cross sections The 3D Explorer in addition to displaying fence diagrams can also be used to display surfaces for each layer involved in the interpretation For example a surface depicting static groundwater elevations over the site can be created and displayed in the 3D Explorer Use the 3D Explorer to import basemaps or shapefiles containing any type of data and relate this to the cross section interpretations For example a contour map or DXF site map may be draped or overlain on top of multiple fence diagrams Finally use the AVI recording tools to record the auto rotation of the 3D fence diagrams for presentation purposes About HydroGeo Analyst 1 1 2 4 Reporting and Printing Report Designer HydroGeo Analyst features a state of the art report generation tool that is equipped with a robust and easy to use runtime designer A Report Wizard provides steps to simplify the report creation process the results are high quality and professional reports containing company headers footers and company logos Reports can contain images and data from any module Map views cross section views 3D views data grids query results charts etc The final reports can be printed or saved in a number of formats including PDF HTML RTF XLS TIF or TXT as well as in a binary format Repor
485. pitation and Temper ature Flood hazards USDA Office Information Profile OIP Applied Conser vation Practices Water Control Infrastructure National Inventory of Dams Grand River Conservation Authority http www grandriver ca index document cfm Sec 63 amp Sub1l 16 amp sub2 0 Data GRCA data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage Grand River Watershed Datum NAD83 Layer Airphoto Topographic and Thematic Data Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 541 542 Ministry of Energy Mines and Petroleum Resources BC http www em gov bc ca Mining Geolsurv MapPlace geoData htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage British Columbia Datum NAD83 and either BC Albers or Geographic Decimal Degrees Layer Geology Geochemistry Canadian Council on Geomatics http www geobase ca geobase en index html Data Geobase Format Shapefile and raster Geographic Coverage Canada Datum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries DEM Geodetic Network Landsat National Road Network Ministry of Sustainable Resource Management BC http srmwww gov bc ca gis arcftp html Data Warehouse Format Coverage Raster Geographic Coverage British Columbia Layer Administrative Boundaries Hydrology Forest and more Alberta Geological Survey http www ags gov ab ca mapserver map236 download download_gis htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum
486. pleD ate Parameter Names Parameter Parameter Values Value Parameter Identification Information ParameterlNfo Units Units Unit Conversion Factors Quality Code Identifiers QualityCode Detection Limit Lelslelelelelelelelels Required for Lab Quality validation Help Cancel A From the Select and configure a template window select from the list of Lab Quality Templates Once a template has been selected the Template Description field will be completed with the description entered when the template was created The next step is to map the fields in your data query to the fields required by the QC component 13 3 1 Mapping Fields In the Data Source frame the Data Entity must be matched to the Data Source for all required fields required fields are marked with a and are also listed in previous section In most cases HGA will be able to automatically detect and map the fields however if you have created custom fields or renamed existing fields in your database structure you may need to browse through the list and select the appropriate Data Source in your project using the pull down menus that corresponds with a Data Entity NOTE A field in your query must be mapped to each of the required fields as listed above see the section Data Requirements on page 487 for more details 13 4 Generate QC Results Once all required fields have been matched in the template the OK button will b
487. plotted data points with a value less than this specified filter value will be hidden from the plots when the filter is active Title Enter a Title for the plot Legend The following Legend settings are available Visible Show hide the legend Alignment Set the Legend position choose from the following options e Top e Bottom e Left e Right 508 Chapter 14 Plotting Style Controls what data elements or series appear in the Legend choose from the following options e Automatic e Series Names e Series Values e Last Values e Palette Vertical space Controls the amount of vertical space between each data element in the legend higher values will result in more space between each item in the legend Inverted Legend Use this property to reverse the order of items in the legend For example items in the order A B C will be inverted to the order C B A when this property is selected Check boxes visible Use this property to display a check box beside each item in the legend when active you can then use the Legend check boxes to show hide which data series are visible on the plot Font series color visible Controls the font color for the text in the legend Vertical Y Axis Plot Settings Pen width Controls the thickness of the axis line Visible Shows hides the axis on the plot Log scale Plots the axis values using a logarithmic scale Max value Controls the maximum value for the axis By default this
488. port Data This menu item will load the DTS with an option to export data from any grid to one of the following file formats e Text CSV TXT ASC TAB e Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as MS Access Database MDB For more details on this utility please see the DTS section in Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Export Grid All HydroGeo Analyst data that can be displayed in any of the grids can be exported to a number of external destinations The data could be a station list from any station group a result of a query execution or any data from the data entry tabs HydroGeo Analyst allows exporting data displayed in grids to various output formats including e Comma separated text file CSV e Extensible Markup Language XML e MS Access Database MDB e ESRI shapefile SHP e Hypertext Markup Language HTM All or part of the data currently displayed in a grid can be exported To export selected data from a grid the data must first be selected Data selection can be performed by either selecting desired rows or using the tools provided in HydroGeo Analyst These tools include those that are used to filter data such as Filter By Selection and Hide selected rows The selected data can then be exported by either selecting the Export option from the Project menu or by right clicking in the grid and selecting the Export pop up menu Chap
489. port Project Creates a copy of all layers in the current map project for use in other applications Export Map Project 7 E x Map Layers Surface M Select Al Map Layer Layer Type Export as Sample Map GA brmnp Raster Sample Map GA brmnp al alme bmp Raster alme bmp e intro db CAD intro dxf e contour Line contour m All Stations Point All Stations al CrossSectonLined Line CrossSechonLine5 al Boreholes Point Boreholes W AmPhoto_Eolor_gr bmp Raster AmPhoto_Color_gr bmp e Water Courses Line Water Courses al Airports 1 Point Airports 1 e Major Railroad Line Major Railroad al Urban Areas Polwgor Urban Areas W Trees Polwgor Trees W Grasslands Polwgor Grasslands al Croplands Polwgor Cropland a Destination Folder D stemp Ej e Export using current map project s coordinate system Export Cancel H Help In this dialog select the layers you with to export and define names for the layers the same can be done for Surfaces if any are available Finally specify the Destination Folder for the copy of the map files On exporting a map project selected shapefiles will be exported in the current projection system if selected by the user Raster images will use the projection system at the time the image was georeferenced Export Map Provides options for exporting the current map view to a Raster Image file Supported file types include Bitmaps BMP JPEGs jpg and Enhanced Meta Files D
490. pot Format e00 format coverage Geographic Coverage Each Country USA each State and County Layer DEM NWI DLG LU LC and TIGER are available for free United States Geological Survey http seamless usgs gov Data GIS Data Warehouse Format Geographic Coverage World each country USA any scale and seamless Datum NAD83 Layer US National Elevation Dataset up to 10 M National Land Cover Dataset High Resolution Orthoimagery Layer extent Transportation Bound aries Hydrography Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 539 540 Florida Department of Environment Protection ftp 1 ftp dep state fl us pub gis data Data GIS Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Florida Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum Layer Environmental Data Basemap Data Global Forest Watch Canada Warehouse http www globalforestwatch ca datawarehouse datawarehouse htm Data GIS Format Shapefile GRID XLS Geographic Coverage Canada Datum North American Datum of 1927 Layer Forest related data basemap data GeoPlan Center University of Florida http www fedl org Data Florida Geographic Data Library FGDL Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Floridawide and County Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum Layer Various St Johns River Water Management District http sjr state fl us programs data html Data GIS data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage St
491. pted Note that only data with a warning message may be accepted Erroneous records will not be accepted for importing unless the errors are fixed The values that cause the errors are highlighted in different colors Records shaded red indicate Errors that must be addressed before the Import can continue Records shaded yellow indicate a Warning or Caution with a corresponding message To accept the posted warning messages and import these records select the items and click the Ae Accept button To reject the posted warning messages and ignore these records from the import select these items and click on the xl Reject button To view the error report click on the Display log file button Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the preview window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the Pa Accept button To reject the selected records click on the xl Reject button Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below Information a O records were updated and 1 44 records were inserted Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System If all desired data transfer operations are done the DTS can be closed by clicking on the Close button If however that is not the case the Back button can be sele
492. pter 9 Cross Section Editor 132 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst 3D Interpolation HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer is now able to display and animate 3D volumetric plumes of one or more soil or groundwater contaminants The plume is generated using the 3D Interpolator tool then displayed with the 3D Explorer The following section describes how to interpolate 3D points data in order to create 3D plumes for details on viewing the plume see Chapter 10 Plumes Display Settings The 3D Plume generation starts with a data set the data set must be generated by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the 3D Interpolation The following are required fields for the 3D interpolation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e X e Y e Z elevation of sampling point e Value concentration value for one or more contaminants e Sample Date if transient plume display is desired Once you have created a data query you may create a 3D Interpolated volume plume of the data To access the 3D Interpolation tools select Tools 3D Interpolation from the main menu and the following dialog will appear 3D Interpolation f l Ioj x 30 Plume Project Hame tce_exceeds_1 0 mo_per_kg Grid Region A of Nodes Min 535231 0 Has 535680 0 E E 40 535231 O 535680 0 Y of Nodes Min 48
493. r and environmental industry including Natural Neighbor Inverse Distance Kriging and Bilinear GW Contour is designed for contouring surface or water levels contaminant concentrations or other spatial data X1X UnSat Suite Plus UnSat Suite Plus seamlessly integrates multiple one dimensional unsaturated zone flow and solute transport models into a single intuitive working environment Models include SESOIL VS2DT VLEACH PESTAN Visual HELP and the International Weather Generator The combination of models offers users the ability for simulating the downward vertical flow of water and the migration of dissolved contaminants through the vadose zone UnSat Suite Plus includes tools for project management generating synthetic weather data modeling flow and contaminants through the unsaturated zone estimating groundwater recharge and contaminant loading rates and preparing compliance reports Visual HELP Visual HELP is a one dimensional unsaturated zone flow modeling application built for optimizing the hydrologic design of municipal landfills Visual HELP is based on the US E P A HELP model Hydrologic Evaluation of Landfill Performance and has been integrated into a 32 Bit Windows application It combines the International Weather Generator Landfill Profile Designer and Report Editor Applications include designing landfill profiles predicting leachate mounding and evaluating potential leachate seepage to the groundwater Visual
494. r filling monitoring points casing materials well dimensions etc e Soil Testing e g SPT pocket penetrometer vane shear test dynamic cone Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Soil Sampling e g Rock Coring Soil Chemistry results Soil Vapor Moisture Content Particle Size Distribution Atterberg Standard Proctor Unconfined Compression Direct Shear Odometer Consolidation e Monitoring Events e g weather conditions bailing field properties water quality groundwater levels groundwater chemistry e Mining Exploration e g Alteration Mineralization Structure Samples Down Hole Survey Down Hole Geophysics e Geophysics e g Conditions Gamma Neutron 64 in E log 16 in E log Density e Well History e g Pumping Rate Pump Screens Top of Casing status e User Defined Category All of the above data categories may be renamed and used differently if desired For example the category named Geology could be renamed to Surface Water and tables such as Catchments Surface Water Monitoring Locations Rivers etc could be organized under it Placing tables under any one of these categories does not have any effect on how the tables are stored in the database 3 1 2 Data Entry There are two locations in HydroGeo Analyst where data can be manually entered and or edited the Station List and the Station Data tabs If the source data is available in a text file spreadsheet XLS or database the data may be impor
495. r map will clipped above the Upper limit and below the Lower limit e Semitransparent sets the color map as semi transparent e Slice field contains a link to the Slice options see Creating Slices and Cross Sections on page 386 below for more details Isoline Maps Isoline Contour maps are a set of lines plotted on a surface whereby each line is connected by a set of points having equal values of a given data type Creating Isoline Maps To create a Isoline map click on the desired element in the Model tree and then right click on the element and select the Add Isolines map option from the pop up menu Alternately contour lines may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create contour map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window with a list of the available surfaces slices The contour map for the selected model element can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines Display Settings 379 380 m Select create slices l ioj xj Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices and Cross Sec
496. r the installation and software registration NOTE If the installation interface fails to load automatically you can e Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the CD ROM drive e Open the Installation folder e Double click on the installation file to initiate the installation Please follow the installation instructions and read the on screen directions carefully Although the HydroGeo Analyst Software needs to be installed on a local hard drive the location of the database will depend on e the expected size of the data e the number of anticipated users and e data and system security SQL Server 2005 Express can be installed on your hard drive as part of the installation process If the WHI SQL Express 1s installed it will be setup as the default database server SQL Server 2005 Express is a database engine built and based on core SQL Server technology NOTE Previous versions of HGA have used Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine MSDE as their main SQL Server Engine If you are upgrading from MSDE to the Microsoft SQL Express please consider the following limitations when working with backup database files e You cannot open a backup database created by MSDE in a HGA environment that 1s using SQL Server Express e Likewise you cannot restore a HGA project that is using SQL Server Express with a backup database that was created with MSDE If you have used MSDE in the past and would like to continue using it simply do not ins
497. r the new Destination Data Category soil_samples for the new Destination table Under Source Table Data Management 55 56 Sheet1 if it is not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the field names in the source are identical to the field names in the destination However the station_name field must be manually mapped and the units must still be selected for the length field types m for the units for the from_ and to_ fields Use for both these fields Under the Source first row in the table Station_name from the combo box Next to continue Yes to continue in the warning message that appears The next window is Data Validation If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one shown below Data Transfer System Import pi 0 x Step 4 Data Validation Errors Warnings Description Field Name of records Preview X Y __ Rowld station sys_sample_code start_depth i AA 1 BH1_10 10 2002_6 4 6 4 1 BH1_10 10 2002_10 9 10 9 Note 1 BH1_10 10 2002_15 9 15 9 The preview shows how your data will be 1 BH1_10 10 2002_24 4 24 4 1 8H1710 10 2002_26 9 26 9 ee 2 BH2_10 10 2002_14 7 14 7 This step allows you to accept reject 2 BH2_10 10 2002_19 2 19 2 records with warnings by selecting the 2 BH2_10 10 2002_24 2 24 2 warning
498. ra arquivos AE Yun Driver do Microsoft Access mdb Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Driver do Microsoft Excell xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf hdieroeokt AJA seo WER Crier 12 ARFI Advanced a 4 4 Back Cancel e Select the ODBC driver format In this example select Microsoft Excel Driver as shown below Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 523 Create New Data Source Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase YFP Driver dbf Microsoft dB ase T reiber dbf Microsoft Excel Driver xls Microsoft Excel Treiber xls Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf Microsoft FoxPro WFF Driver dbf hairs FR ODR ort irac DataSourceName e In this dialog enter a name for the new Data Source in the Name field e Click Next to proceed 524 Appendices Create New Data Source x When pou click Finish you will create the data source which You have just configured The driver may prompt you for more Information File Data Source Filename DataSource ame Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls Te i Cancel e This dialog displays a summary of the data source information e Click Finish to close the dialog and the following ODBC Setup dialog wi
499. range e Click on the Delete button to delete the selected range When you add a new Range enter the Breaking Value this is the upper limit for the range For the example shown in the screenshot above there will be two ranges e Within guidelines Values O 100 inclusive will have unique symbol and label properties e Exceedences Values greater than 100 to 120 inclusive will have a different set of symbol and label properties so they can easily be distinguished on the plot The Labels provides options for the data series labels Text Select the Font Color and Alignment options for the text Custom There are several options available for defining custom label Use different label source allows you to select a field from the list for the labels from a list 511 512 Include pre fix provides the option to attach a text string in front of each label Include post fix provides the option to attach a text string at the end of each label NOTE If the Label options are inactive you must set the Labels to Visible load the General Series Settings and enable the Labels Visible option As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series labels will appear using the selected settings When you are finished with the Label options you can click on the Symbol tab to modify the symbol options as shown in the screenshot below Mark
500. rch option default is Down e Click Find Next The first record matching this criteria will be selected and highlighted in the grid The Find button in the toolbar performs the same function The View menu provides options for changing the appearance of the HydroGeo Analyst window by showing hiding selected grid columns and showing hiding the interface components Project Browser Hides or displays the Project Browser Well Profile Displays the Well Profile Viewer The Well profile 1s a borehole log plot BHLP viewer integrated into the Station List grid Select any BHLP template that 1s created and select a station from the Station List The i button in the toolbar performs the same function To hide the Well Profile Viewer click View on the menu bar and then select Well Profile Hide Selected Columns When this menu item is selected any columns that are selected in a grid will be hidden from the current view This can be useful for focusing on a selected criteria for a Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst selected group of stations This item is only available if one or more columns have been selected in an active grid Show All Columns Use the Show All Columns menu item to display all columns in the active grid this will any hidden columns to the current view This item is activated only if a grid is active and one or more columns are hidden Collapse All Use the Collapse All command to collapse all nodes of th
501. rd lt Enter gt Press the Enter key on your keyboard The bold faced type indicates menu or window items to click The Main Menu items are the items available at the top of the HydroGeo Analyst Parent window 2 1 Creating a New Project To start HydroGeo Analyst Start and choose Programs gt WHS gt HydroGeo Analyst gt HydroGeo Analyst 4 0 or double click on the desktop icon lis When HydroGeo Analyst is loaded there will be no project loaded by default In order to enter your station data you either have to open an existing project or create a new one using the Project Wizard To create a new project follow through the steps of the Project Wizard as outlined below Project gt New from the main menu or click the E New button from the toolbar A prompt will appear for the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below 28 Chapter 2 Getting Started User Credentials xi User Name Fassword OF Cancel HGA includes a default user Admin with no password You must enter a valid user name and password for a user that has privileges for creating new projects HGA will then check these credentials in the security document to confirm that this user has these privileges For more details on assigning user access controls please see Chapter 4 Application Level Objects If you have modified the default Admin user or added additional users with permissions to create projects
502. re data is displayed as above mean sea level you may need to convert your sample depths to sample elevations This can be done in the query builder by adding a calculated display field as shown below Design SQL View Preview Display Fields Function Expression Alias Order by station id id station x Xx station y station name name gt chem_test_sampleO date_ date_ gt chem_test_results0 chemical_name chemical_name gt chem_test_resultsO result_value Concentration chem_test_resultsO result_unit result unit station elevation gt Elevation chem_test_sample0 screen_from_ Screen_from station elevation chem_test_sampleO screen_from_ JE The last display field in the screenshot above combines the sample elevation and the screen depth from fields the screen depth 1s subtracted from the station elevation or station TOC elevation if desired using the Expression below station elevation chem_test_sample0 screen_from_ and entering Z for the Alias Executing this query will produce the results shown below 134 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst The last column displays the calculated sample elevations Z This value should be mapped to Z in the 3D Interpolation to generate your plume NOTE It is recommended that the X Y and Z fields all be displayed with the same length units Interpolation method Available interpolation methods include e Krigging default and e Invers
503. results of the query The results of this query are shown in the figure below Creating Queries 22d E Query Builder Of x xa Station Group Query Data Query Design SQL View Preview Select a Query SELECT t0 id AS id t0 x as x t0 y as y tO name as name FROM Station as t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID LEFT JOIN lithology 45 t1 ON t0 id 41 Station WHERE t1 FROM_ gt 30 AND bedrack30 t1 soil Limestone AND PStation ID 75 Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration y name 100010 80 5575320604263 43 4821142326773 BH 010 da 100011 80 5616076993998 43 4751191676727 BH 011 gos 100013 80 5613306964769 43 4912779610142 BH 013 E Well History 100019 80 5459026865231 43 4787262381272 BH 019 User Category Source Condition Project j Edva Close Help Category User Rows 4 Time 0 0 0 80 You will see that the display fields show only the ID Name X and Y If desired additional fields may be added to the display fields using the steps listed above The query may now be accessed from the project tree under the Queries node If the user 1s familiar with SQL string structure the query string may be directly edited in the SQL View Preview tab Follow the steps listed above to ex
504. ription of Menu Items 329 Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a section of the cross section that is defined by a rectangle drawn around the desired area Place the cursor on the cross section and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the cross section Click this menu item and the cross section window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is not already in a full extent mode Previous Extent Zooms the cross section window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the cross section window to the next window dimensions View 3D Allows you to view one or more cross sections in 3D with the 3D Explorer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Export to 3D Explorer j x Select Surfaces IV Select All Select CrossSections l Select All Cross Section Name Select Grid Name V relief Select wv E E Vv E E M O m Select Plumes IV Select All Select E Grid Name V 3dplume 4 Include site map 3D name HG 43D OK Cancel Help 330 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Select the Cross sections to display from the dialog by placing a check mark b
505. ription of the coordinate and projection systems available in HydroGeo Analyst is provided in Chapter 4 See Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location on page 175 NOTE It is important to know and select the correct project system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates The LAS file allows to specify a place holder for NULL values common examples are 999 0000 Wherever this value is detected in the source HGA will insert NULL in the destination according to the field setting specified in the Template Manager When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Import LAS File This step provides a preview of the mapped fields and an indication of any emoneous records Records with emors wil not be imported ou may teken lo previous steps lo make any corechone bo the mapping Al Ihe bop of the window each tab represents a different detabase table containing one of more mapped fields 188 5 187 5 187 186 5 156 185 184 5 154 1825 The last step in the import involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings 1f any will be listed along with the data Records with errors will not be imported You may return to previous steps to make an
506. roject Properties Once a project is created there are certain settings and properties that may be modified some critical settings may be available as read only 178 Chapter 4 Project Manager To view the project properties select Project Properties from the main menu of HydroGeo Analyst In this menu there are two options Connectivity and Miscellaneous Settings Connectivity This option allows you to check the database connection settings for the current project If the connection is lost or the server is modified the connectivity settings can be redefined in the dialog shown below Set Connectivity i E x Select Server and Database This dialog displays the server and database hosting your data Although the dialog allows all Y Windows NT Integrated Authorization power users to modify the oo connectivity settings great care Eoo must be taken as any improper setting may corrupted your project AaSSWOrt a a Modify these settings only if the Database demo_vaw v database is moved to another server is renamed or user access tights are changed Server siv Build Connection String Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security sspi Persist Security Info F alse Initial Catalog demo_vgw Data Source srv Use Procedure for Prepare 1 Auto Translate T rue Packet Size 4096Workstation ID aschalew Use Encryption for Data False T ag with column collation when possible False
507. rovides an interface to create reports and report templates containing a variety of data from a HydroGeo Analyst project The Report Editor included with the HydroGeo Analyst package is used to create professional reports containing data and or 2D and 3D views you have generated with your projects Reports can be printed or exported to conventional formats RTF PDF HTML etc The Report Editor provides the following features e Create and save Report Layout Templates e Create and Manage Reports e Import Reports e Design and Preview Reports e Save Export and Print Reports In addition the Report Editor e Provides an easy to use Office like designer environment e Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions e Provides Barcode control 155 e Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks For more details please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor 9 BHLP Designer The Borehole Log Plot designer provides the tools for designing borehole logs plots for your station data The number of columns and their order of display is flexible and can be modified in an existing borehole log plot template or a brand new template can be created Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design template Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated through the use of the Report Editor for one or multiple boreholes Information related to
508. rs options are not available when the Model Layer interpretation is set to edit mode in the layer manager Update Cross Section Use this option to update the screen water level and intersecting layer information displayed on the current cross section The corresponding map project should be open in order to update information from intersecting cross sections Cross Section Info Displays summary info for the selected cross section Information for DD A El x Cros Section Line Length 15131 m Butter 200 0 m Starting Point Coord 536467 48174824 Ending Point Coord 536598 4813316 Vertical Exaggeration 23 8 Well Numbers 2 Display BHLP Use this feature to display a borehole log plot directly on the selected cross section when displaying elements such as geophysical plots and well screen intervals the borehole log plot can be a valuable asset when creating a cross section interpretation The BHLP layout settings is shown below 340 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor x BHLP Template BHLPT Please choose wells that pon want to show with BHLP M Visible Horizontal Offset 0 Image Width e0 OF Cancel In the BHLP Layout Settings dialog there are several display options available e BHLP Template select the desired BHLP template from the list e Visible show hide the BHLP on the cross section e Horizontal Offset set the horizontal position of the BHLP a positive offset will shift th
509. rt template for future use Once you are satisfied with the design of the currently opened report s layout click H Save As button to save it as a report template In the dialog that is displayed provide the name for the template check the box beside Save as template and click on Save The template saves the header the footer as well as the background for the detail section of the current report The detail section may have background watermarks such as DRAFT CONFIDENTIAL etc at desired angles and locations The header and footer may contain relevant information for your company and or client including logo name Address Telephone Fax e mail and web site address The user can also configure properties such as font alignment etc for the template Once a report template 1s created 1t will be listed under the Reports node in the Project Browser of HydroGeo Analyst 11 3 2 Opening a Report Template Report templates can be opened by double clicking on them in the Project Browser of HydroGeo Analyst A template can also be opened using the report editor directly by selecting the Open button E from the Designer window s toolbar and setting the file filter to W T P Once a report template is opened it can be edited and saved 11 3 3 Deleting a Report Template In HG Analyst right click on a report template in the project browser and select the Delete option from the menu to delete the temp
510. ry should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the Quality Control component The following are required fields for the Lab Quality validation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e Station ID located in the Station table e Sample ID also referred to as the Sys_sample_code this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Batch Identifiers Samples that are prepared and or analyzed together with the same process and personnel using the same lot s of reagents within a specified time period should be assigned the same Batch ID Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch number which relates the samples to each other e Detection Limit Method detection limit typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry table e Parameter Name contains the parameter being analyzed typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry table with the results e Parameter Identification Information contains meta data about the parameter typically found in the same table as the parameter name e Parameter Values The measured or observed value for the selected chemical or parameter Typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis 487 table e Quality Code Identifiers Use
511. s HGAnalyst Projects Sample_Nov 23 NS i 8 x Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help GBezZ SOh t xBa RCSB E Station Groups a Stati H E Station Data ame Station Group BOs 28 ad E ii tation Data Database T ables dl z Maps y mj name result_value 2 Podes 7 535646 829 4813320 22 BH6 Tetrachloro ross Sections 8 536892 4813305 99 BH Tetrachloro 9 4 Reports 21 536746 69 4914507 49 BH20 Tetrachloro t 3DView 21 536746 69 4814507 49 BH20 Tetrachloro H A Borehole Logs 21 536746 69 4814507 49 BH20 Tetrachloro Plots 21 536746 69 4814507 495 BH20 Tetrachloro M Loading options Load All Incremental po Pf sl 12 a al Rows 6 Time 0 0 0 63 Borehole Logs With this data query you now have the option to generate a Crosstab query report This feature is outside the scope of this exercise For more details please see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries for more details If you have time varying data for one or more contaminants in your database you may generate data queries with these fields then generate Time Series charts This feature is outside the scope of this exercise For an example of how to create charts please see Chapter 14 Adding Plots In the next section you will create a map project and display some of the boreholes on the map 2 5 Mapping the Data Once the data has been entered into a HydroGeo An
512. s if any are open The Edit menu resembles the standard Windows design including options for Cut Copy Paste and Find Depending on the window or dialog selected one or more items under this menu may be grayed out The functionality of all Edit menu items are limited to grids In a grid only individual cells may be selected and copied cut and or pasted not the entire record The Copy command adds the selected item to the Clipboard Use copy to move objects to another grid or to copy the selected grid value to another application Data may be Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst copied from a grid cell or from a text box the entire record may not be copied with a single operation The contents of the clipboard can be inserted into a document with the Edit Paste command Cut The Cut command moves the selected item to the Clipboard Use cut to move objects to a different grid or to move the selected values to another application Data may be cut from a grid cell or from a text box the entire record may not be cut with one operation Cut deletes the selected object after copying it to the clipboard The contents of the clipboard can be inserted into a grid with the Edit Paste command Paste The Paste command copies the Clipboard contents into the selected grid cell If no field is selected then this menu item will be inactive In addition if there is no data in the Windows clipboard then this menu item will be inactive Dat
513. s HGAnalyst Examples Data Management 45 Look in a Examples 7 El Ex ry Sample_Lithology Sample_Stations File name Sample_5 tations Files of type Excel xIs bd Cancel IV Open as read only Open Next to proceed to Step 2 of DTS Once the data source is provided the next step is to match a Source table with a Destination table The DTS provides an interface that can be used to select the destination HydroGeo Analyst table by first selecting the data category that contains the table and the desired destination table Once the destination table is selected all fields in the table will be listed for field mapping Data Transfer System Import OF Xx Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheeti y Description y station y Map source fields to destination fields Use Conditions M id DOUBLE m MV name STRING M x DOUBLE unknowr x DOUBLE degree M y DOUBLE unknowr y DOUBLE degree E y zone LONG ft m X tag STRING E DOUBLE y elevation DOUBLE m TT toc DOUBLE y toc DOUBLE m E y depth DOUBLE E X export DATESTAMP Total of records 15 O Primary key Requires a unit to be selected lt Back Next gt Cancel Help The source table containing the data to be imported can be selected from the list of tables on the left side of this window Under Source Table Sheeti if
514. s cgdi gc ca download Data CGDI Warehouse Format Vector and Raster Geographic Coverage Canada Datum Various Layer Landsat RADARSAT Canada Atlas Canadian Geographic Information Systems Land Use National Scale Frameworks Census Data Ontario Land use Cover Canadian Conversation Areas Database State of Canada s Ecosys tem CGIAR Consortium for Spatial Information CGIAR CSI http srtm csi cglar org Data Shuttle radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Geotiff or Arcinfo Geographic Coverage Global 90M Datum WGS84 EGM96 Layer DEM Appendices Global Land Cover Facility http glcfapp umiacs umd edu S080 esdi index jsp Data Land Sat TM Images Format GeoTiff Geographic Coverage Global Up to 30m Datum WGS84 Layer Landover Images Land Information Ontario http lioapp rc gov on ca lids welcome asp Data NRVIS Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage Ontario Canada Datum NAD83 CNT Layer Airport Annotation Building To Scale Building As Symbol Conces sion Contour Crown Game Preserve Drainage Line Drainage Point MNR District MNR Region Municipal Park National Wildlife Area OBM DTM Park Zone Reg Pit or Quarry Provincial Park Zone Regulated Railway Seg ment Spot Height Tank Tower Transport Line Transport Point Utility Line Utility Site Water Edge Water Structure Waterboy Segment Wooded Area GeoCommunity http data geocomm com catalog Data GIS Data De
515. s described below Adding Georeference Points To set the georeference point Click on the first map location where the world coordinates are known For this image the points for X1 Y1 and X2 Y2 are marked with an on the map 78 Chapter 2 Getting Started A Georeference point window will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location Note The world coordinates must be in the projection system that the map project is set to x1 Y1 XP 192 Yp 159 OK Cancel Enter the following coordinates for this point 7 X1 535122 e Y1 4812839 OK Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known This point is marked with an on the map as X2 Y2 in the upper right corner Enter the following coordinates for this point 7 X2 537252 7 Y2 4814712 OK The image 1s now georeferenced Next in order to use the full map window you must maximize the extents To do so Options gt Full Region in the Georeference Window the window should now appear similar to the figure shown below Mapping the Data 79 Fis Wer Edt Options 49 06 Bb 40 Ae 00 a 2 Pe oe D OK in the Select Region Window This will close the Georeference window OK in the File Attributes window OK in the Confirmation window stating the image was georeferenced successfully The Raster Image now appears as a new Map Layer in the Map Project However
516. s layer and make it editable You should have two check Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 91 marks beside Geology as shown in the image below the first check mark indicates the layer is visible the second check mark indicates the layer is editable in edit mode Map Project Sample_ BEE File Edit View Tools Help Bele ZN xissa OR o Model uopas ssoup Ae Topography tology Y C HydroGeology 320 310 o TO EM G g al EN uy o oO N 270 B34 034 QA 795 1000 1500 2000 pRtatce m 3000 3500 4000 Ear 4 Peia 1343 43 282 32 Choose the Polygon button from the toolbar Place the mouse cursor near the top left corner of the map near 340 m on the y axis Click once on the left mouse button to add a vertex and start digitizing the polygon in the desired direction Add more vertices by clicking on the left mouse button at desired locations Move the mouse cursor to an interval on a desired station the mouse cursor will snap the vertex of the polygon to the nearest station interval A vertex can also be added anywhere on the cross section by clicking on the left mouse button HINT When drawing interpretation polygons use the soil patterns displayed in the boreholes as a guideline for the layer location however since it is a interpretation 1t does not need to exactly match up with the interval locations 92 Chapter 2 Getting Started s
517. s node on the Project Browser Select the New pop up menu option as shown in the following screenshot to design a new template E Plots Import Design Export Design Refresh W Refresh all In the New BHLP Design window that appears enter a name for the new borehole log design a New BHLP design E a Name Sample OK Cancel EJ Help Note that the background color of the text box turns red if you type the name of an existing borehole log design indicating that you cannot have two BHLP s with the same name Modify your new template name slightly and the OK button will be re enabled In the Borehole Log Designer window that opens the borehole s you have selected previously will be made available in the Select Station combo box at the top left of the borehole log designer You can now add the desired elements to the empty BHLP template as shown in the following screenshot Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Borehole Log ma aaah alk x i 5 A Station Y m Elevation im Toc ml RE ON 50 4812036 33 ES Design Close Export Y Print Y Help 12 3 1 Adding Lithology Column To add a column to the BHLP right click on the Design node in the tree view and select the Add column menu option or click the H Add button in the toolbar Borehole Log Designer Sample a ioj x Select Station x m Y m Elevation m TOC sil BH1 537381 50 4812036 33
518. s query are shown in the window below Query Builder xaue Station Group Quey Data Query Select a Query Toc Exceeds 325m y E Description E Location Station Name x Y Elevation TOC tag total depth type description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Sail Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History H A H H MSource Condition Project baj Design SQL View Preview SELECT t0 id t0 name t0 x t0 y tO elevation t0 toc FROM Station 45 t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID WHERE t0 toc gt 325 AND PStation ID 1 1 GB01 2 GB02 3 GBO3 4 GBO4 5 GB05 6 GB06 7 GB07 8 GBOS 9 GB09 10 GB10 11 GB11 12 GB12 13 GB13 14 GB14 15 GB15 16 GB16 17 GB17 18 GB18 19 GB19 20 GB20 21 GB21 ly 80 5575956823942 80 5658716930292 80 5481372487996 80 5689553863083 80 5596308869504 80 5537873728565 80 5496881242797 80 5691857577891 80 5575320604261 80 5616076993997 80 550964509041 80 5613306964768 80 557669897809 80 5672792095427 80 554 7642005826 80 5574207847192 80 5459026865231 80 5595532076244 80 5613609731897 80 559577967353 80 5613609731897 43 4749200273619 43 4744943279344 43 47 70413777749 43 4777916718678 43 4753708962492 43 4816548678084 43 4750729468892 43 4751 443684377 43 4821142327003 43 4751191676957 43 4824596079935
519. s stationary Bottom will start the text at the bottom of the object and the cursor will remain on the same line with every new line while the text moves upwards Middle will start at the vertical midpoint of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text will expand equally upwards and downwards Custom Allows you to change the object output format to General Number Currency Date Time Percentage and Custom It also allows you to specify the line border style CanGrow Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become larger if the entered text does not fit within the allotted frame CanShrink Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become smaller if the text does not fill up the allotted frame Chapter 11 The Report Editor DataField Allows you to attach the field to a datafield in a project through a DataControl e g ADO If the field is linked to a DataControl select the desired data field from the drop down menu All fields linked to a DataControl in a current report are listed in the Fields window under the Report Navigator tree Summary DistinctField Specify the field name of the field used in a distinct summary function SummaryFunction Set the function to be used for aggregating data SummaryGroup Set the name of group section for summarization SummaryRunning Determines whether the summary is a running value or not SummaryType Det
520. sample sample _dat chemicaln result_value result unit come_pprn a Advanced Cloze Help NOTE The table names e g Chemistry Results specified in the SQL statement must be entered as they appear in the database e g chem_test_resultsO You can check the Creating Queries 235 table names by referring to the Template Manager Delete Command The Delete Command can be used to remove records from the database For example if you want to delete all records from the Chemistry Results table with the chemical name benzene enter the following SQL statement into the SQL View Preview tab DELETE FROM chem_test_resultsO WHERE chemical name Benzene e Next click the Execute Query button to display the query results shown below 2 Query Builder i F e ioj xj XAH AAA Station Group Quem e Data Query Design SOL ViewsPreview DELETE FROM chem_test_resultsO WHERE chemical_name Benzene Select a Query Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining E sploration Geophysics Well History 1401214240 1221996 Ethylbenzene ug L 14012148 178 1996 Ethylbenzene ug L WOT 2 12 201201996 Ethylbenzene ug L WOT 4 16 4 16 1996 Ethulbenzene ug L Source Conditio Project WO 43 WO 142 WO 146 104947956 11421956 114841956 WO 2 12 2 12 1996 44012416 41671996 4 01_ 0294 WO 142 WO 142 WOT 1467
521. section_interpretations r In the Data Query window the following options are available To execute an existing query e Select the desired query from the Queries node in the tree e Right mouse click on this query and select Execute To see desired data from a selected table e Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box e Press the f Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid will be populated with all records which satisfy this query For example select the Boreholes station group and view all Lithology data that belong to this group In addition through this interface you may delete all records from a selected table This is useful if you mistakenly import numerous records to the wrong table To delete records from a selected station group and table 238 Chapter 7 Queries Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box e Press the f Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid will be populated with all records which satisfy this query e Press the x Delete button Note Use this feature with caution as records will be permanently deleted from your database 7 6 Exporting Query Results Data Query results may also be sent to the Map Manager or to a Report To load the results of a Data Query into a map project select the Record Display on Map menu option To load the Data
522. sed for visualization you will recall that 3D projects supports multiple plumes for one or more contaminants In the Style combo box select the desired display element Select from Colormap on XY XZ or YZ planes or Isosurface The Visible checkbox shows hides the current plume browser display element To the right of these controls you will find a scroll bar that is used to animate the selected display element When a color map is selected the scroll bar Position is used Working with 3D Explorer 363 to slide the color map along the selected plane through the project s site domain from one side to the other or in the case of an XY color map from the top to the bottom When an Isosurface is selected the scroll bar is used to span through different isosurface Values or shells The O percent value represents the lowest possible value for the isosurface based on the interpolated data set and will result in the largest isosurface The 100 percent value represents the highest possible value for the isosurface and will result in the smallest isosurface When you are satisfied with a view click on the Save Colormap button or Save Isosurface in the case of Isosurfaces to save this display element to the 3D Project under the Plumes node in the tree By doing so you will have access to more advanced options for the colormap or isosurface and this will enable displaying multiple colormaps and or isosurfaces Plume Br
523. send the data to AquiferTest For more details on how to use AquiferTest please refer to the AquiferTest User s Manual Water Quality Analysis Use this feature to analyze water quality data in AquaChem Select a few stations or a station group from the station list then select the menu item and AquaChem will launch with the selected stations For more details on how to use AquaChem please refer to the AquaChem User s Manual When using AquaChem with HGA keep in mind that AquaChem is intended only for its presentation and calculation features Data entry and maintenance operations should be performed centrally through the HGA interface and not the AquaChem interface The operations that must be performed in HGA include e Creating or modifying parameters e Importing data e Creating new samples or modifying sample information e Creating new stations or modifying station information Also the following operations are unavailable in AquaChem e Creating a new database instead the aqc file can be simply copied and distributed e Compressing the database if required this can be done by opening the database in the MS Access environment 3 2 7 Help Contents Displays the HydroGeo Analyst On line Help About Displays the HydroGeo Analyst Info dialog This contains the HydroGeo Analyst version number and information on how to contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc 142 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analy
524. sent one or more water level measurements on the plot 462 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Under the Appearance frame you can specify the water level position for multicasing wells from the dropdown list box You can also select the type of symbol to represent the water level positions e Select the Use Marker option and you can select from a list of symbol markers where the size style and line and fill colors can be defined e Select the Use Font option and you can select from available fonts size color etc After the Font is selected load the Character Map to see the available characters for the selected font character ox Font ESRI Environmental amp Icons Oje elvlailoleolo tosco BOOS slave a sjelsmejola y d amp Selected char 0 OK Cancel Simply click on the desired character then click OK to return xi E ES BHLP Well Constructio ES Well Construction e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc Symbols Data Labels Data to Displa Label rT All Mini EJ Visible Font l Horizontal First Ej Max J 0O Center Jw Last En Aver 5 Vertical Top Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Data Labels tab the Data to Display frame allows you to select which water level s to represent on the BHLP Choose from the following options e All e First e Last BHLP Columns 463 464 e M
525. sired fields you want to display in crosstab format For example if you want to generate a crosstab report of groundwater chemistry results over time at several stations you may want to include the following fields e station name e sample name or code e screen location e sample date e chemical parameter s e result value concentration e units e method detection limit Crosstab Queries 241 Once you have created a data query you are ready to create a Crosstab query This can be done in several ways e Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA project browser then select Tools Crosstab Report from the main menu or e Right mouse click on the Data Query and select Crosstab Report from the pop up menu A dialog will appear prompting you for a name for the Crosstab report enter a name then click OK TE New Crosstab Report x Mame TCE_and_BTEX_for_Year200d OF Cancel Help The DataCube Wizard window will then open as shown in the following screenshot E DataCube wizard x A Layout Style sheet M Source fields DataCube fields M Inactive fields x dimension fields chemical_name Concentration Facts fields M Y dimension fields Cancel The DataCube Wizard window contains two tabs with options that can be configured e Layout Select which fields from your data query sh
526. sitive if there are no options available the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance xl Ed New button creates a new query Delete button deletes the selected query Save Query button saves the query Save As button saves the query under a new name Generate SQL Statement button generates the SQL statement and tests the query Execute SQL Statement button executes the selected query string 7 2 Query Types 7 2 1 Data Queries Data Queries can provide a more detailed look at the data and can be used for quantifying and qualifying any field in the HGA database Query Types In addition many of the visualization and data analysis components require data sources as data inputs Using the Query Builder you can generate Data Queries that provide the data sources for Map Layers see Chapter 8 for more details Cross section interpretation results see Chapter 9 Querying Cross Section Interpretations for more details Quality Control Analysis see Chapter 13 Applying a Lab Quality Template for more details BHLP columns see Chapter 12 Specify Data Source for more details Crosstab reports see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries for more details 221 e 3D plume projects see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation for more details e Charts see Chapter 14 Adding Plots for more details e Customized Reports see Chapter 11 Creating Reports based on a Data Query for more det
527. so be imported using the Template Manager Customizable Lists and Standards HydroGeo Analyst comes with a List Editor tool that allows users to create and customize lists for any field allowing for rapid data entry Common examples of lists include e List of over 150 standard Soil Classifications with descriptions and patterns e List of common chemical names with their CAS numbers e Lab analysis test methods e Well drilling methods construction and casing materials e County and State Codes e Applicable standards for various purposes regions and agencies A List in HydroGeo Analyst is equivalent to either a physical or virtual look up table About HydroGeo Analyst 9 Data Querying and Filtering with the Query Builder Data querying is an important feature for any environmental database It provides the ability to easily locate desired information with only a few mouse clicks HydroGeo Analyst provides multiple methods of querying data out of your database through the Query Builder The Query Builder combines a set of tools for creating a range of simple to the most advanced queries for your projects All queries created can be saved for later use used to define Station Groups or used to filter data for reporting plotting charts and creating GIS maps 1 2 3 Data Visualization 10 Interpretation of geologic and hydrogeologic data is made easy with the visualization modules that are provided in HydroGeo Analyst Us
528. source can be defined The format of the source file must be Records as Rows which means each new record must be in a new row in addition 1f the file contains Header information the Header must be in the first row If the source format is a database then in most cases these requirements will be satisfied However 1f Excel or Text formats are used ensure that the necessary formatting is completed before using the DTS A few examples are shown below The following example demonstrates an Excel file containing station location data note the format records as rows and the header information in the first row Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 2 1 GBO1 536012 7 4613630 333 5 334 5 E 2 B02 535956 7 4613650 336 337 4 a GB03 535679 7 4613670 336 337 5 4 5604 535753 7 4613620 132 133 E 4 5605 535645 7 4613660 334 335 El 6 5606 535543 7 401360 40 5 341 5 5 7 GEO 535452 7 4013630 345 344 g a 5600 535295 7 4613640 339 5 340 5 10 4 5609 535166 7 4613660 339 5 340 5 11 10 6610 539095 4013630 340 349 The following example demonstrates a CSV file containing lithology information for a few stations note the format and the header information in the first row example_file Notepad _ Oy ES File Edit Search Help ID Name from_ to_ form_desc soil type GBA 8 6 5 Coarse Gravel Coarse Gravel 7 GBS 6 5 26 Fine to med sand Hedium Sand GBA 26 52 Gravel Gravel 7 GBS 52 69 Fine sand Fine Sa
529. splayed by clicking on the desired item A description of the interface that is provided to view or edit these items is provided in the following sections Data Categories As mentioned earlier in this document a fixed number of data categories are provided in HydroGeo Analyst in order to help group similar information There are nine pre defined categories and one user defined category The categories are created based on those groups that are common in environmental data management systems These categories include e Description information related to site and stations e Geologic Description information related to subsurface geology e Well Construction information related to drilling methods casing filling etc e Soil Testing information related to geological investigations such as penetrometer tests e Soil Sampling information related to soil investigations such as soil vapor coring etc e Monitoring Events sampling for chemical information as well as water levels and any other data resulting from monitoring events e Geophysics resistivity and gamma readings e Well History historical information on wells e Mining Exploration results from any mining and exploration activities 188 Chapter 5 Template Manager e User Category Any of these categories can be renamed as desired and used to store any information Selecting a category in the Template Manager displays an interface where the name of the category
530. ssccccscsssssssccccssssssccccccssssssccccccsssssccscsesscess 107 A o O 108 NEW cana da adas 108 Bae E E EE E E A E E E E A E PET 108 Open rom BACKUP irii e a a A dean 109 OS o E ETE EEA EE AE ANI AA E E E E E E A A ANE ENE T E EEA die 110 RE OPED nia n ii dd 110 TOPON a dd A de moan tees 110 PP Goteneouekuinsenbaacaben autelatnan ian P E E E O EEE 122 O a A A 123 A 124 EE bi 124 J ra N EE E E A E E E EE AEN LE EEE EEE sgaesieta sone yer ENEE 124 COPY a E O a a a a O 124 Udo A A E E EE E EE E AE EE A T ace 125 Pase a E A E E R 125 A O O 125 NS O II O A 126 PEOJCCU BDTOWS O a eii 126 Wel ETON O arco A olor ici 126 Hide Selected e olUninS ao a E E A AEEA 126 SHO Ws IC ONTINS senage a e E a AA ATA 127 Collapse WM lt a E N Na 127 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Expand A Mil esha ses loas 127 A AS E 127 TCC OU tesi ti 127 PAU E EEE P A AE T nee OE E shel hadnt sited E E E A EN AAE 127 DEl germ e E O SURO Tee Str eT er RP ere eee rene 128 EITE eae ne Romer O tar ee nites sone See eazy Mie CN Eee aN Tee SCC arnt ere 128 PO O a odes Gattis arte oan eee teats a 128 Eller DY Valle a S E A 128 Hide Selected ROWS eonim anO Ea E OE OENE E E DEN ENSE 129 O 129 JA O E a 129 NS 129 NORCANSCONCING A A A A A ts 129 SOT DECENIO a a ce 129 Display om Map e II O cua 129 SEUS tooo 130 Template IN PARA a o daar POR PRE COCO EEE O 130 List Ed NOR casno iio 130 Material Spec ICAU ONS a dads 130 Manace User ACCESS Level canal A di 130 Ch
531. sssssssccsssssssees 436 Denning Quality Codes tor Data sisas 486 Data Requirements nula 487 Define A New Lab Quality Template ssscscsscccsssssssssscssccccccccscessssssssccccesesesess 488 AR O uaetaaeaaaimes 489 CHECKS y DEK CC Senos a ia a aaa 490 Check BlankKs Setas nea a E E te oud eietencn hn 491 Applying a Lab Quality Template sscsssscsssssssssssssssccccccccccsssscsscccssssesssssscecs 492 Mappine Riells ci ito o 493 Generate OC Results cia a 493 Export Quality Control Analysis Results oooooocooooooooooocoononoooccccncncnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnos 495 14 Plotting ccccccsccsssssscsscescescescescescescescascnscessnscsessecsecseccessescescesceceee 497 Aboutthe IMT ORL ACE isisisi ias 498 Description of Designer Toolbar enis 00 ia ii iaa a ia 499 VIEWER Window SCLIN OS tasar atrial 500 PROVO PIOUS c5253 cs eiccsvecseceteuicsteatsescetecauuetseccdecelace N SA A E EEE 501 PUN VO Cr spe ces esis eseras oe aac waited saerac gt cups ned cus sivsts us Sugano ae oaiaaen wauanes ace alaaen Gamenes aden lee eae 501 Pre Ida p pin OS li aldea 502 Plot SENOS pas N 506 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services General STIS etnia ias 506 Sy Fe ADIs Play SCS oa ae sessed ets Sie Geneon Des a Ge Sedan Sean aauSatenauGalatueoeastdatsetheseasbetege 508 COMO Lada tap n 508 PS ETA sasha O ence hate S 508 Vertical ARS id o ae wens 509 HOn ZOOM all ANAS SI AN daa 510 DOMES PEA iii 510 Data
532. st Components 3 3 Template Manager 3 3 1 Purpose The Template Manager provides the tools to modify the HydroGeo Analyst database structure and define user level views 3 3 2 General Description The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and displays database and user settings The following features are available to all users Adding and deleting tables fields Altering the properties of each table and field Grouping tables under logical data categories Defining visibility of tables and or fields Defining user level table and or field names units and data formats where applicable Some of the features in the Template Manager are available only for database administrators referred to as Power Users in the context of HydroGeo Analyst These features include all operations that alter the database schema and table and field designs Features that are accessible only to Power Users include Adding deleting tables and or fields defining primary keys defining relationships between tables Save user templates as a new database schema structure Export user templates to a stand alone XML file Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats All features that are available to all users For more details please refer to Chapter 5 Template Manager 3 4 List Editor The HydroGeo Analyst package includes a List E
533. stination The Destination can be provided either as a file name wherever applicable or as a connection string First a data package must be selected or a new one created from the Package Name field in the first line Then select a folder a file format and enter a filename Once this has been defined Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS 6 2 2 Select Tables to Export The second window as shown below requires you to select the tables to export In addition to selecting the source and destination tables this interface also allows selecting the desired destination fields to which data from the selected table will be exported Data transfer system Export OF x Step 2 Data mapping Source Destination Category Source table Destination table Description v station bd test_export csv Select the fields for data exporting M 5 Y Y x DOUBLE degree M x degree y DOUBLE degree M y DOUBLE degree zone LONG f Y zone LONG e X STRING MV ta STRING elevation DOUBLE m IV elevation DOUBLE m oc DOUBLE m Y toc DOUBLE m X depth DOUBLE E depth DOUBLE region STRING M region STRING Total of records 147 lt Back Next gt Cancel EJ Help Unit Conversion By default the data from those fields with units will be exported in the same units as the source However any unit from the same unit category can be selected and the appropr
534. t 1 121 637 ml 1 851 405 m 211125743 m Ye 155 279 im X Cancel Transformation is performed using two points on the DXF file with known coordinates The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid transformations Follow the procedure below to import a DXF file and use the coordinate Transformation option To set the georeference point click the Georeference button e Click on the first map location where the world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location 276 Chapter 8 Map Manager Georeference point xl 5351 22 7 481 2839 lt p 220 Yp 393 OF Cancel e Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point e Click OK e Click the Georeference button again e Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known e Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point e Click OK The coordinates will be entered into the corresponding Georeference fields on the right hand side of the window Once this is complete click OK to continue and the CAD file will be loaded as a new layer into the map project Save Saves the selected layer Delete Deletes the selected layer A layer cannot be deleted while it is in Edit mode Create Intersection With this option you create a new map layer from the intersection of any station points polyline or polygo
535. t button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Build a Connection String To build a connection string select the radio button beside the Build Connection String option then click on the bl Build Connection String button to load the following dialog E Data Link Properties E x Prowider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE OB Providerfs ESRI GeoDatabase OLE DB Provider Microsoft SAM 1 1 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 3 51 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DE Provider Microsoft OLE OB Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Jee OLE LE io f r Internet aul Hrs OLE DE z for OLA ps Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider Microsoft Project 9 0 OLE DB Provider MSDataShape OLE DE Provider for Microsoft Directory Services SQL Server Replication OLE DB Provider for DTS OF Cancel Help 204 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System The Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box exposes all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports The Data Link Properties dialog box contains four tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three tabs depend upon the Provider selected The Provid
536. t e Usethe button to edit the selected client e Use the button to undo the edits for the selected client Under the Logo frame e Use the by button to load a new graphics for the logo e Use the L button to paste a file from the clipboard for the logo e Use the button to remove the selected logo file Once back in the Project Wizard the next step is to define the project location and projection system In the next line enter your Project Location and specify the Soil Classification Settings SCS The soil classifications will be used to represent soil materials in the cross sections and borehole plots in the program One of the existing SCS s may be selected or anew SCS may be easily created The available soil settings include Using the Project Manager 177 e USCS Unified Soil Classification System e USDA United States Department of Agriculture e DIN 4023 Deutsches Institut f r Normung e V e JAH International Association of Hydrogeologists e Compton Simply choose the desired soil settings from the combo box To customize or create a soil classification press the MJ button to load the Material Specification Editor For more details on customizing the soil settings please refer to Chapter 3 Material Specifications Editor You may also enter a Description of the project in the field below the Soil Specifications optional Finally under the Projection Type frame you must specify the coordinate system used
537. t shapefile coordinates derived in one geographic coordinate system to values expressed in another Once these settings have been defined Map Manager will make the required transformation on the fly when a shapefile is opened For example if your current map project is set to North American Datum 1983 NAD 83 and you wish to import a shapefile that was derived using the North American Datum 1927 NAD 27 projection you must first configure an appropriate geotransformation To configure a geotransformation follow the steps below Upon selecting the following dialog will open Chapter 8 Map Manager Config Transformation Of x Please config geotranformation To Datum GeoTranformation Ok Cancel Click the Add button to add a geotransformation record Config Transformation Sipi x Please config geotranformation To Datum GeoTranformation Ok Cancel Click the empty cell located under the From Datum header The following dialog will appear Choose Datum Me x Please choose a datum D Nord de Guerre D Nord Sahara 1959 D North American 1927 D North merican 1983 D North American 1983 CSRS98 D North American 1983 HARN D North American Michigan DNSWC 9 2 D NTF D NWL 9D D NZGD 2000 D Observatario D Observ Meteorologico 1939 i D Old Hawaiian D Oman D OSGB 1936 D OSGB 1970 SN D OSU 86F y MOL ata ea A Description of Menu Items 311 In the Choose
538. t Series window will open as shown in the following screenshot Add a Plot Series X Flot Seres Typ f Depth Interval Plot Propertie m Description Category Time Unit Conductivity Concentration Recharge Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Choose the Plot Series Type enter Plot Properties as required then click OK to create the plot column Next the Plot Entities must be defined Click on the Plot Entities sub node to expand the Entities options as shown in the following figure Borehole Log Designer Sample a E Of x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 ES Design EE Lithology Lithology Well Construction ES LithologyEntities H E Well Construction Coarse Gravel Sand WH PXS Name DataT able DepthEntity Caption Depth Description Depth DataField YalueEntity Caption Depth Plot Column Description DataField Gravel Y i O Close Export Y Print Y Help For a Depth Plot you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the DepthEntity select the field containing depth values from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the fiel
539. t Templates The Report Designer includes several pre defined Report Templates which can be used to quickly generate a professional report Borehole Log Plotting Borehole log reports can be prepared using the Report Designer A report for multiple boreholes can be generated at once by selecting one or more boreholes in the database and opening the borehole log report generator Borehole log reports may display information such as depth lithology water level screen locations sample results both as values and in charts geophysical data and more Chart Generator HydroGeo Analyst comes with a powerful and easy to use charting interface that is closely linked to the reporting component Unlimited numbers of charts can be placed on the reporting component s runtime designer The charting control can then be linked to specific parts of the database to retrieve the source data HydroGeo Analyst generates an unlimited number of pages with one or more charts with a single click of the mouse The charting module allows charts to include regulatory limits As such it allows users to define a range of values referred to as the Alarm Zone that may be used to indicate a range of values in exceedance of selected regulatory limits or intervals 1 2 5 Interface to Visual MODFLOW and other WHI Software 12 ESRI GIS SHP files and databases have become two of the main sources of data for groundwater models and HydroGeo Analyst makes it
540. t at the left boundary and end at the right boundary e The line must be drawn from left to right and may not go backwards i e no Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 349 350 vertices can be drawn left of a previously drawn vertex e Model layer lines cannot intersect each other e Model layers need to be drawn in the order they are created For instance the bottom of model layer 3 can not be drawn between model layers one and two Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Lines While drawing a model layer interpretation line it is possible to snap to part of or all of the vertices of an already drawn model layer line This can be helpful for defining geologic layers that pinch out 1 e have zero thickness in some parts of the site Snapping between two selected vertices Whenever a model layer line is drawn and the vertex of the line is within the buffer for a vertex of an adjacent model layer line a blue box will appear outlining the vertex on the adjacent line If the mouse is clicked on this vertex the vertex will snap to the existing vertex The line vertex will change to an orange color to indicate the vertex is linked shared between the two model layer lines You can link to as many vertices as desired by repeating the above step However if snapping to a series of consecutive vertices is desired you may click on the first and the last desired vertices The cross section editor will create the necessary number of ver
541. t color sets the color of the Project title text e Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen size Axis e Text color sets the color of the Title text e Text size sets the size of the Axes labels as a fraction of the total screen size e Line color sets the color of the axes lines Setting Background color EIT itle Test color Text size Line color Text color E E E Hi Text color E LA E e Live Update Apply NOTE For printing it may be helpful to change the background color to white and the axis color to black Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Legends e Text color sets the color of the Legend text Resetting Options The currently viewed scene position can be reset to the Default Setting by selecting Edit Reset scene position from the top menu bar or by clicking on the NE Reset Scene Configuration button in the toolbar NOTE The Reset options remove all display objects except the axes the axes labels and the project title 10 3 2 Project Display Settings The HG Analyst Project element consists of general project settings as shown in the figure below By default the project Title is the same as the project name and it appears at the top of the Display Window This can be moved to any location within the Display Window by clicking on the Title and dragging it to a new location Background color sets t
542. t into the Map Manager Cross Sections The Cross Sections node lists all cross sectional views created using the Cross Section Editor Double clicking on a cross section launches the Cross Section Editor and loads the selected cross section Reports The Reporting component included with HydroGeo Analyst allows you to create as many reports as needed for your project and save the layouts for future report generation All the reports created for a selected project will be listed under the Reports node Double clicking on any of these report layouts will open a report template or a saved report By default the report will be displayed in print preview mode however it is a simple task to activate the report designer in order to modify the report layout See Chapter 11 for more details 3D Views The 3D Views node contains a list of available 3D views that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a 3D view loads the selected view into the HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Borehole Logs The Borehole Logs node contains a list of all Borehole Log Plot BHLP templates that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a Borehole Log loads the selected template into the BHLP viewer Plots The Plots node contains a list of all plots that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a plot will load the Plotting component About the Interface 25 26 Chapter 1 Introduction t
543. t size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen Display Settings 369 370 size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame e Visible shows hides the text frame e Line Color sets the color of the text frame e Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Time Label these settings are applicable when displaying time varying plumes Title field allows for modifying the time label Visible shows hides the time label Text color sets the color of the time label The default is white Text size sets the size of the time label text as a fraction of the total screen size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame e Visible shows hides the text frame e Line Color sets the color of the text frame e Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Visible shows hides the legend Title changes the legend title Text size changes the legend text size Text color changes the legend text color Frame allows to decide whether there is a frame around the legend Frame line color sets the legend frame line color Frame fill color sets the legend frame fill color Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 10 3 3 Axis Display Settings Stay on top M The Axis display element controls the appearance of E Default Settings A E E YBx3D the lines and labels for the X Y and Z axes The axes ee are primarily used to indicate the total dimensions paa size of the 3D image and to orient the image when it E Surfaces H 6
544. t y Advanced Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry chemical_name Type STRING Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 Click once on the field and drag this field into the Conditions frame Querying the Database 71 The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually Under the Conditions frame select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt lt gt gt lt LIKE IS IS NOT amp For this example equals symbol from the combo box Next enter a value in the second Expression field For this example Tetrachloroethylene from the combo box In addition add the chemical_name field to the Display fields in the upper frame Click once on this field and drag this field into the Display Fields frame Next you must enter the result value field From the project tree on the left side of the window locate the result_value field Click once on the result_value field and drag this field into the Conditions frame Under the Conditions frame select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt lt gt gt lt LIKE IS IS NOT BETWEEN amp For this example gt greater than symbol from the combo box Next enter a value in th
545. ta Geologic Description Select Station 1 m LY m Elevation m TOC m Queries J p BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 Crosstab Hg Maps Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features E Cross Sections E Reports to soil_type Description Consister Structure ASTM De m m iz La saa 0 00 5 00 Coarse E coarse gravel e f Borehole Logs 5 00 10 00 Mediun loamy sand Plots 10 00 30 00 Gravel 2 sandy gravel Loading options Load All C Incremental fi 000 a Station Groups ID 200621 name form_desc Description STRING Using the steps above enter lithology data for the remaining boreholes HINT First select the new station BH2 from the Select Station combo box above the grid or return to the Station List and select BH2 from the list then return to the Station Data tab BH2 fe os carson eres Gravel sandy gravel HINT Remember to save post the data before proceeding to the next station You will be prompted to save your data when switching between stations if the data has not already been posted Data Management 39 BH3 BH4 CN EAN ECC BHS from m Soil_type Description HINT Remember to save post the data before proceeding to the next station In the next section you will learn how to enter Well Construction data for one of the stations Example Entering Well Construction Data In
546. ta source f Specify import file name amp Note Build a connection string mrt pecs The Data Transfer System DTS allows you 2 to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access Dita cieco delas and other databases through a three to four step process Name Value In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations Newt Cancel E Help In most cases the DTS Import procedure will include four steps e Data Source Specify the source file and package options e Data Mapping Map source fields to destination fields e Station Related Settings Specify projection system and units for the new stations being imported e Data Validation Validate the source data and provides an error analysis report Each step will appear in a new window After specifying the required settings in each step click the Next gt button in the bottom corner to proceed The Next gt button is activated only after the required information has been defined in the current window The following few sections present a detailed description of each window of the DTS Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 6 1 Importing Data using the DTS The DTS allows importing data from various sources into
547. tails in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting 1s selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than other Wise Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real minimum value of interpolated data Real maximum value of interpolated data Minimum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Min Value option is not selected by the user Maximum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Max Value option is not selected by the user The Points per block along X Points per block along Y and Points per block along Z values allow the user to choose Block Kriging used for interpolation as compared to Point Kriging Block Kriging is based on the premise that since Kriging is a linear algorithm direct estimation of the block average is possible for user defined blocks The default values for these parameters are 1 and in this case the default method is Point Kriging If Block Kriging is being used the user needs to enter the Min points for block Kriging and Max points for block Krigi
548. tall SQL Express during the HGA 4 0 Installation Once the installation is completed a shortcut icon will be placed on the desktop You will be prompted to re boot your computer for the system changes to take effect this is necessary only if the WHI instance of SQL Express is installed 1 3 3 Uninstalling HydroGeo Analyst There may be instances where you will need to uninstall remove HydroGeo Analyst from your system e g if the software is to be transferred to another computer or if you need to reinstall it on the current computer 14 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Before uninstalling the HydroGeo Analyst software package from your system we strongly recommend you to make backup copies of all your HydroGeo Analyst projects and databases These include your entire HGA project folder and all its contents Simply copy the Project directory and its contents to another directory If you are also uninstalling the SQL Express component make sure to also back up the SQL Server database s or else you risk permanently losing your HGA data For more details see BackUp Database on page 137 To uninstall HydroGeo Analyst e Locate the Add Remove Programs option in your Windows Control Panel e Select HydroGeo Analyst as the program to be removed e Follow the on screen instructions e Once you are finished re boot your system to ensure all system files are updated 1 3 4 Starting HydroGeo Analyst To launch Hy
549. tandard Environmental Monitoring Well e Geophysical Water Supply e Geotechnical Drilling Log e Ontario MOT Record of Borehole HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer e 3D Interpolation of a data source e Specify grid dimensions and extents e Select interpolation method Kriging or Inverse Distance e Generate static or transient plumes for one or more contaminants e 3D Plume display e Display Plumes Static and Transient using Isosurface Color map or and or Isoline Map e Display 3D volume estimation based on the isosurface value e Save Plume animation to AVI file d e A number of defects were addressed since v 1 0 1 1 3 New Features in v 2 0 The following features were added in Version 2 0 Data models e New database templates All database templates are now provided in both metric or imperial length units e Database fields now support images in all data categories Data Transfer System DTS e Source files require only the Station names It is no longer necessary to add numeric station ID s to each record in your source table e A number of map projection systems have been added 6 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Map Manager e Improved options for contouring including user defined contour intervals e Added Kriging and Inverse Distance interpolation methods for creating contour maps and gridded data sets e A number of map projection systems have been added Cross Section Editor e You can now display gridlines to
550. tation A new station will be added to the HGA database using station details name co ordinates etc in the LAS file If the station already exists in HGA you will be prompted to overwrite the details using those in the LAS source In addition data from one or more parameters Parameter Sections may be imported to one or more tables in your database e Import only Parameter sections use this option if this station already exists in your HGA project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current HGA project When you select this option the following dialog will appear Import LAS file Step 1 Select LAS file Note select data souce The first step requires selecting LAS File the import package and data SOUICE Create an import package or Spacity a data transfer package select from existing packages Package name The import package contains i mappings from previous import b sessions and allows you to zave time when importing Description multiple source files of the FO game format Select the data source W Save change to this DTS package Well Information Description a wee The first step requires selecting the data transfer package and data source A Data Transfer Package DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing several LAS files containing the
551. tations wells Often stations for the project lie within a specific county or municipality It is easier to create this list that may be expanded as desired and link it to the County or Municipality field Then when it is necessary to enter data for the stations the County may be selected from a list contained within a combo box this eliminates the task of continually re typing the same values 2 In the Geologic Description category Lithology table it may be convenient to define a Linked List for the Soil Color field The list may contain generic soil colors ex light brown dark brown black grey etc When the time comes to enter data for this field the color may be selected from this linked list contained within a combo box instead of re entering the same values If the selected field contains a linked list then a combo box arrow will appear on the right side of the field Click on this arrow to view the available list items for the field 3 4 1 Creating a List 144 Lists lookup tables can be created using the List Editor which can be launched by selecting the List Editor menu option from the Settings menu or simply by clicking on the List Editor button on the toolbar The List Editor can also be loaded from the Template Manager as described under the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 148 below In the Template Manager select the field for which a list is d
552. te and elevation In HydroGeo Analyst these sampling sites are known as Stations Station Types In HydroGeo Analyst all data is saved and referenced to a Station A Station is a unique real world location at which data collection activities are performed Depending on the scope a project may contain single or multiple station types each with its own attributes Typical examples of stations are explained below Boreholes A borehole is a hole drilled at a site for exploration of subsurface geologic structure soul and rock parameters and groundwater characteristics Station attributes for a borehole include Station ID Site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of layers soil and rock classification used types of sampling split spoon soil samples static GW level etc Pumping Wells A pumping well is installed in a borehole and may be used for water supply or aquifer test analysis Station attributes for a pumping well include Well ID site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of casing intervals maximum casing diameter and type minimum casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type type of pump average productivity pumping rate etc Observation Monitoring Wells An observation well may be used to monitor groundwater levels and groundwater chemistry An observation well is instal
553. te is plotted e g color map It can be moved to any other location in the Display Screen by dragging and dropping it at the desired location 10 3 7 Cross Section Data Display Settings The Cross Section Data tree contains the properties of the cross sections loaded in the project e Stations e interpretations Each of these display elements contains further settings as described below 384 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Cross Section Settings The Cross Section contains the name as defined in the Cross Section Editor The entire cross section may be set to Visible or hidden from view The Label Properties allow you to modify the following settings e Visible turns cross section labels on off e Text Color changes text color e Text Size changes text size e Box Visible turns the outline box on off e Box Depth changes the thickness of the label e Box Color changes the label background color Stations Display Settings Under the Stations node there will be a list of the HydroGeo Analyst stations which are involved in the selected cross section Individual stations may be selected and set to Visible or hidden Station label properties can be modified in the Station Label Properties options under the Project node Layer Interpretation Settings gt Stay on top M A HGASD Na Cross Sections Data Ef AA Gf Stations i H E Interpretations H E BR H 6 CC Setting BA Name ES
554. ted based on a selected database template a copy of the database template will be added to the database for use as a user template As such the first time 5 4 2 Creating a copy of the current template the Template Manager is opened it will only display this one user template Managing Templates As discussed earlier in this chapter multiple user templates can be created from this copy All users have the ability to make a copy of this template modify and save view settings in this newly created user template To create a copy of the current template select the E Copy Template As button at the top of the window A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name is provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template 5 4 3 Saving a template as default template Saving a template as the default template makes that user template the default for all users When HydroGeo Analyst opens your project it will utilize this default template for view settings To set the template as default select the Use as Project Default option at the top of the window 5 4 4 Exporting the current template as a Database template 198 Any user template can also be exported to a database template This feature allows you to modify the database schema and save it for future use To export the selected user template to a database template click on the Save as a database template button
555. ted elements The Display Tree Panel is structured in a hierarchical fashion where the elements within the tree can be expanded by clicking on the symbol Each display element listed in the Display tree has an associated Setting list that can be accessed by selecting clicking the display element from the tree A brief description of each display property is available by clicking the mouse pointer on the display property This produces a tool tip Description of the Property in the bottom of the Display Tree Panel below the Setting table Although each display element has a different set of display settings there are several display settings which are common to most display elements gt gt gt Stay on top e Elf Site maps i E HG43D E Surfaces a Cross Sections Data H E AA EE Stations i E GB 34 i Elf Interpretations ff Model Layers Elf Geology Layers Ey Coarse Gravel E Medium Sand Gravel Fine Sand i E Sil iE Hydrogeology Layers H E BR H E CE Ff DD P Background color _ Vertical Exaggeratior 4 jtarnctation type Geology ElStations Label Prope T itle e Live Update Apply e Name Sets the name of the display element as it appears in the Model tree e Visible Shows hides the selected display element On Off The following is a brief description of the various display elements and the display settings for each d
556. ted using the Data Transfer System DTS Station List Tab The Station List tab provides an overview of the available stations in the selected Station Group As such only a few basic Station attributes name X coordinate Y coordinate Elevation are displayed in this tab These fields may be modified for a selected station or a new station may be created here and the values for these fields may be defined The Station List tab may be used to quickly enter numerous stations and define the basic attributes for each station HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 105 HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects NewDemo F E 5 x Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help CAE ETE wa Station Groups al Station List Data Quern E Station Data Station Data Se aot Station Name x a Description F E Geologic Description 535320 00 4814610 50 E Well Construction 535300 00 4814339 40 E Soil Testing y 535504 70 4814750 20 Soil Sampling 535472 00 4814704 70 E Monitoring Event 535548 40 4814637 30 E Minire Encloration 335459 40 4814704 90 535476 10 4814781 10 ES Geophysics E 535469 50 4814652 70 E Well History 535484 70 4814546 50 Queries A 535626 80 4814652 90 4 H Crosstab 535545 90 4814553 50 3 Maps z 535637 70 4814582 90 535800 00 4814637 50 ji A E 535674 60 481 4800 00 535687 40
557. ter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst item Once the file dialog appears the desired export destination can be selected by choosing one of the file types corresponding to the supported destination listed earlier in this section Properties This menu item will load a window displaying the properties for the current project Once a project is created there are options to modify some of the project settings These are explained below Connectivity This option allows you to check the database connection settings for the current project If the connection is lost or the server is modified the connectivity settings can be redefined in the dialog shown below Set Connectivity ie i x Select Server and Database This dialog displays the server and Server siy bA database hosting your data gas Although the dialog allows all Y Windows NT Integrated Authorization power users to modify the es Nana gt connectivity settings great care DA s must be taken as any improper setting may corrupted your project assword Modify these settings only if the Database demo_vow v database is moved to another server is renamed or user access rights are changed Build Connection String Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security sspi Persist Security Info False Initial Catalog demo_vqw Data Source sryv Use Procedure for Prepare 1 Auto Translate T rue Packet Size 4096 Workstation ID aschalew Use Encryption
558. tersections With Cross Section Lines Se xj M Rivers Sample M Highway ID Sample e 0 T Contour Max TCE Mas CONC Sample o 0 L M CrossSectionLine name x sample 30 OF Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more cross sections or any line type features such as rivers and highways in this dialog it is possible to specify the features to be displayed on the cross section plots The dialog also allows you to set display properties of these features The following options are available e Name Name of the intersecting layer read only e Field Select a field to represent the layer typically Name ID Text e Font Select a font for the label e Symbol Define symbol properties for the selected layer e Angle Define label angle The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view The Symbol column contains the symbol options for the selected layer Double click on the field in this column to load the options shown below Description of Menu Items 307 Point Style Pattern E fra Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x Fil as Border FP Sample x OF Cancel To show the intersections on the Cross Section e Click on the Cross Section tab e From the top Menu Bar click Tools and then Update Cross Section The following image shows the intersections between the cross sections f Map Project Sit
559. text remains visible within the header space Alignment Set the default header alignment to Center Near left or Far right Angle Specify the default text angle You may choose from 0 45 and 90 Color Specify the default text color Font Specify the default font style The Column Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance for all BHLP columns Here you can modify the following settings Column Width e Column Color The Depth frame allows you to set a fixed column depth If you select the Auto checkbox the depth will automatically be adjusted to the depth of the deepest BHLP column The General frame allows you to adjust the default general display settings for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modified e Fit width to page Select this option to fit your BHLP columns to the entire Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter width of the BHLP Viewer Window e Print Scale Factor The default setting of O will fit the BHLP onto your page However using a whole number for the scale factor no decimal or negative numbers will scale the BHLP in the following manner A Print scale factor of 1 100 would mean that 100 units on the BHLP would correspond to 1 unit on the printout I E If your BHLP units are in Feet then 100 Feet measured on the BHLP would correspond to 1 Foot in the actual printed results so on an 8 1 2 by 11 page 100 feet measured on the BHLP would tak
560. th same names exist in the database When importing additional data from child tables and the source files contain only the station names the DTS will search for the appropriate Station IDs in the station table based on station names and map the data to appropriate stations In the case where there are duplicate station names please see the explanation listed in Duplicate Stations on page 211 Import Order NOTE When importing be sure to import data for the parent tables before the child ones For example Stations must be present in the database before you can import chemistry or lithology data for these stations Likewise for soil or groundwater chemistry data you must first define or import the Sys_Sample_codes in the parent table then run through the DTS again to import the sample results into the correct fields How to Map Fields Follow the directions below to map fields in the source table to a destination table Select the Destination Category from the list on the right side of the window Select a Destination Table from the list on the right side of the window Select the Source Database Table from the list on the left side of the window Under the Source Table Click once in the Name column of a blank field across from the destination field where you wish to import the data A list of available fields will appear as seen in the example below Importing Data using the DTS 207 208 Data
561. th the appropriate report file name Currently HydroGeo Analyst requires that all reports be saved under the Reports folder which in turn is created within the project folder Although the Report Manager allows you to open reports from any folder only those saved under the Reports folder of your project will be displayed in the project browser Creating Reports based on a Data Query Follow the directions below to create a report containing a Data Query e Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the project browser 1f no queries are available create a Query using the Query Manager e Execute the Query in order to see the results e Press the Print button ts from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications As in the previous type of report the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved Creating Reports 419 Creating Parameter Query Reports A parameter query forces the report component to display a dialog box that prompts you for criteria You can design a query to prompt you for one piece of information for example a station name or for more than one piece of information for example tw
562. the controls of the active report and facilitates selecting controls for further editing The Report Explorer windows can be accessed by clicking on the Explorer icon f on the toolbar E MainReport Controls placed in the report a header Controls placed in the Station 3 Group header A StationID E Detail e deRptData 3 Controls placed in the detail A section of the report ah PageFooter The explorer provides quick access for selection of controls on the report Selecting a control in the Report Explorer activates the corresponding control on the report This makes the control ready to be formatted or moved to another location The explorer lists at least three nodes under the MainReport node namely e PageHeader refers to the page header for the current report e Detail refers to the section that hosts the details of the report e PageFooter refers to the page footer for the current report Any item placed on the page header and footer of your report will be displayed on all Chapter 11 The Report Editor pages of the report In addition to these sections one or more sections named Group Headers and a corresponding Group Footer sections can be added to the report In the figure depicted above the data on the report 1s grouped by stations That is the data for each station is displayed together Group Headers can have their own header and footer that will be displayed above and below each group
563. the selected source units there will be no conversion and the data will not be imported For this reason it may be necessary to modify the field settings for your database schema before proceeding with the import For more details see Chapter 5 Modifying Fields and View Settings When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 113 114 Import LAS File Step 4 Select coordinate system for the source Mote ee This step allows you to specify Projector Type Projection the coordinate system used for 5 the station inthe date source UTM State planar MAD 1983 UTH Zone 17N 5 elect the appropriate C Geographic C Others Unit MH projection type Select the appropriate projection datum After impor all coordinates wall be commented to aS 1984 fer inbenrial u Next gt Cancel H Help If the data to be imported contains the Well Section then some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed if data is imported to the Stations table Projection Settings Define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HydroGeo Analyst project A detailed desc
564. the dialog with information from the selected data source A list of tables 1f any are available will appear in the Tables combo box e Select the Table that contains the list to be imported e Select the Field column in this table which contains the Values for the list e Select the Field column that contains the Description if necessary e The list items for this field will appear in the preview frame in the lower half of the window e Once satisfied with the content of the list click on the OK button to start importing the list e In the List Editor window press the Save button to save the list items e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 148 for more details 3 4 2 Editing a List The following editing options are available in the List Editor e Delete a list item by selecting it and pressing the x Delete button e Move the list item by selecting it and dragging it up or down to a new position in the list List Editor 147 e Edit the list item by selecting it and making necessary changes e Once the editing is complete click the Save button to save changes 3 4 3 Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager 148 The List Editor can also be launched from the Template Manager The Template Manager allows you to link a selected field to a list of dis
565. the format as desired and click on the OK button Reports that are saved or exported from the report viewer are not directly managed by HydroGeo Analyst and as such will not be listed in the project browser 11 3 Creating and Managing Report Templates The Report Editor contains pre defined templates which allow users to quickly and easily create professional reports Report templates can be edited saved and managed in the Report Editor and new templates may be created and saved for future use This feature allows users to have different report layout options for headers and footers and to share them between two or more reports This allows users to have as many report designs as desired For example one or more report templates can be prepared for each client with the specific header and footer Another advantage of having a report template is that if the header information using a certain template changes the change will automatically be applied to all reports that use the template without the need to reopen the report For example if the client company s telephone number changes the user needs to change only the template instead of changing each report Each time a new report is created previewed or printed it will use the active report s Creating and Managing Report Templates 425 layout unless a template is specified 11 3 1 Creating A Report Template The Report Editor allows you to save the active report s design as a repo
566. the map project About the Interface 257 258 e LineLayer A line symbol indicates a cross section line contour line layer or annotation line e PolygonLayer Polygon shapefile represented by a polygon symbol e TextLayer Text annotation layer represented by a T symbol e Contour Layer Contour line layer e Station Layers A group layer containing several component layers e Boreholes and Monitoring Wells Station group layers e vc_exceeds_1 mg per A data query e CrossSectionLine2 Cross section line layer e Color Shade A color shade layer e Airport_color bmp Georeferenced raster image e WO Stations A station group layer with graduated rendering e DEM_UTM17 A surface DEM layer Grouping Layers Group Layers help organize map layers that share similar characteristics in a map project For example if your map contains a railroad layer and a highway layer you may choose to group these layers into a single group layer called Transportation Network Group Layers behave similarly to other layers within the Layer Manager panel If you turn off the visibility for a group layer the component layers will also turn off You can also move a group layer up or down the layer list change its draw order and ungroup layers as needed Creating a Group Layer To create a Layer Group follow the steps below e Right click anywhere within the Layer Manager panel e From the pop up menu select Create Layer Group N
567. the properties of each field using the Field Property Editor shown below By default the editor is divided into two sections Appearance and Data You can organize the settings in Alphabetical Order by selecting Crosstab Queries 243 244 CE wizara x A Layout Style sheet M Source fields DataCube fields M Inactive fields x dimension fields name Concentration Format ShowPercent False ShowProgress False Totall abel Width 100 Xe e gt Xela Aggregate Sum DisplayE xpression Expression Concentration FieldT ype Both SortOrder Ascending AY dimension fields r Facts fields chemical_name ate xtje gt Xe e gt a gate Determines the object which creates an aggregate function OK Cancel Each property is described below Caption Change the caption of a field item Format Assign a field data output format string For example you can use this property to specify the number of decimal places to show e g Type 0 00 to show values to two decimal places ShowPercent Show field data as percent ShowProgress Represent field data as a progress bar for each cell In order to set this property the ShowPercent property must be enabled Total Label Assign a header for a field total Width Change the cell width of the field Aggregate Assign a data aggregation type for a field This property only applies to the Fact fields The followi
568. the tables that violate the conditions For plots the templates are selected from available Chart templates To activate this feature first select a layer that contains points data 1 e a data query or a station group from the Layer Control When you select the Display Data option from the Layer menu the following dialog will appear 290 Chapter 8 Map Manager Display Data x iW i Sampled Table with YOC exceedences ela x F i Data Settings Display Settinas Ok Cove BB Heb This dialog allows you to manage the various layouts for the map layer In the first column show hide the layout by setting the Visible status Define the Name in the second column In the third you may optionally enter a Description Click on the op Add button to add a new layout In the combo box that appears select either Tabular or Plot shown below Display Type X Please select a display type Tabular Cancel Click on the x Delete button to delete the selected layout Use the button to move the selected layout up Use the button to move the selected layout down Next you must define the settings for the layout Plots For a Plot display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear Description of Menu Items 291 292 Data Settings 4 x Plot Template Choose Data Please choose the plot template SampleT emplate OK Cancel Help In the list cho
569. the view Do the same for the ColorShadeMap layer Boreholes layer from the Layer Manager panel to ensure that this layer is active Chapter 2 Getting Started HINT In order to activate the cross section options a layer that contains Station data must be selected 53 Cross Section Line button from the toolbar Place the mouse cursor near the top left corner of the map and click once with the left mouse button to start the line Se Drag the mouse across the map to the bottom right corner of the map passing in between some of the stations as you draw the line Double click with the mouse near the bottom right corner of the map to finish the line This will launch the dialog shown below CrossSection Line EI Hame Sample Buffer 400 meters Description Sample OK Cancel H Help In this dialog specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description optional The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section type Sample for the line Name type 400m for the Buffer Distance type Sample for the Description OK to accept the Line attributes The Cross Section line will now appear in the Map Manager and will be labeled with the Cross Section Line name In addition a new layer will appear in the Layer Manager panel named CrossSectionLine This is a line shape layer containing the cross section lines for the project Mapping the Data 89 Pad E
570. then scaled and the map extents are calculated NOTE The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid georeferencing points Georeferencing Raster Images If a Raster image is selected from the Layer Import menu a message will appear stating that the image must be georeferenced Click Yes to continue and you will be prompted to save the georeferenced image as a new file Chapter 8 Map Manager Save jhi E Map l c J Data E WaLne new bmp J Selection _ Station wayne E temp bmp E test3 bmp E Test Site Map bmp Cancel Save az Ippe Enter a name for the new image The file will be converted and saved as a bitmap BMP This new name will be used as the map layer name in the Map Manager Click Save to continue and the Georeference window will appear as shown in the following figure EN Select Map Region Be loj x File view Edit Options 32 00 OBER EE Georeference Point 2 points 3 points 3338 E TM X pixels 751 Y pixels 652 OK In order to map the pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have at least two georeference points with known coordinates These georeference points can be defined using the procedure described below Note The real world georeference points must have coordinates that are in the same projection system as the Map Project Map Manager will not make adjustme
571. ther Model Layer Lines ccc eeesseeeesseseeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeees 350 Editine ModelLayers io ol deena guns le 351 Addins MINIDV CLEC ES sti di EERE 352 Lankine Vertices between Model Layers a a dina ts 352 R move Stations from Cross SCCtons ias 353 Querying Cross Section Interpretations ccccccccccsscssssssssssssssscsssssssssssscccccssssseees 353 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section ssccscccccsssssssssscsscccccscccsssscsssssccccssssssees 354 A cog ahaa S E E E E E E A E E EE E AE T 355 APCD OS ssar E E E E A 355 Add Poly tons a a A E E N 356 A A N E Dees 356 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 357 ADout TNE INLET TACE nata A A 357 Working with 3D Explorer sacsccscisssccscescsectevsscccscctsnsenevasvbscseacnessssvassesccasgtecsvesveesccavnesases 358 Positonme the Panels diia 358 WG vane a Panel ao 359 A A A eae E EE eetanastaneene ste 359 Dockine Panels ass 359 Closme Panels ansia da dias 359 Vertical XA Scrolls 359 SD Navigation Lodi A iia 360 BS Ca Set Ine mate as odiosa 360 AMINA MO COMMONS te cect ie deuuts tac hai gt E EAEE 361 MA AE AOU steele Nace ied oan ee Ja meses iS 362 Pume DIOWSCE teneo a a chain cae res en ceienasie caaset ise acorn seen ace vaste O mautebegentactane 363 Recording Animation to A V Mie usa ii teal 364 OpenGL eNA S sa UN ee wea arpa 366 Loadio PLOlCCIS sia plis di ed seanal hagas 366 Display Setna
572. tices on the model layer line being drawn and link them to their respective vertices For instance if there are five vertices on the existing model line layer between the selected first and last vertices six vertices will be created on the current model layer line Linked vertices will move together and can be separated if needed The following figure depicts an example of a model layer pinching out around the middle of the cross section Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor i EEEE i i kk map Project demo project map A Ss File Edit View Tools A 2 a rrvtas 108 Topography ooon Overburden quife Aquitard Main Aquifer 330 Geology Clay Sand Gravel Bedrock 320 310 HydroGeology adsfsadf Snapping between two vertices 300 Elevation m Snapping to end of cross section 290 Mike test33 260 270 280 250 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 Distance m 1373 17 328 91 Snapping to the end of the cross section line If the model layer pinches out from any given point on the cross section to the end of the cross section line the cross section editor can draw the model line from that given point on for you To do this double click on the first vertex The model line will automatically be created for you See the bottom most layer in the
573. ties of each table field e Group tables under logical data categories e Edit table designs define primary keys relationships between tables etc e Save user templates e Export user templates to a stand alone XML file e Create and edit linked fields e Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users e Set visibility of tables and or fields e Setting user level table and or field names display units where applicable and data formats where applicable 5 1 Understanding the Template Manager HydroGeo Analyst comes with a number of standard environmental database structure templates that are currently in use around the world When creating a new database for your project you have the option of either using one of these database templates or creating your own If the latter is selected the template manager can be used to create the new database structure from scratch All database structure templates that come with HG Analyst also come with their respective report and borehole log plot BHLP templates As such if one of the existing database templates is selected during the project creation these templates will be copied to your project by default You can later edit them or even remove them from your project if desired The Template Manager allows you to modify the current user view as well as create an Understanding the Template Manager 181 unlimited number of additional user views For example a
574. tinct values that may be used as values for the field To link a list to a selected field e Select Settings Template Manager or click the Ex button from the toolbar The Template Manager window will load e From the tree view on the left side select the appropriate Data Category and select the appropriate table and the desired field e Locate the View Settings options in the lower half of the window as indicated in the figure below Template Editor Demo_YGW x am Use as project default Field Settings Description E M Desen ption Database Settings 1 Location V name Field name Mx driling_method A Denat allew duplicate values M Y V Elevation Data type p M TOC STRING A Unit category IV depth gt V region _ Hl descripti dd View Settings B V Geologic Descript Elis H V Lithology H V Hydrogeology driling_method H Modelling Default value H features E M Well Constructi E 4 Drilling Protocol Format IV from V to IV diameter ME drilling method Y inclination V azimu t 4 Casing H Screen 4 Annular Fill H V Monitoring Point E 4 Soil Testing 4 Soil Sampling E 4 Monitoring Event E 4 Mining Explorat H V Geophysics IV Well History TF User Category FXAQE I gt Last Change 06 22 2004 9 56 50 4M ES E Help e Select a General List from the Get Values from List comb
575. tings Grid Settings and Styles Each section is described below Report Settings 413 414 Report Settings r T T a dF Top Margin Bottom Margin Left Margin Right Margin Gutter LL Mirror Margins The Page Setup section allows you to set the page margins of your report page Set the Top Bottom Left Right and Gutter margins by using the appropriate vertical scroll bars Margin values can be set in quarter increments 1440 1 inch You may also choose to mirror the margins of facing pages by selecting the Mirror Margins check box Report Settings Paper5ize Default Printer bA width li Height f Printer Default C Portrait C Landscape PaperBin Default Printer k Cancel The Printer Settings section allows you modify the printing options Here you can select the paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box You can manually specify the paper size by using the Width and Height vertical scroll bars The Orientation frame allows you to specify the paper orientation Chapter 11 The Report Editor You may also choose to set the options for Collate Duplex and PaperBin by using the appropriate dropdown list box Selecting Printer Default for any of the printing options will assign the default setting of the selected printer for that particular print option Report Settings M Show Grid I Align Controls to Grid Grid columns 5 Aa Grid rows Ruler
576. tion Coordinate Y e Station ground surface elevation Elevation If plotting stations on a map or cross section is desired then the following fields are required e Station X co ordinate e Station Y co ordinate e Station ground surface elevation Elevation Station coordinates are stored in the Stations Table in latitude longitude format by default However each project may contain its own projection and coordinate system settings so that station locations may be entered and displayed in an alternate format e g UTM State Planar etc These options are available in the Template Editor Stations can be added modified or deleted through the Station List tab The Station List tab displays a limited number of fields for viewing and editing for a more detailed view of each station the Station Data tab must be used the information displayed in HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 101 102 the Stations Table can be found in the Description Data Category within this tab in the Location table as shown below HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects NewDemo eae iol xj Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help aeZl AhtXxXBaAlBRBOOh Fey BOS SMa ws lini Egi Station Groups roject M Monitoring Wells a Boreholes wa Soil Borings M G_Stations a OC_Monitoring_ Wells wi Boreholes_with_plot_data ell clay thicker than 2 m am soil_borings_with_tce_exceedine M Station List
577. tion component currently allows creating complex overlapping Zig zagging interpretations these types of interpretations are not suitable for the purpose of saving and later querying in the database As such the following rules limitations are enforced to avoid saving such results in the database e A given layer may not be allowed to intersect a given station more than twice When this rule is violated HGA will consider the two top most intersection points as defining the layer e All layers in a cross section must be uniquely identified by the layer name HGA may pick the top most layer and ignore all other layers with the same name e If a station is removed from a cross section related saved interpretations contacts are removed as long as this station is not involved in any other cross sections e Ifa layer is deleted from a cross section all related interpretations contacts are removed from all stations that are involved in the cross section as long as this layer does not appear in another cross section for any of the stations involved in the current cross section e Ifa given well appears in more than one cross section interpretation results are updated with interpretations from the cross section that is last updated Model Layers Before drawing model layers the model layer attributes must first be defined in the dialog shown below Model layers can be added deleted or edited in this dialog 338 Chapter 9 Cross Section
578. tion in HGA e querying the interpretation table for any desired surface s or thickness data that can be used for groundwater modeling applications The final interpretation results may be queried for information such as layer thickness at selected station s top elevation s bottom elevation s layer type name and description When you create a Data Query in the Query Builder and expand the Description data category you will see the Interpretation Results table as shown below 7 Query Builder 5 E Ol x Xaaa C Station Group Quern Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields Cross section data Function Expression Alias ey station id id E Description a station x station y y H Location H description_addins station name name Layer_Description Layer_Name Top_elevation Thickness Interpretation Interpretation_Results layer_description Interpretation_Results layer Station ID Interpretation_Results top_elevation Station Name Interpretation_Results thickness x i Interpretation_Results interpretation Y Layer Description Layer Name X IV Map and BHLP Ready IV Use current projection system Top elevation ESR eee RR PRENSA NE CREDA ANN PRAT CON Thickness Conditions Interpretation Expression Operator Expression Geologic Description Te os y a A Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics y FSource Condit
579. tions on page 386 below To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A contour map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Contour map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Isoline Map Display Settings Once the Isoline map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below Color fill will fill the space between contour lines with a solid color where the color between lines is scaled according to the lower contour line value Line properties Setting Value Name Contour map 3 Iw ml ml 39339 7852 0 0 Slice SEE E Color from palette r L 1 Solid E Huuto intervals Custom Values Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer e Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type e Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color e Width is the contour line width e Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals Contour map 3 Iw C C 39339 7852 0 0 ElLine properties El uto intervals Visible e 40000 Lower limit 0 500 H E
580. tions The Edit options shown in the following Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor screenshot can be used to add edit and delete text lines and polygons Save Delete View 30 Copy From Geo Layers Properties Model Label Update Erosssection Show Intersecting Info Annotations Edit Text Edit Line Edit Polygon Move Up Move Down Epa Settings To add an annotation select the appropriate option from the list to enter Edit mode then click the corresponding button from the toolbar You can then user your mouse to select the location to add your annotation After adding an annotation you will need to click on the corresponding button again to add another annotation of the same type NOTE If you are adding editing deleting one annotation type you must right click on the selected layer and either switch between annotation types or de select the current annotation type otherwise you will remain in Edit mode for the selected annotation type Upon deselecting switching annotation types you will be prompted to save your changes Add Text To add text e Select the Edit Text option from the pop up menu e Click on the A Text button on the toolbar e Click on the desired text location in the cross section window e Enter the text in the Input text window that appears Once a text box has been created it can be moved by clicking and dragging or edited by double clicking on the existing text Text can be deleted by
581. to Back Move the selected item to the back of the overlay Align Left Aligns selected controls to the same left coordinate of the last selected control Center Align Aligns selected controls to the same center coordinate of the last selected control Right Align Aligns selected controls to the same right coordinate of the last selected control Align Top Aligns selected controls to the same top coordinate of the last selected control Align Middle Aligns selected controls to the same middle coordinate of the last selected control Align Bottom Aligns selected controls to the bottom coordinate of the last selected control Chapter 11 The Report Editor HL Align to Grid Aligns the selected controls to the closest grid point os Size to Same Width makes all selected controls the same width as the last selected control O Os Size to Same Height makes all selected controls the same height as the last selected control Size to Same makes all selected controls the same height and width as the last selected control del Lock Controls Locks all controls on the designer so that they will not be resized or moved from their original location 11 2 2 Toolbox options for General Tools This section 1s designed to help familiarize you with the different options available in the toolbox for various tools The Toolbox 1s dynamic and changes depending on the object currently active in the Report Designer The vital options of se
582. to fit the text size but the Box color and Box depth can be customized The Color Palette The color Palette is used to customize the range of colors used to represent the values of selected model elements for each display object this includes the color maps isolines and isosurfaces The color Palette settings will govern the color scaling used on each display object The color Palette settings can be modified by selecting one of 382 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Display Settings the display elements and clicking the button in the Palette field of the Display Settings table The Palette window will appear as shown in the figure below 4 Palette xj 0 Value 399574 5 a l COLOR Reset Change color O a OF Cancel The default color setting contains a gradation of seven colors ranging from a dark blue at the minimum value to a dark red at the maximum value This range of colors and the values associated with each will be reflected in the Color Legend for the selected display element Changing Color Values The parameter values associated with each color can be changed by typing in a new value or by clicking on one of the color boxes beneath the color bar and dragging the arrow to a new location on the color bar Changing Colors The color for each color box can be modified by selecting the color box and then clicking the Change color button or by c
583. to start Cancel Clicking on the Next button displays the second dialog requesting the MS Access database name that will be used as a source for the reports to be imported Provide the database name by clicking on the Open Database button to the right of the text box or alternately type in the name including the full path 1z Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start ME Source Database v WB Projects Demo_Project Report SampleReport mdb gt Open database Cancel lt Back Next gt Import Reports from MS Access 427 Click on the Next button to display the next dialog listing all reports that are available in the selected database Select the desired report and click on the Next button to proceed lq Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start i Select the report that you want to convert Database Employee Sales by Country a Invoice Li st of available Products by Category Reports Sales by Category reports 1n the Sales by Category Subreport Sales by Year selected database Sales by Year Subreport Sales Totals by Amount Summary of Sales by Quarter Summary of Sales by Year Options Convert Finish Cancel lt Back Next gt The dialog shown below will be displayed It allows you to specify some settings that will alter the converted report The default values are fine unless a change is desired Convert
584. to store your data The tables will be Environmental metric created based ona selected Database Structure Preview ma ne the Tables Fields Please select create a template browse through the tables and fields that will be created and click on the Next button to proceed Location description_addins Geologic Description Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features Well Construction Drilling Protocol Casing Screen y Description _ Copy All Stations to Project lt Back Next gt Cancel Help In this window select from one of the pre defined Database templates for the new project The template contains the necessary tables fields relationships linked lists and reports for storing and interpreting data in the HydroGeo Analyst database The following templates are available in both imperial and metric length units Creating a New Project 31 e Environmental e US EPA Region 2 e US EPA Region 5 MOE WWIS Ontario Ministry of Environment Water Well Information System Environmental metric template from the Templates combo box for this example Next button to create the project dependent tables for this database 2 1 3 Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location 32 The third step in the Project wizard contains general project information as seen in the figure below Project Wizard 0 x Step 3 Provide Project Location Settings Project Name SamplePro
585. ton allows selecting all stations within a polygon that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Ellipse button allows for selecting all stations within an ellipse that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select Along Line button allows for selecting all stations within a buffer distance of a line that 1s drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select All button selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select None button de selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations 1s visible and selected from the Layer Manager and at least one station has been 261 selected Cross Section Line button allows the location and buffer distance for cross section lines to be defined This feature 1s active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager fall Show Create Cross Section button allows a cross section corresponding to a selected cross section line
586. torno Event a Mining Exploration Map Select the appropriate Geophysics matching field from destination Well Histon in the right Click on the Map button Mapped fields wall then be added to the Preview grd ai the batharm af the window To remove the mapping for a selected field select the appropriate row in the gid then click on the Delete Mapping button Location Location Y resistviy_oh depth resistvty_oh resistivity toto tea oo The next step in the data transfer operation 1s to match a source table with a destination table You may map the entire LAS file including the Well Section or just downhole parameters if you do not include the well section you must have the appropriate station already created in your HGA project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current HGA project If one 1s found you may proceed Otherwise you must include the well section or terminate the import routine and return to HGA and create the appropriate station using the same station name as found in the LAS source If duplicate station names are found in the HGA database there will be a prompt to select the appropriate station The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames e The Source well section found on left side of the window and Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e The Destination HGA tables and fields on the right side of the windo
587. ttomE nity a Caption Bottom el E Description Delete Entity D ataField to Select Text Entity or Image Entity from the combo box depending on the type of data you wish to display 454 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter A new entity will be added to the Settings frame Using the combo box provided select the field that contains the value or image you wish to display DataT able Moisture Content E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField From E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField extE ntity Caption Description DataF eld Settings The Depth Interval based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Interval node from the BHLP Settings window Interva Jw Visible Pattern Symbol Description e Visible e visible Width 40 Use numeric format Image Draw Mode Tiled be Format General E Humber of digits Help Apply OF Cancel The Interval frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button see page 447 The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column Outline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check b
588. type Gravel Close Export Y Print Y Help In some cases the BHLP may not be able to identify the default data source for the selected column type and as a result there may not be a preview In this event you can Designing a Borehole Log Plot 475 manually select the data source or query results for the column using the Data Table Queries property In the case of Lithology select the Lithology Entities node as shown in the previous screenshot Specify Data Source First select if you want to use a Data table or a Query as the Data Source Then choose the respective table or data query from the list provided in the combo box next to this property as indicated in the following screenshot All fields from the selected table or query will be available for mapping to the required data fields in the column Update each Data Field as necessary The Data Fields required for a Lithology column are circled in the following figure Borehole Log Designer Sample a Oj x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 ES Design E E5 Lithology E LithologyEntities Caption DataField Caption Description DataField TextEntity Caption DataField Image Image soll_type_image Text soil_type Lithology Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Gravel Close Export Y Print
589. type i e text line point polygon These are called annotation layers For example to draw polygons on the map a new map layer with the type Polygon must first be created using the Layer New menu option or if a polygon layer already exists it has to be set to edit mode To add text to a map layer a new layer with the type Text must first be created using the Layer New menu option The following annotation options are available Polygon Provides the option to draw a polygon This option is available only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Rectangle Provides the option to draw a rectangle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Circle Provides the option to draw a circle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Description of Menu Items 299 Line Provides the option to draw a line This option is only available if a line shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Point Provides the option to add points to the map layer This option is only available if a point shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Text Provides the option to add text labels to a map layer This option is only available if a text layer is selected and set for editing Information Provides a dialog containing information about the selected station or other objects such as
590. ubsurface data mapping and assessing spatial information and reporting site data AquiferTest Pro AquiferTest Pro designed for graphical analysis and reporting of pumping test and slug test data offers the tools necessary to calculate an aquifer s hydraulic properties such as hydraulic conductivity transmissivity and storativity AquiferTest Pro is versatile enough to consider confined aquifers unconfined aquifers leaky aquifers and fractured rock aquifers conditions Analysis results are displayed in report format or may be exported into graphical formats for use in presentations AquiferTest Pro also provides the tools for trends corrections and graphical contouring water table drawdown around the pumping well AquaChem AquaChem is designed for the management analysis and reporting of water quality data AquaChem s analysis capabilities cover a wide range of functions and calculations frequently used for analyzing interpreting and comparing water quality data AquaChem includes a comprehensive selection of commonly used plotting techniques to represent the chemical characteristics of aqueous geochemical and water quality data as well includes PHREEQC a powerful geochemical reaction model GW Contour The GW Contour data interpolation and contouring program incorporates techniques for mapping velocity vectors and particle tracks GW Contour incorporates the most commonly used 2D data interpolation techniques for the groundwate
591. ular fill nevy riult cr D Program Files HydroGeoB ase drilling type D Program Files HydroGeoB ase open list D Program Files HudroGeoB ase ample_Stations E Help Cancel e Select the Excel file once more e Click OK to complete the procedure e The file will then be loaded into the appropriate module in HydroGeo Analyst 528 Appendices 15 4 Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 15 4 1 Inverse Distance The Inverse Distance Squared method is a very fast and efficient weighted average interpolation method The weighting factor applied to the data depends on the distance of the point from the grid cell and is inversely proportional to the distance squared Consequently the greater the distance the data point is from the grid node the smaller the influence it has on the calculated value The Inverse Distance Squared method for interpolation may generate patterns similar to a bull s eye surrounding points of observations Selecting a larger number of nearest neighboring data points may smooth this effect but if the bull s eye pattern is undesirable then other methods of interpolation like Natural Neighbor and Kriging are recommended The Interpolator Options for the Inverse Distance Squared method is described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordi
592. uments e Application Level Security Document ALSD used to control access to high level features such as managing databases creating new projects and the user access management e Project Level Security Document PLSD used to control access to individual projects as well as the data and modules within this project The settings for the ALSD are encrypted and saved in the ALSD whi file which is copied to your HGA installation directory during the installation default is Program Files HGAnalyst The ASLD contains one default user group Administrators and one user Admin with no password After installation the Administrator can launch HGA login with the default user credentials and customize the default Administrator user and Administrators user group NOTE At least one user must belong to the Administrator user group at all times If you are working on a network and you want other users to have the same ALSD settings that you have defined then these users must have the same ALSD whi file in their HGA installation folder Simply copy the file to the target machine and overwrite when prompted The settings for the PLSD are saved in the PLSD table which is an encrypted table and is created for each HGA project 4 1 3 Managing Users and Groups 158 The User Access Level Management UALM module is loaded from the main window of HGA by selecting Settings Manage User Access Levels from the main menu If you load the
593. unches a dialog that allows setting font details Left Align Aligns selected text on the left margin UUI Center Align Centers selected text Report Designer Window 397 398 Right Align Aligns selected text on the right margin cn it Bulleted List Formats the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list ity tf Outdent Outdents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list IF tf Indent Indents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list ea Background color Sets the background color of the selected control Text Color Sets the forecolor of the selected text ES i Line Color Sets the line color of the selected control rae Line style Sets the line style of the selected control H Border Sets the border style of the selected control General Tools To insert any of the items listed below into your report select the item from the toolbar and in the designer window draw a box in the position where you wish that object to appear ls Select Selects a control object on the Designer An Label Allows you to put headings and labels in your report ab Field Insert it and link to a data field to display specific data from the project Field also allows you to put text in your report Chapter 11 The Report Editor yey a Check box Add a check boxes to a report can be used to create check lists in your report Image Add logos maps and other i
594. unches the Cross Section editor and displays the last edited cross section if any Data Import button launches the DTS for importing data into the project Data Export button launches the DTS for exporting data from the project 23 1 6 4 Project Browser The project browser tree lists the following items Saal Station Groups al Project e Station Groups al Monitoring Wells n a Boreholes e Station Data Data categories ag Soil Borings gt ll 0_ Stations Queries i ll clay thicker than 2 m e Crosstab all tee gt 10 mg kg GE Station Data gt Maps H E Queries gt H E Crosstab e Cross Sections F e e E Cross Sections Reports ogg Reports e 3D Views ASS SDView 1 8 Borehole Logs e Borehole Logs ak Plats e Plots These items may be part of any project Each item is organized as a node in the tree view with one or more items under each node If there is no item under a given node there will be no branches available Station Groups The Station Groups node contains the Station Groups in your HydroGeo Analyst project By default all projects will contain a station group named Project that lists all stations in the database belonging to the project All station groups that are created for a project are listed under the Station Groups node below the Project node Clicking on a Station Group node will load the Station List tab and display a limited number of columns of data for the stations belonging to that group Addition
595. user name then you must modify the Project Level Security Document PLSD to setup the desired access levels These options are available under Settings Manage User Access Levels NOTE If an administrator password is lost it cannot be retrieved You are recommended to keep the project administrator password in a safe place or to create multiple project administrators for multiple users as a backup When you open a Map Project for the first time you may encounter the following error Error in getting information for project 1 The water level table is missing or doesn t meet the HGA specification This error occurs because water level and screen support has been added to the cross section editor and this table was not mapped in Templates from v 1 0 To fix this problem follow the steps below e In the main window load the Template Manager Settings Template Manager e Load the Profile Settings click on the Set Profile Settings button from the top toolbar e Select the Water Level tab e Select an appropriate table for the Water Level info default 1s water_level e Select an appropriate field for the Level type default 1s water_level_remark e Save and close the Template then re open the map project NOTE Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages however caused if project data has not been securely and independently backed up You are strongly encouraged to frequently back up your H
596. utes Click OK to continue or click Modify where you can coarsen the grid size in order to improve loading and processing times Modify A surface file with a large grid size may take several minutes to load depending on the performance capabilities of your computer For example a DEM surface file that 1s approximately 9mb may take up to 10 minutes to load If the grid size for the selected surface file exceeds 300 000 nodes the message shown above will display and you can choose to accept the original grid size or modify its dimensions to lower the resolution and decrease the loading time To accept the original grid size click Ok Otherwise click the Modify button to specify a new grid size The following dialog will be shown x Mew size Original size HC o Em HC ol 1000 NFiows 308 NFiows 1400 OF The Ncols and NRows fields represent the number of columns and number of rows for the surface file respectively These fields will contain recommended values for the new grid size However you can manually define a new grid size by entering the desired values for these fields Click Ok once the new grid size has been defined The surface layer will then be generated and added to the Layer Manager panel Load HGA Data This menu item provides options for loading HydroGeo Analyst data as a new map layer The data source may be a list of stations from a HydroGeo Analyst Station Group or those resulting
597. ve icon on the runtime report designer An existing report will be saved using the same file name When saving new reports your will be prompted for a file name Saving a Report As To save a report with a different name and or as a report template click on PJ Save As icon on the Report Designer s toolbar You will be prompted for a file name and type The report or report template will be saved to the Reports sub folder of the folder storing your project related information The report or report template will also be saved in the project s database and will be made available in the appropriate node in the project browser The report or template can be deleted from the project browser if you choose not to store it in the database 11 2 4 Exporting generated reports Once a report has been generated 1t can be exported to various formats as well as being saved in the Report Editor s native format The native format stores reports with an 424 Chapter 11 The Report Editor RTF file extension To export a report click on the a Export Report icon on the toolbar A dialog similar to that shown in the figure below will be displayed Report Export Select the export File Format options Export Format Export Options Filename Acrobat Version fi Acrobat 3 JPG Quality 75 ka No Embedding Fonts Select the desired export format provide a file name and path specify settings relevant to
598. ve EINES cnica ironico laminadas lirica 323 A ER 326 Chance ees RS 6 Ll awe perenne ere eames cena ier ee erm aenrie str a cert vn trea eer en renee non 328 Change Vertical LAXIS a in aGinckes cute a ata aio 328 Change Vertical Exaggeration ein Genea a doen E EEA T 329 CODY W OW a asa E A o 329 SA EE E A A ene 329 FOIE Ei n T E E O N 329 ZOOM MIN nadae rn la diarios 330 LOMO E E E E 330 Previous ENIE OU aiar AON E A AT E A iSde 330 A E uses E E E A eeteaecaeapia 330 VOW ID ica 330 O 331 Preview A A eteecepineonnaen a a ost 331 TOO od 331 OUI ONS iia bid 331 Limitations aria o tits 338 Mode IL ZA CS anormal srta cisco 338 Update LOS SSC CON 55 1 spec aster ice aed aoen sonuaninn oda 340 CEOSS SCHON MO acacia 340 Display BHEE Su idos 340 Help einc a r a ee added a ea liebe eld Math ads 341 COMO S a AEA 341 Creating the Cross SCHON A A 341 Drawing Cross Section Interpretations sssssceccccossssscececococssseccecocossssscceeocosssssseeeesoo 342 Load SUTTACE ICA CLS cacao lor dcr mid 342 Creolosic Way ef Interpretations A del eaidn 343 PGES Tay CHS naaa 345 Hydrogeolosic Layer Interpretations sorene ean vicar 346 Translating Geologic Interpretations into Hydrogeologic Interpretations ccccccncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 346 Model Layer Interpretations alas 347 Detinins Model Layer a A eee oes 347 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Drawing Model Interpretation Layers ii idune a eee aati 348 Snapping Vertices to O
599. view tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the window below Query Builder Xa HEA Station Group Quern Data Query Select a Query Toc Exceeds 320m y Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Cene Geophysics Well History Source Condition Project Design SOL View Preview SELECT t0 id AS id t0 x as x t0 y as y t0 name as name tO toc as toc FROM Station as t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID WHERE t0 toc gt 320 AND PStation ID 1 10 00 Y MOM qn 80 5575956823942 80 5658716930292 80 5481372487996 80 5689553863083 80 5596308869504 80 5537873728565 80 5496881 242797 80 5691857577891 80 5575320604261 80 5616076993997 80 550964509041 80 5613306964768 80 557669897809 80 5672792095427 80 554 7642005826 80 5574207847192 80 5459026865231 80 5595532076244 80 5613609731897 80 559577967353 80 5613609731897 43 4749200273619 GB01 43 4744943279344 GB02 43 4770413777749 GB03 43 4777916718678 GBO4 43 4753708962492 GBO5 43 4816548678084 GB06 43 4750729468892 GBO 43 4751443684377 GB08 43 4821142327003 GB09 43 4751191676957 GB10 43 4824596079935 GB11 43 4812779610372 GB12 43 4781366586241 GB13 43 4803200569183 GB14 43 4840015977549 GB15 43 4
600. w Hydroten Analyst Sampie Ce Prograra Files HGAnalya 0 Projects Denn Sample x Protect Cdt Vew Reid Getting Tae Hep GA ft BAF i Hl BOs Aaa io 01 500 pais Y 7 00 Ao SA Y SHIA 10 24 10 44110 5351 11 600 41013600 30 430 10 439 10 E E 4 Sea 350 50 251 50 Ei a 45011747 A al 0 51 00 5 5600 rw 40 50 41 50 Petal ib selected i 0 As each station is added to the database it is assigned a unique station ID value The station ID for the selected station can be seen in the task bar in the Station List window an example is circled above for station OW 1 the station ID is 6 The station ID is the primary key it is required in all source tables during import so that data can be Chapter 2 Getting Started matched to the appropriate station If your source tables do not contain station ID s you may use the station names and HGA will map the data to the appropriate station ID Next you will enter additional data for one of the new stations BH1 from the Station List then Station Data tab The Station Data tab provides the interface for viewing entering detailed data for an individual station There are several Data Categories available in HydroGeo Analyst Data Categories are provided to enable logical grouping of your tables A Data Category may be selected from the combo box at the top of the window or from the Station Data node in the project browser By default the Description data category will be displa
601. w The Source frame which contains the data to be imported can be expanded on the left side of the window If the field names in the source are identical to those in the destination then the fields will be matched automatically For all others you must map the fields using the procedure below The Destination frame contains the HGA database schema all tables and fields under their appropriate data categories From this frame select a Category then a Table from this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Mapping Mapping fields from the LAS file to the HGA database is described below Select one field from the source file in the left frame Select the appropriate matching field from destination in the right by expanding the appropriate data category and table Click on the Map button Mapped fields will then be added to the Preview grid at the bottom of the window Repeat these steps for additional fields To remove the mapping for a selected field Select the appropriate row in the Preview grid Click on the Delete Mapping button Units Due to the flexible nature of the LAS file there may exist one or more parameters with units that are not supported in HGA as such unit conversion will not be possible during the import Where the unit categories and units exist HGA will attempt to do unit conversion and import the data If the destination field does not support
602. want to remove then click on the x Delete button at the top of the window Saving and Exporting 515 14 5 3 Export Plot Page to Graphics File To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot page design node in the tree and select Export Plot Page to Image from the pop up menu The image can be saved to the following graphics file formats BMP JPG TIF EMF GIF PNG Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save 14 5 4 Copy Plot to Clipboard This option is available for individual plots in the design To copy the selected plot to the windows clipboard right mouse click on the plot name in the tree or right mouse click on the plot in the viewer and select Copy to Windows Clipboard from the pop up menu You can then insert the plot into a graphics or word processing application for further modifications 14 5 5 Export Plot Page to Document To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot design in the tree and select Export from the pop up menu The plot page design can be saved as an XML file 14 5 6 Printing Click on the Print button in the lower right corner to send the current plot view to your printer 516 Chapter 14 Plotting Appendices 15 1 Appendix A HydroGeo Analyst File Types HydroGeo Analyst uses two types of files to manage users settings of the software and the projects its managing The first file named as HGB WHT is used to stor
603. where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simultaneously Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Print plots in a report single or multiple pages Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst e Save plot settings as templates for re use e Export plots to graphics format or copy plots to Windows clipboard Application and Project Management User Access Level Management e Manage access rights on an application and project level e Application Level used to control permissions to features such as creating new projects and deleting existing ones and e Project level used to control access to individual projects and the various modules e g Data access maps queries BHLP Template Manager etc e Create and manage user groups i e create edit delete user groups and add remove edit users in to existing user groups e Project administrator can assign access rights to User Groups for each object Data Management Maps Cross Sections etc e Set user ID for Users names description and access passwords e Enforcement of access levels to each user group as per the specified security document e Store Users and User Groups in database templates for re use in future projects GIS Map Manager e Add or remove stations from existing cross sections e Displa
604. wing items e Property Toolbox provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain e Toolbar provides multiple buttons for functions in the designer Explorer allows you to browse through the controls that are placed on the currently opened report It facilitates selecting a control for further editing e Layout window provides the interface for designing the report e Fields allows you to select one or more data fields for displaying data Simply drag and drop the selected field into the desired section of the report 11 2 1 Report Designer Toolbars The figure below shows a closer view of the toolbars used in the Report Designer window IESG HiO eso N S e M PTO EFEC e NS a ei Ha AAM 1 ul IL ul ES Pa i E m al 33 The following sections describe the toolbar buttons of the designer window Main Toolbar E New Report Allows you to create a new report amp Report Wizard Allows you to create a new report using the report wizard e Import MS Access Reports Allows you to import reports that are created in MS Access Cu Open Report Allows you to open an existing report Report Designer Window 395 z Save Report Allows you to save the active report H Save Report As Allows you to save the active report with another name and or format i e as a report template if desired ER Page Setup
605. with the new data refresh the layer or cancel the operation When displaying stations from the Stations List grid you have the option of selecting one or more stations to be displayed on the map If no records are selected but the cursor is located within the Stations List grid then all displayed records will be included on the map For more details on the Map Manager please see Chapter 8 Map Manager 3 2 5 Settings The Settings menu item provides options for modifying various HG Analyst project and component properties Each menu item is described below Template Manager The Template Manager provides options for modifying the database settings The Es button in the toolbar can also be used to load the Template Manager For more details please see Chapter 5 Template Manager List Editor This menu item loads the List Editor which provides options to set add and or delete items in a list table The button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see the List Editor section in this chapter Material Specifications This menu item loads the Material Specifications Editor which provides options for the material soil and geological formation specification that is currently used by the Project The oS button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see the Material Specifications Editor section 1n this chapter Manage User Access Level This menu item loads the User Access Level Ma
606. wser where each new query will appear as a new node Using the Query Builder it 1s possible to create two types of queries e Station Group Queries and e Data Queries Each query type is discussed later in this chapter Additionally once a query is created it is possible to generate a CrossTab Query using the query data Crosstab Queries are discussed in section 7 8 on page 241 7 1 About the Interface The Query Builder may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Tools gt Query Builder from the main menu e In the toolbar click on the E Query Builder OR e In the Query branch of the Project Browser right click on an existing query and select New or Edit The Query Builder window is shown below This display shows the options for a Data Query About the Interface 219 220 Source Display Toolbar Fields 7 Query Builder Query DAR a yP Station Group Query Data Query Design SQL View Preview Display Fields 15 x Select a Query Query OC_Exceeds_320m F List Expression station id station station y y station name name y station toc TOC X Function Chemistry_S ample Chemistry_Results sys_sample_code Name sample_date chemical_name Available Fields lb ye J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system result_unit conc_ppm reporting_detection_limit rdl_ppm
607. xit the program return to the HydroGeo Analyst window and Project gt Exit Chapter 2 Getting Started Using HydroGeo Analyst The following topics will be discussed in this chapter HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts e Introduction e Station Types e Stations Table e Station Groups e Data Categories e Data Entry HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar e Project e Edit e View e Record e Settings e Tools e Help Finally a description of the major components which make up the HydroGeo Analyst package 1s provided These components simplify the task of managing analyzing and visualizing the data stored in the database and include e Template Manager e List Editor e Material Specifications Editor e Project Manager e Data Transfer System DTS e Query Builder e Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e 3D Explorer e Report Editor e Borehole Log Plot BHLP Designer 99 e Unit Converter 3 1 HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 3 1 1 Introduction 100 HydroGeo Analyst is designed to manage databases with any structure and any level of referential integrity constraints As such a project database is not limited in the number of tables it may contain nor in the relationship between the tables A HydroGeo Analyst database is designed to store any type of environmental data Most environmental data is inherently spatial as samples and observations are taken at specific locations in the map coordina
608. y or the interpolated value only f x y Note This has no effect on the actual contour output and can be ignored 15 4 2 Natural Neighbor 530 The Natural Neighbor method Watson 1994 is based on the Thiessen polygon method used for interpolating rainfall data The grid node for interpolation is considered a new point or target for the existing data set With the addition of this point the Thiessen polygons based on the existing points are modified to include the new point The polygons reduce in area to include the new points and the area that is taken out from the existing polygons is called the borrowed area The interpolation algorithm calculates the interpolated value as the weighted average of the neighboring observations where the weights are proportional to the borrowed areas The Natural Neighbor method is valid only with the convex hull of the Thiessen polygon formed by the data points and values outside the hull extrapolation should be used with caution The Natural Neighbor interpolation scheme may be visualized as a taut rubber sheet stretched to satisfy all the data points The interpolated value at any location is a linear combination of all Natural Neighbors of that location and the resulting surface is continuous with a slope that is also continuous Combining the gradients or slopes with the linear interpolation provides results that are more smooth and may anticipate the peaks and valleys between data Singul
609. y Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField to E DiameterEntity Caption Diameter Description Diameter DataField diameter ImageEntity Caption Image Description Image DataField ima TextEntity Caption Text Description Text DataField material X xl e Define color for the casing cap and mount NOTE In order to see the well casing and screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities e Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well casing on the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that contains an image e Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the casing on the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that is a string and contains the descriptive information on the casing type material e IDEntity select the field that contains the Casing ID e ParentID use this option if you want to display well casings nested within another casing or on their own You must select a field from the casing table that 1s field type double and contains values for the parent casing ID SortBy use this option if you want well casings to be ordered in a particular fashion on the BHLP You must select a field from the casing table that is field type double and 460 C
610. y Builder XHA Station Group Quern Data Query Select a Query chart tvoc_ Description Geologic Description well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring E vent Design SOL View Preview sample_date SELECT t0 name 45 name t1 sample_date as sample_date t1 result_value as result_value FROM Station 4S t0 RIGHT JOIN SStation ON t0 1D SStation SID LEFT JOIN chem_test_results0 45 t1 ON t0 1d tl Station WHERE SStation ID 1 T a lt a M Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History the RR GE DE Source Condition Station Groups y Monitoring Wells 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 m E 2000000000000 0O00O00oO0o0Oo Rows 115 Time 0 0 0 30 Close Help The query will return all records containing a sample date and result value in the Monitoring Wells station group In this example there are 115 records 5 samples collected from each of the 23 monitoring wells The Query Builder may now be closed Close Yes to save the query The next step is to execute the query in HGA and send this to the Report Editor Queries nod
611. y corrections to the mapping The data is checked against the following conditions e Proper Station Locations e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format WGS 1984 for internal use regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this wndow displays the converted station co ordinates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in any projection system desired At the top of the window each tab represents a different database table containing one or more mapped fields Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the preview window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the Accept button To reject the selected records click on the xl Reject button HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 115 116 Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below Information a O records were updated and UL 44 records were inserted To close the import routine and return to HGA Analyst OK button in the confirmation dialog then Close button at the bottom of the window MON Data This option allows for importing data from a MON file a format generated from datalogger monitoring software suc
612. y station data according to their specific interval of values You have the option of specifying the color scheme and or the symbol that represents the station To use the Graduated Renderer select Renderer from the Layer menu click the op Add button and choose Graduated renderer from the available list The following dialogue will allow you to compose a set of symbols for different value intervals Graduated Renderer Mame Enter renderer name here Field Name ELEVATION Classify Min 332 0000 Max 346 0000 C 334 8 332 334 6 C 337 6 334 8 337 6 a 340 4 337 6 340 4 C 343 2 340 4 343 2 C 346 343 2 346 x amp 2 0 Ramp OF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field based on the values from which you want to classify your data Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals Clicking on the symbol beside each interval will load the standard Point Style dialog allowing you to choose a specific symbol and or color for each interval See Properties on page 264 Color may also be specified as a spectrum using the Ramp function Color Rampe PA tee Start Color End Color Start Size 5 End Size 5 OF Cancel 280 Chapter 8 Map Manager You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying d
613. y summary results on map in a tabular format e modify display properties of table color style fields e define conditions and highlight values that violate a specified value or a value from another field e g useful for highlighting contaminant exceedences Cross Section Editor e Remove wells from cross sections e Create new annotation layers text line polygon this allows adding text labels shapes or lines that can that can represent faults e Improved data management for cross section interpretations e Interpretations are saved to the database e Interpretation results are now linked to the stations that were selected for the cross section these stations along with their interval data are saved to the database e Interpretation results and the wells and corresponding interval data can be retrieved later using Query Builder e Display borehole log plots BHLP directly on cross sections e g display What s New in HydroGeo Analyst 5 Geophysical plots on the cross section to assist in the interpretation Borehole Log Plotter e Print borehole log plots to a user defined scale when a report is generated e Use queries as data sources for depth interval or plot columns provides for flexible data sources e Reorder columns by dragging and dropping in the designer view e Allow zooming into any specified interval of a BHLP e Added BHLP designs templates that are widely used around the world e US Army Corps of Engineers e S
614. y will be loaded as a default Each table in the selected category will be displayed in a separate tab under this tab Each of these tabs displays data from corresponding tables filtered for the Station selected at the top of the window To change the active station simply select a new station from the combo box above the grid Category selection HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects NewDemo Project Edit View Record Settings Tools iaea stitx8 amp B Station selection Se SD E Ml Station Groups a Project Data a Monitoring Wells 4 Boreholes M Soil Borinas Select StatiWn x m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 536212 69 481 4030 00 323 50 324 50 a W0_Stations a UC_Monitoring_Wells odeling features y soil_type Consister Structure M Boreholes_with_plot_dal ail clay thicker than 2 m a soil_borings_with_tce_e 5 Station Data El Queries E Crosstab E 2 Maps Cross Sections Reports 3DView 2 Borehole Logs E Plots Tables Loading options Load All Incremental Coarse Gravel Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Fine to med sanc Gravel i Gravel Fine Sand Fine sand Silt Silty clay with tra x Station Groups Data Loading Options When working with environmental data it is common that you
615. ydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects NewDemo ES Ge 5 x Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help aezZ Sh t xBAaAl RGCHR BA ada iin wi Station Groups M Station List E Data Query S Station Data Station Data Data Category Es Description 7 Description y Select Station x m Y m Elevation m TOC m E Geologic Description hie WOT y 535320 00 481 4610 50 330 80 331 80 E Well Construction a Soil Testing E Soil Sampling e S Monitoring Event Epes A Mining Exploration Monitoring Event El Geophysics deh daa Well History Well Histor E Queries TO E Crosstab Total Depth Maps Cross Sections Reports i Station Type Observation Well Depth to Bedrock NULL e e e e e 3DView Borehole Logs Plots Loading options Load All C Incremental x Description After a Data Category has been selected the appropriate tables and fields belonging to this category will be displayed in the Station Data tab The following is a complete list of the data categories provided in HydroGeo Analyst along with some of the data entities that may be linked to each category e Description e g station name location coordinates elevation site etc e Geologic Description e g lithology soil properties hydrogeologic properties etc e Well Construction e g drilling protocol annula
616. yed and the Location table will be activated for this station Selecting a new Data Category will display all the available tables and fields belonging to the selected category The following is a summary of the Data Categories included in HydroGeo Analyst along with some of the tables and fields Data Category Tables and Fields Description Station name world coordinates elevation TOC elevation Geologic Description Soil description e g from split spoon soil sampling and drilling Well Construction Well casing intervals packing depths drilling method etc Alteration Mineralization Structure Samples Down Hole Survey Down Hole Geophysics Geophysics Conditions Gamma Neutron 64 in E log 16 in E log Density Well History Well installation owner permit to take water decommissioning etc User Category User defined category which may contain any other data types not covered by the previous categories eg Surface Water Air Quality etc Data Management 37 38 The example below illustrates how to enter Lithology data in the Geologic Description category for several stations Example Entering Lithology Data Ensure that the Station Data tab is still selected and BH1 is the selected station Geologic Description from the Data Category combo box M Station List BR Data Query Station Data Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m H1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00
617. ys all stations in the Destination in your project database whose names are the same as the station selected on the left Stations will be sorted by ID in ascending order In the right side of the table you can select only one station to match to the station selected on the left side The left grid will contains the column Operations that will display combo boxes for each row The combo boxes contain three options e Append Import the station as a new station in the destination table e Update Map the correct station ID in the destination table to a Station name in the source table e Reject Reject the station The DTS will not import rejected stations By default the operation will be set to Append i e duplicate stations will be imported as new Stations If Update is selected for a station on the left grid the right grid will display the first potentially duplicate station Using the right grid you may select the appropriate destination station to be updated If the destination contains more than station with the same name you must choose the appropriate one by selecting the appropriate radio button Above the left grid you will see the All Stations combo box with four items Append Update Reject and blank This combo box will control the group operations and allow you to apply the same operation to all stations listed on the left grid The default selection in this combo box will be the Append option Chapter 6 The Data
618. yyyy MM yyyy Yyyy e MMM e hh mm ss tt tt AM PM e hh mm ss e You can set the Tick Interval by selecting one of the following options e Min e Hour e Day e Month e Year Series Type Line displays the plot as a line chart Bar displays the plot as a bar chart 510 Chapter 14 Plotting NOTE You can also change the Series Type by right clicking on any data point on and plot and selecting Change Series Type 14 3 3 Data Series Settings Plot Settings Data Series Range settings can be accessed by right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Edit Range Settings from the pop up menu The following Series Settings dialog will appear Name Breaking value Labels Symbol Within guidelin 100 Text p Exceedences 120 po Font Color Alignment y M Custom Use Different Label Source Label Source Include Pre fix Pre fix IV Include Post fix Post fix Exceedence m Preview Sample Preview Exceedence Min 0 Max 120 AP Xx cue On the left side of this dialog there is a list of available data series for the selected plot You may also Add Data Range series and specify Data Series options for this Series This is useful if you want to identify data on the plot that exceeds a guideline or standard value and assign unique symbol or label properties to this data set only e Click on the Add button to add a new

HydroGeo Analyst v.4.0 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents